EEGS - HKFEMC

EEGS - HKFEMC
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
IN
GOVERNMENT BUILDINGS
OF
THE HONG KONG SPECIAL ADMINISTRATIVE REGION
2012 EDITION
ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT
THE GOVERNMENT OF THE HONG KONG SPECIAL ADMINISTRATIVE REGION
PREFACE
This General Specification aims to lay down the technical requirements of materials
and equipment, the standards of workmanship, the requirements on testing and
commissioning as well as requirements on document submissions for electrical installation
in Government Buildings of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region (HKSAR).
The 2012 edition of this General Specification was developed based on its 2007
edition by the Electrical Specialist Support Group that was established under the Building
Services Branch Technical Information and Research & Development Committee of the
Architectural Services Department (ArchSD). This new edition comprises revisions in the
corrigendum that had been issued for the 2007 edition and, in addition, incorporates updated
international standards as well as technological developments which find applications in
Hong Kong. To be in line with the department’s endeavour to reduce the environmental
burden on our neighbours and to help preserving common resources while improving the
quality of our service, this new edition has continued putting emphasis on green initiatives
and initiatives for enhancement of client satisfaction on completed projects.
With the benefit of information technology, electronic version of this new edition is
to be viewed on and free for download from the Architectural Services Department (ArchSD)
Internet homepage. As part of the Government’s efforts to limit paper consumption, hard
copies of this General Specification will not be put up for sale.
The draft of this edition has been circulated to stakeholders within and external to the
Government before finalization. Nevertheless, the Architectural Services Department
welcomes comments on its contents at anytime since the updating of this General
Specification is a continuous process for the inclusion of any developments that can help
meeting the needs of our community.
DISCLAIMER
This General Specification is solely compiled for an electrical installation carried out
for or on behalf of the ArchSD in Government buildings of the HKSAR.
There are no representations, either expressed or implied, as to the suitability of this
General Specification for purposes other than that stated above. Users who choose to adopt
this General Specification for their works are responsible for making their own assessments
and judgement of all information contained here. The ArchSD does not accept any liability
and responsibility for any special, indirect or consequential loss or damage whatsoever
arising out of or in connection with the use of this General Specification or reliance placed
on it.
The materials contained in this document may not be pertinent or fully cover the
extent of the installation in non-government buildings and there is no intimated or implied
endorsement of the sales, supply and installation of the materials and equipment specified in
this General Specification within the territory of the HKSAR.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART A
SECTION A1
SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION
A1.1
A1.2
A1.3
A1.4
SECTION A2
A2.2
Statutory Obligations and Other Requirements
A2.1.1
Statutory Obligations
A2.1.2
Other Requirements
A2.1.3
Safety Requirements
A2.1.4
Technical Standards
Case of Conflict
EXECUTION OF WORKS
A3.1
A3.2
A3.3
A3.4
A3.5
A3.6
A3.7
A3.8
A3.9
A3.10
SECTION A4
Installation to Comply with this General Specification
Scope of the Works
Terms and Definitions
Singular and Plural
STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REGULATIONS
A2.1
SECTION A3
SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The International System of Units (SI)
Programme of Works
Builder’s Work
Coordination of Contract Works
Cooperation with Other Contractors
Site Supervision
Sample Board
Advice of Order Placed
Record of Materials Delivery
Protection of Materials and Equipment
DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
A4.1
A4.2
Drawings in Electronic Format
Installation Drawings
A4.2.1
Drawing Submission Schedule
A4.2.2
Size of Installation Drawings
A4.2.3
Contents of Installation Drawings
A4.2.4
Builder’s Work Drawings
A4.2.5
Manufacturer’s Shop Drawings
Table of Contents
Page 1 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A4.3
A4.4
As-built Drawings
A4.3.1
Submission of As-built Drawings
A4.3.2
Size of As-built Drawings
A4.3.3
Content of As-built Drawings
A4.3.4
Framed Drawings
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual and User Manual
A4.4.1
General
A4.4.2
Presentation
A4.4.3
Checking and Approval
A4.4.4
Structure and Contents of O&M Manual
A4.4.5
Structure and Contents of User Manual
A4.4.6
Intellectual Property Rights
Table of Contents
Page 2 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
PART B
SECTION B1
GENERAL
B1.1
B1.2
B1.3
B1.4
B1.5
B1.6
B1.7
B1.8
SECTION B2
INSTALLATION METHODOLOGY
Workmanship
B1.1.1
Tradesmen
B1.1.2
Tool and Instrument
B1.1.3
Safety on Site
Label and Notice
B1.2.1
Inscription of Label and Engraving
B1.2.2
Material for Label
B1.2.3
Fixing of Label
B1.2.4
Engraving for Electrical Accessory
B1.2.5
Warning Notice
B1.2.6
Other Labels and Notices
Guard and Railing for Moving or Rotating Parts of Equipment
Identification of Cable and Conduit
Fixing to Wooden Plug
Painting of Metal Work
Water Proofing
Provision of Spare Fuses in Main Switch Room
INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS
B2.1
Wiring in Steel Conduit System
B2.1.1
Type of Cable
B2.1.2
Concealed Steel Conduit System
B2.1.3
Surface Conduit System
B2.1.4
Minimum Size of Conduit
B2.1.5
Flexible Conduit
B2.1.6
Conduit Continuity
B2.1.7
Joint in Conduits
B2.1.8
Provision of Adaptable Box
B2.1.9
Spacing between Conduits
B2.1.10 Termination of Conduits at Metal Casing of
Equipment
B2.1.11 Conduit Bend
B2.1.12 Conduit Crossing Expansion Joint
B2.1.13 Use of Extension Piece
B2.1.14 Prevention of Ingress of Foreign Matters
B2.1.15 Prevention of Accumulation of Water or Moisture
B2.1.16 Conduit Laid Direct in Ground
B2.1.17 Fixing of Distance (Spacing) Saddle
B2.1.18 Conduit Installed Outdoors or in Damp Situation
B2.1.19 Swabbing Out of Conduit
B2.1.20 Fire Barrier
B2.1.21 Cable Capacity of Conduit
B2.1.22 Method of Drawing Cables into Conduit
B2.1.23 Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit
Categories
Table of Contents
Page 3 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
“Looping-in” Wiring System
Grouping of Cables in Conduit
Termination of Bonding Conductors at Conduit
Installation
Wiring in Steel Trunking System
B2.2.1
General
B2.2.2
Provision of Cable Retaining Bar and Cable
Support
B2.2.3
Cable Capacity of Trunking
B2.2.4
Correction Factor of Grouping
B2.2.5
Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit
Categories
B2.2.6
Connection to Equipment
B2.2.7
Connection to Distribution Board
B2.2.8
Fixing of Surface Trunking
B2.2.9
Cables through Trunking
B2.2.10 Fire Barrier
B2.2.11 Prevention of Electrolytic Action
B2.2.12 Prevention of Ingress of Water
Wiring in Plastic Conduit or Plastic Trunking System
B2.3.1
General
B2.3.2
Pliable Conduit
B2.3.3
Joint in PVC Conduit
B2.3.4
Plastic Boxes
B2.3.5
Termination of PVC Conduit at Casing of
Equipment
B2.3.6
Conduit Bend
B2.3.7
Allowance for Thermal Expansion
B2.3.8
Fixing of Trunking
B2.3.9
Earthing
Surface Wiring System
B2.4.1
Type of Cable
B2.4.2
Minimum Size of Live Conductors and CPC
B2.4.3
Identification of Cable Core
B2.4.4
Joint in Cable or Cord
B2.4.5
Installation of Non-flexible Cable
B2.4.6
Installation of Flexible Cable and Flexible Cord
Tool and Workmanship
B2.5.1
Approved Tool
B2.5.2
Cutting in Metal Work for Conduit or in Trunking
B2.5.3
Making Good of Damaged Coating
B2.1.24
B2.1.25
B2.1.26
B2.2
B2.3
B2.4
B2.5
Table of Contents
Page 4 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B3
INSTALLATION OF POWER CABLES, CABLE TRAYS AND
CABLE LADDERS
B3.1
B3.2
B3.3
B3.4
B3.5
B3.6
B3.7
B3.8
B3.9
General
B3.1.1
Scope
B3.1.2
Electromagnetic Interference
Cable Mounted on Surface
Cable Laid in Enclosed Trench
Cable Enclosed in Duct
B3.4.1
General
B3.4.2
Drawing-in of Cables
B3.4.3
Internal Barrier
B3.4.4
Fire Barrier
B3.4.5
Draw-in Pit
B3.4.6
Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit
Categories
B3.4.7
Sealing of Duct Entry to Building
Cable Buried Direct in Ground
B3.5.1
Protection of Cable
B3.5.2
Cable Marker
Bending Radius of Cable
Cable Joint and Cable Termination
B3.7.1
General
B3.7.2
Joint Box and Terminating Box
B3.7.3
Identification at Joint or Termination
B3.7.4
Earth Continuity across Joint
B3.7.5
Straight-through Joint for Copper Conductors
B3.7.6
Tee-joint for Copper Conductor
B3.7.7
Joint for Aluminium Cables
B3.7.8
Termination of PVC-insulated or XLPE-insulated
Cable with Copper Conductors
B3.7.9
Termination of PVC-insulated or XLPE-insulated
Cable with Aluminium Conductors
B3.7.10 Use of Heat Shrinkable Tubing
B3.7.11 Other Methods of Joint and Termination
Special Requirements for Mineral Insulated Cables
B3.8.1
Cable Route
B3.8.2
Cable Support
B3.8.3
Bending Radius
B3.8.4
Cable Loop for Prevention of Vibration and Low
Temperature Cold Store
B3.8.5
Cable Termination
B3.8.6
Insulation Resistance
B3.8.7
Bonding of Cable Sheath to Metalwork
B3.8.8
Laying of Single-core Cables
B3.8.9
Protection from Mechanical Damage
Installation of Perforated Cable Trays
B3.9.1
Connection between Adjacent Lengths of Tray
B3.9.2
Cutting of Tray
B3.9.3
Hole in Tray
B3.9.4
Fixing of Tray
B3.9.5
Fixing of Cable on Tray
Table of Contents
Page 5 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.10
B3.11
SECTION B4
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL LIGHTING AND POWER
B4.1
B4.2
B4.3
B4.4
B4.5
SECTION B5
Installation of Wire Mesh Cable Trays
B3.10.1 General
B3.10.2 Supports
B3.10.3 Bends
B3.10.4 Earthing
B3.10.5 Safety Working Load
Installation of Cable Ladder
B3.11.1 Dropout Plate for Cable Exit
B3.11.2 Flexible (Expansion) Couplers across Building
Expansion Joint
B3.11.3 Ladder Covers
B3.11.4 End Connectors
B3.11.5 Earthing
B3.11.6 Minimum Inside Radius of All Bends
B3.11.7 Supports
B3.11.8 Working Load
Installation of Lighting System and Luminaires
B4.1.1
Pendant
B4.1.2
Luminaire Mounted on Pattress
B4.1.3
Ceiling Rose
B4.1.4
Painting
B4.1.5
Special Requirements for Outdoor Luminaires
Installation of Wiring Accessories
Installation of Domestic Switches
B4.3.1
General
B4.3.2
Lighting Switch
B4.3.3
Time Switch
B4.3.4
Application in Bathroom
Installation of Socket Outlets
B4.4.1
General
B4.4.2
Shaver Supply Unit
B4.4.3
Socket Outlet at Hazardous Area
B4.4.4
Socket Outlet of Surface Conduit System
B4.4.5
Socket Outlet for Different Voltage System
B4.4.6
Application in Bathroom
Installation of Measuring Instrument
B4.5.1
Mounting of Current Transformers Associated
with Watt-hour Meter
B4.5.2
Identification of Instrument
B4.5.3
Mounting Position of Selector Switch
INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC APPLIANCES
B5.1
General
B5.1.1
B5.1.2
B5.1.3
B5.1.4
Connection to Appliances
(NOT USED)
Engraving for Identification
Earthing of Appliance
Table of Contents
Page 6 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B5.2
B5.3
B5.4
B5.5
B5.6
B5.7
B5.8
B5.9
B5.10
B5.11
SECTION B6
B5.1.5
Appliance Requiring Exclusive Circuit
Ceiling Fan and Ceiling-mounted Rotary Fan
B5.2.1
Method of Supply
B5.2.2
Fixing of Fan
B5.2.3
Fan Regulator
Wall-mounted Fan
Exhaust Fan
B5.4.1
Fixing of Fan
B5.4.2
Method of Supply
Electric Fire or Heater
B5.5.1
Wall-mounted Radiator
B5.5.2
Panel Fire
B5.5.3
Tubular Heater
Water Heater and Water Boiler
B5.6.1
Oversink Water Heater
B5.6.2
Other Type of Water Heater
B5.6.3
Water Boiler
Tea Urn
Household Electric Cooker
Hand/Face Dryer
Room Cooler
B5.10.1 Method of Supply
B5.10.2 Position of Connection Unit
Refrigerator
INSTALLATION OF BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM
B6.1
B6.2
B6.3
B6.4
B6.5
B6.6
B6.7
B6.8
B6.9
B6.10
B6.11
B6.12
B6.13
General
Site Storage and Protection
Busbar Identification
Joint in Busbar
Expansion Unit
Feeder Unit
Tap-off Unit Connection
Fire Barrier
Busbar Trunking Accessories
Support of Busbar Trunking System
Earthing
Requirements for Air-insulated Busbar Trunking System
B6.12.1 Application
B6.12.2 Busbar Supports
B6.12.3 Tap-off
B6.12.4 Fire Barrier
B6.12.5 Mounting Brackets
Requirement for All Insulated Busbar Trunking System
B6.13.1 Application
B6.13.2 Busbar Jointing
B6.13.3 Expansion Unit
B6.13.4 Tap-off Unit
B6.13.5 Supporting Hangers and Fixing Brackets
Table of Contents
Page 7 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B7
INSTALLATION OF EARTHING SYSTEM
B7.1
B7.2
B7.3
B7.4
B7.5
B7.6
B7.7
B7.8
B7.9
B7.10
B7.11
B7.12
General
Main Earthing Terminal
Earth Electrode
B7.3.1
Types of Earth Electrode
B7.3.2
Rod Electrode
B7.3.3
Tape Electrode
B7.3.4
Plate Electrode
B7.3.5
Electrode in Deep Bored Hole
B7.3.6
Connection between Electrodes
Earthing Conductor
B7.4.1
Conductor Material
B7.4.2
Connection to Electrodes
Main Equipotential Bonding Conductor
B7.5.1
Conductor Material
B7.5.2
Bonding Position
B7.5.3
Bonding Method
Supplementary Bonding Conductor
B7.6.1
Conductor Material
B7.6.2
Application in Bathroom
B7.6.3
Application in Other Areas
B7.6.4
Bonding Method
Circuit Protective Conductor (CPC)
B7.7.1
General
B7.7.2
CPC for Socket Outlet
B7.7.3
CPC for Flexible Conduit
B7.7.4
CPC for Busbar Trunking
B7.7.5
CPC for Ring Final Circuit
Joints in Protective Conductors
Identification and Labelling
B7.9.1
Colour Identification
B7.9.2
Label for Earthing and Bonding Connections
Sizing of Protective Conductor
B7.10.1 General
B7.10.2 Equipotential Bonding Conductor
Earth Fault Loop Impedance
B7.11.1 Automatic Disconnection Time
B7.11.2 Maximum Earth Loop Impedance
B7.11.3 Condition for Compliance
Use of Residual Current-operated Circuit Breaker
B7.12.1 General
B7.12.2 Application in Household Installation
B7.12.3 Equipment Outside an Equipotential Zone
B7.12.4 Circuits in Bathroom
Table of Contents
Page 8 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B8
MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS
B8.1
B8.2
B8.3
B8.4
Telecommunication Systems
B8.1.1
Scope
B8.1.2
Conduit for Telephone, Computer Network,
Inter-communication and PA Systems
B8.1.3
Outlet Box for Telephone Point
B8.1.4
Outlet Box for Computer Point
B8.1.5
Outlet Box for Inter-communication and PA
System
B8.1.6
Conduit for Staff Paging System
B8.1.7
Conduit for Broadcast Reception System
B8.1.8
Outlet Box for Broadcast Reception System
Bell and Audible Warning System
B8.2.1
Class-change Bell System for Schools
B8.2.2
Bell for Mains Voltage
B8.2.3
Call Bell and Door Bell Systems
B8.2.4
Bell and Buzzer for Extra Low Voltage
B8.2.5
Bell Transformer
B8.2.6
Call Bell Push
B8.2.7
Mounting of Call Bell Push
B8.2.8
Table-type Push
B8.2.9
Table-type Push in Concealed Conduit Installation
B8.2.10 Bell Indicator
B8.2.11 Segregation of Circuits
Installation in Hazardous Areas
B8.3.1
General
B8.3.2
Electrical Equipment Selection
B8.3.3
Wiring System
B8.3.4
Conduit Fitting, Cable Glands, Terminal Box and
Enclosure
B8.3.5
Screw or Bolt
B8.3.6
Luminaire
B8.3.7
Conduit Pendant
B8.3.8
Cables or Conduits Passing through Floor, Wall or
Partition
B8.3.9
Precautions to Prevent Passage of Inflammables
Gases or Vapours
B8.3.10 Equipotential Bonding of Conduit
External Lighting System
B8.4.1
Scope
B8.4.2
Specification and Drawing
B8.4.3
Luminaire
B8.4.4
Construction of Lamp Pole
B8.4.5
Foundation of Lamp Pole
B8.4.6
Service Box
B8.4.7
Underground Cable to Pole
B8.4.8
Cable between Service Box and Luminaire
B8.4.9
Switch Fitted to Pole
B8.4.10 Control Gear for Discharge Lighting
B8.4.11 Testing of Illumination Level
B8.4.12 Numbering of Lamp Pole
Table of Contents
Page 9 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B8.5
SECTION B9
Lightning Protection System
B8.5.1
Installation of Lightning Protection System
B8.5.2
Scope
B8.5.3
Type of Lightning Protection System
B8.5.4
Air Termination
B8.5.5
Down Conductor
B8.5.6
Test Joint
B8.5.7
Earth Termination
B8.5.8
Spacer Saddle
B8.5.9
Connection to Earth Termination
B8.5.10 Bonding to Other Services
B8.5.11 Bond
B8.5.12 Joint in Conductors
B8.5.13 Testing
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC MOTORS AND HIGH
VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT
B9.1
B9.2
B9.3
B9.4
B9.5
B9.6
B9.7
B9.8
Low Voltage-Electric Motors
B9.1.1
Maintenance Access and Safety
B9.1.2
Terminals
B9.1.3
Anti-condensation Heater
B9.1.4
Belt Drives and Pulleys
B9.1.5
Protective Guards
B9.1.6
Warning Label
Motor Switchgear, Starter and Control Panels
B9.2.1
General
B9.2.2
Local Motor Control Panels
B9.2.3
Motor Control Switchboard
High Voltage-General
High Voltage-Electric Motors
B9.4.1
Motor Foundation
B9.4.2
Provision for Cabling and Termination
High Voltage Motor Control Switchboard
B9.5.1
General Requirements
B9.5.2
Primary Busbars and Connections
B9.5.3
Anti-condensation Heaters
B9.5.4
Cables Boxes
B9.5.5
Labels and Warning Notice
High Voltage Auto-transformers
High Voltage Power Factor Correction Capacitors
High Voltage Power Cables
Table of Contents
Page 10 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
PART C
SECTION C1
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION
GENERAL
C1.1
C1.2
C1.3
C1.4
C1.5
C1.6
C1.7
C1.8
SECTION C2
Material and Equipment
C1.1.1
International Standards
C1.1.2
Other Standard Specifications
C1.1.3
Service Conditions
C1.1.4
Selection of Equipment
C1.1.5
Equipment Catalogue and Manufacturer’s
Specification
Voltage Covered by this Specification
Insulating Material
Minimum Size of Cable Conductor
Use of PVC-Insulated Cable at Low Temperature
Fixing Screw and Bolt
Sheet Metal Work
Cable Markers in addition to Cable Color Identification
WIRING SYSTEM: CABLES, CONDUITS, TRUNKING AND
ACCESSORIES
C2.1
C2.2
C2.3
C2.4
C2.5
Cables in Wiring System
C2.1.1
General
C2.1.2
Non-sheathed Cables
C2.1.3
Sheathed Cables
C2.1.4
Flexible Cables
C2.1.5
Conductor
C2.1.6
Fire Performance of Fire Resistant Cables
Steel Conduit and Accessories
C2.2.1
Steel Conduit
C2.2.2
Steel Flexible Conduit
C2.2.3
Steel Conduit Fitting
C2.2.4
Metal Boxes for Electrical Accessories
C2.2.5
Class of Protection against Corrosion
C2.2.6
Screw
Plastic or PVC Conduit and Accessories
C2.3.1
Rigid Conduit and Conduit Fittings
C2.3.2
Pliable Conduit
C2.3.3
Plastic or PVC Conduit Boxes
C2.3.4
Plastic Couplers
Steel Trunking and Accessories
C2.4.1
Steel Trunking
C2.4.2
Class of Protection against Corrosion
C2.4.3
Construction
C2.4.4
Dimension
C2.4.5
Connection between Lengths of Trunking
C2.4.6
Steel Surface Trunking Cover
C2.4.7
Screw
Plastic or PVC Trunking and Accessories
Table of Contents
Page 11 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C3
POWER CABLES AND ASSOCIATED CABLING FACILITIES
C3.1
C3.2
C3.3
C3.4
C3.5
C3.6
C3.7
C3.8
C3.9
C3.10
C3.11
C3.12
SECTION C4
General
Types of Power Cables
Conductor
Armour
(NOT USED)
Fire Performance of Fire Resistant Cables
Identification of Core
Special Requirements for Mineral Insulated (MI) Cable
C3.8.1
Outer Covering
C3.8.2
Restriction of Use
C3.8.3
Cable Saddle and Clip
Cable Duct
Perforated Metal Cable Tray
C3.10.1 Material
C3.10.2 Dimensions of Tray
C3.10.3 Bend Piece
C3.10.4 Perforation on Bend
C3.10.5 Tee Piece
C3.10.6 Cable Tray Accessory
Wire Mesh Cable Tray (Cable Basket)
C3.11.1 General
C3.11.2 Material
C3.11.3 Fittings and Accessories
C3.11.4 Construction of Wire Mesh Cable Tray
Cable Ladder
C3.12.1 Material
C3.12.2 Fittings and Accessories
C3.12.3 Construction of Cable Ladder
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
C4.1
C4.2
C4.3
C4.4
C4.5
C4.6
Wiring Accessories - General
Domestic Switches
C4.2.1
General
C4.2.2
Lighting Switch
C4.2.3
Double Pole Switch for Appliance
C4.2.4
Sparkless Switch
C4.2.5
Time Switch
Socket Outlets
C4.3.1
General
C4.3.2
Shaver Supply Unit
C4.3.3
Plug
Connection Units
C4.4.1
Blank
C4.4.2
Switched or Unswitched Fused Connection Unit
Insulated Terminal Block
Lighting System Accessories
C4.6.1
Luminaire Track System
C4.6.2
Photocell Device
Table of Contents
Page 12 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C4.7
C4.8
SECTION C5
C4.6.3
Ceiling Rose
C4.6.4
Lampholder
Measuring Instrument
C4.7.1
Watt-hour Meter
C4.7.2
Ammeter and Voltmeter
C4.7.3
Current Transformer
C4.7.4
Selector Switch for Ammeter
C4.7.5
Selector Switch for Voltmeter
C4.7.6
Meter Chamber
Occupancy and Daylight Sensor
C4.8.1
General
C4.8.2
Passive Infrared (PIR) Sensor
C4.8.3
Ultrasonic Sensor
C4.8.4
Dual Technology Sensor
C4.8.5
Daylight Sensor
SWITCHGEAR AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
C5.1
C5.2
C5.3
C5.4
General
C5.1.1
C5.1.2
C5.1.3
Scope
Service Condition
Short-circuit Rating and Continuous Current
Rating
C5.1.4
Voltage Rating
C5.1.5
Degree of Protection for Enclosure
C5.1.6
Material
C5.1.7
ON and OFF Indication
C5.1.8
Identification of Circuit
Switch, Disconnector, Fuse-switch and Switch-fuse
C5.2.1
Scope of Switch
C5.2.2
General
C5.2.3
Operating Mechanism
C5.2.4
Construction
C5.2.5
Operating Performance
C5.2.6
Utilization Category
C5.2.7
Padlocking Facility
Circuit Breaker - General
C5.3.1
Scope of Circuit Breaker
C5.3.2
Number of Poles
C5.3.3
Operating Mechanism
C5.3.4
Casing
C5.3.5
Current Rating
Air-circuit Breaker (ACB)
C5.4.1
General
C5.4.2
Performance Characteristic
C5.4.3
Closing and Tripping Operation
C5.4.4
Racking Gear
C5.4.5
Interlocking Facility
C5.4.6
Main Isolating Contacts and Safety Shutter
C5.4.7
Contact
Table of Contents
Page 13 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.5
C5.6
C5.7
C5.8
C5.9
C5.10
C5.11
C5.12
C5.13
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
C5.5.1
General
C5.5.2
Operating Characteristic
C5.5.3
Performance Characteristic
C5.5.4
Shunt Trip Release
C5.5.5
Locking Facility
Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)
C5.6.1
General
C5.6.2
Operating Characteristic
C5.6.3
Short Circuit Breaking Capacity
Residual Current-operated Circuit Breaker without Integral
Overcurrent
Protection
(RCCB)
and
Residual
Current-operated Circuit Breaker with Integral Overcurrent
Protection (RCBO)
C5.7.1
RCCB – General
C5.7.2
RCCB – Electrical and Operating Characteristics
C5.7.3
RCCB – Test Device
C5.7.4
RCBO – General
C5.7.5
RCBO – Electrical and Operating Characteristics
C5.7.6
RCBO – Test Device
Fuse
C5.8.1
Scope of Fuse
C5.8.2
General
C5.8.3
Fuse Carrier and Holder
C5.8.4
Blank
C5.8.5
Fuse Ratings and Dimensions
Busbar Chamber
C5.9.1
General
C5.9.2
Construction
C5.9.3
Color Identification of Busbar
C5.9.4
Interconnection to Other Equipment
Distribution Board - General
C5.10.1 Scope of Distribution Board
C5.10.2 Construction of Enclosure
C5.10.3 Arrangement of Component Parts
C5.10.4 Busbar
C5.10.5 Earthing Terminal
C5.10.6 Provision of Spare Ways
C5.10.7 Shrouding of Live Part
MCCB Distribution Board
C5.11.1 General
C5.11.2 Type of MCCB Distribution Board
C5.11.3 Busbar
MCB Distribution Board
C5.12.1 General
C5.12.2 Construction
C5.12.3 Method of Mounting
Voltage Dip Ride-through Device
C5.13.1 Constant Voltage Transformer
C5.13.2 Static Tap Switcher Voltage Regulator
C5.13.3 Voltage Dip Ride-through Inverter
Table of Contents
Page 14 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.14
C5.15
C5.16
C5.17
C5.18
C5.19
C5.20
C5.21
C5.22
C5.23
C5.24
C5.25
Electromechanical Contactors
C5.14.1 General
C5.14.2 Performance Requirements
C5.14.3 Co-ordination with Short-circuit Protective
Devices
C5.14.4 Control Circuit
Automatic Changeover Switch
Active Harmonic Filter
C5.16.1 General Requirements
C5.16.2 Performance Requirements
C5.16.3 Construction
Surge Protection Device
C5.17.1 General Requirements
C5.17.2 Performance Requirements
C5.17.3 Construction
Solid State Soft Motor Starter
C5.18.1 General Requirements
C5.18.2 Performance Requirements
C5.18.3 Selection of Softstarter and Operating Precautions
Variable Speed Drives for Centrifugal Fans and Pumps
C5.19.1 General Requirements
C5.19.2 Performance Requirements
C5.19.3 Construction
Digital Multifunction Power Meter
C5.20.1 General Requirements
C5.20.2 Technical Requirements
Charger and Battery Set
C5.21.1 General Requirements
C5.21.2 Technical Requirements
C5.21.3 Construction
C5.21.4 Selection Criteria
Power Factor Correction Equipment
C5.22.1 General Requirements
C5.22.2 Requirements of the Components
Digital Protection Relay
C5.23.1 General Requirements
C5.23.2 Technical Requirements
Digital Power Analyzer
C5.24.1 General Requirements
C5.24.2 Technical Requirements
Electric Motors
C5.25.1 General
C5.25.2 Insulation Test
C5.25.3 Starting Torque and Current
C5.25.4 Maintenance Access and Safety
C5.25.5 Noise and Vibration
C5.25.6 Minimum Motor Efficiency
C5.25.7 Continuous Rating
C5.25.8 Tachometers
C5.25.9 Terminals
C5.25.10 Anti-condensation Heater
C5.25.11 Belt Drives and Pulleys
C5.25.12 Protective Guards
Table of Contents
Page 15 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.26
SECTION C6
BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM
C6.1
C6.2
C6.3
C6.4
C6.5
C6.6
C6.7
C6.8
C6.9
C6.10
C6.11
SECTION C7
C5.25.13 Motor Fed by Converter
Motor Switchgear, Starters and Control Panel
C5.26.1 General
C5.26.2 Local Motor Control Panels
C5.26.3 Motor Control Switchboard
C5.26.4 Motor Starters
General
Busbar Trunking Construction
Busbar Insulation
Busbar
Feeder Unit
Tap-off Units
Busbar Expansion Unit
Fire Barrier in Busbar Trunking System
Busbar Trunking Accessories
Requirement for Air-insulated Busbar Trunking System
C6.10.1 Busbar Enclosure
C6.10.2 Busbar Supports
C6.10.3 Busbar Jointing
C6.10.4 Suspension Unit, Flexible Joint and Stop-end Unit
C6.10.5 Tap-off Unit
C6.10.6 Testing and Certification
Requirement for All Insulated Busbar Trunking System
C6.11.1 Busbar Enclosure
C6.11.2 Busbar Insulation
C6.11.3 Tap-off Units
C6.11.4 Joint in Busbar Trunking System
C6.11.5 Testing and Certification
FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE AND LAMP
C7.1
C7.2
C7.3
C7.4
C7.5
C7.6
C7.7
C7.8
General
Type of Luminaires
Group 1 Luminaires
Group 2 - Special Luminaires
Group 3 - Self-contained Emergency Fluorescent Luminaires
C7.5.1
General
C7.5.2
Standards
C7.5.3
Functional Requirements
C7.5.4
Construction
Blank
Fluorescent Lamps
Electronic Ballasts
C7.8.1
General
C7.8.2
Construction
C7.8.3
Performance Requirements
C7.8.4
Additional Requirements for Dimmable Electronic
Ballasts
Table of Contents
Page 16 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C8
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LUMINAIRE AND LAMP
C8.1
C8.2
C8.3
C8.4
C8.5
SECTION C9
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE LUMINAIRE & DRIVER
C9.1
C9.2
C9.3
C9.4
SECTION C10
General
High Pressure Sodium Vapour Discharge Lamp (SON-T and
SON-E or LBS: HST and HSE)
Elliptical High Pressure Mercury Vapour Discharge Lamp
(MBF or LBS : HME)
Linear Metal Halide/Linear High Pressure Sodium Lamp
Luminaire for Floodlighting
C8.5.1 General
C8.5.2 Construction
C8.5.3 Lamps
General
Electronic Driver
LED Module
Performance Requirements
DOMESTIC APPLIANCES
C10.1
C10.2
C10.3
C10.4
C10.5
C10.6
C10.7
General
C10.1.1 Compliance with Regulation
C10.1.2 General Requirements
C10.1.3 Technical Literature
900 mm, 1200 mm and 1400 mm Ceiling Fan
C10.2.1 General Requirements
C10.2.2 Performance Requirements
C10.2.3 Construction
400 mm Sweep Auto Cycle/Oscillating Fan
C10.3.1 General Requirements
C10.3.2 Performance Requirements
C10.3.3 Construction
400 mm Sweep Wall Fan
C10.4.1 General Requirements
C10.4.2 Performance Requirements
C10.4.3 Construction
400 mm Sweep Desk Fan
C10.5.1 General Requirements
C10.5.2 Performance Requirements
C10.5.3 Construction
400 mm Sweep Pedestal Fan
C10.6.1 General Requirements
C10.6.2 Performance Requirements
C10.6.3 Construction
Domestic Exhaust Fan
C10.7.1 General Requirements
C10.7.2 Performance Requirements
C10.7.3 Construction
Table of Contents
Page 17 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.8
C10.9
C10.10
C10.11
C10.12
C10.13
C10.14
C10.15
C10.16
C10.17
C10.18
C10.19
Propeller Fan – Ring Mounted Type
C10.8.1 General Requirements
C10.8.2 Performance Requirements
C10.8.3 Construction
Fume Cupboard Exhaust Fan
C10.9.1 General Requirements
C10.9.2 Performance Requirements
C10.9.3 Construction
1 kW Electric Fire, Wall Mounted Type
C10.10.1 General Requirements
C10.10.2 Performance Requirements
C10.10.3 Construction
2 kW Convector Fire
C10.11.1 General Requirements
C10.11.2 Performance Requirements
C10.11.3 Construction
2 kW Oil-filled Electric Radiator
C10.12.1 General Requirements
C10.12.2 Performance Requirements
C10.12.3 Construction
300 mm and 1200 mm Single Tubular Heater Complete with
Wire Guard
C10.13.1 General Requirements
C10.13.2 Performance Requirements
C10.13.3 Construction
10-Litre Open-outlet Type, Electric Sink Water Heater
C10.14.1 General Requirements
C10.14.2 Performance Requirements
C10.14.3 Construction
90-Litre and 135-Litre Thermal Storage Electric Water Heater
C10.15.1 General Requirements
C10.15.2 Performance Requirements
C10.15.3 Specific Safety Requirements
C10.15.4 Construction
Electric Tea Urn
C10.16.1 General Requirements
C10.16.2 Performance Requirements
C10.16.3 Construction
Electric Kettle 3.5-4.5 Litres
C10.17.1 General Requirements
C10.17.2 Performance Requirements
C10.17.3 Construction
Mains-supply Drinking Water Dispenser for "Cold" Water
C10.18.1 General Requirements
C10.18.2 Performance Requirements
C10.18.3 Construction
Domestic Electric Cooker (Table Model)
C10.19.1 General Requirements
C10.19.2 Performance Requirements
C10.19.3 Construction
Table of Contents
Page 18 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.20
C10.21
C10.22
C10.23
C10.24
C10.25
C10.26
C10.27
C10.28
C10.29
C10.30
C10.31
C10.32
Domestic Electric Cooker (Four Radiant Plates Type)
C10.20.1 General Requirements
C10.20.2 Performance Requirements
C10.20.3 Construction
Electric Hot Plate
C10.21.1 General Requirements
C10.21.2 Performance Requirements
C10.21.3 Construction
10-Persons and 15-Persons Electric Rice Cooker
C10.22.1 General Requirements
C10.22.2 Performance Requirements
C10.22.3 Construction
2 kW Electric Toaster
C10.23.1 General Requirements
C10.23.2 Performance Requirements
C10.23.3 Construction
Electric Hand/Face Dryer
C10.24.1 General Requirements
C10.24.2 Performance Requirements
C10.24.3 Construction
Blank
Wall Clock Battery-operated
C10.26.1 General Requirements
C10.26.2 Performance Requirements
C10.26.3 Construction
Electric Dry Iron
C10.27.1 General Requirements
C10.27.2 Performance Requirements
C10.27.3 Construction
Vacuum Cleaner
C10.28.1 General Requirements
C10.28.2 Performance Requirements
C10.28.3 Construction
Floor Polisher
C10.29.1 General Requirements
C10.29.2 Performance Requirements
C10.29.3 Construction
7-Litres and 9-Litres Dehumidifier
C10.30.1 General Requirements
C10.30.2 Performance Requirements
C10.30.3 Construction
Room Cooler
C10.31.1 Type of Room Cooler
C10.31.2 General Requirements
C10.31.3 Performance Requirements
C10.31.4 Construction
Refrigerator
C10.32.1 Type of Refrigerator
C10.32.2 General Requirements
C10.32.3 Performance Requirements
C10.32.4 Construction
Table of Contents
Page 19 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.33
SECTION C11
LOW VOLTAGE CUBICLE SWITCHBOARD
C11.1
C11.2
C11.3
C11.4
C11.5
C11.6
C11.7
C11.8
C11.9
C11.10
C11.11
C11.12
C11.13
C11.14
C11.15
C11.16
C11.17
SECTION C12
LED Table Lamp
C10.33.1 General Requirements
C10.33.2 Safety Requirements
C10.33.3 Performance Requirements
C10.33.4 Electrical Requirements
C10.33.5 Mechanical Requirements
C10.33.6 Testing Standards for Compliance
General
Design Requirements
Performance Requirements
Construction and Finish
Electricity Characteristics of the Switchboard
Service Conditions
Busbars, Wiring and Earthing
Circuit Breakers, Fuseswitches and Automatic Changeover
Switches
Metering, Protective Relays and Indicating Lamps
Supply Company Metering
Labels
Cable Arrangements
Automatic Interlocking Facility
Ancillary Equipment
Operation Instruction/Drawing at the Main Switch Room
Inspection and Testing for Low Voltage Cubicle Switchboard
Installation
Requirements during Maintenance Period
DIESEL GENERATING SET INSTALLATION
C12.1
Requirements of Diesel Generating Sets
C12.1.1 Generating Set Rating
C12.1.2 General Requirements of Diesel Engine
C12.1.3 General Requirements of Alternator
C12.1.4 Starting System
C12.1.5 Electrical Loads
C12.1.6 Suitability for Cold Starting and Step Load
Acceptance
C12.1.7 Radio Interference Suppression
C12.1.8 Painting
C12.1.9 Baseframe Assembly
C12.1.10 Welding
C12.1.11 Structural Steel
Table of Contents
Page 20 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.2
C12.3
C12.4
C12.5
C12.6
C12.7
C12.8
C12.9
C12.10
C12.11
C12.12
C12.13
C12.14
Construction of Control Cubicle
Operation Requirement
C12.3.1 Automatic Operation
C12.3.2 Protection
Control Requirement
C12.4.1 Instruments and Functions for Control Cubicle
C12.4.2 Interfacing with CCMS System
Installation of Diesel Generating Sets
C12.5.1 Position
C12.5.2 Guards and Insulations
C12.5.3 Air-ducts
C12.5.4 Engine Exhaust System
C12.5.5 Electrical Works
Engine Cooling System Using Remote Radiator
C12.6.1 General
C12.6.2 Remote Radiators
C12.6.3 Heat Exchangers
C12.6.4 Water Circulating Pumps
C12.6.5 Expansion Tank
C12.6.6 Pipework and Valve
C12.6.7 Hydraulic Test
C12.6.8 Power Supply and Control System
Fuel Supply System
C12.7.1 Underground Horizontal Fuel Storage Tank
C12.7.2 Daily Services Fuel Tank
C12.7.3 Fuel transfer Pumping System
C12.7.4 Pipeworks and Fittings
C12.7.5 Diesel Fuel Level Switches
Acoustic Treatment Installation
C12.8.1 Performance Requirements
C12.8.2 Scope of Work
C12.8.3 Installation of the Acoustic Treatment System
Exhaust Fan for Emergency Generator Room
Lifting Hoist
Warning Sign
Schematic Diagrams
Testing
C12.13.1 Testing of Diesel Generating Sets
C12.13.2 Testing of Control Cubicle
C12.13.3 Testing of Daily Service Tank, Fuel Storage Tank
and Pipework
C12.13.4 Testing of Noise Control System
C12.13.5 Testing of Exhaust Fan
Submission to the Authorities
Table of Contents
Page 21 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C13
HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND EQUIPMENT
C13.1
C13.2
C13.3
C13.4
C13.5
C13.6
High Voltage – General
High Voltage – Electric Motors
C13.2.1 Performance Requirements
C13.2.2 Enclosure
C13.2.3 Thermal Insulation & Characteristics
C13.2.4 Motor Stators & Windings
C13.2.5 Rotor
C13.2.6 Bearings
C13.2.7 Motor Foundation
C13.2.8 Provision for Cabling and Termination
C13.2.9 Motor Termination Boxes
C13.2.10 Markings and Data Plates
C13.2.11 Temperature Detectors for Motor Protection
High Voltage – Motor Control Switchboards
C13.3.1 General Requirements
C13.2.2 General Construction
C13.3.3 Primary Busbars and Connections
C13.3.4 Circuit Breakers
C13.3.5 Earthing and Earthing Devices
C13.3.6 Testing Facilities
C13.3.7 Mechanical Indication
C13.3.8 Auxiliary Switches
C13.3.9 Anti-Condensation Heaters
C13.3.10 Current Transformers
C13.3.11 Voltage Transformers
C13.3.12 Cables Boxes
C13.3.13 Protective Relays
C13.3.14 Control and Timer Relays
C13.3.15 Indicating Instruments
C13.3.16 Labels and Warning Notice
C13.3.17 Ancillary Equipment
C13.3.18 Operation Diagram
High Voltage – Auto-transformers
C13.4.1 General
C13.4.2 Rating
C13.4.3 Insulation
C13.4.4 Transformer Windings
C13.4.5 Tap Changers
C13.4.6 Internal Earthing of Transformers
C13.4.7 Enclosure
C13.4.8 Finishes
C13.4.9 Rating Plates and Diagrams
C13.4.10 Cable Boxes
High Voltage – Power Factor Correction Capacitors
High Voltage – Power Cables
C13.6.1 General
C13.6.2 Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Cables
C13.6.3 Conductors
C13.6.4 Cable Terminations
Table of Contents
Page 22 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C14
COMPUTERIZED LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
C14.1
C14.2
C14.3
C14.4
General
System Requirement
Communication Bus
Lighting Control Modules
Table of Contents
Page 23 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
PART D INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING DURING
CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
SECTION D1
GENERAL REQUIREMENT
D1.1
General Requirement
SECTION D2
ROUTING INSPECTION
D2.1
Off-site Routine Inspection and Functional Test
D2.2
Inspection of Materials and Equipment Delivered to Site
D2.3
Visual Inspection of Installation
D2.4
Inspection and Functional Test of Installed Works
SECTION D3
HANDOVER INSPECTION
SECTION D4
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
D4.1
General
D4.2
Testing and Commissioning Procedure
D4.3
Testing of Emergency Lighting, Exit Sign and Emergency
Generator Installations
Table of Contents
Page 24 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
PART E TRAINING, INSPECTION, ATTENDANCE AND
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DURING
MAINTENANCE PERIOD
SECTION E1
TRAINING
TO
USERS
MAINTENANCE AGENTS
E1.1
SECTION E2
AND
Particulars of Training Course and Training Schedule
Requirements on Response Time
Monitoring Mechanism on Contractor’s Performance
Follow Up Action after Emergency and Fault Cases
INSPECTION,
OPERATION
REQUIREMENTS
E3.1
E3.2
E3.3
E3.4
SECTION E4
OPERATION
EMERGENCY SERVICES AND ATTENDANCE TO FAULT
CALLS
E2.1
E2.2
E2.3
SECTION E3
AND
AND
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Schedule
Monitoring Mechanism on Contractor’s Performance
Final Inspection before the End of Maintenance Period
Final Inspection before the End of Maintenance Period for
Low Voltage Cubicle Switchboard
COMPLETION OF OUTSTANDING AND DEFECTIVE WORKS
ANNEX
Annex I List of Technical Standards Quoted in this General Specification
Table of Contents
Page 25 of 25
EE_GS
2012 Edition
PART A – SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION A1
SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION
A1.1
INSTALLATION TO COMPLY WITH THIS GENERAL
SPECIFICATION
The electrical installation shall comply with this General Specification which
details the intrinsic properties (including materials and workmanship) of the
installation, in so far as it is not overridden by the General Conditions of
Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, Particular Specification for the Works,
Drawings and/or written instructions of the Architect.
A1.2
SCOPE OF THE WORKS
This General Specification, Particular Specification, Tender Equipment
Schedule and Drawings detail the performance requirements of the Works. The
Works to be carried out in accordance with this General Specification shall
include the installation and supply of all materials necessary to form a complete
installation including any necessary tests, adjustments, commissioning and
maintenance as prescribed and all other incidental sundry components together
with the necessary labour for installing such components, for the proper
operation of the installation.
A1.3
TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
In this General Specification, the following words or expressions shall have the
meanings assigned to them except when the context otherwise requires:
A1.3.1
Terms and Definitions
Architect
The Architect or the Maintenance Surveyor or the
Supervising Officer as defined in the Contract.
Building
Contractor
The contractor employed by the Employer for the
execution of the Works as defined in the Contract or
the contractor separately employed by the Employer
to execute the builder‟s work associated with the
Works as appropriate.
BS
British Standards, including British Standard
Specifications and British Standard Codes of Practice,
published by the British Standards Institution.
BSB
Building Services Branch of the Architectural
Services Department, the Government of the Hong
Kong Special Administrative Region.
Section A1
Page 1 of 2
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A1.4
BS EN
European Standard adopted as British Standard
Contract
The Contract defined in the General Conditions of
Contract for the Works or the Sub-contract defined in
the Specialist Sub-contract for the Works or the Subcontract defined in the Nominated Sub-contract for
the Works as appropriate
Contractor
The contractor employed by the Employer or the
Specialist Sub-contractor employed by the Building
Contractor or the Nominated Sub-contractor
nominated by the Architect for the execution of the
Works as appropriate
CSA
Cross-sectional area of a conductor.
Electricity Supplier
A person or organization who generates, supplies and
sells electricity at low and high voltages for use in an
electrical installation
EMSD
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, the
Government of the Hong Kong Special
Administrative Region
EN
European Standards prepared by European
Committee for Electrotechnical Standardisation or
European
Committee
for
Electrotechnical
Commission Publication
FSD
The Fire Services Department, the Government of the
Hong Kong Special Administrative Region
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IET
The Institution of Engineering and Technology,
previously the Institution of Electrical Engineers,
U.K.
ISO
International Organisation for Standardization
Tender
The Contractor‟s tender for the Works Contract or the
Specialist Sub-contractor‟s tender for the Works
Specialist Sub-contract or the Nominated Subcontractor‟s tender for the Works Nominated Subcontract as appropriate.
SINGULAR AND PLURAL
Words importing the singular only also include the plural and vice versa where
the context requires.
Section A1
Page 2 of 2
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION A2
STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REGULATIONS
A2.1
STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS
The electrical installation shall comply with the following:
A2.1.1
A.2.1.2
Statutory Obligations
(a)
Electricity Ordinance, Chapter 406, and other subsidiary
legislation made under the Ordinance;
(b)
Waste Disposal Ordinance, Chapter 354 and other subsidiary
legislation made under the Ordinance; and
(c)
Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance, Chapter 499
and other subsidiary legislation made under the Ordinance.
Other Requirements
(a)
Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations
issued by Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, the
Government of the HKSAR;
(b)
IEC 60364 series for Low-voltage Electrical Installations or
Electrical Installations of Building;
(c)
Electricity Supplier Requirements;
The Supply Rules and other requirements issued by electricity
suppliers;
(d)
IEC, ISO, EN, BS EN and BS;
(e)
Fire Services Department Requirements;
The current requirements of FSD, including those specified in
the FSD Circular Letters and the current edition of the “Codes
of Practice for Minimum Fire Service Installations and
Equipment and Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of
Installations and Equipment”;
(f)
Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building Services
Installations in Building, issued by Electrical and Mechanical
Services Department, the Government of the HKSAR;
(g)
Design Manual : Barrier Free Access, issued by Buildings
Department; and
Section A2
Page 1 of 2
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(h)
A2.1.3
A2.1.4
Guidance Notes for the Electrical Product (Safety) Regulation,
issued by Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, the
Government of the HKSAR.
Safety Requirements
(a)
Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance, Chapter 509, and
other subsidiary legislation made under the Ordinance;
(b)
Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance, Chapter 59,
and other subsidiary legislation made under the Ordinance;
(c)
Public Health and Municipal Service Ordinance, Chapter 132,
and other subsidiary legislation made under the Ordinance;
(d)
Construction Site (Safety) Regulations;
(e)
Construction Site Safety Manual issued by Environmental,
Transport and Works Bureau, the Government of the HKSAR;
(f)
Electricity Ordinance, Chapter 406 and relevant Code of
Practices;
(g)
Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations
issued by Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, the
Government of the HKSAR; and
(h)
IEC 60364-7-704:2005: Low-voltage electrical Installations –
Part 7-704: Requirements for Special Installations or
Locations - Construction and Demolition Site Installations.
Technical Standards
BS, BS EN, ISO Standards, IEC Standards, Codes of Practice, etc.
shall be deemed to include all amendments, revisions and standards
superseding the standards listed herein, which are current at the
closing date of the tender of the Contract unless otherwise specified.
A summary of technical standards quoted in this General
Specification to which the Works shall comply with is listed in
Annex I.
A2.2
CASE OF CONFLICT
The documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of
one another but in case of ambiguities or discrepancies the same shall be
explained by the Architect who shall issue to the Contractor instructions
clarifying such ambiguities or discrepancies.
Section A2
Page 2 of 2
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION A3
EXECUTION OF WORKS
A3.1
THE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI)
The International System of Units (System International d‟Unites) of weights
and measures shall be used for all materials, equipment and measurements.
A3.2
PROGRAMME OF WORKS
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect a detailed programme of the Works
within 4 weeks from the acceptance of his Tender showing the intended method,
stages and order of work execution in coordination with the building
construction programme, together with the duration he estimated for each and
every stage of the Works. The programme shall include at least the following:
(a)
Dates for the placement of orders for equipment and materials;
(b)
Expected completion dates for builder‟s work requirements, i.e. when
work site needs to be ready;
(c)
Delivery dates of equipment and materials to Site;
(d)
Dates of commencement and completion of every stage of the Works in
line with the building construction programme, i.e. each floor level
and/or zone area;
(e)
Dates of documents/drawings submissions to relevant Government
departments to obtain the necessary approvals;
(f)
Dates of requirement of temporary facilities necessary for testing and
commissioning, e.g. electricity supply, water and town gas;
(g)
Dates of completion, testing and commissioning; and
(h)
Short term programmes showing the detailed work schedules of coming
weeks and months shall also be provided to the Architect. Programmes
shall be regularly updated to reflect the actual progress and to meet the
Contractor‟s obligations under the Contract.
In addition, detailed submission schedules for installation drawings, equipment
and testing and commissioning shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
The formats and information to be included in the schedules shall be as required
by the Architect.
Section A3
Page 1 of 5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A3.3
BUILDER’S WORK
All builder‟s work including openings or holes through building structure or
partition walls; trenches, ducts and cutting; and all plinths, concrete bases,
supports, ducts, etc. required for the installation will be carried out as part of the
building works by the Building Contractor at the expense of the Employer
provided that the Contractor has submitted full details of such requirements
within a reasonable time to the Architect for approval, so that due consideration
may be given before the Building Contractor commences the building works in
accordance with the building programme in the areas concerned. After
obtaining the said approval of the Architect, the Contractor is required to mark
out at the relevant locations of the Site the exact positions and sizes of all such
works and to provide detailed information of such works to the Building
Contractor to facilitate him to carry out the builder‟s works as the works proceed.
All „cutting-away‟ and „making-good‟ as required to facilitate the Contractor‟s
works will be carried out by the Building Contractor, except for minor
provisions required for the fixing of screws, raw plugs, redhead bolts, etc. which
shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor shall mark out on Site
and/or supply drawings of all „cutting-away‟ to the Building Contractor within a
reasonable time.
All expenses properly incurred and losses suffered by the Employer as a result
of the Contractor‟s failure to comply with the above requirements are
recoverable by the Employer from the Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure that such works are essential for the execution of the
Works. In the event that any of such works is proved to be non-essential,
unnecessary and/or abortive, the Contractor shall bear the full cost of such
works including but not limited to any unnecessary or incorrect „cutting-away‟
and making-good and shall reimburse the Employer for all cost incurred in this
connection.
Upon completion of the builder‟s works by the Building Contractor, the
Contractor shall forthwith check and examine that all builder‟s works so
executed have been completed in accordance with his requirements. If at any
time it becomes apparent to the Contractor that any builder‟s works completed
by the Building Contractor does not comply with his requirements in any respect
whatsoever, the Contractor shall forthwith give notice in writing to the Architect
and specify in details the extents and effects of such non-compliance in that
notice. The Contractor is deemed to have satisfied with the builder‟s works
after a period of 14 days from the date of completion of the builder‟s works if
the above notice is not served to the Architect within such period. All additional
expenditure properly incurred and all loss suffered in this connection by the
Employer in having such works re-executed and rectified shall be recoverable
by the Employer from the Contractor.
Section A3
Page 2 of 5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A3.4
COORDINATION OF CONTRACT WORKS
The Contractor shall coordinate the Works with those works of the Building
Contractor and any other contractors and sub-contractors.
The Contractor shall note that the Drawings supplied to him only indicate the
approximate locations of the works. He shall make any modification reasonably
required of his programme, work sequence and physical deployment of his work
to suit the outcome of work coordination or as necessary and ensure that all
cleaning, adjustment, test and control points are readily accessible while keeping
the number of loops, cross-overs and the like to a minimum.
The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the building works programme
and shall plan, coordinate and programme his works to suit and adhere to the
building works in accordance with the building programme.
Any significant problems encountered during the coordination work, which are
beyond the Contractor‟s control shall promptly be reported to the Architect.
A3.5
COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS
The Contractor shall cooperate at all times with the Building Contractor and all
other contractors and sub-contractors in order to achieve efficient workflow on
Site.
Any significant problems beyond the Contractor‟s control shall promptly be
reported to the Architect.
A3.6
SITE SUPERVISION
The Contractor shall keep on the Site a competent and technically qualified site
supervisor to control, supervise and manage all his Works on Site. The
supervisor shall be vested with suitable powers to receive instructions from the
Architect.
The site supervisor shall be technically competent and have adequate site
experience for the Works. The Contractor shall also refer to the Particular
Specification for other specific requirements, if any, on site supervision.
Approval by the Architect shall be obtained prior to the posting of the supervisor
on Site. The Contractor shall immediately replace the site supervisor whose
experience, skill or competency is, in the opinion of the Architect, found to be
inadequate for the particular work.
Section A3
Page 3 of 5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A3.7
SAMPLE BOARD
Within 6 weeks of the acceptance of his Tender and prior to the commencement
of Works, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval in a
reasonable time a sample board of essential components proposed to be used in
the Contract.
However, the Contractor may request the Architect in writing for an extension
of time, if 6 weeks are practically insufficient.
Items displayed shall be deemed to be adequate for the Works unless otherwise
clearly indicated. Each sample, with clear numbering and labeling, shall be
firmly fixed onto a rigid wooden or metal board. A list shall also be affixed on
the sample board to show the item description, make and brand, country of
origin and locations of installation (if not generally used). Samples rejected by
the Architect shall be replaced as soon as possible. Upon approval of all items,
the Architect will endorse the list on the sample board and the Contractor shall
deliver the board to the site office for reference.
The board shall contain samples of all „compact‟ sized materials and accessories
to be used in the Works. Written approval of all samples and technical details
shall be obtained from the Architect before commencement of any installation
work.
In the context of this General Specification the term „compact‟ means any item
that will fit into a 300 mm cube.
The following items shall be included in the sample board as a minimum.
A3.8
(a)
Conduit and accessories
(b)
Trunking and accessories
(c)
Cable and accessories
(d)
Wiring accessories
ADVICE OF ORDER PLACED
The Contractor shall submit copies of all orders placed for major items of
equipment and materials to the Architect for record.
Section A3
Page 4 of 5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A3.9
RECORD OF MATERIALS DELIVERY
All materials and equipment delivered to Site shall be accurately listed and
recorded in the site record books maintained by the representatives of the
Architect on Site.
Materials and equipment delivered to Site and paid for in interim payment shall
be the Employer‟s property. Such materials and equipment shall not be
removed from Site without the approval of the Architect in writing and
appropriate deduction shall be made in the next interim payment in accordance
with the Contract.
Where the Building Contractor is in overall control of the Site, the Building
Contractor may also be required to record details of all incoming/outgoing
materials. In this case, the Contractor shall comply with the Building
Contractor‟s arrangements.
A3.10
PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Unless the responsibility is clearly defined in the Contract that the protection on
Site for delivered equipment, materials and installation is solely by other
contractors, the Contractor shall be responsible for the safe custody of all
materials and equipment as stored or installed by him until finally inspected,
tested and accepted. In addition, the Contractor shall protect all work against
theft, fire, damage or inclement weather and carefully store all materials and
equipment received on Site but not yet installed in a safe and secure place unless
otherwise specified.
All cases of theft and fire must immediately be reported to the police, the
Building Contractor, the Architect and the Architect‟s representatives on Site
with full details.
Where necessary the Contractor shall provide lockable steel container or other
equally secure enclosures placed within a securely fenced-in compound
provided by the Building Contractor on Site for the storage of materials and
equipment.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate and arrange with the Building Contractor who
shall provide clean, reasonably finished and lockable secure accommodation for
the storage of sensitive and/or expensive items before installation.
If there is no Building Contractor, all the storage facilities and spaces shall be
provided by the Contractor.
Section A3
Page 5 of 5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION A4
DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
A4.1
DRAWINGS IN ELECTRONIC FORMAT
The Contractor shall provide drawings in electronic format as required in the
following clauses. These drawings shall conform to the latest version of CAD
Standard of Works Projects (CSWP) as posted in the web site of the Works
Branch, Development Bureau and in accordance with the latest version of CAD
Manual for Architectural Services Department Projects. Should any technical
conflict between the CSWP and the CAD Manual arise, the CSWP shall take
precedence.
A4.2
INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A4.2.1
Drawing Submission Schedule
The Contractor shall submit a detailed installation drawing
submission schedule and programme to the Architect. The
Contractor shall allow reasonable time in the programme for vetting
of the installation drawings by the Architect and for drawing
resubmissions as necessary.
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect a comprehensive
“Submission Schedule” of installation drawings and builder‟s work
drawings within 2 weeks after the acceptance of Tender, taking into
account of the overall programme of the Works including any
Specialist Works and works by the utility undertakings. No
equipment shall be delivered to the Site and no works shall be
executed until the installation drawings have been approved by the
Architect. The Contractor shall ensure that installation drawings and
builder‟s work drawings are progressively submitted in accordance
with the approved “Submission Schedule”.
The Contractor shall provide at least 6 hard copies and one electronic
copy, unless otherwise specified in the Contract, of the approved
installation drawings to the Architect for distribution.
Section A4
Page 1 of 10
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A4.2.2
Size of Installation Drawings
Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall only be of standard sizes
from A0 to A4 or B1 size as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999.
A4.2.3
Contents of Installation Drawings
The Contractor shall ensure all installation drawings are accurate
representation of the Works, before submitting them to the Architect.
All installation drawings shall be fully dimensioned and suitably
scaled showing construction, sizes, weights, arrangements, operating
clearances and performance characteristics.
Installation drawings shall be dimensioned and showing construction,
sizes, weights, arrangements, operating clearances, performance
characteristics and the necessary builder‟s work involved.
Installation drawings for conduit layout shall clearly indicate the
proposed position and size of conduit runs together with the number
of cables, size and circuiting of the cables therein.
A4.2.4
Builder‟s Work Drawings
Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, the Contractor shall
submit to the Architect in accordance with the approved
“Submission Schedule”, 6 copies of drawings showing details of all
builder‟s work required e.g. the weight and the load on each support
of equipment. Such drawings shall clearly indicate the details and
positions of all openings, holes, trenches, ducts and cutting required
and construction details for plinths and equipment bases.
A4.2.5
Manufacturer‟s Shop Drawings
The manufacturer‟s shop drawings are drawings for equipment or
plant to be manufactured by a specialist manufacturing supplier in
their own workshops and places away from the Site.
The drawings shall show detailed construction, principal dimensions,
weights and clearances for maintenance, etc. Immediately after
placing of any order or at any event within 4 weeks unless otherwise
approved in writing by the Architect, the Contractor shall forward to
the Architect for comment, 4 copies of manufacturer‟s shop
drawings indicating detailed construction, principal dimensions and
weights, clearances for withdrawals and/or cleaning, etc. No work
shall proceed on or off Site unless drawings requiring approval are
so approved in writing by the Architect.
Section A4
Page 2 of 10
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A4.3
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A4.3.1
Submission of As–built Drawings
The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of the first draft prints of as-built
drawings within 28 days of the issuance of the certificate of
completion to the Architect for checking. The Architect after
checking the above draft prints shall return one set of the marked up
copies of these as-built drawings to the Contractor within 42 days
from the date of submission of the Contractor‟s draft prints with
comments. The Contractor shall within a further 28 days from the
date of receiving the Architect‟s comments on the draft as-built
drawings re-submit to the Architect for his approval another 3 sets of
the second draft prints of as-built drawings with the Architect‟s
comments incorporated. This process of submission and approval
shall continue until the final approval of the Architect on these asbuilt drawing is obtained.
The final approved as-built drawings shall be in 3 sets of hard copies
and 3 sets of electronic copies. These shall be submitted within 21
days from the date of final approval. Each electronic copy shall be
in the form of CD-ROM, labelled, with cross reference to a printed
list of files explaining the contents and purpose of each file and
supplied in sturdy plastic containers.
The detailed requirements and the media of as-built drawings set out
in the Preliminaries of the Bills of Quantities or the Specification
Preliminaries shall be followed as appropriate.
A4.3.2
Size of As-built Drawings
As-built drawings shall only be of standard sizes of A0, A1 or B1
size as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999.
A4.3.3
Content of As-built Drawings
The Contractor shall ensure all as-built drawings are accurate
representation of the Works, before submitting them to the Architect.
The as-built drawings required to be provided by the Contractor for
various types of BS/E&M installations shall include, but not limited
to the following:
(a)
Building services layout plans such as ducting arrangement,
trunking arrangement, piping arrangement, etc;
(b)
System schematic diagrams, control diagrams and wiring
diagrams;
(c)
Concealed work layout plan such as concealed conduit routing,
etc; and
(d)
Installation details and assembly drawings such as LV cubicle
switchboard layout, motor control cubicle layout, etc.
Section A4
Page 3 of 10
EE_GS
2012 Edition
As-built drawings shall show the positions of all conduits, cables,
switchgear, distribution boards, luminaires, lightning protection and
earthing and all other items which have been installed.
A4.3.4
Framed Drawings
The Contractor shall provide framed drawings to each major
switchroom showing the schematic wiring diagrams, tables or charts
to indicate the type and composition of circuits, identification and
location of item of equipment from that switchroom. The framed
drawings shall be fixed to the wall in such a way that it can easily be
removed for reference.
A4.4
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUAL AND USER
MANUAL
A4.4.1
General
The Contractor shall provide two types of manuals to the Architect
with all changes made to the installation during the course of the
Contract suitably incorporated.
The O&M Manual is for use by the maintenance agent of the
completed installation. It shall contain detailed technical information
covering both operation and maintenance aspects of the installation.
The User Manual seeks to give users of the completed installation an
overview of the essential information of the installation. The
contents of the manual should be concise and succinct for ease of
comprehension by people with a non-technical background.
A4.4.2
Presentation
All manuals shall be written in English, unless otherwise specified.
The text of descriptive parts shall be kept concise while at the same
time ensure completeness. Diagrammatic materials shall also be
supported by comprehensive descriptions.
The manuals shall comprise A4 size loose-leaf and, where necessary,
A3 size folded loose-leaf. The loose-leaves shall be of good quality
paper that is sufficiently opaque to avoid “show-through”. Unless
otherwise specified in the Contract, the manuals shall be bound in
durable loose-leaf four ring binders with hard covers. The manuals
shall have labels or lettering on the front cover and spine. The
Architect‟s approval shall be obtained on this at the draft manual
stage. The electronic copy of manuals including the technical
literatures, shall be in PDF format readable by Acrobat Reader
Freeware.
Section A4
Page 4 of 10
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A4.4.3
Checking and Approval
The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of the first draft of O&M Manuals
together with a list of recommended spare parts for one year‟s
operation and a list of special tools, both complete with prices to the
Architect for comment within 28 days of the issuance of the
completion certificate.
The Contractor shall submit 2 sets of the first draft of the User
Manual to the Architect for comment at least 56 calendar days before
the date of completion.
The Architect will check the drafts and return them to the Contractor
within 42 days from the date of submission with comments
necessary for a final and approved set of document. The Contractor
shall then make all necessary amendments to the documents and
resubmit them to the Architect within 21 days from the date of
receipt of comments.
The Contractor shall submit 4 sets of hard copies (one of which shall
be the original) and one set of electronic copy of the final approved
O&M Manuals in CD-ROM within 21 days from the date of
approval by the Architect.
The Contractor shall submit 2 sets of hard copies and one electronic
copy of the final approved User Manuals in CD-ROM within 21
days from the date of approval by the Architect.
A4.4.4
Structure and Contents of O&M Manual
The detailed requirements, structure and contents of the O&M
Manual shall be as specified elsewhere in the Contract and shall
include the following information under separate sections where
appropriate:
(a)
Project Information
This shall include:
Project title, site address, contract no., contract title,
contractor/sub-contractor name, address, contact persons and
their telephone/fax nos., contract commencement date,
substantial completion date and end date of Maintenance
Period.
(b)
System Description
-
Type(s) of system(s) and equipment installed;
Design criteria, design data and parameters;
Locations of the system and major equipment, and what
they serve;
Description of operation and functions of the system
and equipment; and
Section A4
Page 5 of 10
EE_GS
2012 Edition
-
(c)
General operating conditions, expected performance
and energy and resources consumption where
applicable.
List of Installed Equipment
Schedule of all items of equipment and plant stating the
location, name, model no., manufacturer's serial or reference
no., manufacturer‟s design duties and data.
(d)
(e)
Spare Parts and Special Tools Lists
-
List of Spare Parts supplied by the Contractors:
Item descriptions, supplied quantities, model nos.,
manufacturer‟s serial or reference nos. and storage
locations; and
-
Recommended Spare Parts List and Special Tools List:
Manufacturers‟/suppliers‟ recommendations for spare
parts and special tools with item description, unit rate,
recommended stock quantities as well as the agents for
the spare parts and special tools.
Manufacturers‟ Certificates/Guarantees
-
Manufacturers‟ certificates such as factory test
certificates, laboratory test reports and guarantees and
any others where required for the equipment and plants,
etc.; and
-
Originals of Statutory Inspection Certificate for various
installations, including:
Originals of Work Completion Certificate – Form No.
PBS/GN.069.
(f)
Safety Precautions for Operation and Maintenance
State, where applicable, hazard warnings and safety
precautions of which the operation and maintenance staff need
to be aware:
-
mandatory requirements relating to safety;
known hazards against which protection measures shall
be taken; and
known features or operational characteristics of the
installed equipment or systems which may cause hazard
and the related safety precautions.
Section A4
Page 6 of 10
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(g)
Operation Instructions
Instructions for the safe and efficient operation, under both
normal and emergency conditions, of the installed system
which shall comprise:
-
(h)
an outline of the operating mode;
control logic and data (sequence, effect, limits of
capability, modes and set points);
procedures and sequences for start-up and shut-down;
interlocks between equipment/system;
calling on of stand-by equipment;
precautions necessary to overcome known hazards;
means by which any potentially hazardous equipment
can be made safe;
estimation of energy consumption and energy costs;
forms for recording plant running hours, energy
consumption and energy costs; and
operating data such as running current, operating
pressure, operating flow rates etc.
Maintenance
(i)
Maintenance instructions
Manufacturers‟ and the Contractor's recommendations
and instructions for the maintenance of the installed
equipment. Clear distinction should be made between
planned tasks (preventive maintenance) and fault-repair
tasks (corrective maintenance). Instructions shall be
given on each of the following, as appropriate:
-
nature of deterioration, and the defects to be looked
for;
isolation and return to service of plant and
equipment;
dismantling and reassembly;
replacement of components and assemblies;
dealing with hazards which may arise during
maintenance;
adjustments, calibration and testing; and
special tools, test equipment and ancillary services.
Section A4
Page 7 of 10
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(ii)
Maintenance schedules
Proposed maintenance schedules for all the preventive
maintenance tasks identified above. The schedules
shall be based on both manufacturers' recommendations
and other authoritative sources (e.g. statutory or
mandatory requirements) and should include:
-
routine servicing;
inspections;
tests and examinations;
adjustments;
calibration; and
overhaul.
The frequency of each task may be expressed as
specific time intervals, running hours or number of
completed operations as appropriate. Collectively, the
schedules will form a complete maintenance cycle,
repeated throughout the whole working life of the
installation.
(i)
Drawing Lists
-
(j)
A complete list of as-built drawings identified with
drawing number/reference;
A complete list of manufacturers‟ shop drawings with
drawing number/reference, where applicable; and
A brief description of CD-ROM for these drawings.
Technical Literatures
A complete set of manufacturers' literatures for all the plant
and equipment installed in the system. The contents of these
literatures shall cover the following areas where applicable:
-
(k)
description of equipment with model numbers
highlighted;
performance-behavioural
characteristics
of
the
equipment;
applications - suitability for use;
factory/laboratory test reports, detailed drawings,
circuit diagrams;
methods of operation and control;
operation instructions;
cleaning and maintenance requirements;
plants, materials and space required for maintenance;
protective measures and safety precautions for
operation and maintenance; and
part lists.
Contact addresses and telephone numbers of suppliers of
major equipment.
Section A4
Page 8 of 10
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A4.4.5
Structure and Contents of User Manual
The detailed requirements, structure and contents of the User Manual
shall include, where applicable, the following information:
(a)
Project Information
This shall include:
Project title, site address, contract no., contract title, contract
commencement date, substantial completion date and end date
of Maintenance Period.
(b)
System Description
-
(c)
Schedule of Major Plant Rooms and Installed Equipment
-
(d)
Type(s) of system(s) and equipment installed, and their
purposes;
Locations of major plant rooms and riser ducts;
Brief description of the operation and functions of the
systems and equipment; and
Listing of set points which can be adjusted by the user
to suit their operation needs.
Schedule of major plant rooms and riser ducts including
their locations; and
Schedule of major equipment and plants including their
locations and serving areas.
Safety Precautions for Operation
Any safety precautions and warnings signals that the users
shall be aware of in the daily operation of the various systems
and equipment in the installation including:
-
-
mandatory requirements relating to safety;
features or operational characteristics of the installed
systems or equipment which may cause hazard and the
related safety - precautions;
protective measures and safety precautions for
operation; and
list of warning signals and the related meanings that the
user shall be aware of and the actions to be taken.
Section A4
Page 9 of 10
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(e)
Operation Instructions
Instructions for the safe and efficient operation, under both
normal and emergency conditions, of the installed system
which shall comprise:
-
(f)
an outline of the operating mode;
step by step operation instructions for systems and
equipment that are to be operated by the user, including
at least procedures for start-up and shut-down;
means by which any potentially hazardous situation can
be made safe; and
cleaning and basic maintenance procedures.
List of Statutory Periodic Inspections and Tests
A schedule of periodic inspections and tests that owner and/or
user of the installation have to arrange to achieve compliance
with the requirements stipulated in the relevant Laws of Hong
Kong. The frequency of such inspections and tests shall be
expressed in specific time intervals.
(g)
Drawings
A set of selected as-built drawings which shall be able to
illustrate to the user the general layout of the completed
installation.
(h)
Photographs
A set of photographs with suitable captions to illustrate to the
user the appearance and locations of devices which require
their setting and operation.
A4.4.6
Intellectual Property Rights
The Government shall become the absolute and exclusive owner of
the O&M Manuals and the User Manual and all intellectual property
rights subsisting therein free from all encumbrances.
In the event that the beneficial ownership of any intellectual property
rights subsisting in the above Manuals are vested in anyone other
than the Contractor, the Contactor shall procure that the beneficial
owner shall grant to the Employer a transferable, non-exclusive,
royalty-free and irrevocable licence (carrying the right to grant sublicences) to utilize the intellectual property rights in the manuals for
the purposes contemplated in the Contract. For the avoidance of
doubt such purposes shall, but not limited to, include providing free
copying of the materials in the manuals by any subsequent owner or
user of the installation, and/or any party responsible for the operation
and maintenance of the installation in connection with any
subsequent alteration, extension, operation and maintenance of the
installation.
Section A4
Page 10 of 10
EE_GS
2012 Edition
PART B – INSTALLATION METHODOLOGY
SECTION B1
GENERAL
B1.1
WORKMANSHIP
B1.1.1
Tradesmen
All electrical works shall be carried out by or under the direct
supervision of “registered electrical workers” of the appropriate
grade in accordance with the Electricity Ordinance.
All tradesmen shall be experienced in the trade and the work carried
out shall be consistent with the good practice in Hong Kong and to
the satisfaction of the Architect.
B1.1.2
Tool and Instrument
Proper tools shall be used for carrying out the electrical installations.
Adequate and accurate testing/measuring instruments shall be used
to demonstrate compliance of the electrical installations with the
relevant specifications and regulations. The Architect has the right
to stop any work on which the correct tools and/or instruments are
not being used.
Instruments used for acceptance tests shall be calibrated at
appropriate intervals and as required in the Contract for a particular
project.
B1.1.3
Safety on Site
Works shall be carried out in such a manner as to comply with all the
ordinances, regulations, etc., as listed in Clause A2.1 together with
any amendments made thereto.
B1.2
LABEL AND NOTICE
B1.2.1
Inscription of Label and Engraving
The Contractor shall submit a schedule of all labels, notices and
identifications for the Architect‟s approval prior to order and
installation. Inscription of label and engraving shall be in both
Chinese and English characters. The Chinese translations shall be
referred to the “Glossaries of Terms Commonly Used in Government
Departments” issued by Civil Service Bureau. Sample of label and
notice shall be submitted to the Architect for agreement.
Section B1
Page 1 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B1.2.2
Material for Label
Label shall be of white plastic with black or red lettering engraved as
required. Where distribution board is fitted with labels provided by
the manufacturer of the distribution board, these labels may be used
in lieu of the white plastic label provided that they are of equivalent
quality and approved by the Architect.
B1.2.3
Fixing of Label
Label shall be fixed to switchgear and distribution board by screws.
Where drilling and tapping of the equipment is impracticable,
approved means of glue fastening may be used subject to prior
approval of the Architect.
B1.2.4
Engraving for Electrical Accessory
The front plate of each switch socket or control switch feeding an
essential circuit or a fixed electrical appliance, such as water heater,
cooker, wall-mounted fan, wall-mounted radiator, room cooler, etc.,
shall be engraved according to the appliance being controlled.
Details of the inscription shall be submitted to the Architect for
approval.
Additional engraving to other electrical accessories will be specified
in the Particular Specification and/or order by the Architect.
B1.2.5
Warning Notice
Warning notices shall be provided as required by the Electricity
Ordinance and the Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring)
Regulations. In addition, the following warning notices in Chinese
and English shall be provided at the appropriate positions:
(a)
A label having minimum size of 65 x 50 mm marked with the
words „DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE‟ in Chinese characters
and English lettering of not less than 5 mm high to be fixed on
every container or enclosure of ancillary equipment for
discharge lighting installations operating at voltages exceeding
“low voltage”.
(b)
A label to indicate the maximum voltage present in an item of
equipment or enclosure within which a voltage exceeding
250V exists, or items or equipment or enclosure which can be
reached simultaneously and a voltage exceeding 250V exists
between simultaneously accessible terminals or other fixed live
parts: such voltages are normally not expected to exist with the
equipment or enclosure.
Section B1
Page 2 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B1.2.6
(c)
A label to be fixed in such a position that any person gaining
access to the live parts of an item of equipment or enclosure,
which are not capable of being isolated by a single device and
not provided with an interlocking arrangement to isolate all
circuits concerned, will be adequately warned of the need of
taking special precautionary measures to use the appropriate
isolating devices.
(d)
A label with the words „FOR EQUIPMENT OUTDOORS‟ for
each socket outlet intended to supply equipment used at
outdoors or area outside the same equipotential zone.
Other Labels and Notices
Other labels and notices as required by the Electricity Ordinance or
the Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations shall be
provided where appropriate.
B1.3
GUARD AND RAILING FOR MOVING OR ROTATING PARTS OF
EQUIPMENT
All moving or rotating parts of equipment shall be provided with an approved
guard and railing complying with the Factories and Industrial Undertakings
(Guarding and Operation of Machinery) Regulations, together with any
amendments made thereto.
Guards shall be of rigid and substantial construction and shall consist of heavy
mild steel angle frames, hinged and latched with either heavy galvanised mild
steel wire crimped mesh securely fastened to frames or galvanised sheet metal
of 1.2 mm minimum thickness. All apertures shall be such that finger access to
dangerous part is not possible. All sections shall be bolted or riveted. Railings
shall be made of 32 mm diameter galvanised mild steel pipe and railing fittings.
B1.4
IDENTIFICATION OF CABLE AND CONDUIT
Cables for control circuits, inter-communication circuits, signalling circuits, and
bell wiring shall be identified as required for each particular circumstance.
Cables for power and lighting circuits shall be identified in accordance with IEC
60364-1:2009 and the associated parts of the standard.
Electrical conduits, where required to be distinguished from pipelines or other
services, shall use orange (BS color reference No. 06 E 51 to BS 4800:1989) as
the basic identification color in compliance with BS 1710:1984.
B1.5
FIXING TO WOODEN PLUG
Screws shall not be fixed to wooden plugs unless otherwise specified. Proper
methods of fixing, such as expanding plugs of adequate size or other purposedesigned fixing devices approved by the Architect, shall be used.
Section B1
Page 3 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B1.6
PAINTING OF METAL WORK
Painting shall be carried in accordance with the appropriate Clauses in the
current “General Specification for Building” issued by the Architectural
Services Department, the Government of the HKSAR and any amendments or
revisions made thereto.
Agreement on the type, brand and color of the paint to be used shall be obtained
from the Architect before the work commences. Undercoat and finish coat shall
be of properly matching type and the finish coat shall give a hard gloss finish or
as required.
B1.7
WATER PROOFING
Where any work pierces the waterproofing including waterproof structure, the
method of installation shall be as agreed by the Architect.
B1.8
PROVISION OF SPARE FUSES IN MAIN SWITCH ROOM
The Contractor shall supply and install one complete set of spare fuses for each
rating of switchfuse, fuseswitch and fuses in control circuit installed. The spare
fuses shall be hung on a wooden board fixed at a convenient position inside the
main switch room.
The wooden board shall be smoothed on the front face and edges, and shall be
painted to the approval of the Architect.
Section B1
Page 4 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B2
INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS
B2.1
WIRING IN STEEL CONDUIT SYSTEM
B2.1.1
Type of Cable
Non-sheathed cable shall be installed in conduit system. Sheathed
copper cable installed in conduit system is also acceptable. Cables
for 3-phase circuit shall be 450/750V grade or above.
B2.1.2
Concealed Steel Conduit System
Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification or on the
Drawings, conduits shall be concealed within walls, floor slabs, false
ceilings, raised floor or other suitable space.
Chase for conduit to be concealed in wall, column or beam shall be
vertical or horizontal.
B2.1.3
Surface Conduit System
Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification or on the
Drawings, surface conduit shall be run in a vertical or horizontal
direction.
Conduit boxes, adaptable boxes and metal boxes for accessories
shall be securely fixed to walls, ceilings or other substantial parts of
a structure by means of suitable brass screws correctly spaced. The
fixing of these boxes shall be independent of the fixing of the
associated conduits.
B2.1.4
Minimum Size of Conduit
The minimum outside diameter of any conduit shall be 20 mm.
B2.1.5
Flexible Conduit
Flexible conduit shall be used as short as possible. The length of
flexible conduit shall be not more than 1 m for general applications
or 2 m inside false ceiling and raised floor. (Note: PVC pliable
conduit may be used in place of steel flexible conduit wherever
appropriate. In such case, requirements in Clause B2.3 shall apply.)
Section B2
Page 1 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B2.1.6
Conduit Continuity
The steel conduit installation shall be mechanically and electrically
continuous throughout and effectively earthed.
Where the circuit protective conductor is formed by the conduits, the
terminal of a socket outlet shall be connected by a separate circuit
protective conductor having the same cross-sectional area and type
as the live conductor to an earth terminal incorporated in the
associated metal box or enclosure.
Flexible conduit shall not be used as a circuit protective conductor.
A separate circuit protective conductor having the same crosssectional area and type as the largest live conductor shall be drawn
into the flexible conduit for earth continuity. This circuit protective
conductor shall be fixed to an earth terminal incorporated, at each
end, in the metal boxes or enclosures onto which the ends of the
flexible conduit are locked.
B2.1.7
Joint in Conduits
Joint in steel conduits shall be made by means of a solid coupler into
which the adjacent ends of the two conduits shall be inserted to
approximately half into it and screwed up tightly in order to make
the conduit run mechanically and electrically continuous. No threads
on either conduit shall be exposed.
Running couplings shall not be used. In case where such a coupling
cannot be avoided, approval from the Architect must be obtained
before it is adopted. In this case, the coupler shall be screwed up
tightly onto the short threaded portion of one conduit, the threaded
portion of which shall project approximately half way into the length
of the coupler. The threaded portion of the mating conduit shall also
project approximately half way into the coupler. Electrical continuity
shall be ensured by tightening up a hexagon locknut against the
coupler. Any exposed threads on either conduit shall be painted with
at least two coats of anti-rust paint.
B2.1.8
Provision of Adaptable Box
An adequate number of suitably sized adaptable boxes shall be
provided in all conduit runs to enable cables to be drawn in and out
easily without damage. Adaptable boxes shall be provided
immediately after every two bends, or after a bend plus a maximum
straight run of 10m, or after a maximum straight run of 15m.
B2.1.9
Spacing between Conduits
Adjacent or parallel conduits cast in concrete shall be separated by a
spacing of not less than 25 mm so as to allow concrete aggregate to
pass and set between them.
Section B2
Page 2 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B2.1.10
Termination of Conduits at Metal Casing of Equipment
Where a steel conduit terminates at a metal casing, a coupler and a
brass male bush shall be used. The brass male bush shall be screwed
into the coupler or adaptor from the inside of the metal casing
through a clearance hole drilled in the metal casing to suit the bush.
Both the conduit and the bush shall be screwed tightly into the
coupler or adaptor so as to grip the metal casing securely for
mechanical and electrical continuity. Threads on the steel conduit
shall be at least half the coupler length. Connection between flexible
conduit and the adaptor shall be securely fixed. No threads on the
metal casing shall be allowed.
In case of using flexible steel conduit, a brass adaptor together with a
brass male bush shall be used. The brass adaptor shall comprise two
parts, an inner core and an outer ferrule. The inner core shall screw
into the bore of the conduit together with an outer ferrule which caps
off the end of the conduit, so that the adaptor can provide an
extremely strong joint. The core shall lock against the outer ferrule
and isolate any sharp cut edges in the conduit.
Where a metal casing is painted or enamelled, the electrical
continuity between the conduit and the casing shall be achieved by
means of a separate circuit protective conductor of adequate size,
connecting the earth terminal of the conduit and an earth terminal
inside the metal casing. A copper earthing piece placed between the
bush and the metal casing may be used as an earthing terminal of the
conduit. Neither the paint nor the enamel shall be damaged or
removed in order to achieve the electrical continuity.
B2.1.11
Conduit Bend
Conduit shall not be bent more than 90 degrees. The internal radius
of the bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the outside diameter of
the conduit.
B2.1.12
Conduit Crossing Expansion Joint
Where a steel conduit crosses an expansion joint, special
arrangements shall be made to allow relative movement to occur on
either side of the expansion joint. A separate circuit protective
conductor (CPC) shall be installed in accordance with Clause B2.3.9
of this specification to maintain an effective electrical continuity
across the expansion joint.
B2.1.13
Use of Extension Piece
An extension piece shall be fitted to a conduit box where the plaster
wall finish (including plaster) is more than 25 mm from the conduit
box. Only extension pieces of the correct depth shall be used. Under
no circumstances shall multiple extension pieces be permitted.
Section B2
Page 3 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B2.1.14
Prevention of Ingress of Foreign Matters
During the building construction, all open ends of the conduit
termination, which are liable to be filled with water, moisture or
other foreign matters, shall be plugged with approved conduit
stopping plugs; paper, rag or similar materials shall NOT be used for
this purpose. Steel conduit boxes in similar circumstances shall also
be similarly plugged to prevent concrete aggregate or plaster from
entering into the boxes during building construction.
B2.1.15
Prevention of Accumulation of Water or Moisture
The conduits shall be so laid to prevent accumulation of condensed
moisture and the ingress of water in any part of the installation.
Approved type of sealant for the prevention of condensed moisture
shall be applied to ceiling conduit outlets installed in a cooled space
subject to the influx of warm air.
B2.1.16
Conduit Laid Direct in Ground
Steel conduits laid direct in ground or buried in soil shall be painted
with two coats of bituminous paint and wrapped with selfamalgamating tapes or other wrapping materials for protection
against corrosion and approved by the Architect.
B2.1.17
Fixing of Distance (Spacing) Saddle
Saddles, for the support of surface conduits, shall be provided
throughout the entire route at regular intervals. The spacing between
adjacent saddles for steel conduits shall not be greater than those
given in Table B2.1.17
Each bend of a surface conduit shall be supported by a saddle on
either side of the bend, and the saddles shall be fixed as near to the
bend as practicable.
Saddles shall be fixed with brass screws in expanding plugs or other
purpose-designed fixing devices approved by the Architect.
Table B2.1.17 - Spacing of Supports for Conduit
Conduit
size
(mm)
20
25, 32
Maximum distance between supports (m)
Rigid steel
conduit
Rigid plastic/PVC
conduit
Pliable/flexible
conduit
Horizontal Vertical
Horizontal Vertical
Horizontal Vertical
1.75
2.00
2.00
2.25
Section B2
Page 4 of 19
1.50
1.75
1.75
2.00
0.40
0.60
0.60
0.80
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B2.1.18
Conduit Installed Outdoors or in Damp Situation
Where steel conduits are installed outdoors or in damp situations, all
conduit fittings and conduit accessories shall not be placed in contact
with other metals with which they are liable to set up electrolytic
action. In addition, where the conduit installation is subject to
weather, the conduit fittings and conduit accessories shall be
provided with weatherproof sealant or other materials to ensure that
the installation is completely weatherproof.
B2.1.19
Swabbing Out of Conduit
Conduits shall be swabbed out and free from moisture before wiring
work is to commence. The swabbing operation shall be witnessed by
the authorised representative of the Architect. Only approved drawin tape or steel wire of appropriate size and absorbent cloth shall be
used.
B2.1.20
Fire Barrier
Where a conduit passes through fire resistant structural elements,
such as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the opening made
shall be sealed according to the appropriate degree of fire resistance
of the wall and/or floor. In addition, where a conduit is installed in a
channel, duct, ducting, trunking or shaft which pass through such
elements, suitable fire-resistant barriers shall also be provided to
prevent the spread of fire.
B2.1.21
Cable Capacity of Conduit
The number of cables drawn into a conduit shall be such that no
damage will be caused to the cables or to the conduits during their
installation.
In determining the size of the conduit, the “unit system” method
shall be adopted. The sum of all factors for the cables as given in
Table B2.1.21-1 shall NOT be greater than the conduit factor as
given on Table B2.1.21-2.
Section B2
Page 5 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Table B2.1.21-1 -
Conductor
cross-sectional
area
(mm²)
(See Note 1)
Cable Factors for Single Core Insulated
Copper Cables
Cable factors for cables in
conduits
(See Note 2)
For
For long runs
short run
or
run with bends
Cable factors
for cables in
trunking
1.0 Solid
22
16
5.8
1.5 Solid
27
22
7.1
1.5
31
22
8.1
2.5 Solid
39
30
10.2
2.5
43
30
11.4
4.0
58
43
15.2
6.0
88
58
22.9
105
36.3
10.0
146
Notes: 1.
Unless otherwise noted, all cables are stranded cables.
2.
“Short run” means a straight conduit run not
exceeding 3m long. “Long run” means a straight
conduit run exceeding 3m long.
Section B2
Page 6 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Table B2.1.21-2 - Conduit Factors
Length
of
conduit
Runs
(m)
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
6
7
8
9
10
Notes: 1.
B2.1.22
Conduit diameter (mm)
20
25
32
Straight run
460 800 1400
460 800 1400
460 800 1400
460 800 1400
460 800 1400
290 521 911
286 514 900
282 507 889
278 500 878
270 487 857
263 475 837
256 463 818
250 452 800
244 442 783
20
25
32
Run with one bend
303 543 947
294 528 923
286 514 900
278 500 878
270 487 857
263 475 837
256 463 818
250 452 800
244 442 783
233 422 750
222 404 720
213 388 692
204 373 667
196 358 643
20
25
32
Run with 2 bends
286 514 900
270 487 857
256 463 818
244 442 783
233 422 750
222 404 720
213 388 692
204 373 667
196 358 643
182 333 600
169 311 563
159 292 529
149 275 500
141 260 474
The size of conduit, which will satisfactorily
accommodate the cables, is that size having a factor
equal to or exceeding the sum of the cable factors.
Method of Drawing Cables into Conduit
Conduit system shall be completely erected before cable is drawn in
and there shall be adequate means of access for drawing cable in or
out.
Cables shall be drawn into a conduit by using approved draw-in tape
or steel wire of the appropriate size. Under no circumstances shall
the use of lubricants, e.g. grease, graphite, talcum powder, etc., be
permitted to assist in the drawing the cables.
Galvanized iron draw-wires of adequate size shall be provided in all
empty conduits.
B2.1.23
Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit Categories
Separate conduits shall be provided for cables of different circuit
categories or using different voltage levels.
B2.1.24
“Looping-in” Wiring System
Each cable in a run shall be of one continuous length and wired on
the “loop-in” system. No joint in cable run shall be allowed.
Section B2
Page 7 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B2.1.25
Grouping of Cables in Conduit
Conduits running from a distribution board to the final distribution
point may each contain all live conductors of a number of final
circuits provided that the effective current-carrying capacity of all
circuits, upon taking the correction factors into consideration, shall
exceed the rating of their respective over-current protection devices
and all conditions as stipulated in Clause B2.1.21 above are satisfied.
For conduits serving final circuits direct from a distribution board or
from an adaptable box used as a final distribution point, each conduit
shall contain all live cables of one final circuit only except in the
case of lighting final circuit where two circuits with 1.0 mm2 or 1.5
mm2 cables will be permitted in a 20 mm diameter conduit.
The neutral cable of a lighting final circuit using single core cables
may be routed in the conduit direct to the lighting point without
passing through the switch box.
B2.1.26
Termination of Bonding Conductors at Conduit Installation
For surface conduit installations, the supplementary bonding
conductors shall be terminated at the nearest conduit or conduit box
forming an integral part of the conduit installation.
For concealed conduit installations, the supplementary bonding
conductors shall be terminated at a copper earthing terminal fitted
inside a metal box forming an integral part of the conduit installation.
The metal conduit box shall be located as near as possible to the
bonding position and the exposed part of the supplementary bonding
conductor shall be made as short as possible.
B2.2
WIRING IN STEEL TRUNKING SYSTEM
B2.2.1
General
Where steel trunking is specified, they shall be installed neatly on
the surface of the walls, columns, beams or flushed with floor
screeding and shall be installed along a vertical or a horizontal plane.
The complete trunking installation shall be mechanically and
electrically continuous throughout, and effectively earthed.
Wiring system in trunking installation shall consist of non-sheathed
copper cables or sheathed copper cables. Cables for 3 phase circuit
shall be 450/750V grade or above.
Cables in each final circuit and/or in each sub-main shall be bunched
and tied or clipped together.
Particular precaution should be taken in situations where high
temperature cables may be touched or where they may touch other
Section B2
Page 8 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
materials.
Where cable trunking is required to be installed on floor to meet the
site constraints and special environmental conditions, such as inside
lift machine room, plant room, etc., this may be permissable subject
to safety consideration, workmanship and approval by the Architect.
B2.2.2
Provision of Cable Retaining Bar and Cable Support
Surface trunking, which is installed in such a position that the cables
might fall out when the cover is removed, shall be fitted with cables
retaining bars or other suitable devices to prevent the cables from
falling out.
Surface trunking installed vertically with length exceeding 5m shall
contain sufficient supporting devices such as pin racks within the
trunking to prevent strain on the cables due to the weight of the
cables, and to prevent vertical movement of the cables.
B2.2.3
Cable Capacity of Trunking
The number of cables put into a trunking shall be such that no
damage is caused to the cables or the trunking during their
installation.
In determining the size of the trunking required for a particular
installation, the “unit system” method shall be adopted. The sum of
all factors of the cables, as given in Table B2.1.21-1 shall NOT be
greater than the trunking factor as given in Table B2.2.3.
Table B2.2.3 - Trunking Factors
Trunking
Dimensions
(mm x mm)
Trunking
Factors
50 x
37.5
50 x
50
75 x
50
75 x
75
100 x 100 x 100 x
50
75
100
767
1037
1555
2371
2091
3189
4252
Notes: 1.
The size of trunking which will satisfactorily
accommodate the cables is that size having a factor equal
to or exceeding the sum of the cable factors.
2.
For sizes and types of cables and sizes of trunking other
than those given in Tables B2.1.21-1 and B2.2.3, the
number of cables installed shall be such that the resulting
space factor does not exceed 45%. The space factor is
expressed as the ratio (expressed as percentage) of the
sum of the overall cross-sectional areas of cables to the
internal cross-sectional area of the trunking in which the
cables are installed. The effective overall cross-sectional
area of a non-circular cable is taken as that of a circle of
diameter equal to the major axis of the cable.
Section B2
Page 9 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B2.2.4
Correction Factor of Grouping
Where more than one circuit of single-core cables or more than one
multi-core cables are enclosed in a common trunking, suitable
correction factor for grouping, as recommended by IEC 60364-1:
2009 and other associated parts of the standard, shall be applied in
determining the size of the cables to be installed. The effective
current carrying capacity of all circuits, upon taking the correction
factors into consideration, shall exceed the rating of their respective
over-current protection devices and all conditions as stipulated in
Clause B2.2.3 above are satisfied.
B2.2.5
Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit Categories
Where a common trunking is used to accommodate cables for
different circuit categories, they shall be effectively segregated by
means of partitions or dividers except in the case where trunking is
manufactured using two smaller pieces of trunking attached together
with a common cover. The partitions or dividers shall be adequately
secured to the body of the trunking.
For underfloor (duct) trunking, the partitions or dividers shall also be
of full depth to provide support and strength to the top surface of the
assembly.
B2.2.6
Connection to Equipment
Connection between trunking and equipment shall be made by
means of a standard flange coupling or an adaptor neck, fabricated or
cast. For direct attachment of trunking to equipment, cable entries
shall be provided with smooth bore bushes or grommets and the
return edge of the lid of the trunking shall be left intact.
B2.2.7
Connection to Distribution Board
Where connection is made between trunking and a distribution board,
the connectors for cable entry shall be sized to accept all cables from
all available circuits including circuits marked as “spare”.
B2.2.8
Fixing of Surface Trunking
Individual pieces of trunking shall be independently supported by
means of at least two fixed points per piece. On straight runs,
supports for trunking shall be fixed at regular intervals with
maximum spacing as given in Table B2.2.8. For runs with bends,
supports shall be fixed as near to the bend as practicable.
Overhead trunking shall be suitably supported by means of mild
steel hangers, brackets or other approved means, so that no visible
sag is observed when loaded with cables. These supports shall be
painted with at least two coats of an approved anti-rust paint to
prevent corrosion.
Section B2
Page 10 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Table B2.2.8 - Spacing of Supports for Cable Trunking
Trunking crosssectional area
(mm2)
Exceeding 300 but
not exceeding 700
Exceeding 700 but
not exceeding
1500
Exceeding 1500
but not exceeding
2500
Exceeding 2500
but not exceeding
5000
Exceeding 5000
B2.2.9
Maximum distance between supports (m)
Steel trunking
Plastic/PVC trunking
Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
0.75
1.0
0.50
0.50
1.25
1.5
0.50
0.50
1.75
2.0
1.25
1.25
3.0
3.0
1.50
2.00
3.0
3.0
1.75
2.00
Notes: 1.
The spacing tabulated above assume that the trunking is
not exposed to mechanical stress other than that due to
the weight of the enclosed cables, and the trunking and
fittings.
2.
The above figures do not apply to trunking which is
used for supporting luminaires or other equipment.
Cables through Trunking
Cables penetrating through trunking shall be protected by conduits
except insulated and sheathed cables if such cables form part of a
surface wiring system. In such case, the holes in the trunking,
through which such cables penetrate, shall be fitted with suitable
rubber grommets or insulated bushes.
B2.2.10
Fire Barrier
Where a trunking passes through a fire resistant structural element,
such as floor and wall, having specified fire resistance, the opening
thus formed shall be internally and externally sealed with approved
type of fire resisting material according to the appropriate degree of
required fire resistance.
B2.2.11
Prevention of Electrolytic Action
Where a trunking is installed in a damp situation, or where a
trunking is likely to be exposed to weather, the trunking shall be kept
away from other metalwork with which electrolytic action is liable to
incur.
Section B2
Page 11 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B2.2.12
Prevention of Ingress of Water
Every entry to a trunking shall be so placed as to prevent or to be
protected against ingress of water.
B2.3
WIRING IN PLASTIC CONDUIT OR PLASTIC TRUNKING SYSTEM
B2.3.1
General
Where wiring in plastic conduits or plastic trunking is specified, they
shall comply, where applicable, with the relevant Clauses in B2.1
and B2.2.
PVC conduit shall be heavy duty and shall not be used for
installation where the ambient temperature exceeds 60C or below
minus 5C.
Conduits may be corrugated, plain or reinforced. Suitable conduit
cutter shall be used for cutting rigid PVC conduit.
B2.3.2
Pliable Conduit
Pliable conduit shall be used as short as possible. The length of
pliable conduit shall be not more than 1m for general applications or
2m inside false ceiling and raised floor. Pliable conduit shall not be
used in situations where they would be subject to continuous flexing.
B2.3.3
Joint in PVC Conduit
Joint in PVC conduit shall be made by means of a solid PVC coupler
into which jointing cement shall be applied to the outer surface of
the conduit to be joined in turn and then shall be inserted firmly into
a coupler and twist a quarter turn to spread cement evenly in order to
make the conduit run mechanically continuous.
B2.3.4
Plastic Boxes
PVC adaptable boxes and PVC boxes for enclosure of electrical
accessories shall be interchangeable with the steel boxes.
PVC boxes shall be provided with a brass earthing terminal complete
with screw for the connection of circuit protective conductor. They
shall not be used for suspension of luminaires or other equipment,
where considerable heat will be produced or where the mass of the
luminaire or equipment exceeds 3 kg.
Where a concealed conduit system is used in floor slab or wall, a
system of PVC rigid conduit fitted with a “screwed to plain PVC
converting adaptor” firmly screwed into a deep pattern type cast iron
ceiling mounted “BESA” box shall be employed for the suspension
of luminaires or other equipment. The system shall also be suitable
Section B2
Page 12 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
for the suspended load at the expected working temperature. The
threaded portion of the mating converting adaptor shall project to
cover the full threaded portion of the “BESA” box and shall be
screwed up tightly in order to make the conduit run mechanically
continuous. Any exposed threads on the “BESA” box shall be
painted with at least two coats of anti-rust paint.
B2.3.5
Termination of PVC Conduit at Casing of Equipment
Where a PVC conduit terminates at a casing, a coupler and a PVC
bush (i.e. a “plain to screwed” PVC coupler) with a male PVC bush
or a “screwed to plain PVC converting adaptor” with a female PVC
bush shall be used. In the case of flexible conduit, a rigid PVC
glands or a PVC adaptor together with a PVC male bush shall be
used.
Where PVC adaptor with male bush are used, the male bush shall be
screwed into the coupler or adaptor from the inside of the metal
casing through a clearance hole drilled in the casing to suit the bush.
The bush shall be screwed tightly into the coupler or adaptor so as to
grip the casing securely for mechanical continuity. Threads on the
male bush shall be long enough to cover the full threaded portion of
the coupler. The jointing cement shall be applied on the surface of
pliable conduit prior to insertion into the coupler/adaptor and twist.
B2.3.6
Conduit Bend
Conduit bend shall be made by the use of purpose made solid elbow
or, for PVC conduit not exceeding 25 mm diameter, by bending the
conduit itself . Conduit bend shall not be bent more than 90 degrees.
The internal radius of the bend shall not be less than 4 times the
outside diameter of the conduit.
In case of the conduit bend is made by bending the PVC conduit, the
conduit bend shall be made by using the appropriate size of conduit
bending springs. Conduit shall be fixed in position as soon as
possible after bending.
B2.3.7
Allowance for Thermal Expansion
Due allowance shall be made for the expansion of PVC tubing at
high temperature. Expansion coupling or other fittings shall be
installed in a straight run of 8m or more. Saddles or clips shall be of
sliding fit.
B2.3.8
Fixing of Trunking
The trunking shall be fixed and supported in the normal way by
screws, but the holes in the trunking shall always be made slightly
oversize to allow for the movement of expansion. Washers shall be
used under the head of the screw which shall not be over-tightened.
The spacing between adjacent supports for trunking shall not be
Section B2
Page 13 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
greater than those given in Table B2.2.8.
B2.3.9
Earthing
A PVC insulated cable shall be drawn into the conduit or trunking
system to serve as the circuit protective conductor (CPC), the crosssectional area of which shall comply with IEC 60364-1:2009 and
other associated parts of the standard for the size of the largest live
conductors enclosed.
B2.4
SURFACE WIRING SYSTEM
B2.4.1
Type of Cable
Where surface mounted wiring is specified, sheathed copper cables
shall be used for fixed installation. Cables for 3-phase circuit shall be
450/750V grade or above. Cables shall not be buried in concrete or
plaster.
Flexible cables or flexible cords shall be used for connection to
apparatus, appliances or equipment via an appropriate wiring
accessory. Flexible cables or flexible cords shall not be used in fixed
installation, except for final connection to a fixed equipment.
B2.4.2
Minimum Size of Live Conductors and CPC
Cables shall have CSA not less than 1.0 mm2 for 6A circuits,1.5
mm2 for 10A circuits and 2.5 mm2 for 16A circuits.
Flexible cables and flexible cords shall have CSA not less than
0.75 mm2.
The minimum CSA of a CPC shall be 1.5 mm2 if the CPC is
integrated in a cable carrying the associated live conductors. The
minimum CSA of a separate CPC shall be 2.5 mm2 if protection
against mechanical damage is provided (e.g. sheathed cable), and
4 mm2 if mechanical protection is not provided (e.g. non-sheathed
cable).
CPC shall be properly sized in accordance with Section B7.
B2.4.3
Identification of Cable Core
All conductors shall be colored as specified in Table C3.7 of this
Specification.
B2.4.4
Joint in Cable or Cord
Joints in cables or cords shall not be allowed unless approved by the
Architect. In such case, the joints shall be electrically and
mechanically sound, be protected against mechanical damage and
any vibration liable to occur.
Section B2
Page 14 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B2.4.5
Installation of Non-flexible Cable
(a)
General
All cables shall be run in a vertical or horizontal direction, and
shall be secured flat on the surface of walls, columns,
partitions or ceilings, etc. throughout the entire route, including
at bends. Fixing onto the ceiling shall be avoided unless the
cable is required to feed a point on the ceiling.
Where required, the cables may be run under floors, between
partitions or inside ceiling voids provided that they are
enclosed in ducts, conduits or trunking which comply fully
with the relevant Clauses in B2.1, B2.2 and B2.3.
When cables are routed along or cross steel joints, beams,
stanchions, etc. they shall be enclosed in steel or rigid PVC
trunking/conduit.
Cables shall not be run as a span between beams, trusses, etc.,
without rigid support throughout their length.
(b)
Protection to Cable Susceptible to Damage
Cables susceptible to damage shall be protected by means of
metal channels. Where protection is required for cables
running up a wall from the floor, the metal channel shall be
fixed to a minimum height of 1.5m above finished floor level.
(c)
Cable Passing through a Building Structure
Where cables pass through a building structure such as a wall
or column, the cables shall be drawn through PVC sleeves
inserted into the building structure. The size of the PVC
sleeves shall be such that the space factor shall not exceed 40%.
The gap between the structure and the sleeve and that between
the cables and the sleeve shall be completely filled with
cement or approved fire-resisting material.
Cables crossing an expansion joint shall be formed into a loop
such that any movement in the joint shall not stress the cables.
(d)
Cable Passing through Metal Work
Rubber grommets or insulated bushes shall be used to protect
the cables passing through metal part of a distribution board, a
luminaire, a metal box or any other metal work.
(e)
Segregation from Other Services
Cables shall be run at least 150 mm clear of all other nonelectrical services.
Section B2
Page 15 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(f)
"Looping-in" Wiring System
The cables shall be wired on the "looping-in" system. Cable
joints of any type in cable runs shall not be allowed.
(g)
Neutral Conductor at Switch Position
The neutral conductor of a twin core cable for a lighting final
circuit shall be looped through an insulated connector enclosed
in the moulded box or pattress accommodating the switch.
(h)
Termination of Cable
Cable terminated at a moulded box or pattress, a luminaire or
other fittings shall have the overall protective sheath carried
into the moulded box or pattress, luminaire or other fittings for
a minimum of 13 mm.
The CPC shall be terminated at the earth terminal provided in
the moulded box or pattress housing the wiring accessories.
Where it is not required to terminate the CPC in an accessory,
it shall not be cut back or removed. Instead, it shall be coiled
away from the live terminals or any bare conductors and shall
be insulated and sleeved with a green-and-yellow PVC sleeve.
(i)
Bending Radius of Cable
The internal bending radii of cables shall not be less than the
values given in Table B2.4.5-1.
Table B2.4.5-1 - Bending Radius of Non-Flexible Cable
Overall diameter of
cable (D)
Minimum internal radius
of cable bend
Non-armoured
Armoured
Not exceeding 10 mm
3D
6D
Exceeding 10 mm but
not exceeding 25 mm
4D
6D
Exceeding 25 mm
6D
6D
Section B2
Page 16 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(j)
Fixing of Cable
Cables having an overall diameter not exceeding 10 mm shall
be fixed by means of buckle clips. Cables of other diameters
shall be fixed by means of cables saddles.
Where a number of cables running together on the surface of
walls, columns, partitions or ceiling such that their aggregated
width exceeds 50 mm, a 13 mm thick hard wood batten of
adequate width shall be fixed along the cable route for
mounting the cables. The hard wood batten shall be finished
with one coat of approved priming on front and edges, and
waterproof compound treated at the back. Lengths of the batten
shall be properly fitted together and fixed in position by
counter-sunk brass screws in raw plugs.
(k)
Fixing of Clip
Buckle clips shall be fixed and secured by pins driven into
surface of wall, column, partition or ceiling. The head of every
pin shall be level with the surface of the clip so that no damage
to the sheath of the fixed cables can occur.
Every hole in the buckle clip shall require a fixing pin.
A separate buckle clip shall be required for every cable of size
above 2.5 mm2 twin with CPC, or of equivalent size. Not more
than two cables shall be allowed in one clip under all
circumstances.
Buckle clips shall be provided along the entire cable route at
regular intervals not exceeding 250 mm on horizontal runs and
400 mm on vertical runs.
A clip shall also be provided at a distance not exceeding
75 mm from a termination and from both sides of a bend.
(l)
Fixing of Cable Saddle
Cable saddles shall be securely fixed by fixing screws. Saddles
shall be provided along the entire cable route at regular
intervals. The spacing between adjacent saddles shall not
exceed the values given in Table 25(3) of the Code of Practice
for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.
A saddle shall also be provided at a distance not exceeding 150
mm from a termination and form both sides of a bend.
Section B2
Page 17 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(m) Correction Factor to Current Rating of Cable
Where more than two twin cables are fixed together, or when
the cables are installed at or in thermally insulated materials,
etc., suitable correction factors, as recommended by IEC
60364-1:2009 and other associated parts of the standard shall
be applied in determining the size of the cables to be installed.
The effective current carrying capacity of each cable shall be
calculated and ensured that it is within the intended operating
value of the circuit.
B2.4.6
Installation of Flexible Cable and Flexible Cord
(a)
Connection to Portable Equipment
Flexible cables or flexible cords for connections to portable
appliance or equipment shall have suitable length (preferably
1.5m to 2m) to avoid undue risk of mechanical damage.
(b)
Connection to Fixed Equipment
Exposed lengths of flexible cable or flexible cord used for final
connections to fixed equipment or appliance shall be as short
as possible.
(c)
Connection to Luminaire
Where a flexible cord supports or partly supports a pendant
luminaire, the maximum mass acting on the cord shall not
exceed 3 kg for flexible cord of 0.75 mm2, and shall not exceed
5 kg for flexible cord of larger conductor CSA.
B2.5
TOOL AND WORKMANSHIP
B2.5.1
Approved Tool
Only tools which are proven to be suitable shall be used.
Conduit bushes, couplers and similar items shall be tightened with
bush spanner or other suitable tools approved by the Architect.
Conduit bends shall be formed on an approved bending machine, and
the conduits shall not be flattened or with protective coating
damaged at the bends.
Suitable cutters shall be used for cutting PVC conduits or trunking.
Section B2
Page 18 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B2.5.2
Cutting in Metal Work for Conduit or in Trunking
Holes in metal work for the termination of conduits shall be drilled
on site with a twist drill of the correct size or by means of an
approved hole cutting device.
Holes in trunking shall be drilled, punched or cut by ring saw.
After cutting, burrs and sharp edges on the metal work or trunking
shall be removed to prevent abrasion of cables.
B2.5.3
Making Good of Damaged Coating
Where the protective coating on a steel conduit or trunking has been
damaged after installation, such surface shall be effectively restored
by at least two coats of anti-rust paint or other suitable coating to
prevent corrosion.
Section B2
Page 19 of 19
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B3
INSTALLATION OF POWER CABLES, CABLE TRAYS AND CABLE LADDERS
B3.1
GENERAL
B3.1.1
Scope
This Section covers the installation of power cable, which includes
those listed in Clause C3.2 of Section C3. It also covers the
installation of the associated cabling facilities, including cable trays
and cable ladders.
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, all cables shall have copper
conductors.
B3.1.2
Electromagnetic Interference
To minimize the electromagnetic interference generated from single
core cables, the following arrangements shall be adopted:
B3.2
(a)
All the single core cables of a circuit shall be of the same
conductor, same cross sectional areas, same type, same
construction and from the same manufacturer;
(b)
All the single core cables of a circuit shall be of equal length,
and shall follow the same route of installation;
(c)
The single core cables shall not be able to operate individually;
and
(d)
The layout of single core cables shall be arranged as shown in
Figure B3.1.2(d) at the end of this Section B3.
CABLE MOUNTED ON SURFACE
Unless otherwise specified, power cables shall be mounted on the surface of
wall or ceiling or other building structure. They shall be cleated in position by
approved type cable cleats or cable saddles. Cable cleats or cable saddles shall
be provided along the entire cable route according to the Table 25(3) of the
Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.
When specified, power cables may be supported on cable trays or cable ladders.
In such cases, the requirements of Clauses B3.9 and B3.10 shall apply.
For vertical cable runs exceeding 100m, tension releasing sections shall be
provided in accordance with the recommendation of the cable manufacturer,
failing which, a tension releasing section shall be provided for every 100m
vertical run.
Section B3
Page 1 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.3
CABLE LAID IN ENCLOSED TRENCH
When power cables are laid in an enclosed trench, the cables shall be installed in
accordance with the installation methods 18, 19 and 20 of Appendix 7 of the
Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations. Correction factors
shall be applied to the current ratings as indicated in Table A5(6) of the Code of
Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations, where applicable.
B3.4
CABLE ENCLOSED IN DUCT
B3.4.1
General
Cables laid in ducts shall be sheathed and armoured. Where mineral
insulated cables are specified, they shall be with PVC or XLPE outer
cover as specified.
Where the ducts are formed from wood, cables shall be held in
position by clips, saddles, or approved fixings.
The space factor in a cable duct shall not exceed 35%.
B3.4.2
Drawing-in of Cables
Prior to the drawing-in of the cables, the cylindrical ducts shall be
cleaned with a cylindrical brush of appropriate size.
Attachment to facilitate the pulling of cables through a duct shall be
made to the cores, insulation, inner and outer sheaths and not to the
armour in order to avoid twisting. Attachment to the armour will
only be permitted for small cables with the approval of the Architect.
When pulling power cables into small ducts, cable lubricant which
should not negatively interact with the cables they lubricate and
should not increase the flame spread or decrease the fire resistance
properties of the cable may be used for brushing onto the cable
surfaces where they enter the duct to reduce friction during pulling.
When pulling-in lead-sheathed insulated power cables, the following
precautions shall be taken:
(a)
Maximum stress in sheath - 10,000kPa (with stocking pulling
grip);
(b)
Maximum stress in conductors - 70,000kPa (with pulling eye
attached to conductors); and
(c)
Maximum pull shall be limited to 220,000 Newtons.
Section B3
Page 2 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.4.3
Internal Barrier
In every vertical duct, which is designed as totally enclosed without
ventilation, internal barriers shall be provided to prevent the air at
the top of the duct from attaining an excessively high temperature.
The distance between adjacent barriers shall be the distance between
floors. Where the floor to floor distance exceeds 5m, additional
barriers shall be provided at an interval not exceeding 5m.
B3.4.4
Fire Barrier
Where a cable duct passes through fire resistant structural elements,
such as floor or wall designated as fire barriers, the opening thus
formed shall be sealed with fire resistant materials having the same
degree of fire resistance as the structural element. In addition,
suitable internal fire barriers shall also be provided. An internal fire
barrier may also serve as an internal barrier described in Clause
B3.4.3 above.
B3.4.5
Draw-in Pit
Where cables in a duct are inaccessible for the greater part of their
length, adequate number of draw-in pits shall be provided at every
turning point and at regular intervals of not greater than 15m.
Sufficient room shall be available in the draw-in pits to enable the
cables to be manoeuvred without damage. In the case of armoured
cables, the draw-in pits shall be concrete or brick lined and shall be
fitted with a waterproof heavy cast iron lid. Draw-in pits shall not be
filled with sand or other materials.
Where a change in direction in a duct occurs, provision shall be
made to enable the cables in the duct to have adequate radii of
curvature in accordance with the relevant requirements in this
Section.
B3.4.6
Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit Categories
Separate ducts shall be provided for cables of different circuit
categories. However, cables of different categories may be allowed
to pass through the same draw-in pit provided that they are properly
and appropriately segregated in accordance with the requirements
specified in the current Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring)
Regulations.
B3.4.7
Sealing of Duct Entry to Building
After the cables have been installed, both the cables and the exposed
duct end shall be sealed to form a gas, water and fire barrier. Open
ends of spare ducts shall be closed with tapered hardwood plugs and
then sealed similarly.
Section B3
Page 3 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.5
CABLE BURIED DIRECT IN GROUND
B3.5.1
Protection of Cable
Power cables buried direct in ground shall be armoured. They shall
be buried at a depth of not less than 450 mm and shall be protected
by means of approved cable cover tiles. The bottom of the cable
trench shall be covered, to a depth not less than the diameter of the
largest cable, with a bedding layer of sand or fine soil. On top of the
cables, an after layer of sand or fine soil, to a depth of 100 mm, shall
again be provided. The sand or fine soil shall not be larger than 13
mm sieve. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that there shall be
no pebbles or small stones in the bedding layer or after layer of the
fine sand or soil. The cables shall then be covered, throughout the
entire route, by approved type cable cover tiles which shall be laid
on top of the after layer.
B3.5.2
Cable Marker
The route of all power cables buried direct in ground shall be clearly
indicated by cable markers laid on the ground. The cable markers
shall be engraved with the following wording:
"DANGER - ELECTRIC CABLES"
Cable markers shall be placed at regular intervals not exceeding 60m
apart and also at positions where the cable route changes direction.
At the position of each underground junction box, a cable marker
shall also be installed. Such markers shall be engraved, in addition to
the wordings mentioned above, the appropriate information, such as
"3 way Joint Box".
B3.6
BENDING RADIUS OF CABLE
The internal bending radius of every power cable shall not be less than the
appropriate values given in Table B2.4.5-1 of this specification.
B3.7
CABLE JOINT AND CABLE TERMINATION
B3.7.1
General
Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification and
approved by the Architect, cable joint for power cable shall not be
used for new electrical installation.
Joints and terminations of all power cables shall be made by skilled
cable jointers who shall be approved by the Architect before work
commences.
Section B3
Page 4 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
No reduction in the number of strands of a cable core shall be
allowed at a cable joint or termination.
Ferrules, compression connectors and bare portions of cable core
resulting from a jointing or terminating process shall be insulated
with an approved type of insulating tape, heat shrinkable tubing or
approved means of insulating material after completion of process.
Such insulating material shall have equal or better electrical and
mechanical properities as those of the original insulation removed,
and shall be adhered to the cores, securely and permanently. The
final thickness shall be in a smooth contour throughout the whole
length.
Every compression joint shall be of a type which has been the
subject of a test certificate as described in IEC 61238-1:2003 and
other associated parts of the standards. When a compression joint is
made, the appropriate tools specified by the manufacturer of the joint
connectors shall be used.
B3.7.2
Joint Box and Terminating Box
Boxes for joints in all power cables shall be of cast-iron, compound
filled and of adequate size. The boxes shall be fitted with suitable
armouring clamps and glands. The armouring of the cables shall be
terminated at the armouring clamps and the inner sheath shall pass
through the gland.
The box shall be warmed thoroughly before the compound is poured
to allow total adhesion between the compound and the box. The
compound shall then be allowed to cool and topped up before the
box is closed. No air locks shall be formed within the box.
Plastic shells fitted with suitably sized armour bond and filled with
approved type cold pouring encapsulating compound may be used as
alternative for jointing PVC insulated power cables. The complete
jointing kit, including plastic shell, compound, insulating tape, etc.
shall be from the same proprietary manufacturer who is specialised
in manufacturing products for this purpose. The jointing method and
procedure as laid down by manufacturer shall be followed strictly.
B3.7.3
Identification at Joint or Termination
At each joint or termination, a non-ferrous metallic label shall be
fixed to the cable giving the size and identification of the cable,
e.g. 50 mm2 4-core XLPE/SWA/PVCS copper cable to "Services
Block".
B3.7.4
Earth Continuity across Joint
A circuit protective conductor having adequate cross sectional area
shall be installed and connected to maintain the effectiveness of the
earth continuity across every cable joint.
Section B3
Page 5 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.7.5
Straight-through Joint for Copper Conductors
In such joint, the two conductors shall be butted together after the
strands have been soldered solid and shall be jointed by means of a
weak back ferrule, soldered to the cores. Soldering shall be carried
out by pouring tin-man's solder over the cores and weak back ferrule.
Under no circumstances shall direct flame from a blow lamp be used
for soldering.
As an alternative, conductors may be jointed by approved type
compression connectors using the appropriate tools and connectors.
B3.7.6
Tee-joint for Copper Conductor
When two cables with copper conductors are tee-jointed, the branch
conductor shall be connected to the main conductor by means of
claw type or weak back ferrules. The strands in both branch and
main conductors are to be sweated solid before sweating to the
ferrule. Soldering shall be carried out as detailed in Clause B3.7.5
above.
As an alternative, conductors may be jointed by approved type
compression connectors using the appropriate tools and connectors.
B3.7.7
Joint for Aluminium Cables
(a)
Soldered Joint
Prior to making a soldered joint, each conductor shall be
cleaned by means of steel wool or similar abrasive and then
tinned by pouring solder, specially made for use with
aluminium, over the cores. Both cores shall then be inserted in
a weak-backed aluminium ferrule and butted together. The
ferrule shall then be closed. Soldering shall be completed by
pouring the solder over the ferrule, after applying a layer of
flux recommended by the cable manufacturer for this purpose.
(b)
Compression Joint
Alternatively, the aluminium cores may be jointed by means of
an approved type compression joint. A compression joint shall
be made by inserting the aluminium cores to be jointed into the
opposite ends of an aluminium compression jointing tube,
which shall have the correct size for the conductors. The tube
shall then be compressed onto the cores by means of a
compressing tool. The tool used and the working procedure
adopted shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer.
Section B3
Page 6 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.7.8
Termination of PVC-insulated or XLPE-insulated Cable with Copper
Conductors
PVC-insulated or XLPE-insulated cables shall be terminated in a
gland fitted with an armour clamp. Provision shall be arranged to
enable a watertight seal to be made between the gland and inner
sheath. The gland body shall be provided with an internal conical
seating to receive the armour clamping cone and a clamping nut
which shall secure the armour clamping cone firmly to the armour
wires ensuring that the armour wires are tightly clamped between the
armour cone and conical armour seating. The spigot on the gland
body shall be threaded to suit standard conduit accessories. A shroud
of PVC or alternative approved materials shall be fitted to cover the
body of the gland and the exposed armour wires.
The copper cores shall be soldered to the cable lugs or cable sockets
by the "damp sweat" method as described in Clause B3.7.5 above.
As an alternative, conductors may be terminated by approved type
compression terminations using the appropriate tools and
terminations.
B3.7.9
Termination of PVC-insulated or XLPE-insulated Cable with
Aluminium Conductors
Terminating gland and armour clamp for power cables with
aluminium conductors shall be made from aluminium. Termination
of gland and clamping of armour shall be the same as for copper core
armoured cables as described in Clause B3.7.8 above. Cores shall be
terminated in a hot tinned brass or copper lug, which should be
shaped in a vice or by means of a hammer to suit the sector shape of
the conductor. The core shall be tinned, and then soldered into the
lug.
As an alternative to terminating cores in a tinned brass or copper lug,
a compression termination may be used. In such case, the cores shall
be inserted into the sleeve of an aluminium compression type cable
lug. The sleeve shall then be compressed onto the cores by means of
a compressing tool. The tool used and the working procedure
adopted shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer.
Prior to connection to the terminal, the cable lug shall be painted
with an anti-oxidizing paste. The anti-oxidizing paste shall be
suitable for preventing the creation of electrolytic action due to
contact between the aluminium lug and copper or brass terminal, for
an indefinite period. Alternatively, copper/aluminium bimetal cable
lugs may be accepted.
Section B3
Page 7 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.7.10
Use of Heat Shrinkable Tubing
All heat shrinkable tubing and accessories used for cable joints or
termincations shall be suitable for use with the type and construction
of cable to be jointed or terminated.
The heat shrinkable materials shall have electrical and mechanical
properties equal to or better than those of the cable insulation and
sheath, where applicable. After the application of the heat, the heat
shrinkable materials shall seal the interfaces between the heat
shrinkable materials or between the heat shrinkable materials and the
cable surfaces.
Whenever heat shrinkable tubing and accessories are used, the
complete kit shall be from the same proprietary manufacturer who is
specialised in manufacturing products for this purpose. The method
and procedures adopted shall be strictly as those laid down by the
manufacturer.
B3.7.11
Other Methods of Joint and Termination
Methods for jointing or terminating a power cable, other than those
specified in this Sub-section, will not be precluded provided:
B3.8
(a)
that the method used shall be proven to be capable of affording
the degree of safety, reliability, durability and efficiency not
less than that achieved by those specified in this Sub-section,
(b)
that the method used shall satisfy the requirements of IEC
60364-1:2009 and other associated parts of the standard and
other relevant Standards, and
(c)
that prior agreement of the Architect has been obtained.
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MINERAL INSULATED CABLES
B3.8.1
Cable Route
Mineral-insulated cables shall be run neatly on the surface of the
walls, columns, beams or ceilings in a vertical or horizontal direction,
and at least 150 mm clear of all plumbing and mechanical services.
The use of conduit and/or cable trunking to enclose such cables shall
be kept to the minimum.
Section B3
Page 8 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.8.2
Cable Support
Mineral-insulated cables shall be adequately supported by saddles
which shall be of the same manufacturer as the cables. Saddles shall
be provided throughout the entire cable route at regular intervals.
The spacing between adjacent saddles shall not exceed the values
given Table B3.8.2. Saddles shall also be provided at a distance not
exceeding 150 mm away from a termination and from both sides of a
bend.
Table B3.8.2 - Spacing of Saddles for Mineral-insulated Cable
Overall diameter
B3.8.3
Maximum spacing
of cable (d) mm
Horizontal run
Vertical run
d9
600 mm
800 mm
9 < d  15
900 mm
1200 mm
d > 15
1500 mm
2000 mm
Bending Radius
The minimum internal bending radius for a mineral-insulated cable
shall be 6 times the overall diameter of the cable.
B3.8.4
Cable Loop for Prevention of Vibration and Low Temperature Cold
Store
A loop shall be introduced in a cable immediately before its entry
into an equipment which is subject to vibration or occasional
movement. A clear space of at least 10 mm shall be maintained at
the point in the loop where the cable passes over itself.
Cable loop or similar means shall be provided for mineral-insulated
cables serving and running inside low temperature cold store.
B3.8.5
Cable Termination
Cable terminations shall generally comply with IEC 60702-2:2002.
The cable to be terminated shall be cut, screwed, sealed with cold
compound and fitted with brass terminating glands, nuts,
compression ring, gland body, sealing pot, disc and sleeves. The
conductors shall be carried unbroken through the sealing pot to the
terminal sockets or clamping screws.
Section B3
Page 9 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Sealing shall be properly carried out to protect the cable ends from
moisture and the insulation shall be thoroughly dry before the sealant
is applied. The sealing material and material used to insulate the
conductors when they emerge from the insulation shall have
adequate insulating and moisture-proofing properties which shall be
retained throughout the range of temperature they may be subjected
to in service.
Where a mineral insulated cable is terminated at an insulating casing
or enamelled/painted metal casing, the sealing pot shall be provided
with a copper circuit protective conductor, complying with the
requirements of IEC 60228:2004, and of an appropriate size in
accordance with IEC 60702-2:2002.
Where more than one cable terminates at a galvanized or zinc coated
enclosure, the gland plate shall be of brass or insulating materials.
PVC shrouded terminating glands shall be used when the cables are
fitted with PVC outer covering.
Only tools recommended by the manufacturer of the cables shall be
used and the manufacturer's recommended methods of cable
termination shall be adopted in all cases.
B3.8.6
Insulation Resistance
The insulation resistance between the cores and between each core
and the sheath shall be measured before the cable end is sealed. The
measured resistance shall be infinity on a 500V insulation resistance
tester. If the reading is less than infinity, the cable shall be heated by
means of a blow lamp or similar device so that moisture is driven out
to the open end of the cable. Heating shall be continued until the
measured insulation resistance reaches infinity, and sealing shall be
applied immediately. The insulation resistance shall be measured
again when the cable end has been sealed to ensure infinite
resistance.
For mineral-insulated cable with outer covering, adequate length of
the outer covering shall be cut out in the event of low insulation
resistance to allow dehydration by the application of blowlamp as
described above. After the process is completed, the section of outer
covering shall be re-installed as specified.
B3.8.7
Bonding of Cable Sheath to Metalwork
Where a mineral-insulated cable passes through or makes contact
with any metal, the metal and cable sheath shall be effectively
bonded together.
B3.8.8
Laying of Single-core Cables
Single-core mineral-insulated cables running together shall be laid
with the cable sheaths in contact. Mineral-insulated cables for 3Section B3
Page 10 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
phase circuits shall be laid in trefoil formation. Where cables used
are rated at 100A or above, gland plates of apparatus shall be of
brass.
B3.8.9
Protection from Mechanical Damage
Mineral-insulated (MI) cables shall be protected by steel sleeves
where they are exposed in vulnerable positions (e.g. passing through
floors, ceilings and walls).
Insert material between copper
oversheath of cable and steel sleeve shall be dielectrically isolated
form one another to prevent galvanic action. The openings or holes
through which the cables pass shall be made good with cement or
other non-combustible material.
B3.9
INSTALLATION OF PERFORATED CABLE TRAYS
B3.9.1
Connection between Adjacent Lengths of Tray
Connections between adjacent lengths of tray, tee or bend pieces,
shall be made by butt joints and fixed by mushroom-head steel
roofing bolts and nuts complying with BS 1494-1:1964.
The connection shall be mechanically strong so that no relative
movement between the two lengths can occur.
B3.9.2
Cutting of Tray
Cable trays shall be cut along a line of plain metal only, i.e. they
shall not be cut through the perforation. All cut edges of the
galvanized cable tray shall be prepared and treated with a cold
galvanized paint.
B3.9.3
Hole in Tray
Holes cut in a cable tray for the passage of cable shall be provided
with grommets. Alternatively, they shall be bushed or lined.
B3.9.4
Fixing of Tray
The cable tray except those of short run less than 300mm long where
at least 1 set of hanger or bracket is required, shall be supported by at
least 2 sets of hangers or brackets of adequate mechanical strength
securely fixed to the walls, ceiling or other structure. The hangers or
brackets shall be painted with anti-rust epoxy paint unless otherwise
specified. Fixings for cable trays shall be disposed at regular
intervals not exceeding 1.2m for straight run and at a distance not
exceeding 225 mm on both sides from a bend or intersection.
A minimum clear space of 20 mm shall be left behind all cable trays.
Section B3
Page 11 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.9.5
Fixing of Cable on Tray
Saddles for securing multi-core cables to the cable tray shall be made
from PVC covered metal strip, and shall be shaped to the form of the
cables to be secured. The saddles shall be fixed to the cable tray by
means of corrosion resistant cheese-headed screws and nuts. The
shanks of the screws shall not protrude beyond the nuts by more than
three threads. Where saddles exceed 150 mm in length, intermediate
fixings shall be provided such that the maximum spacing between
screws shall not exceed 150 mm.
Single-core cables shall be secured to the cable tray by clamps made
of wood or other non-ferrous materials specially designed to suit the
dimension of the cables. The clamp shall be secured to the cable tray
by means of bolts, washers and nuts.
Cable saddles or cable clamps shall be provided along the entire
cable route with their spacing in accordance with the manufacturer‟s
recommendation.
B3.10
INSTALLATION OF WIRE MESH CABLE TRAYS
B3.10.1
General
Unless otherwise specified, the installation of wire mesh cable tray
system shall be generally in accordance with the manufacturer‟s
installation instruction.
B3.10.2
Supports
The wire mesh cable tray except those of short run less than 300 mm
long where at least 1 set of hanger or bracket is required, shall be
supported by at least 2 sets of hangers or brackets. Supports shall be
properly spaced at distance not exceeding 1500 mm for straight run
to satisfactorily support the weight of the tray and cables.
B3.10.3
Bends
In general, large radius bend shall be used for the wire mesh cable
tray system. 90 ∘ bend shall not be installed unless otherwise
approved by the Architect.
B3.10.4
Earthing
The wire mesh cable tray shall be bonded and earthed throughout in
order to maintain the earth continuity for equipotential bonding.
Section B3
Page 12 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.10.5
Safety Working Load
The weight of cables per span of the wire mesh cable tray shall be
uniformly distributed and shall not exceed the maximum working
load specified by the manufacturer.
B3.11
INSTALLATION OF CABLE LADDER
B3.11.1
Dropout Plate for Cable Exit
Dropout plate of width same as the cable ladder shall be provided to
support the cables locally as they exit a ladder down between the
rungs.
B3.11.2
Flexible (Expansion) Couplers across Building Expansion Joint
The cable ladders shall be jointed by flexible (expansion) couplers
across the expansion joints of the building structure. The selection
and installation details of such flexible couplers shall be
recommended by the manufacturer and submitted to the Architect for
acceptance. Rigid fitting across the expansion joints shall not be
allowed.
B3.11.3
Ladder Covers
Unless otherwise specified, proprietary ladder covers (ventilated or
closed as specified) shall be fixed onto the cable ladder following the
installation details recommended by the manufacturer.
B3.11.4
End Connectors
The end of a run of cable ladder shall be fixed to the wall or slab
with proprietary end connectors. If it is far from the wall or slab, a
proprietary “stop end” connector shall be fixed to the end of a cable
ladder run in order to give a neater appearance. Installation details
shall follow the manufacturer‟s recommendation.
Section B3
Page 13 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B3.11.5
Earthing
The cable ladders shall be bonded and earthed throughout. Across all
joints of the cable ladder, copper connectors shall be fixed onto the
cable ladder in order to maintain the earth continuity. Factory-made
attachment points shall be provided near the joints for fixing the
earth continuity connectors. The length of the copper connectors
shall be slightly longer than the length between the two attachment
points to allow for movement at the joints due to expansion or some
other reasons.
B3.11.6
Minimum Inside Radius of All Bends
The inside radius of all bends of the cable ladder system shall not be
less than 300 mm.
B3.11.7
Supports
The cable ladder except those of short run less than 300mm long
where at least 1 set of hanger or bracket is required, shall be
supported by at least 2 sets of hangers or brackets. Supports shall be
properly spaced at distance not exceeding 1500 mm for straight run
to satisfactorily support the weight of the ladder and cables. They
shall also be provided at a distance not exceeding 300 mm on
every side from a bend or intersection.
B3.11.8
Safety Working Load
The weight of cables per span of the cable ladder shall be uniformly
distributed and shall not exceed the maximum working load
specified by the manufacturer.
Section B3
Page 14 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Figure B3.1.2(d) - Design and Installation of LV Single-core Cable to Minimize
Electromagnetic Interference
Section B3
Page 15 of 15
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B4
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL LIGHTING AND POWER
B4.1
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING SYSTEM AND LUMINAIRES
B4.1.1
Pendant
Tube pendant shall comprise a dome cover and a biscuit ring and a
piece of screwed steel conduit of suitable length to give the required
mounting height of the luminaire.
Plain pendant shall comprise a ceiling rose and a cord-grip
lampholder connected by a flexible cord having a suitable length to
give the required mounting height of the lamp shade.
B4.1.2
Luminaire Mounted on Pattress
When a luminaire is not provided with facility for a surface cable
entry, the luminaire shall be mounted on pattress. The cable shall
then enter the luminaire from the rear through a slot and a hole
formed in the pattress.
B4.1.3
Ceiling Rose
Ceiling rose shall not be used for the attachment of more than one
outgoing flexible cord or cable unless it is specially designed for
multiple pendants.
B4.1.4
Painting
Unless otherwise specified, lighting equipment and luminaires other
than those indicated to be self-finished such as stainless steel,
anodized aluminium, etc, shall have factory-finished.
Metal parts such as cover plates for adaptable boxes, blanking plate
for any boxes and surface conduit, etc. shall be painted white or a
suitable color to match the interior finish of a particular location.
B4.1.5
Special Requirements for Outdoor Luminaires
Outdoor luminaires shall be able to withstand the weather. Metal
work should be protected against corrosion, and parts which have to
be removed for access to the interior shall be provided with proper
gaskets to restrict the entrance of moisture and dirt. Mounting
brackets shall be heavily galvanized and stainless steel or galvanized
bolts and nuts shall be used.
The adjustment bolts and nuts of a luminaire which is mounted on
high level shall be captive to prevent accidental loss during servicing.
Safety chains shall be provided to hold the luminaire from falling. A
luminaire installed in a location within hand reach shall be of robust
Section B4
Page 1 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
construct, fitted with an impact-resistant transparent or diffusing
front panel, and shall have secret key fixings for the panel to the
body of the luminaire. Where necessary, wire guards shall be fitted
over the front panel to give extra protection.
Cables within the outdoor luminaire shall be such a type that it can
sustain the lamp operation at a high ambient temperature due to the
waterproof/airtight natures of the luminaire design. Heat resistant
cable is considered as an acceptable mean of internal cable for
outdoor luminaire. Any other cable type with appropriate type test
certification demonstrating satisfactory use for outdoor luminaire
shall be submitted for approval by the Architect. Heat resistant
sleeve shall be used for external cable entering the luninaire for
wiring connection as far as practicable. Where installation of heat
resistant sleeve is found impracticable due to environmental
constraints, alternative mean avoiding cause of adverse effect as a
result of high internal operating temperature shall be submitted for
Architect‟s approval.
Where the heat resistant sleeves is required, the sleeves within the
luminaire shall be extended to a distance of 150mm outside the
luminiare.
B4.2
INSTALLATION OF WIRING ACCESSORIES
Wiring accessories, including lighting switches, socket outlets and domestic
type switches for electrical appliances, shall be designed for flush mounting.
Where surface wiring installation is specified, wiring accessories shall be fixed
onto moulded boxes or pattresses. In conduit installation, they shall be fixed
onto moulded, galvanized steel or cast iron boxes.
Where a waterproof or flameproof configuration is required, wiring accessories
shall be mounted as the particular circumstances demand.
The front plate of a switch or socket outlet shall be labelled in accordance with
Clause B1.2.
B4.3
INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC SWITCHES
B4.3.1
General
Switch for domestic and similar purposes shall be mounted at a
height of 1350 mm above finished floor level unless otherwise
specified.
B4.3.2
Lighting Switch
When lighting switches are mounted adjacent to one another, they
shall be grouped in a single enclosure (single or multi-gang box) and
shall share a common switch plate, subject to a maximum of three
Section B4
Page 2 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
lighting switches per single-gang plate.
Lighting switches installed adjacent to a door shall be located on the
handle side of the door, and shall be as near to the door as
practicable.
B4.3.3
Time Switch
Time switch shall be housed in a factory or purpose made metal
enclosure provided with a removal cover of durable clear plastic
material.
B4.3.4
Application in Bathroom
No switch shall be installed inside a toilet or a room containing a
fixed bath or shower. All control switches shall be located
immediately outside the room.
This restriction does not apply to insulating cord switches, remotely
operated switches using mechanical actuators with linkage
incorporating insulating components, switched supplied from
Separated Extra Low Voltage (SELV) and shaver units.
B4.4
INSTALLATION OF SOCKET OUTLETS
B4.4.1
General
Socket outlet intended for supplying a fixed or stationary appliance
shall be located as near as possible to the appliance.
Socket outlet shall be mounted at a height of 1350 mm above
finished floor level in kitchens, sculleries, ironing rooms and the like.
In other locations, they shall be mounted at 300 mm from finished
floor level, 75 mm from surface top measured from bottom of socket
outlet or as specified.
B4.4.2
Shaver Supply Unit
The complete unit shall be enclosed in a galvanized metal box for
flush mounting, or a galvanized cast iron or plastic surface box for
surface mounting.
B4.4.3
Socket Outlet at Hazardous Area
The installation of socket outlets in hazardous areas should be
avoided as far as possible. Where it is absolutely essential to install a
socket outlet in such area, the socket outlet shall comply with IEC
60079-0:2007 and other associated parts of the standard and shall be
controlled by a sparkless switch. The socket outlet shall be
interlocked with the plug so that removal or insertion shall not be
possible unless the controlling switch is in the OFF position. The
plug shall have shrouded pins and the design of the pin contacts shall
Section B4
Page 3 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
be such as to guard against development of hot spots or sparking.
Requirements for wiring installation in hazardous areas are specified
in Clause B8.3.
B4.4.4
Socket Outlet of Surface Conduit System
In plant room, switch room or similar area where surface conduits
are installed, socket outlets shall be metalclad or bronze front plate.
B4.4.5
Socket Outlet for Different Voltage System
Socket outlet and plug for one voltage system shall not be
interchangeable with those for use at other voltage and/or frequency
systems in the same installation.
B4.4.6
Application in Bathroom
Shaver supply units complying with IEC 61558-2-5:1997 can be
installed inside a room containing a fixed bath or shower and inside
a toilet. Socket outlets inside such a room, if so required under the
contract, shall be installed in accordance with requirements of Code
26A(3)(j) of Code of Practice for Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.
B4.5
INSTALLATION OF MEASURING INSTRUMENT
B4.5.1
Mounting of Current Transformers Associated with Watt-hour Meter
Current transformers, if required to be associated with a watt-hour
meter, may be mounted inside the meter chamber, or in a separate
current transformer chamber, as dictated by the circumstances of
each particular job. When current transformers are mounted in the
meter chamber, separate partitioned compartments with separate
front access covers for the current transformers and meters
respectively shall be provided. Suitable engraved labels shall be
fixed on the covers to identify the installed equipment therein.
B4.5.2
Identification of Instrument
Each measuring instrument shall be identified by means of a label
fitted under the associated instrument. This label shall denote the
function of the circuit connected to the meter.
B4.5.3
Mounting Position of Selector Switch
Selector switch for ammeter or voltmeter shall be mounted
immediately below the meter with which it is associated.
Section B4
Page 4 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B5
INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC APPLIANCES
B5.1
GENERAL
B5.1.1
Connection to Appliances
Domestic appliances shall each be connected to the electrical supply
through a suitable wiring accessory and a suitable length (preferably
1.5 m to 2 m) of flexible cable or PVC insulated cables enclosed in a
flexible conduit.
For portable appliance, plug and socket shall be used. For fixed
appliances, the wiring accessories shall be opened or removed only
by means of a tool.
Wiring accessories shall meet the requirements of Section C4 and
shall be installed as near as practicable to the appliances to be
connected. Fuse-links shall comply with IEC 60127-1:2006 and the
other associated Parts of the Standard and shall have current ratings
suitable for the appliances to be controlled.
Flexible cables for final connection to domestic appliances shall be
white in colour unless otherwise specified, and shall be circular,
sheathed, twin core with circuit protective conductor (CPC) to
IEC 60189-1:2007 and the associated parts of the standard; and
IEC 60227-1:2007 and the associated parts of the standard (PVCinsulated) or to IEC 60245-1:2008 and the associated parts of the
standard (rubber-insulated), all with copper conductors. Twin core
cables without earth wire are only allowed for double insulated
appliances classified as Class II appliances under IEC 61140. The
cores of the flexible cables shall have identification colours in
accordance with Section Table C3.7 in Section C3.
B5.1.2
Not Used
B5.1.3
Engraving for Identification
The front plate of every switched socket outlet, fused connection unit
or control switch feeding a fixed domestic appliance shall be
engraved in accordance with Sub-section B1.2 to indicate correctly
its function.
B5.1.4
Earthing of Appliance
All domestic appliances except Class II equipment to IEC 61140
shall be effectively earthed to the main earth via a circuit protective
conductor. Where the cables for final connection to a fixed appliance
is enclosed in a flexible conduit, effective earthing shall be achieved
by means of a separate circuit protective conductor drawn into the
flexible conduit.
Section B5
Page 1 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B5.1.5
Appliances Requiring Exclusive Circuit
The following types of domestic appliances shall be supplied from
an exclusive final circuit:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
B5.2
Household electric cooker
Water heater other than oversink water heater
Water boiler
Room cooler
Appliance having a normal power rating of 3 kW or above
CEILING FAN AND CEILING-MOUNTED ROTARY FAN
B5.2.1
Method of Supply
Supply to a ceiling fan or a ceiling mounted rotary fan shall be by
means of a 2 A fused connection unit with earthing facilities and
controlled by a 5-20 A D.P. switch with pilot light for maintenance
purpose.
The fuse connection unit shall be suitable for mounting either on a
conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2003 and the associated parts of the
standard for concealed conduit installation or on a moulded box or
plastic pattress to IEC 60670-1:2003 and the associated parts of the
standard for surface conduit and surface wiring installation.
B5.2.2
Fixing of Fan
Every ceiling fan shall be suspended from a substantial hook fixed
securely to the ceiling structure.
Rotary fans shall be fixed direct to the ceiling structure.
B5.2.3
Fan Regulator
Fan regulators shall each be controlled by a 5-20 A D.P. switch with
pilot light and shall be fixed on the surface of walls.
In a concealed conduit installation, the fan regulator shall be
mounted on a back-plate over a recessed 35 mm deep box to IEC
60670-1:2003 where the conduit shall be terminated. The backplate shall be made of galvanized sheet steel of 3 mm thick with
suitable grommeted hole for cable entry.
In a surface conduit installation, the fan regulator shall be mounted
on a special fabricated box of 1.5 mm thick galvanized sheet steel
and having the same size as the regulator or proprietary fabricated
box by the fan manufacturer. The conduit shall be terminated at this
specially made surface mounted box which the cables shall enter the
fan regulator.
Section B5
Page 2 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
In a surface wiring installation, the fan regulator shall be mounted on
a wooden block. Groove shall be formed at the back surface of the
wooden block to suit the cables, and holes shall be drilled to enable
the cables to enter the fan regulator from the rear.
B5.3
WALL-MOUNTED FAN
Supply to a wall mounted fan shall be by means of a 2A fused
connection unit and shall be controlled by a 5-20 A D.P. switch with
pilot light.
Wall mounted fans shall each be fixed by means of wall mounting
bracket supplied with the fan or sit on a mounting bracket or battern
made of teak wood or other material approved by the Architect.
B5.4
EXHAUST FAN
B5.4.1
Fixing of Fan
Exhaust fans shall each be installed on the structural opening by
means of a steel mounting plate. Where an exhaust fan is intended to
draw exhausted air through a fume cupboard, the fan shall be ducted
to the fume cupboard by means of a pipe made of low smoke
emission and halogen free PVC of suitable size and length.
B5.4.2
Method of Supply
Supply to a domestic type/fume cupboard exhaust fan shall be by
means of a 2 A fused connection unit similar to that for a ceiling fan,
and shall be controlled by a 5-20 A D.P. switch with pilot light.
Supply to an industrial type exhaust fan shall be by means of a fused
connection unit with suitably sized fuse and shall be controlled by a
20 A D.P. switch with pilot light.
B5.5
ELECTRIC FIRE OR HEATER
B5.5.1
Wall-mounted Radiator
Supply to wall-mounted radiators shall be obtained through a fused
connection unit with suitably sized fuse and shall be controlled by a
20 A D.P. switch with pilot light.
B5.5.2
Panel Fire
Panel fires rated at 3 kW or less shall each be supplied and
controlled by a 15 A 3-pin switched socket outlet with pilot light.
The switched socket outlet shall be installed at a height of 300 mm
above finished floor level unless otherwise specified.
Section B5
Page 3 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B5.5.3
Tubular Heater
Tubular heaters shall be supplied and controlled by a 13 A 3-pin
switched socket outlet with pilot light. A wire guard complete with
end plates made of hot-dip galvanized steel shall be provided to
prevent falling fabric from contact with the heater tube as to create a
fire risk.
B5.6
WATER HEATER AND WATER BOILER
B5.6.1
Oversink Water Heater
Supply to an oversink water heater shall be by means of a 13A fused
connection unit controlled by a 20A D.P. switch with pilot light at a
distance not less than 2 m from any water taps. The front plate of the
fused connection unit shall have an outlet hole and the necessary
cord-grip for the flexible cable.
In a surface wiring installation, the fused connection unit and the
20 A D.P. switch shall each be mounted on a moulded box or plastic
pattress to IEC 60670-1:2003 and the associated parts of the standard.
B5.6.2
Other Type of Water Heater
Supply to a domestic thermal storage or instantaneous water heater
shall be connected to an individual final circuit. Single phase water
heater shall be controlled by a double-pole switch of adequate rating
and with pilot light. Three phase water heater shall either be
controlled by a 4-pole switch of adequate rating and with pilot light
or by a 20A double-pole switch with pilot light through a 4-pole
contactor of adequate rating.
In a concealed or surface conduit installation, the PVC insulated
cables shall be enclosed in a conduit from the control switch to a
standard circular conduit box fitted with a dome cover and then
through a flexible conduit from the dome cover to the water heater.
The dome cover and the conduit shall be fixed as near to the water
heater as practicable.
In a surface wiring installation, the control switch shall be mounted
on a moulded box or plastic pattress. Final connection to the water
heater shall be taken from the control switch via a flexible cable,
twin with CPC. The control switch shall be fixed as near to the water
heater as practicable.
B5.6.3
Water Boiler
The installation of a water boiler shall be similar to that for water
heater. The control switch shall be a double-pole switch of 30A
rating and with pilot light.
Section B5
Page 4 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B5.7
TEA URN
Tea urns having a rating of 3 kW or less shall be supplied and controlled by a
15 A 3-pin switched socket outlet with pilot light, while those of ratings higher
than 3kW is to be supplied and controlled by fused connection unit completed
with separate DP control switch with pilot light. The switched socket outlet shall
be fixed at a height of 1350 mm above finished floor level unless otherwise
specified.
B5.8
HOUSEHOLD ELECTRIC COOKER
Supply to a household electric cooker shall be controlled by a cooker control
unit of rating not less than 45 A unless otherwise specified. The control unit
shall be installed at a height of 1350 mm above finished floor level.
In a concealed or surface conduit installation, the PVC insulated cables from the
control unit shall be enclosed in a conduit and terminated at an insulated
terminal block inside a 47 mm deep conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2003 and the
associated parts of the standard. The PVC insulated cables shall then be changed
into PVC insulated and sheathed cable twin core with CPC before connecting to
the cooker. The insulated terminal block shall be mounted on the wall at 300
mm above finished floor level. The PVC insulated and sheathed cable twin core
with CPC shall be 1.5 m to 2 m long to allow the cooker to be moved for
cleaning purpose.
In a surface wiring installation, PVC insulated and sheathed cable twin with
CPC shall be used throughout.
B5.9
HAND/FACE DRYER
The supply to an electric hand/face dryer shall be by means of a fused
connection unit complete with an integrated 20A D.P. switch and pilot light. The
front plate of the fused connection unit shall have an outlet hole and the
necessary cord-grip for the flexible cable. Hand/face dryer shall be installed at
such a height so as to allow the nozzle to be 1150mm above finished floor level
in male toilet and 1100mm in female toilet.
B5.10
ROOM COOLER
B5.10.1
Method of Supply
Supply to a room cooler shall be by means of a connection unit and a
control switch, both of which shall have a current capacity of not less
than the rated value of the room cooler. The control switch shall be
D.P. with pilot light, installed at a height of 1350 mm above the
finished floor level.
Section B5
Page 5 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B5.10.2
Position of Connection Unit
The connection unit shall be installed adjacent to the room cooler
and shall be on the same side of the room cooler as where the
flexible cable enters the room cooler. In case it is not possible to
ascertain where the flexible cable enters the room cooler, the
connection unit shall be installed on the left side of the room cooler,
as viewed from the front.
B5.11
REFRIGERATOR
Supply to a refrigerator shall be by means of a 13A switched socket with pilot
light. For general purpose, the socket shall be mounted at a height of 1350 mm
above finished floor level.
Section B5
Page 6 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B6
INSTALLATION OF BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM
B6.1
GENERAL
Busbar trunking including accessories shall be tailor-made to suit the actual site
measurements, and working drawings shall be submitted for perusal by the
Architect.
Adequate clear space shall be allowed for inspection and
maintenance of the installation.
B6.2
B6.3
SITE STORAGE AND PROTECTION
B6.2.1
Busbar trunking shall be stored in a dry clean location with adequate
air circulation to prevent condensation. The storage area shall be
free from dirt, fumes, water and physical damage.
B6.2.2
Work on the busbar trunking installation shall not commence unless
the builder‟s work on the accommodation for the busbar trunking has
been completed and is in a dry and clean condition with lockable
door and kerb.
B6.2.3
Busbar trunking shall be handled with great care to avoid damage to
internal components, enclosure and finish. Busbar shall not be
dragged across floor and shall not be subjected to torsion, denting,
impact or rough handling.
BUSBAR IDENTIFICATION
Each bar shall be painted to indicate the phase to which it is connected, at each
accessible position to the busbars and in each tee-off unit.
B6.4
JOINT IN BUSBAR
Joints shall be properly clean and free from contamination before joint. Joints in
busbars shall not cause any loss in mechanical strength, electrical continuity,
current carrying capacity and short circuit capacity of the busbars compared
with an unjoined busbar.
Joints shall be properly aligned before the final tightening of all joint bolts.
Bolts shall not be over or loosely tightened. Bolt tightening shall be done either
by means of a torque wrench to a strength figure as specified by the
manufacturer or in accordance with the manufacturer‟s special procedure.
Section B6
Page 1 of 5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B6.5
EXPANSION UNIT
Expansion units shall be provided to take up the axial expansions or contractions
of the busbar trunking system under normal service conditions. In particular,
expansion units shall be provided where both ends of the busbar trunking system
are fixed and normal expansion or contraction is restricted, and where the busbar
trunking system is installed across a building expansion joint. For every 30m of
busbar trunking, an expansion unit shall also be provided or else the
manufacturer‟s recommendation shall be followed.
B6.6
FEEDER UNIT
A feeder unit shall be provided for each busbar trunking system for connection
of incoming supply.
B6.7
TAP-OFF UNIT CONNECTION
Interconnecting conductors if provided between the busbars and tap-off units
shall have a current rating not less than that of the tap-off units. The
temperature rise of interconnecting conductors under normal service conditions
shall not exceed that of the busbars specified in Clause C6.4.
B6.8
FIRE BARRIER
Where busbar trunking passes through compartmentation wall or slab, a proper
fire barrier made of non-hygroscopic material having a fire-resistance period of
not less than that of the corresponding compartmentation wall or slab shall be
provided.
B6.9
BUSBAR TRUNKING ACCESSORIES
Bends, tees and intersection units shall be installed in such a way that no loss in
mechanical strength, electrical continuity, rated current and rated short-circuit
capacity shall be incurred due to insertion of bends, tees or intersection units.
B6.10
SUPPORT OF BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM
Busbar trunking system shall be securely fixed to the building structure
according to manufacturer‟s recommendations. For horizontal run of busbar
trunking system the hanger support shall be suitable for heavy mechanical load
as stated in IEC 60439-2:2005. All fixing bolts, nuts and screws of
hangers/brackets shall be heavily electroplated or galvanized.
The supports shall be spaced at regular intervals such that the clearance and
creepage distances be maintained under normal service and short-circuit
conditions.
Section B6
Page 2 of 5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B6.11
EARTHING
A 25mm x 3 mm copper tape shall be fixed to and run along the full length of
the busbar trunking system to ensure earth continuity. The copper tape shall be
supported at intervals not more than 400 mm horizontally and not more than 500
mm vertically. It shall be connected to the main earthing terminal on each floor.
A warning notice bearing the words “Safety Electrical Connection - Do not
Remove” with Chinese translation shall be displayed in a conspicuous position
for every 10m horizontal run and/or one label per floor for rising main.
Provision of copper tape may be exempted if the enclosure of busbar trunking
can satisfy the second paragraph of Clause B7.7.4 that follows.
B6.12
REQUIREMENTS
SYSTEM
B6.12.1
FOR
AIR-INSULATED
BUSBAR
TRUNKING
Application
Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification, airinsulated busbar trunking system shall not be used. However, if such
a system is used, then the following requirements shall be followed.
B6.12.2
B6.12.3
Busbar Supports
(a)
For vertical busbar trunking system, suspension units shall be
provided at the top of each run. A built-in thrust block and an
intermediate suspension unit shall be provided at every 30m
interval. Insulated thrust blocks or other thrust-absorbing
device shall be provided at the bottom of each run and after
each flexible joint.
(b)
The busbar trunking system shall be terminated in a stop-end
unit.
Tap-off
Branch circuits shall be connected to the busbars by tap-off units or
cable clamping devices. Drilling of busbars shall be permitted only
if the mechanical strength will not be impaired and the current
density of the busbars will not exceed the permissible level after
drilling.
B6.12.4
Fire Barrier
At the position of the fire barrier, the busbars shall be insulated with
self-extinguishing heat shrinkable insulating sleeves of suitable
operating temperature extended to approximately 150 mm on each
side of the fire barrier.
Section B6
Page 3 of 5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B6.12.5
Mounting Brackets
Mounting brackets shall be provided for supporting the busbar
trunking from the building structure. The brackets shall have the
same finish as the enclosure and shall allow not less than 20 mm
adjustment clearance from the wall.
B6.13
REQUIREMENT
SYSTEM
B6.13.1
FOR
ALL
INSULATED
BUSBAR
TRUNKING
Application
All insulated busbar trunking system shall be generally used for a
combination of extensive vertical and horizontal run of busbar mains
or in an environment where weather-proofing or water-proofing of
the system is required.
B6.13.2
Busbar Jointing
Two sections of the busbar trunking shall be joined by connecting
the joint-ends of the busbars in an interleaved manner. The contact
interconnection pressure shall be maintained by insulated bolts
inserted through the joint. Bolts shall be tightened up either by
means of a torque wrench to a strength figure as recommended by
the manufacturer, or in accordance with the manufacturer‟s provision
of special torque-indicating tightening device.
The joint shall be covered up by metal cover plates of same type of
material and finish as the busbar casing so that the degree of
protection against ingress of dust will not be less than that of an
unjoined busbar trunking system.
B6.13.3
Expansion Unit
Expansion units shall be so constructed that any change in length on
both the conductors and the casing so caused by thermal expansion
and contraction in all direction can be absorbed easily and cause no
distortion of the busbar trunking whatsoever.
B6.13.4
Tap-off Unit
Bolt-on tap-off unit shall be properly fixed on the busbars in
accordance with the manufacturer‟s design. Drilling of the busbars
for connection of cables will not be permitted.
Section B6
Page 4 of 5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B6.13.5
Supporting Hangers and Fixing Brackets
Supports for the busbar trunking system shall be by means of
hangers and brackets supplied by the same manufacturer as the
busbar trunking system. Unless otherwise specified, the hangers
shall be spaced at intervals of not more than 2m for horizontal
mounting and 3m for vertical mounting, or in accordance with the
manufacturer‟s recommendation. In addition, for vertical mounting,
the busbar trunking system shall be supported on every floor.
Hangers and brackets shall be properly aligned with building
structure and adjusted to ensure the alignment and leveling of the
busbar trunking as required in the manufacturer‟s standard and
recommendation. Additional guide brackets in the intermediate
position between two supports shall be provided, if necessary, to
balance the offset loading of the tap-off unit.
Section B6
Page 5 of 5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B7
INSTALLATION OF EARTHING SYSTEM
B7.1
GENERAL
All metalworks associated with an electrical installation but not forming part of
a live conductor, including exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive
parts, shall be solidly and effectively bonded and earthed in accordance with
IEC 60364-1:2009 and the associated parts of the standard and the Code of
Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.
B7.2
MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL
A solid copper main earthing terminal of ample size shall be provided for every
electrical installation at a position near the main incoming switch or switchboard
for the connection of:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
the circuit protective conductors;
the main equipotential bonding conductors;
the functional earthing conductors;
the earthing conductors; and
the lightning protective system bonding conductors.
to create the equipotential zone. The main earthing terminal shall be connected
to earth via an earthing conductor to an earth electrode or a group of electrodes.
Where an installation distributes to a number of buildings or units, a separate
main earthing terminal shall be provided for each individual building or unit at
the point of intake thereby creating a separate equipotential zone in each
building or unit.
B7.3
EARTH ELECTRODE
B7.3.1
Types of Earth Electrode
The following types of earth electrode are permitted:
(a)
(b)
(c)
rod electrode;
tape electrode; or
plate electrode.
Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification or
Drawings, rod electrode shall be installed.
Metalwork of public gas or water services shall not be used as the
sole protective earth electrode.
Section B7
Page 1 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B7.3.2
Rod Electrode
Rod electrode shall be of copper with overall diameter not less than
12.5 mm or of stainless steel and galvanised steel of not less than
16mm. A hardened steel point may be fitted to the penetrating end
of the rod electrode. Additional lengths of rod, whenever required,
should each be connected together by coupling .
Rod electrode shall be driven into the ground within an earth pit.
Only approved tools e.g. electric hammer or pneumatic hammer shall
be used for this installation.
In case the earthing resistance achieved by one rod is not sufficiently
low for the purpose required, additional lengths or additional rods
shall be installed. For the latter application, additional rods shall be
driven into the ground outside the resistance area of the previously
installed rod(s). Under normal circumstances, a mutual separation of
3.5m is considered adequate.
B7.3.3
Tape Electrode
Tape electrode shall be untinned copper strip of not less than 25
mm x 3 mm in cross section. Tape electrode shall be used only if
specified by the Architect.
In case where several tapes are required for connection in parallel to
achieve a low earthing resistance, they may be installed in parallel
lines or they may radiate from a point.
B7.3.4
Plate Electrode
Plate electrode shall be of copper not less than 3 mm in thickness,
having dimensions as indicated on the Drawings or Particular
Specification subject to a maximum of 1200 mm x 1200 mm.
In case the earthing resistance achieved by one plate is not
sufficiently low for the purpose required, additional plates shall be
installed. The plates shall be installed outside the resistances area of
the previously installed plate(s).
B7.3.5
Electrode in Deep Bored Hole
As an alternative, electrode may be buried in a deep bored hole of 20
to 30m deep and of about 100 mm diameter provided by the building
contractor where the soil conditions are unfavourable. In such case,
a 12.5 mm diameter copper inner core rod electrode or 16mm
galvanised or stainless steel inner core rod electrode (connected
together to form the required length) or annealed copper tape of 25
mm x 6 mm shall be inserted into the full length of the deep bored
hole. The clearance between the electrode and the surrounding of
the deep bore hole shall be filled completely by a mixture of 60%
bentonite and 40% of gypsum to 125% (by volume) mixed to give a
thick slurry, which shall be grouted into the deep bored hole and then
Section B7
Page 2 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
allowed to solidify. The grouting shall not trap any air in the deep
bored hole.
B7.3.6
Connection between Electrodes
All electrodes shall be inter-connected together to form a complete
earthing system by means of 25 mm x 3 mm annealed copper tapes
or stranded bare copper conductors of 70 mm2. The copper tapes or
conductors shall be enclosed in PVC sleeve or pipe laid at a
minimum depth of 600 mm below the ground surface. The
connecting copper tapes or conductors shall be run in direct lines
between the rods.
Connections shall be brazed to achieve good and reliable joints to
withstand the anticipated fault current.
B7.4
EARTHING CONDUCTOR
B7.4.1
Conductor Material
Earthing conductor shall be copper tapes 25 mm x 3 mm in cross
section. For outdoor applications, copper tapes shall be tin plated.
Aluminium conductors shall not be used as earthing conductors.
B7.4.2
Connection to Electrodes
Earthing conductor shall be connected to the earth electrode(s) by
means of approved copper connector-clamps such that the
connection can only be disconnected by means of a tool. The
connection shall be contained within a concrete lined earth pit with a
substantial removable cover to ensure accessibility and
maintainability.
B7.5
MAIN EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING CONDUCTOR
B7.5.1
Conductor Material
Unless otherwise specified, main equipotential bonding conductor
shall be of copper.
Section B7
Page 3 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B7.5.2
Bonding Position
Main equipotential bonding conductor shall connect the extraneous
conductive parts of other services within the premises to the main
earthing terminal of the installation. Such extraneous conductive
parts shall include main water and gas pipes, other service pipes and
risers and exposed metallic parts of the building structure liable to
transmit a potential. Connection shall be made as near as practicable
to the point of entry of the non-electrical services into the premises
concerned, and shall be on the installation side of the possible breaks
in the system, such as gas meter or water meter. Where practicable,
the connection shall be made within 600 mm from the meter outlet
union or at the point of entry to the building if the meter is outside
the building.
B7.5.3
Bonding Method
Main equipotential bonding conductor shall be securely and reliably
connected to extraneous conductive parts of the non-electrical
services by means of a copper connector-clamp of an approved type
suitable for the particular application. All contact surfaces shall be
cleaned and free from non-conducting materials, such as grease or
paint, before the connector-clamp is installed.
B7.6
SUPPLEMENTARY BONDING CONDUCTOR
B7.6.1
Conductor Material
Unless otherwise specified, supplementary bonding conductor shall
be of copper.
B7.6.2
Application in Bathroom
In a room containing a fixed bath or shower, all simultaneously
accessible conductive parts (either exposed or extraneous) shall be
locally connected by means of supplementary bonding conductors.
B7.6.3
Application in Other Areas
Supplementary bonding of extraneous conductive parts shall be
required whenever such conductive parts are likely to be accessible
simultaneously with other extraneous conductive parts or exposed
conductive parts, and are not electrically connected to the main
equipotential bonding by means of permanent and reliable metal-tometal joints of negligible impedance.
Section B7
Page 4 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B7.6.4
Bonding Method
Supplementary bonding conductor shall be solidly and effectively
connected to the extraneous or exposed conductive parts by means of
a copper connector-clamp of an approved type suitable for the
application. All contact surfaces shall be cleaned and free from nonconducting materials, such as grease or paint, before the connectorclamp is installed.
For surface steel conduit installation, the supplementary bonding
conductor shall be terminated at the nearest steel conduit or conduit
box forming an integral part of the conduit installation.
For concealed steel conduit installation the supplementary bonding
conductor shall be terminated at, via a telephone cord outlet plate, a
copper earth terminal fitted inside a metal conduit box to IEC 606701:2003 and the associated parts of the standard forming an integral
part of the conduit installation. The metal conduit box shall be
located as near as possible to the bonding position and the exposed
part of the supplementary bonding conductor shall be made as short
as possible.
B7.7
CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR (CPC)
B7.7.1
General
Circuit protective conductor (CPC) may be formed by a separate
cable, the metallic sheath or armour of a cable, part of the same cable
as the associated live conductor, rigid steel conduits, trunking or
ducting, or the metal enclosure of the wiring system. Flexible
conduits and the exposed conductive parts of equipment shall not
form part of the circuit protective conductor.
B7.7.2
CPC for Socket Outlet
For every socket outlet, a separate circuit protective conductor shall
be provided connecting the earth terminal of the socket outlet and
that inside the enclosure accommodating the socket outlet.
B7.7.3
CPC for Flexible Conduit
For every length of flexible conduit, a separate circuit protective
conductor shall be provided inside the conduit to ensure the earth
continuity of the installation between the two ends of the flexible
conduit.
B7.7.4
CPC for Busbar Trunking
A copper tape, 25 mm x 3 mm in cross section shall be provided for
the entire length of a busbar trunking. The copper tape shall be
bonded to the busbar trunking at intervals not exceeding 3m and at
the position of each tape-off point.
Section B7
Page 5 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Subject to the prior agreement of the Architect, the provision of
copper tapes for a busbar trunking may be exempted provided that
the enclosure of the busbar trunking can be proven to satisfy the full
requirements of the circuit protective conductor in accordance with
relevant regulations of IEC 60364-1:2009 and the associated parts of
the standard.
B7.7.5
CPC for Ring Final Circuit
For wiring system using PVC insulated, PVC sheathed cables, the
circuit protective conductor of every ring final circuit shall also be
run in the form of a ring having both ends connected to the earth
terminal at the origin of the circuit.
B7.8
JOINTS IN PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
Provision shall be made in an accessible position for disconnecting a protective
conductor from the main earthing terminal or the earth electrode to permit
testing and measurements of earthing resistance. Such joints shall only be
disconnected by means of a tool, shall be mechanically strong and shall be
tinned to maintain the electrical continuity reliably.
No switching device shall be inserted in a protective conductor except for the
following:
B7.9
(a)
Where an installation is supplied from more than one source of energy,
one of which requires a means of earthing independent of the means of
earthing of other sources and it is necessary to ensure that not more than
one means of earthing is applied at any time, a switch may be inserted in
the connection between the neutral point and the means of earthing,
provided that the switch is a linked switch arranged to disconnect and
connect the earthing conductor for the appropriate source, at substantially
the same time as the related live conductors.
(b)
Multipole linked switching or plug-in devices in which the protective
conductor circuit will not be interrupted before the live conductors are
disconnected and will be re-established not later than when the live
conductors are re-connected.
IDENTIFICATION AND LABELLING
B7.9.1
Color Identification
All cables used as protective conductors, including earthing
conductors, main equipotential bonding conductors, supplementary
bonding conductors and circuit protective conductors shall be
identified by the color in accordance with Code of Practice for the
Electrical (Wiring) Regulation.
Section B7
Page 6 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Bare conductor used as protective conductor shall also be made
similarly identifiable, where necessary, by the application of tapes,
sleeves or discs, or by painting with the above color combination.
B7.9.2
Label for Earthing and Bonding Connections
Every point of connection for earthing and bonding shall be provided
with a warning notice in accordance with Clause B1.2.
B7.10
SIZING OF PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR
B7.10.1
General
The cross sectional area of a protective conductor, other than an
equipotential bonding conductor, shall be determined by the Code of
Practice for the Electricty (Wiring) Regulations Clause 11K , Table
11(1) to 11(7).
Where a protective conductor does not form part of a cable and is not
formed by or not contained in steel conduit, trunking, ducting or
other metallic enclosure of a wiring system, the cross sectional area
shall not be less than 2.5 mm2 copper or equivalent if protection
against mechanical protection is provided (e.g. sheathed cable), and
4 mm2 copper or equivalent if mechanical protection is not provided
(e.g. non-sheathed cable). When a separate cable is used as a CPC,
the cable shall be insulated to IEC 60227-1:2007 and the associated
parts of the standard, IEC 60189-1:2007 and the associated parts of
the standard (BS 6004:2000, Table 1a) or better unless its CSA is
greater than 6 mm2.
B7.10.2
Equipotential Bonding Conductor
The cross sectional area of a main equipotential bonding conductor
shall not be less than half of the cross-sectional area of the associated
earthing conductor of the installation subject to a minimum of 6 mm2
and a maximum of 25 mm2.
The cross sectional area of a supplementary bonding conductor shall
be determined in accordance with relevant Regulation of IEC 603641:2009 and the associated parts of the standard.
B7.11
EARTH FAULT LOOP IMPEDANCE
B7.11.1
Automatic Disconnection Time
For the purpose of automatic disconnection, means of protection
shall be provided at the main switch. The type and setting of the
protective devices shall be so selected that they can properly
discriminate from the Electricity Supplier‟s protection.
Section B7
Page 7 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
For installation other than socket outlet circuit where fault protection
(previously named protection against indirect contact) is afforded by
an overcurrent protective device, the earth fault loop impedance of a
final circuit and the characteristic of the protective device shall be so
co-ordinated that the automatic disconnection of supply shall occur
within 0.2 second, 0.4 second and 5 seconds as appropriate in case of
an earth fault in accordance with code 11B(b) of the Code of
Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.
B7.11.2
Maximum Earth Loop Impedance
For installation other than the socket outlet circuit where fault
protection (previously named protection against indirect contact) is
afforded by overcurrent protective device, the earth fault loop
impedance of any final circuit shall not exceed the maximum values
given in the relevant tables in Code 11 of the Code of Practice for
the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.
B7.11.3
Condition for Compliance
To comply with the requirement, the following formula shall be
fulfilled for each circuit:
RA Ia  50 V
where:
B7.12
RA
is the sum of the resistances of the earth
electrode and the protective conductor(s)
connecting it to the exposed conductive part;
and
Ia
is the current causing the automatic
operation of the protective device within 5
seconds. When the protective device is a
residual current device, Ia is the rated
residual operating current.
USE OF RESIDUAL CURRENT-OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER
B7.12.1
General
Every socket outlet circuit shall be protected by a residual current
device. The residual current device shall have a rated residual
operating current not exceeding 30mA and an operating time not
exceeding 40ms at a residual current of 150mA as governed by IEC
61008-1:2006 and the associated parts of the standard / IEC
60755:2008.
Section B7
Page 8 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Residual current-operated circuit breaker (RCCB) shall be installed
for any final circuit where the earth fault loop impedance is too high
to allow sufficient earth fault current to operate the overcurrent
protective device within the specified automatic disconnection time
of 0.2 second, 0.4 second or 5 seconds in accordance with Code
11B(b) of the Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring)
Regulations. In such case, the product of the rated residual operating
current in amperes of the residual current-operated circuit breaker
and the earth fault loop impedance of the circuit shall not
exceed 50 V.
Residual current-operated circuit breaker shall meet the requirements
specified in Clause C5.7.
B7.12.2
Application in Household Installation
RCCD used for protecting socket outlet circuits in a household or
similar installation shall have a rated operating residual current not
exceeding 30 mA.
B7.12.3
Equipment Outside an Equipotential Zone
For equipment used outdoors or outside an equipotential zone and
supplied via a socket outlet rated at 32 A or less or via a flexible
cable or cord having a similar current carrying capacity, protection
shall be afforded by a residual current-operated circuit breaker
having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30 mA.
B7.12.4
Circuits in Bathroom
All circuits inside a room containing a fixed bath or shower shall be
protected by one or more residual current devices with a residual
operating current not exceeding 30mA.
Section B7
Page 9 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B8
MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS
B8.1
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
B8.1.1
Scope
This Section covers the conduit installation for the following systems:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Telephone;
Computer Network;
Inter-communication and Public Address (PA) Systems;
Staff Paging; and
Broadcast Reception System.
Separate conduits shall be provided for each of these systems.
Galvanized draw-wires of adequate size shall be provided in all
empty conduits.
B8.1.2
Conduit for Telephone, Computer Network, Inter-communication
and PA Systems
Conduits shall be of steel not smaller than 20 mm in diameter, and
shall be installed in accordance with Section B2 of this Specification.
B8.1.3
Outlet Box for Telephone Point
At each telephone outlet position, the conduit shall be terminated at a
35 mm deep conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2003 and the associated
parts of the standard with a moulded blank plate labelled with the
type of installation unless otherwise specified. Outlet boxes shall be
located at 300 mm above finished floor level measured from the
bottom of the box unless otherwise as stated on the Drawing.
B8.1.4
Outlet Box for Computer Point
At each computer outlet, the conduit shall be terminated at a 35 mm
deep conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2003 and the associated parts of
the standard with moulded cover plate labelled with the type of
installation. Outlet boxes shall be fixed at positions as specified on
the Drawing.
Computer sockets will be provided and installed by others.
Section B8
Page 1 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B8.1.5
Outlet Box for Inter-communication and PA System
At each inter-communication or PA outlet position, the conduit shall
be terminated at a 35 mm deep conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2003
and the associated parts of the standard with moulded blank plate
labelled with the type of installation. unless otherwise specified. The
box shall be fixed at positions as stated on the Drawing.
B8.1.6
Conduit for Staff Paging System
Unless otherwise specified, conduits for staff paging system shall be
not less than 20 mm in diameter and shall be installed in accordance
with Section B2 of this Specification. Sub-clause B8.1.5 shall also
be applicable to this type of installation.
B8.1.7
Conduit for Broadcast Reception System
Conduits for Broadcast Reception System shall be of steel, not
smaller than 25 mm in diameter unless otherwise specified, and shall
be installed generally in accordance with Section B2. They shall be
kept clear of power and telephone conduits and shall be arranged to
cross them at right angles whenever possible. Bends shall have an
internal radius of not less than 115 mm. Draw-in boxes shall be
provided at intervals of not exceeding 6m and at all 90 change of
direction.
B8.1.8
Outlet Box for Broadcast Reception System
At each broadcast reception outlet position, the conduit shall be
terminated in a 47 mm deep, 75 mm square steel box with
galvanized sheet metal over-lapping cover plate labelled with the
type of installation unless otherwise specified. The box shall be
fixed at skirting level or otherwise as stated on the Drawing. The
metal overlapping cover plate shall be finished as the wall color.
B8.2
BELL AND AUDIBLE WARNING SYSTEM
B8.2.1
Class-change Bell System for Schools
“Class-change” bell system shall be suitable for use on mains
voltage, and shall normally be located in the General Office of the
school unless otherwise specified. The supervisory panel of the bell
system shall be engraved with the words "Class-change" in English
and Chinese characters.
B8.2.2
Bell for Mains Voltage
Bells for operation at mains voltage shall be ironclad, weatherproof,
with approximately 150 mm diameter round gong suitable for
conduit entry.
Section B8
Page 2 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B8.2.3
Call Bell and Door Bell Systems
Bells and buzzers shall operate at extra low voltage obtained from a
double wound transformer which shall be connected to the mains
supply through a 2A fused connection unit. Unless otherwise
specified, cables shall be 1.0 mm2 PVC insulated for conduit wiring
installation, or 0.75 mm2 PVC twin flexible cable for surface wiring
installation.
B8.2.4
Bell and Buzzer for Extra Low Voltage
Bells shall be of the underdome type having a gong of approximately
75 mm diameter and shall be fixed to a substantial frame. Buzzers
shall be contained within an insulating plastic case, and shall be
approximately 75 mm square in size. Both the bells and buzzers shall
have large solid terminals and rubbing contacts.
B8.2.5
Bell Transformer
Bell transformers shall be air-cooled and double wound complying
with EN 60742:1995. One side of the secondary (extra low voltage)
winding shall be earthed. The reactance of the transformer winding
shall be of such a value that a continuous short circuit across the
terminals of the secondary winding shall not damage the transformer,
or cause dangerous overheating.
The windings, core and terminals of the transformer shall be
contained within an insulating plastic case.
B8.2.6
Call Bell Push
Call bell pushes for indoor use shall be of flush pattern with white or
ivory color front plate.
Call bell pushes for outdoor use, or for areas where they may be
subjected to rain or water, shall be weatherproof.
B8.2.7
Mounting of Call Bell Push
In conduit installations, bell pushes shall be fixed in 35 mm deep
conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2003 and the associated parts of the
standard. In surface cable installations, bell pushes shall be fixed on
a plastic pattress.
Bell pushes shall not be mounted on doors without the written
approval of the Architect.
B8.2.8
Table-type Push
Table-type pushes shall be single or multiple way as specified. They
shall have a plastic base, and a plastic or metal top plate with
adequate and approved holders for labels.
Section B8
Page 3 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B8.2.9
Table-type Push in Concealed Conduit Installation
Table-type pushes in concealed conduit installations shall be
connected to a length of 0.75 mm2 PVC insulated and sheathed
flexible cord, comprising sufficient number of cords to suit the
number of ways in use on the push panel. The flexible cords shall be
taken to a conduit concealed in the floor slab. One end of the
conduit shall terminate underneath the desk, and the other end shall
enter a 35 mm deep concealed conduit box to IEC 60670-1: 2003
and the associated parts of the standard, mounted just above skirting
level on the wall. The flexible cord shall enter the conduit through a
compression gland, and shall be connected to a terminal block
mounted in the conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2003 and the associated
parts of the standard, to which the extra low voltage wiring shall be
connected. Where spare conduits are placed in floor slabs, they shall
be plugged with a metal screwed plug to keep out dirt and moisture.
The conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2003 and the associated parts of the
standard shall form part of the extra low voltage conduit system.
B8.2.10
Bell Indicator
Bell indicator shall be in a form of flashing light or indication light
as specified. The indicators shall be fixed onto a cabinet of approved
type with proper labels. Reset facilities shall be provided to resume
the normal operation after acknowledge the bell indication.
B8.2.11
Segregation of Circuits
Cables for operation at extra low voltage shall not be routed in the
same conduit where other cables are operating at higher voltages.
B8.3
INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS
B8.3.1
General
(a)
Electrical equipment and wiring of electrical installations
exposed to potentially explosive atmospheres shall be
constructed and protected to the requirements specified for
hazardous areas in IEC 60079-0:2007 and the associated parts
of the standard and equivalent such as BS EN 50014 to 50039
and relevant FM (Factory Mutual) or UL (Underwriters
Laboratory) standards under ANSI or equivalent standard
acceptable by relevant authorities.
(b)
Electrical equipment and wiring of electrical installations in
buildings and premises for the storage, manufacture or packing
of dangerous goods in Categories 1 to 10 shall comply with the
provisions of CAP 295B Dangerous Goods (General)
Regulations.
Section B8
Page 4 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
B8.3.2
Electrical equipment and wiring of electrical installations in
building and premises for Categories 2 and 5 Dangerous Goods
including those in building and premises for liquid petroleum
gas storage and for petrol filling stations shall, in addition to
the requirements in Clause 8.3.1 (a) and (b) above, comply
with the requirements specified for hazardous areas in the
Electricity Safety Code Part 1 and 15 of the Institute of
Petroleum Model Code of Safe Practice in the Petroleum
Industry or Marketing Safety Code of the Institute of
Petroleum or equivalent such as BS EN 50014 to 50039 and
relevant FM (Factory Mutual) or UL (Underwriters Laboratory)
standards under ANSI or equivalent standard acceptable by
relevant authorities.
Electrical Equipment Selection
(a)
Attention shall be paid to the Zone of Risk and to adopt the
most appropriate type of protection. Type of protection of
electrical equipment for achievement of safety shall be in
accordance with the zone of risk listed in Table B8.3.2(a).
Table B8.3.2(a) -
Selection of Electrical Equipment and
Systems according to Zone of Risk
Type of Protection
„ia‟
„s‟
„p‟
„d‟
„e‟
„ib‟
intrinsically-safe apparatus
or system
special protection
(specifically certified for
use in Zone 0)
„m‟
„s‟
Pressurized apparatus
flammable enclosure
increased safety
intrinsically-safe apparatus
or system
encapsulation
special protection
„o‟
„q‟
‟N‟
oil-immersion
powder filling
non sparking
Zone in which
the protection
may be used
0, 1, 2
1, 2
2
NOTES:
Zone 0 Zone in which an explosive atmosphere
continuously present or present for long periods;
Section B8
Page 5 of 14
is
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Zone 1 Zone in which an explosive atmosphere is likely to
occur in normal operation; and
Zone 2 Zone in which an explosive atmosphere is not likely
to occur in normal operation, and if it occurs it will
exist only for a short time.
(b)
The maximum surface temperature of the T (Temperature)
class of an electrical equipment shall not exceed the ignition
temperature of the gases or vapours involved. Relationship
between T class and maximum surface temperature is shown in
Table B8.3.2(b).
Table B8.3.2(b) - Relationship between T Class and
Maximum Surface Temperature
T Class
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
(c)
B8.3.3
Maximum Surface Temperature (C)
450
300
200
135
100
85
The gas and vapour classification of electrical equipment
which provides guidance for the safety usage of equipment in
the type of gaseous prevalent environment shall conform with
IEC 60079-20-1:2010 and the associated Parts of the Standard.
Wiring System
The wiring system shall be:
(a)
PVC insulated cables drawn into steel conduits complying with
Sections B2 and C2; or
(b)
Flame retarding PVC outer sheathed fire retarding cable
enclosed in conduits or trunking complying with Sections B3
and C3; or
(c)
Multi-core armoured cables complying with Sections B3 and
C3; or
(d)
Mineral insulated copper sheathed cables with copper
conductors complying with Sections B3 and C3.
Where single core metal sheathed or armoured cables are used,
precautions shall be taken to avoid dangerous sheath voltages or
currents.
Section B8
Page 6 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B8.3.4
Conduit Fitting, Cable Glands, Terminal Box and Enclosure
Unless otherwise specified, conduit fittings, cable glands, terminal
boxes and enclosures of apparatus (including accessories) shall be
suitable for use with Group IIA and Group IIB inflammable gases
and vapours as specified in IEC 60079-20-1:2010 with temperature
classification of T6 (85C). Conduit fittings, cable glands and
terminal boxes shall carry the registered flameproof mark and
manufacturer's certificate number.
B8.3.5
Screw or Bolt
Screws or bolts for securing individual components of apparatus and
luminaires shall only be removed by the using of a tubular box
spanner complying with BS 2558:1954 or a hexagon wrench key
complying with BS 2470:1973.
B8.3.6
Luminaire
Unless otherwise specified, luminaires shall comply with IEC
60079-0:2007 and the associated parts of the standard and shall be
suitable for use in Zone 1 where gases exist is of Group IIA or
Group IIB classification as specified in IEC 60079-20-1:2010 with
temperature classification of T6 (85oC). Where tubular fluorescent
luminaires are specified, they shall have starterless ballasts.
B8.3.7
Conduit Pendant
At all tube pendant points, a three-way (tee) circular or rectangular
junction box shall be provided. The conduit down drop shall be fitted
direct to the threaded spout of the box. Screwed pendant covers shall
not be used.
B8.3.8
Cables or Conduits Passing through Floor, Wall or Partition
Where cables or conduit passing through a floor, wall or partition
that forms a gas or fire barrier, the hole provided for them shall be
made good with material determined as incombustible in accordance
with the method of BS 476-4:1970 to the full thickness of the floor,
wall or partition. Alternatively, cable glands or cable transits may be
used for this purpose.
Where a run of conduit, irrespective of size, passes from a hazardous
area to a non-hazardous area, a stopper box or sealing device shall be
inserted at the hazardous area boundary or, failing this, on the side
remote from the hazardous area.
B8.3.9
Precautions to Prevent Passage of Inflammables Gases or Vapours
Where trunking, ducts, pipes or trenches are used to accommodate
cables, precautions shall be taken to prevent the passage of
inflammable gases or vapours from one area to another and to
Section B8
Page 7 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
prevent the collection of inflammable gases or vapours in trenches.
Such precautions shall involve the sealing of trunking, ducts and
pipes and the adequate ventilation or sand filling of trenches.
B8.3.10
Equipotential Bonding of Conduit
The metallic portion of conduit shall be electrically bonded to the
rigid system by either a separate conductor or terminating devices.
B8.4
EXTERNAL LIGHTING SYSTEM
B8.4.1
Scope
This Sub-section covers lighting installations (mainly pole mounted)
for street lighting, security lighting, floodlighting and general area
lighting.
B8.4.2
Specification and Drawing
External lighting installations shall be installed in accordance with
the Particular Specification and Drawings.
B8.4.3
Luminaire
The type of lamps and luminaires to be used shall be as specified in
the Particular Specification and Drawings. The luminaires shall be
securely mounted on the poles.
For those not mounted on poles, they shall be fixed on wall or
hanger, plinth or the like dedicated for the mounting of the
luminaires. In such case, the installation shall comply with Clause
B4.
Where specified in the Particular Specification, a safety chain shall
be provided between the luminaire and the lamp pole to ensure that
the luminaire will not be dropped down in case the luminaire support
fails. The chain shall be galvanized steel and of adequate strength to
support at least three times the weight of the luminaire.
B8.4.4
Construction of Lamp Pole
Unless otherwise specified, lamp poles shall be constructed of mild
steel pipe. The lamp poles shall be hot dipped galvanized to BS EN
ISO 1461:2009. Material samples and working drawings shall be
submitted when requested by the Architect. The poles shall be
finished overall with at least two coats of primer and two coats of
finishing paint after erection in accordance with Clause B1.6. The
color of the finishing paint shall be as directed by the Architect.
Section B8
Page 8 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
The Contractor shall submit evidence to substantiate that the lamp
poles are structurally sound and are suitable for use in the local
environment, in particular under typhoon conditions at a wind speed
of up to 80 m/s. Such evidence shall be by means of manufacturer‟s
calculation and certificates.
All lamp poles shall be earthed by approved means such as the
armour of the underground armoured cables.
B8.4.5
Foundation of Lamp Pole
Lamp poles shall be securely bolted down in an upright position to
the foundations. The Contractor shall submit structural calculations
through a registered structural engineer to substantiate the
foundation is structurally sound and is suitable for use in the local
environment, in particular under typhoon conditions at a wind speed
up to 80m/s. Should there be any queries on the construction of the
foundations, the Architect‟s advice shall be sought.
B8.4.6
Service Box
A galvanized steel service box shall be provided on each pole at an
appropriate height above ground level to accommodate the MCB
control box. The service box can be integrated with the lamp pole.
Each lamp circuit shall be protected by an MCB. Where the CSA of
the incoming/outgoing cable cores are larger than that which can be
accommodated by the terminal of the MCB, a fixed insulated
connector block of adequate rating shall be installed with a tail to the
MCB. Alternatively, a copper busbar may be used.
Where the service box serves more than one circuit, the supply to the
MCB shall be by means of a copper busbar of adequate rating. The
phase conductors of the incoming/outgoing cables shall then be
terminated to the busbar by means of cable sockets.
Each control box shall be fitted with a neutral block of adequate
rating and having sufficient number of ways for the
incoming/outgoing cable cores. It shall be securely fixed to the base
of the control box by means of a 6 mm thick paxolin block.
The service box shall be fitted with a 3 mm thick galvanized steel
cover made waterproof with a 3 mm thick soft rubber or neoprene
gasket. The cover shall be fixed by means of four M6 brass fixing
bolts and washers and shall be hinged. Provision shall be made in
the batten plate of the box for supporting and terminating up to three
numbers of incoming/outgoing XPLE or PVC/SWA & PVCS cables
by means of suitable cable glands. The cable sizes shall be as
specified in the Particular Specification or on the Drawings.
B8.4.7
Underground Cable to Pole
Underground cables for external lighting systems shall be copper
Section B8
Page 9 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
cored, XPLE or PVC insulated, steel wire armoured and PVC
sheathed cables (XPLE or PVC/SWA & PVCS) unless otherwise
specified. Cables shall enter and leave the pole below ground level
and each cable shall terminate in a gland fixed to the MCB control
box. The cable cores between the glands and the terminals shall not
be in tension.
Underground straight through joint will not be permitted without
written agreement of the Architect.
All underground cables shall be laid inside cable trenches or ducts.
If these ducts are provided by the builder, the Contractor shall
ascertain that the quantity, size and associated arrangement of the
ducts are suitable for drawing of cables in future. Draw pits of
adequate sizes shall be provided for a straight run of approximately
15m, at position where cable route changes direction or as and where
required.
B8.4.8
Cable between Service Box and Luminaire
Cables from the neutral terminal block and the MCB to the
luminaires shall be PVC insulated and PVC sheathed having CSA as
specified. Arrangements shall be made to prevent the cores from
being under tension where they are attached to terminals. All cables
shall be contained within the poles. Rubber grommets shall be
installed where cable passes through metal work.
Where sustained arc voltage of a discharge lamp exceeds 250V, the
cables used for connecting the lamp and the control-gear shall be of
600/1000V grade to IEC 60502-1:2009 and the associated parts of
the standard or as recommended by the lamp manufacturer. The
length of cables shall not exceed the limit as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Where flexible cables are recommended by manufacturer for
termination at the luminaire, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed
flexible cables shall be used. Such cables shall enter the luminaire
by means of suitable waterproof compression glands.
Where four or more floodlights are mounted on a pole, the flexible
cables shall be connected to the luminaires by means of a mild steel
connector box with waterproof hinged cover. The connector box
shall be fitted near to the top of the pole.
B8.4.9
Switch Fitted to Pole
Where specified switches may be mounted on the pole for local
control. Switches mounted on the pole shall be fixed onto it by
tapped holes and brass fixing screws. The switches shall be
waterproof or contained within a waterproof type galvanized metal
case, with an external galvanized metal operating knob or handle.
Switches shall be fitted at least 2m above finished ground level.
Section B8
Page 10 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B8.4.10
Control Gear for Discharge Lighting
Control gear for discharge lamps shall be contained within a
galvanized steel box mounted on the pole or inside the concrete gearcabinet provided by others as shown on the Drawings. When
mounted on the pole, the steel box shall be watertight and positioned
at a height higher than normal working level in such a way that a
ladder is needed for access. The box shall be of adequate size to
accommodate all control gear, cable and connections. The method
of construction shall be similar to the service box.
B8.4.11
Testing of Illumination Level
Testing of the illumination level and distribution of external lighting
installations shall be carried out after dark under the direction of the
Architect. All labour, instruments and materials necessary to carry
out the test shall be provided including adjustment of the luminaires
to achieve the desired illumination level and performance to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
B8.4.12
Numbering of Lamp Pole
All lamp poles shall be marked with appropriate identification
numbers. The numbers shall commence consecutively from the
source of power supply in the clockwise direction. The numbering
proposal shall be submitted with the shop drawings to the Architect
for approval.
The number shall be etched on a stainless steel plate which shall be
fixed onto the pole by tapped holes and two brass fixing screws. The
numbers shall not be less than 50 mm tall.
A framed drawing indicating the location of lamp poles and pole
numbers shall be provided in the appropriate switch room. The
framed drawing shall be fixed onto the wall in such a manner that it
can easily be removed for reference.
B8.5
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
B8.5.1
Installation of Lightning Protection System
Lightning protection systems shall be installed in accordance with
the Particular Specification and Drawings, and as directed by the
Architect.
B8.5.2
Scope
This Sub-section covers lightning protection systems applicable to
buildings and similar structures. It does not cover the protection of
overhead lines and other specialized applications. The installation
shall conform to the requirements and recommendations set out in
IEC 62305-1:2006 and the associated parts of the standard.
Section B8
Page 11 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B8.5.3
Type of Lightning Protection System
A lightning protection system shall comprise air termination
connected by down conductors to earthing electrodes. In larger
schemes more than one of any or all of the above items may be used.
Air terminations may be interconnected by means of roof horizontal
conductors.
B8.5.4
Air Termination
Air termination shall consist of vertical or horizontal conductor(s) or
combination of both.
On a reinforced concrete structure, the air termination shall be
connected to the designated reinforcing bars in the number of
positions required for down conductors.
All metallic projections on or above the main surface of the roof
which are connected, intentionally or fortuitously, to the general
mass of the earth should be bonded to, and form part of, the air
termination network.
B8.5.5
Down Conductor
The dimensions of down conductors to be used shall be either of the
following:
(a)
annealed tinned copper strip 25 mm x 3 mm;
(b)
annealed copper rod 12 mm diameter; or
(c)
steel reinforcement bar 12 mm diameter.
Where the steel work of the structure is used as down conductor, coordination with the Building Contractor is required to ensure the
continuity of the steel work. In this connection the ends of the steel
work shall be connected to the lightning protection system by a
jointing method which is suitable for bonding dissimilar metals and
approved by the Architect. A test joint shall be provided at each
connection.
When down conductors adhered on the external wall are specified,
they shall be fixed by means of suitable spacer saddles at regular
intervals of not exceeding 1m apart. The down conductor shall
follow the most direct path possible between the air termination
network and the earth termination network. When more than one
down conductors are installed, they shall be arranged as evenly as
practicable around the outside walls of the structure starting from the
corners.
Each down conductor shall be connected to an earth termination.
Section B8
Page 12 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B8.5.6
Test Joint
Test joints shall be of phosphor bronze, gunmetal or copper. They
shall comprise a heavy circular base, to which a heavy circular cover
of the same material shall be bolted. The flat copper conductor shall
be overlapped and placed so that they are clamped between the cover
and the base by means of at least four screws or studs.
The test joints shall be positioned so that they shall not be tampered
with by unauthorized persons. In cases where this is not possible,
the earth tape/rod connector clamp shall be used as an alternative test
point in place of the test joint.
B8.5.7
Earth Termination
Unless otherwise specified, earth termination shall be of rod
electrodes complying with Clause B7.3.
Each earth termination shall have a resistance to earth not exceeding
the product given by 10 times the number of earth terminations to
be provided. The whole of the lightning protection system shall
have a combined resistance to earth not exceeding 10. Where, due
to local conditions, it is difficult to obtain a value of less than 10
by the sole use of rod electrodes, alternative or additional methods,
e.g. the use of deep bore holes, the installation of tape or plate
electrodes complying with Section B7, may be used at the discretion
of the Architect.
B8.5.8
Spacer Saddle
Spacer saddles shall be of high quality metal. For copper conductors,
brass or gunmetal shall be used.
Non-metallic spacer saddles shall only be used when down
conductors are provided with PVC sheathing.
B8.5.9
Connection to Earth Termination
Down conductors and bonding conductors shall be connected to the
earth electrode in accordance with Clause B7.4. Each connection
shall be separately clamped and shall be fitted with a warning notice
in accordance with Clause B1.2
B8.5.10
Bonding to Other Services
Lightning protection systems shall normally be kept segregated from
the metalwork of other services. Minimum isolation clearances as
given in IEC 62305-1:2006 and the associated parts of the standard.
shall be maintained. However, in certain circumstances, e.g. where
fortuitous contact with other systems cannot be avoided, earth
electrodes for lightning protection may, at the discretion of the
Architect, be bonded to other such services including the metal
Section B8
Page 13 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
sheath and armouring of low voltage cables, the consumer's low
voltage earth system, metal water pipes and steel reinforcement for
the foundation and structure. Cables and earthing systems belonging
to the Supply Authorities, the Telephone Company and other
authorities shall not be bonded except with the written permission of
such Authorities. Gas pipes shall not normally be connected to any
earth electrode.
B8.5.11
Bond
Bonds for use in connecting the lightning protection system of other
metal work shall be of soft annealed copper strip of 25 x 3 mm.
Bonds connecting movable items to the lightning protection system
shall be of flexible copper strand 475/0.5 mm diameter or equivalent.
Connections to other metalwork shall be of negligible resistance,
metal to metal and mechanically sound with non-ferrous nuts, bolts
and washers using clamps where necessary.
B8.5.12
Joint in Conductors
Joints in roof conductors and/or down conductors shall be made by
double riveting or by suitable tape clamps. When clamps are used,
the tape clamps shall each be provided with at least 4 screws or bolts.
All such joints shall be tinned and shall have negligible resistance
and good mechanical strength.
Alternatively, connectors may be jointed together by means of
exothermic or thermal welding utilizing the high temperature
reaction of powdered copper oxide provided that the proper material
and equipment are used in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended process.
B8.5.13
Testing
On completion of the installation, the lightning protection system
shall be tested for continuity between air terminations and earthing
terminations and the resistance shall be recorded. The earthing
resistance of each earthing electrode shall also be tested and
recorded. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with Part D of
this Specification and shall be submitted to the Architect for
approval.
All instruments used for testing shall be properly calibrated.
Section B8
Page 14 of 14
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION B9
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC MOTORS AND HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT
B9.1
LOW VOLTAGE-ELECTRIC MOTORS
B9.1.1
B9.1.2
Maintenance Access and Safety
(a)
Adequate access to the motors and their associated facilities
shall be allowed such that the necessary periodical testing,
cleaning and maintenance can be carried out. The motors shall
not be installed in a position where surrounding plant or
building work may obstruct in meeting such requirements.
(b)
Each electric motor, electric air heater battery or other
electrical device which is controlled from the main control
panel and is so situated that the panel is at a distance and/or out
of sight from the equipment. shall be provided with a local
'stop-lock' control circuit switch (where there is a separate
control circuit), plus a local main power supply circuit isolator
in all such cases.
Terminals
Exception for armoured cables, all other cables appearing above
floor level shall be enclosed in approved trunking, solid or flexible
conduit, with approved provision for movement of the motor. The
terminal boxes for cable connection shall be suitably arranged to
make a neat joint with the conduits or cables.
B9.1.3
Anti-Condensation Heater
The anti-condensation heater shall be controlled such that the heater
shall be de-energised when the starter is switched on and vice versa.
Heaters shall be wired from the motor control panel.
B9.1.4
Belt Drives and Pulleys
Pulleys shall be correctly aligned and any holding down bolts or
fixings shall be positioned to ensure correct alignment.
Slide rails shall be provided for all motors driving through belts.
Purpose-made adjusting devices shall be provided to adjust the belt
tension and to secure the motors.
B9.1.5
Protective Guards
The protective guards shall be rigidly constructed. It shall not be
possible to remove any guard without the aid of a tool.
Section B9
Page 1 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B9.1.6
Warning Label
Motor arranged for automatic restart shall have a label of durable
material permanently fixed to it and in a prominent position clearly
inscribed as shown below:
DANGER
THIS MOTOR IS AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED AND MAY
START WITHOUT WARNING. ISOLATE BEFORE INSPECTION.
危險
此 機 乃 自 動 操 作 , 維 修 前 請 先 關 掣
B9.2
MOTOR SWITCHGEAR, STARTER AND CONTROL PANELS
B9.2.1
General
The motor switchgear, starters and controls shall be housed in wallmounted local motor control panels, or floor-standing motor control
switchboard as required.
B9.2.2
Local Motor Control Panels
The local motor control panel shall be of wall-mounted type, unless
otherwise specified, to house the motor starter and switchgear.
B9.2.3
B9.3
Motor Control Switchboard
(a)
The motor control switchboard (hereafter called the “MC
Switchboard”) shall be a free-standing floor-mounted low
voltage switchboard to group centrally the motor starters,
controls and switchgear for the equipment.
(b)
The switchboard shall be installed on a raised concrete
'housekeeping' base provided by others. Precautions shall be
taken to prevent damage or deterioration of panels during
transit and to afford physical protection on site prior to final
acceptance.
HIGH VOLTAGE-GENERAL
B9.3.1
All the high voltage electrical installation work shall be carried out
by a Registered Electrical Contractor and Worker for Grade H
electrical work as required by the Electricity Ordinance (Cap.406).
After the completion of the electrical installation works, it shall be
inspected, tested and certified by a Registered Electrical Worker to
confirm that the requirements of the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations
have been met. The Registered Electrical Worker and Contractor
shall sign the Work Completion Certificate for the individual high
voltage electrical installation and submit to the Architect before the
electrical installation is energised.
Section B9
Page 2 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B9.4
HIGH VOLTAGE - ELECTRIC MOTORS
B9.4.1
Motor Foundation
A motor bedplate/foundation block shall be provided unless the
motor is to be mounted on the soleplate of the driving equipment
such as compressor or pump. Jacking screws shall be fitted at
perpendicular directions on the foundation block for alignment of the
coupling.
B9.4.2
Provision for Cabling and Termination
(a)
Cabling Provision at Bedplates
Provision shall be made in the steel bedplate where necessary
to facilitate straight run of cable to the bottom of the motor
cable terminal box.
(b)
Cabling Provision at Motor Casing
The terminal leads from cable box terminals or connectors to
the windings for a distance of 150 mm beyond their point of
entry into the motor frame shall be adequately braced to
withstand the forces produced by maximum fault current.
The phase windings shall be accessible for testing. For this
purpose, neutral leads shall be brought out to a separate starpoint terminal box and shorted with an insulated copper bar of
cross-sectional area not less than the conductor of the terminal
lead.
Studs shall be so fixed as to prevent the terminal leads from
turning when the nuts are tightened down. Means shall be
provided to prevent slackening of cable connections due to
vibration.
(c)
Motor Termination Boxes
The termination of motor supply cables shall be done by bolts
and nuts on to stud terminal stems, and so designed that the
motor can be removed to another location with the termination
chamber in-situ. No cable joint is permitted in the termination
chamber.
Front access detachable cover plates shall be fixed by studs
and nuts. Separate plates shall be supplied for termination
chambers.
Joints shall be machined flat and fitted with neoprene rubber
gaskets.
A shroud having a minimum breakdown voltage of 20 kV shall
be fitted over each cable terminal.
Section B9
Page 3 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B9.5
HIGH VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL SWITCHBOARD
B9.5.1
B9.5.2
B9.5.3
General Requirements
(a)
The switchboard shall be mounted firmly on to the concrete
floor finished to the standard requirements as recommended by
the equipment manufacturer. The floor construction shall be
designed to withstand the operating weight and impact loading
of the switchboard. Individual panels shall be erected to true
plumb vertically and horizontally on suitable guides/rails as
standard accessories from the same manufacturer.
(b)
The height of the instrument panel above floor level shall not
exceed 2400 mm.
All panels constituting a complete
switchboard shall be of equal height.
(c)
Bolted on rear and top covers shall be designed to gain access
to individual circuits without exposing other circuits which
may be alive. Switchboards shall not be located across floor
expansion joints.
(d)
Before steelworks is painted, it shall be treated and degreased
by an approved method such as grit blasting to ISO 8502:2006
or chemical pickling and an approved anti-rusting priming coat
applied. The panels shall be externally finished in semi-gloss
stoved enamel or cellulose to a color to be approved by the
Architect.
Primary Busbars and Connections
(a)
At all points where connections or joints occur, the busbars and
connecting pieces shall be tinned or silver-plated. The
resistance of any length of conductor containing a joint shall
not be greater than that of an equal length without a joint.
(b)
Jointing of sections of busbars shall be done by mechanical
means. Soldered, braced, welded or riveted joints shall not be
used in busbars. Jointing faces of copper conductors shall be
tinned or silver plated, or other approved treatment to maintain
effective conductivity of the joint. All necessary busbar
jointing bolts, nuts, and fixing accessories shall be provided.
The recommended torque for tightening the bolts shall be
stated in the maintenance manual.
Anti-Condensation Heaters
They shall be thermostatically controlled and shall operate at black
heat and shall be shrouded and located so as not to cause injury to
personnel or damage to equipment. The heaters shall be controlled
from a double-pole miniature circuit-breaker, with a lamp to indicate
'cubicle heaters on'. The circuit-breaker and indicating lamp shall be
mounted externally at one end of the switchboard.
Section B9
Page 4 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B9.5.4
B9.5.5
B9.6
B9.7
Cables Boxes
(a)
Cable boxes shall be suitable for terminating the cables directly
into the switchgear.
(b)
Where cable boxes are used for three-core cables, the sweating
sockets on the two outer phases shall be so fixed to incline
towards the centre to minimise bending of the cable cores.
Where there is more than one core per phase, the socket block
shall be so fixed as to minimise bending of the cable cores, and
spacer clips shall be used.
Labels and Warning Notice
(a)
Labels shall be fixed by screws on the non-detachable parts of
the panel at a height of 1350 mm or above.
(b)
'Danger - H.V. Live Terminals/ 危 險 – 高 壓 帶 電 電 極 '
warning labels shall be attached to the access covers of the air
insulated cable boxes, CT chambers and busbar, and shall be
colored red with white lettering in both English & Chinese
characters.
(c)
In addition to automatic screening shutters and barriers,
warning labels shall also be provided for all live parts, such as
test terminal blocks.
HIGH VOLTAGE AUTO-TRANSFORMERS
B9.6.1
The auto-transformers shall be mounted firmly on to the concrete
floor finished to the standard requirements as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer. The floor construction shall be designed to
withstand the operating weight of the auto-transformers.
B9.6.2
The installation shall be carried out in strict accordance with the
recommendations so as to keep the noise and vibration generated by
the auto-transformers to the minimum.
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
B9.7.1
Positioning of the power factor correction capacitors shall be done
by means of the built-in combined jacking and haulage lugs.
B9.7.2
The installation shall strictly follow the equipment manufacturer‟s
recommendations.
Section B9
Page 5 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
B9.8
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES
B9.8.1
No straight through cable joints shall be installed without the
approval of the Architect.
B9.8.2
For identification, the rating of the cable shall be impressed into the
outer insulation at regular intervals.
B9.8.3
The radius of each bend or change in direction in the route of a cable
shall not be less than eight times the overall diameter of the cable or
as technically recommended by the cable manufacturer whichever is
more stringent.
B9.8.4
Cable Terminations
Cables shall be terminated by approved non-ferrous mechanical
glands complete with compression devices for securing the cable
sheath. An armour clamp shall be provided for bonding to metal
sheaths as necessary. Where the cables are installed in entirely dry
situations, the gland shall be designed with a compressible gasket or
packing for securing the inner sheath and anchoring the armour. For
cables installed wholly or partly in outdoor or damp conditions,
compressible sealing and clamping features shall be provided for
securing the inner and outer sheaths and also the armour; barriers
shall be incorporated to prevent the ingress of moisture. Other types
of cable termination can be used subject to the approval of Architect.
Section B9
Page 6 of 6
EE_GS
2012 Edition
PART C – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION
SECTION C1
GENERAL
C1.1
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
C1.1.1
International Standards
Material and equipment shall be of high quality, and shall comply
with, where applicable, the appropriate International Standard
Specifications prepared by IEC or ISO Technical Committees
together with any amendments made thereto.
The Contractor can propose the relevant parts of the stated standard
for the offered equipment and materials to comply with for approval
by the Architect.
C1.1.2
Other Standard Specifications
When material or equipment complying with other standard
specifications is offered, the Contractor shall satisfy the Architect that
the quality of the equipment offered is equal to or better than that
specified in the appropriate International Standards (IEC/ISO).
C1.1.3
Service Conditions
The following service conditions shall apply:
C1.1.4
(a)
Climate: Hong Kong (tropical);
(b)
Ambient temperature:
Peak -5°C to +40°C (continuously 4 hours)
Average 0°C to +35°C (over 24 hours);
(c)
Altitude: up to 2000 m above sea level; and
(d)
Relative humidity: 99% maximum.
Selection of Equipment
Selection of equipment shall be based on this Specification, the
Particular Specification, and technical data contained on the
Drawings for a particular installation.
Section C1
Page 1 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
An assessment should be made of any characteristics of equipment
likely to have harmful effects upon other electrical equipment or other
services, or impair the supply. Those characteristics include the
following:
(a)
overvoltages;
(b)
undervoltages;
(c)
fluctuating loads;
(d)
unbalanced loads;
(e)
power factor;
(f)
starting currents;
(g)
harmonic currents;
(h)
d.c. feedback;
(i)
high-frequency oscillations; and
(j)
necessity for additional connection to earth.
Where items of equipment are interconnected to form an integral part
of the complete electrical installation, their characteristics of
performance and capacities shall be so matched as to give safe,
reliable, efficient and economical operation of the complete electrical
installation.
Whenever equipment are called for in the Particular Specifications or
Drawings for the electrical installation of a particular job, all these
equipment shall conform to the energy efficiency requirements as
stipulated in the Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building
Services Installations in Building issued by Electrical and Mechanical
Services Department, the Government of the HKSAR.
C1.1.5
Equipment Catalogue and Manufacturer‟s Specification
Equipment catalogues and manufacturers‟ specifications related to the
proposed equipment shall be in the Chinese or English language, be
specific and shall include all information necessary for the Architect
to ascertain that the equipment complies with this Specification and
Drawings. Data and sales catalogue of a general nature will not be
accepted unless prior agreement has been obtained from the Architect.
Equipment catalogues and manufacturers‟ specifications must be
submitted for the examination and agreement of the Architect before
any equipment is ordered.
Section C1
Page 2 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C1.2
VOLTAGE COVERED BY THIS SPECIFICATION
Unless otherwise specified, all apparatus, equipment, materials and wiring shall
be suitable for use with a 3-phase and neutral, 4-wire, 380/220V +6%,
50 Hz ±2% source neutral earthed system with provision of bonding to the
Electricity Supplier‟s bonding terminal.
C1.3
INSULATING MATERIAL
Insulating tapes for low voltage applications shall comply with IEC 60454-31:2002 pressure sensitive adhesive tape type F-PVCp/90/0/Tp (Plasticized PVC)
and have a thickness of not less than 0.22mm.
Non-impregnated paper, fabric, wood or press-hemp shall not be used for
insulating purposes. Where synthetic resin bonded insulating boards are used, all
cut edges shall be sealed with an approved varnish.
When insulating material complying with other standard specifications is
offered, the Contractor shall satisfy the Architect that the quality of the
insulating material offered is equal to or better than that specified in the
appropriate IEC Standards.
C1.4
MINIMUM SIZE OF CABLE CONDUCTOR
Cables for lighting and bell circuits shall have CSA of not less than 1.0mm², and
those for power circuits shall have CSA of not less than 2.5mm². Internal wiring
in factory made panel or equipment may comprise cables of different suitable
CSA determined by the manufacturer.
The CSA of any cable shall not be reduced at its point of termination, junction,
joints, etc.
Where cables of 1.0mm2 are to be terminated, approximately 15mm long of
cable insulation shall be removed and half the length of the bare conductor shall
be bent into the other half to form a solid part prior to the insertion into the
termination.
C1.5
USE OF PVC-INSULATED CABLE AT LOW TEMPERATURE
PVC-insulated cables shall not be installed in refrigerated space or other
situations where the temperature is consistently below 0C.
Section C1
Page 3 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C1.6
FIXING SCREW AND BOLT
Machine screws and nuts shall be to ISO 885:2000. Hexagon bolts, screws and
nuts shall be to BS EN ISO 4016:2001, BS EN ISO 4018:2001 and BS EN ISO
4034:2001. Wood screws shall be to BS 1210:1963 with countersunk head
unless otherwise specified. Holes for bolts, screws and other fixings shall be
drilled or stamped, and no larger than required for clearance of the bolt, screw,
etc.
C1.7
SHEET METAL WORK
Sheet metal boxes, meter chambers, etc. shall be manufactured from plain steel
sheets. The thickness of steel sheet shall be as specified in the Particular
Specification and subject to a minimum of 1.0mm. Where necessary, suitable
stiffeners shall be provided to give adequate rigidity.
Protection against corrosion shall be achieved by means of hot-dip galvanisation,
anti-rust painting or enamel, or the use of stainless steel. If stainless steel sheet
is specified, it shall be to ISO 683-13:1986, Table 3 “Type of Condition and
Surface Condition of Stainless Steel Products” Symbol F9 for matt finish and
Symbol F8 for polished finish.
C1.8
CABLE MARKERS IN ADDITION TO CABLE COLOR
IDENTIFICATION
Cable markers where necessary shall be provided to cables in addition to their
color identifications.
C1.8.1
Cable markers for identification purposes shall comply with BS
3858:1992.
C1.8.2
The physical dimensions of cable markers and all necessary
accessories shall suit and fit the sizes of cables. Cable markers shall
either be of closed type which have to be fitted to the cable before
physical connection of cables or of open type which can be directly
attached to the cables after connection.
C1.8.3
The materials used for the cable markers and carrier strips shall be
made from Halogen-free materials and flame resistance, having a
service temperature range between -40oC to +70oC. They shall be of
high mechanical strength , rigidity and hardness characteristics. The
material shall also be chemical resistance against sodium hydroxide,
seawater, detergent, petrol, diesel, sodium chloride solution, nitric
acid, ammonium hydroxide, etc. The color of cable markers shall be
YELLOW in accordance with the international color-code.
C1.8.4
The identification markings on the cable markers shall be printed in
BLACK color. The printed characteristics shall withstand all the
usual marker tests pertaining to resistance to smearing and scratching,
and imperious to solvents such as acetone.
Section C1
Page 4 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C2
WIRING SYSTEM: CABLES, CONDUITS, TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES
C2.1
CABLES IN WIRING SYSTEM
C2.1.1
General
Wiring cables shall be manufactured under a recognized quality
surveillance scheme (e.g. British Approvals Service for Cables
(BASEC) licence or the HAR scheme recognized by the European
Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization, CENELEC, etc.) and
bear the appropriate marking (e.g. BASEC mark or HAR mark, etc.)
of the quality surveillance scheme.
Cables in wiring system shall be one or a combination of the
following types.
C2.1.2
Non-sheathed Cables
Non-sheathed cables shall be to:
(a)
450/750V PVC insulated, single-core, non-sheathed copper
cables, with solid or stranded conductor for general purpose,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
70oC – code designation 60227 IEC 01 of IEC 60227-3:1997;
(b)
450/750V PVC insulated, single-core, non-sheathed copper
cables with flexible conductor for general purpose, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 70oC – code
designation 60227 IEC 02 of IEC 60227-3:1997;
(c)
300/500V heat resistant ethylene-vinyl acetate rubber or other
equivalent synthetic elastomer insulated, single-core, nonsheathed copper cable, with solid conductor, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 110oC – code
designation 60245 IEC 06 of IEC 60245-7:1994;
(d)
450/750V heat resistant ethylene-vinyl acetate rubber or other
equivalent synthetic elastomer insulated, single-core, nonsheathed copper cable, with solid or stranded conductor,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
110oC – code designation 60245 IEC 04 of IEC 60245-7:1994;
(e)
450/750V thermosetting insulated, single-core non-sheathed,
copper cable, with solid or stranded conductor, with low
emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
90oC – code designation H07Z-U and H07Z-R of BS
7211:1998; or
Section C2
Page 1 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(f)
C2.1.3
450/750V, fire resistant, thermosetting insulated, single core,
non-sheathed copper cable, with solid or stranded conductor,
with low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected
by fire, suitable for conductor operating temperature not
exceeding 90 oC. Fire resistant cable shall also comply with
the fire performance requirement specified in Clause C2.1.6.
Sheathed Cables
Sheathed cables shall be to:
(a)
600/1000V PVC insulated, single-core or multi-core, PVC
sheathed, with or without armour, copper cables with solid or
stranded conductor, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 70oC – IEC 60502-1:2004;
(b)
600/1000V PVC insulated, single-core or multi-core,
thermoplastic polyethylene (PE) sheathed, with or without
armour, copper cables with solid or stranded conductor,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
70oC – IEC 60502-1:2004;
(c)
600/1000V cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated,
single-core or multi-core, PVC sheathed, with or without
armour, copper cables with solid or stranded conductor,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
90oC – IEC 60502-1:2004;
(d)
600/1000V ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) insulated, singlecore or multi-core, PVC sheathed, with or without armour,
copper cables with solid or stranded conductor, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 90oC – IEC
60502-1:2004;
(e)
300/500V light PVC insulated, multi-core, PVC sheathed
copper cable with solid or stranded conductor, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 70oC – code
designation 60227 IEC 10 of IEC 60227-4:1997;
(f)
300/500V PVC insulated, single-core, flat twin or 3-core, PVC
sheathed copper cable with solid or stranded conductor,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
70oC – national type (Table 7) of BS 6004:2000;
(g)
300/500V PVC insulated, single-core, flat twin or 3-core, PVC
sheathed copper cable with solid or stranded conductor and
circuit protective conductor, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 70oC – national type (Table 8) of
BS 6004:2000;
Section C2
Page 2 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C2.1.4
(h)
300/500V PVC insulated, single-core or flat twin, PVC
sheathed copper cable with stranded conductor and with or
without circuit protective conductor, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 70oC – national type
(Table 9) of BS 6004:2000;
(i)
450/750V thermosetting insulated, twin, 3-core, 4-core or 5core, sheathed copper cable with solid or stranded conductor,
with low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected
by fire, suitable for conductor operating temperature not
exceeding 90oC – national type (Table 6) of BS 7211:1998;
(j)
300/500V thermosetting insulated, single-core, flat twin or flat
3-core, sheathed copper cable with solid or stranded conductor
and circuit protective conductor, with low emission of smoke
and corrosive gases when affected by fire, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 90oC – national
type (Table 7) of BS 7211:1998;
(k)
300/500V fire resistant, thermosetting insulated, twin, 3-core
or 4-core, sheathed copper cable with solid or stranded
conductor and un-insulated circuit protective conductor, with
low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by
fire, suitable for conductor operating temperature not
exceeding 90 oC – BS 7629-1:2008. Fire resistant cable shall
also comply with the fire performance requirement specified in
Clause C2.1.6;
(l)
600/1000V cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated,
single-core or multi-core, sheathed with or without armour,
copper cables with solid or stranded conductor and with low
emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
90oC – IEC 60502-1:2004; or
(m)
450/750V, fire resistant, thermosetting insulated, single-core or
multi-core, sheathed with or without armour copper cables,
with solid or stranded conductor and with low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 90 oC. Fire
resistant cable shall also comply with the fire performance
requirement specified in Clause C2.1.6.
Flexible Cables
Flexible cables shall be:
(a)
300/500V ordinary PVC insulated, multi-core, PVC sheathed
flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 70oC – code designation 60227
IEC 53 of IEC 60227-5:2003;
Section C2
Page 3 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
300/500V ordinary tough rubber insulated, multi-core, rubber
sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 60oC – code designation
60245 IEC 53 of IEC 60245-4:2004;
(c)
450/750V rubber insulated, single-core or multi-core, heavy
polychloroprene or other equivalent synthetic elastomer
sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 60oC – code designation
60245 IEC 66 of IEC 60245-4:2004;
(d)
300/500V PVC insulated, single-core or twisted twin, nonsheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for internal wiring and
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 70oC – code
designation H05V-K of BS 6004:2000;
(e)
300/500V PVC insulated, single-core or twisted twin, nonsheathed heat resisting flexible copper cable, suitable for
internal wiring and conductor operating temperature not
exceeding 90oC – code designation H05V2-K of BS 6004:2000;
(f)
300/500V braided, silicone rubber insulated, single core, nonsheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 180oC – code designation
H05SJ-K of BS 6007:2006;
(g)
300/500V flexible copper cable, suitable for use with appliance
and equipment intended for domestic, office and similar
environments to BS 6500:2000;
(h)
300/500V ordinary duty rubber insulated, 3-core or 4-core,
sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 60oC – code designation
H05RR-F of BS 7919:2001;
(i)
450/750V heavy duty rubber insulated, single-core, twin, 3core, 4-core or 5-core, PCP or equivalent synthetic elastomer
sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 60oC – code designation
H07RN-F of BS 7919:2001;
(j)
450/750V heavy duty heat resisting ethylene propylene rubber
(EPR) or equivalent synthetic elastomer insulated, single-core,
twin, 3-core, 4-core or 5-core, and CSP or equivalent synthetic
elastomer sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 90oC – code
designation H07BN4-F of BS 7919:2001;
(k)
300/500V heat resistant, ethylene-vinyl acetate rubber or other
equivalent synthetic elastomer insulated, single-core, nonsheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 110oC – code designation
60245 IEC 07 of IEC 60245-7:1994;
Section C2
Page 4 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C2.1.5
(l)
450/750V heat resistant, ethylene-vinyl acetate rubber or other
equivalent synthetic elastomer insulated, single-core, nonsheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 110oC – code designation
60245 IEC 05 of IEC 60245-7:1994; or
(m)
300/500V heat resistant, silicone rubber insulated, single-core,
non-sheathed flexible copper cable, ,suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 180oC - code designation
60245 IEC 03 of IEC 60245-3:1994.
Conductor
Conductors of wiring cables shall be of high-conductivity copper and
all meet the requirements of IEC 60228:2004.
The CSA of the neutral conductor shall not be less than that of the
phase conductors, unless otherwise specified.
C2.1.6
Fire Performance of Fire Resistant Cables
The materials for insulation and outer covering, if exists, of fire
resistant cable shall be of low emission of smoke and corrosive gases
characteristics when affected by fire. Fire resistant cable shall be type
tested to the following fire performance requirement:
(i)
Circuit integrity
:
BS 6387:1994;
(ii)
Flame propagation
:
IEC 60332-1-1:2004;
IEC 60332-1-2:2004 or
IEC 60332-3-24:2009;
(iii)
Smoke emission
:
IEC 61034-2:2006; and
(iv)
Acid gas emission
:
IEC 60754-1:1994.
IEC 60754-2:1997,
EN 50267-2-1:1999 or
EN 50267-2-2:1999.
C2.2
STEEL CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES
C2.2.1
Steel Conduit
Steel conduits, except flexible conduits, shall be of heavy gauge,
screwed, longitudinally welded. All steel conduits shall comply with
IEC 61386-21:2002.
Section C2
Page 5 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C2.2.2
Steel Flexible Conduit
Steel flexible conduits and solid type brass adaptors shall comply
with IEC 61386-23:2002. In addition, the steel flexible conduits shall
be metallic type with PVC oversheath. Oversheath materials of low
emission of smoke and corrosive gas characteristics shall be provided
where specified. However, neither oversheath of PVC nor materials
with low emission of smoke and corrosive gas characteristics shall be
required for installations within ventilated ceiling void.
The flexible conduit adaptor shall comprise two parts, an inner core
and an outer ferrule. The inner core screws into the bore of the
conduit together with an outer ferrule which caps off the end of the
conduit, so that the adaptor can provide an extremely strong joint.
The core shall lock against the outer ferrule and isolate any sharp cut
edges in the conduit.
C2.2.3
Steel Conduit Fitting
All steel conduit fittings shall comply with IEC 61386-21:2002 and
other associated Parts of the Standard.
Adaptable boxes complete with covers shall be of cast iron or
galvanized steel. Boxes of the preferred sizes as given in IEC 606701:2003 and other associated Parts of the Standard shall be used.
Circular boxes, dome covers and hook covers shall be of galvanized
malleable cast iron complying with IEC 60670-1:2003. Ceiling
mounted boxes shall be of deep pattern type having an internal depth
of not less than 60 mm.
Bushes and tube ends shall be of brass.
Distance (spacing) saddles shall be of galvanized cast iron. The
screws for tightening and fixing the saddles shall be of brass.
Solid or inspection tee-pieces or elbows shall NOT be used on any
conduit installation.
C2.2.4
Metal Boxes for Electrical Accessories
Metal boxes complete with covers for enclosure of electrical
accessories in conduit installation shall comply with IEC 606701:2003. Boxes used to house accessories such as domestic switches,
socket outlets, spur units, etc. shall be 35 mm and 47 mm deep. The
depth chosen shall be suitable for the accessories to be housed.
C2.2.5
Class of Protection against Corrosion
Steel conduits and couplers shall be hot-dip zinc coated or sheradized
both inside and outside against corrosion and shall be tested to
comply with IEC 61386-1:2008.
Section C2
Page 6 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Steel or ferrous conduit fittings shall be hot-dip zinc coated or
sheradized both inside and outside against corrosion and shall be
tested to comply with IEC 61386-1:2008.
Metal boxes complete with covers for the enclosure of electrical
accessories shall have heavy protection both inside and outside in
accordance with IEC 60670-1:2003 (e.g. hot-dip galvanized coating
or sheradizing).
C2.2.6
Screw
Screws used for fixing boxes and spacing saddle, and for tightening
covers and spacing saddles shall have ISO metric threads. They shall
be of brass or steel and if of steel they shall be protected against
corrosion by a finish at least equal to the zinc coating specified in
BS 3382-2:1961. Electro-brass plated screws or self tapping screws
shall NOT be used.
C2.3
PLASTIC OR PVC CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES
C2.3.1
Rigid Conduit and Conduit Fittings
Rigid plain PVC conduits shall comply with IEC 61386-21:2002 and
rigid plain PVC conduit fittings shall comply with IEC 61386-1:2008
and other associated Parts of the Standard. Conduits shall have
classification as below:
C2.3.2
(a)
According to mechanical properties - for heavy mechanical
stress; and
(b)
According to temperature - with a permanent application
temperature range of -5C to 60C.
Pliable Conduit
Pliable conduits shall be formed of self-extinguishing plastic
materials and shall comply with IEC 61386-22:2002 and pliable
conduit fittings shall comply with IEC 61386-1:2008 and other
associated Parts of the Standard. Conduits shall be suitable for
installation, storage or transport at temperature range of -5°C to
+60C.
C2.3.3
Plastic or PVC Conduit Boxes
Plastic or PVC adaptable boxes and plastic or PVC boxes for
enclosure of electrical accessories shall be of heavy duty having
dimensions complying with IEC 60670-1:2003. They shall be
interchangeable with the steel boxes complying with the same IEC
standard. The minimum wall thickness of boxes shall be 2 mm.
Section C2
Page 7 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C2.3.4
Plastic Couplers
Plain, moulded slip-type couplers and expansion type couplers to IEC
61386-1:2008 shall be used in the jointing of conduits.
Adhesive/jointing cement for jointing shall be the type recommended
by the manufacturer.
C2.4
STEEL TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES
C2.4.1
Steel Trunking
Steel surface and raised floor trunking systems shall be compatible to
the requirements laid down in IEC 61084-1:1993. The body and
cover of the surface and raised floor trunkings shall be fabricated with
sheet steel having a minimum thickness as indicated in
Table C2.4.4-1.
Steel flush floor and underfloor trunking shall be compatible to the
requirements laid down in IEC 61084-1:1993 and IEC 61084-22:2003. The body and access cover of the flush floor and underfloor
trunkings shall be subjected to external mechanical loads and
fabricated with sheet steel having a nominal thickness as indicated in
Table C2.4.4-2.
Manufacturer‟s standard fittings such as tee or angle pieces,
connectors, junction boxes, end caps, modular service outlet boxes
and panels, etc. shall be used throughout the trunking system unless
prior approval has been obtained from the Architect.
C2.4.2
Class of Protection against Corrosion
Steel trunking and associated fittings, except service outlet panel of
modular service outlet box, shall have class 3 protection against
corrosion in accordance with BS 4678-4:1971, i.e. hot-dip zinc
coating to BS EN 10143:2006 with a minimum coating designation of
G275. The service outlet panel of modular service outlet box shall be
epoxy coated unless otherwise specified.
C2.4.3
Construction
Steel surface and raised floor trunkings shall be of square or
rectangular cross section. One side of the trunking shall be
removable or hinged. No projection from screw or other sharp object
will be allowed inside the trunking.
Steel flush foor and underfloor trunkings shall be designed and
constructed to permit the laying of the trunking on a structural floor
without ingress of water or cement whilst the floor is screeded or is
cleaned by wet-treatment. The trunking systems shall be constructed
with a degree of protection against water at least IPX4 according to
IEC 60529:2001.
Section C2
Page 8 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
The flush floor and underfloor trunkings shall be embedded in floor
screed. The access cover surface of the flush floor trunking shall be
flushed with the finished floor level.
C2.4.4
Dimension
Unless otherwise specified, the sizes, body and cover thickness, and
preferred length of steel and raised floor trunking, are given in Table
C2.4.4-1.
Unless otherwise specified, the sizes, body and cover thickness and
preferred lengths for flush floor and underfloor trunking shall be as
given in Table C2.4.4-2.
The dimensions of the trunking for the installation shall be the same
throughout.
Trunking to special order having dimensions differing from the
Tables C2.4.4-1 and C2.4.4-2 may be used, provided that they meet
all the requirements as stated in this Specification and prior approval
has been obtained from the Architect.
Table C2.4.4-1 Size, Body and Cover Thickness, and Preferred
Length of Steel Surface and Raised Floor Trunkings
External
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
dimension (mm) thickness of body thickness of body thickness of
with return flange without return cover (mm)
(mm)
flange (mm)
50
75
75
100
100
100
150
150
150
150
200
200
200
200
200
300
300
300
300
300
x 50
1.0
1.0
1.0
x 50
1.2
1.2
1.2
x 75
1.2
1.2
1.2
x 50
1.2
1.2
1.2
x 75
1.2
1.2
1.2
x 100
1.2
1.4
1.2
x 50
1.2
1.4
1.2
x 75
1.2
1.4
1.2
x 100
1.2
1.4
1.2
x 150
1.4
1.6
1.2
x 50
1.6
-1.4
x 75
1.6
-1.4
x 100
1.6
-1.4
x 150
1.6
-1.4
x 200
1.6
-1.4
x 50
1.6
-1.6
x 75
1.6
-1.6
x 100
1.6
-1.6
x 150
1.6
-1.6
x 300
2.0
-1.6
Preferred lengths: 3 m (minimum: 2 m; maximum: 3 m)
Minimum thickness of partitions or dividers: 1.0 mm.
Section C2
Page 9 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Table C2.4.4-2 Body and Cover Thickness and Preferred Lengths of
Steel Flush Floor and Underfloor Trunkings
Minimum Minimum
Minimum
thickness of thickness of thickness of
cover (mm) body (mm) partition (mm)
Flush Floor Trunking
For office applications
For mechanical plant
room applications
2.5
1.5
1.5
6
1.5
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.6
1.6
1.0
Underfloor Trunking
External width (excluding
flange projections)
Up to 100 mm
Above 100 mm and up to
300 mm
Preferred length: 3 m ( minimum: 2m; maximum: 3m)
C2.4.5
Connection between Lengths of Trunking
Connection between adjacent lengths of trunkings, tee or angle pieces,
accessories, etc. shall be made by connectors. The two adjacent ends
of trunking shall be fixed so that no relative movement can occur
between them.
Electrical continuity shall be achieved by means of connecting a
continuity bonding link of adequate size across the two adjacent ends
of the trunking. The continuity bonding link shall be of such
materials to as to prevent electrolytic corrosion.
C2.4.6
Steel Surface Trunking Cover
Trunking and fittings shall have removable or hinged covers
extending over the entire length. The covers shall be of the same
material and finish as those of the trunking body.
Removable covers shall be held in position on the trunking either by
the natural elasticity of the material of the cover (e.g. spring capped
trunking) or by other approved means which hold the covers tightly
onto the trunking body and cause no damage to the cables inside.
Section C2
Page 10 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Bends, tee junctions, etc. shall also be fitted with removable or hinged
covers of the same construction as that of the trunking.
C2.4.7
Screw
Screws used for securing a cover or connector and for fixing a
trunking shall have ISO metric threads. They shall be of brass or
steel. Steel screws shall be protected against corrosion by a finish at
least equal to the zinc coating specified in BS 3382-2:1961. Electrobrass plated screws or self tapping screws shall NOT be used.
Projection of screws inside a trunking or a trunking fitting will not be
allowed.
C2.5
PLASTIC OR PVC TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES
PVC trunking and fittings shall comply with IEC 61084-1:1993. The nominal
dimensions of PVC cable trunking shall be selected from any of the following
numbers in mm:
12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 25.0, 32.0, 37.5, 40.0, 50.0, 75.0, 100.0 and 150.0
Cover for trunking shall be secured either by purpose-made rivets or clip-on
mechanism to manufacturer‟s standard.
Section C2
Page 11 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C3
POWER CABLES AND ASSOCIATED CABLING FACILITIES
C3.1
GENERAL
Power cables are mainly for electricity supply and distribution. They shall be
manufactured under a recognized quality surveillance scheme (e.g. British
Approvals Service for Cables (BASEC) licence or the HAR scheme recognized
by the European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization, CENELEC,
etc.) and bear the appropriate marking (e.g. BASEC mark or HAR mark, etc.) of
the quality surveillance scheme.
Power cables shall have grading as specified in Clause C3.2 below.
Cabling facilities will include cable ducts, cable trays and cable ladder.
C3.2
TYPES OF POWER CABLES
Power cables for supply and distribution shall be one or a combination of the
following types as specified in the Particular Specification or on the Drawings:
(a)
600/1000V cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, single-core,
two-core, three-core or four-core, PVC sheathed with armour copper
cables, with solid or stranded conductor, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 90oC – IEC 60502-1:2004;
(b)
600/1000V cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, single-core,
two-core, three-core or four-core, sheathed with armour copper cable,
with solid or stranded conductor, with low emission of smoke and
corrosive gases when affected by fire, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 90oC – IEC60502-1:2004;
(c)
600/1000V fire resistant, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated,
two-core, three-core or four-core, sheathed with armour copper cable,
with solid or stranded conductor, with low emission of smoke and
corrosive gases when affected by fire, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 90oC - Category F2 of BS 7846:2000. Fire
resistant cable shall also comply with the fire performance requirement
specified in Clause C2.1.6;
(d)
500V (light duty grade) mineral insulated, single-core, two-core, threecore or four-core, copper sheathed copper cable with – IEC 607021:2002 and IEC 60702-2:2002;
(e)
750V (heavy duty grade) mineral insulated, single-core, two-core, threecore or four-core, copper sheathed copper cable – IEC 60702-1:2002 and
IEC 60702-2:2002; or
(f)
600/1000V PVC insulated, single-core, two-core, three-core or four-core,
PVC sheathed with armour copper cables, with solid or stranded
Section C3
Page 1 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
conductor, suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
70oC – IEC 60502-1:2004.
C3.3
CONDUCTOR
The requirement of conductor as stated in Clause C2.1.5 shall apply.
C3.4
ARMOUR
The armour shall be of galvanised steel wire for multi-core cables. Single core
armoured cables shall be provided with non-ferrous armour. Use of steel
armour for single core cable is not accepted.
C3.5
(NOT USED)
C3.6
FIRE PERFORMANCE OF FIRE RESISTANT CABLES
The requirements as stated in Clause C2.1.6 shall apply.
C3.7
IDENTIFICATION OF CORE
Each core of a PVC or XLPE power cable shall be identified continuously
throughout its entire length.
For a mineral-insulated cable each core shall be identifiable at its termination by
the application of sleeves or discs of appropriate colors as prescribed below.
Identification sleeves shall comply with BS 3858:1992, Type 3, where
appropriate and shall have temperature rating similar to that of the sealant.
The identification shall take the form of appropriate color or number codes in
accordance with Table C3.7, or the relevant Specifications.
Section C3
Page 2 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Table C3.7 – Core Identification of Power Cable
Function of core
Color code
Number code
Phase conductor of a single
phase circuit
Brown
L
Phase conductor of a threephase circuit
Brown or black or
grey according to
phase concerned
L1 or L2 or L3
according to phase
concerned
Neutral conductor
Blue
N
Core used as protective conductors shall have an exclusive color identification of
green-and-yellow.
C3.8
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MINERAL INSULATED (MI) CABLE
C3.8.1
Outer Covering
MI cables shall have plastic outer covering when installed under the
following conditions where:
(a)
the cables are exposed to weather;
(b)
the atmosphere is likely to cause corrosion;
(c)
the cables are laid upon or fixed direct to a concrete or stone
surface subject to dampness;
(d)
the cables are laid upon or fixed to a zinc coated surface, e.g. a
galvanised cable tray or corrugated sheeting, subject to
dampness; or
(e)
the cables are buried direct in the ground.
MI cables buried in concrete brick or other building structure,
installed in refrigerated space or areas where the temperature is
persistently below 0C shall be without plastic outer covering.
The outer covering shall be of low smoke halogen free, or low smoke
zero halogen, i.e. evolving very low content of smoke or corrosive
gases during combustion when tested to IEC 60754-1:1994 and other
associated Parts of the Standard.
C3.8.2
Restriction of Use
MI cables shall not be used in discharged lighting circuits unless
suitable precautions, approved by the Architect, have been taken to
avoid excessive voltage. MI cables shall also not be used for earthed
Section C3
Page 3 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
concentric wiring system.
C3.8.3
Cable Saddle and Clip
Saddles and clips for fixing MI cables shall be purpose-made by the
cable manufacturer for this purpose. Cables with plastic outer
covering shall be fixed by saddles or clips having also plastic
covering.
C3.9
CABLE DUCT
Cable ducts shall be formed from concrete, PVC, metal or such other materials
as may be specified by the Architect relating to a particular job.
Metallic ducting shall comply with the same requirement as metal trunking.
Ducts cast in-situ in concrete shall be so formed that the radial thickness of the
concrete or screed surrounding the cross-section of the complete ducting shall
not be less than 15 mm at every point.
C3.10
PERFORATED METAL CABLE TRAY
C3.10.1
Material
Perforated metal cable trays shall be formed from plain steel sheet
complying with BS EN 10149-1:1996, and shall be hot-dipped
galvanised to ISO 1460:1992 and ISO 1461:1999 after perforation.
C3.10.2
Dimensions of Tray
Cable trays shall have typical dimensions as shown on Table C3.10.2.
Table C3.10.2 – Typical Dimensions
C3.10.3
Nominal
Width
Minimum height
of upstand
Thickness of
steel sheet
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
Minimum
height of
return flange
(mm)
100 and 150
12
1.2
--
225 and 250
12
1.5
--
300 and 350
20
1.5
12
400 and 450
20
1.5
12
500 and 550
20
2.0
12
600 and 700
20
2.0
12
800 and 1000
20
2.0
12
20
2.0
12
1200
Bend Piece
Section C3
Page 4 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Bend pieces shall be of the same material, thickness and finish as the
main body of the cable tray and shall have an inner radius of 50mm
and a straight length of 100mm at each end.
C3.10.4
Perforation on Bend
No perforation shall be made in the circular portion of all bend pieces
having a nominal width of 150mm or 100mm. Perforation may be
allowed in bend pieces having a nominal width of 225mm or above
provided that the perforation is made along a line passing through the
centre of curvature of the bend pieces and set at an angle  to the
normal of the axis of the cable tray. The values of  are shown in
Table C3.10.4.
Table C3.10.4 – Location of Perforation in Bend Piece of Cable Tray
C3.10.5
Nominal width of cable tray
Value of 
225 mm to 350 mm
45°
400 mm and above
30° and 60°
Tee Piece
Tee pieces shall be of the same material, thickness and finish as the
main body of the cable tray. The distance measured between the
point of inter-section and the end of the tee piece shall not be less
than 100mm.
C3.10.6
Cable Tray Accessories
Manufacturer's standard items of accessories shall be used. Site
fabrication of accessories will only be allowed upon approval of the
Architect and shall be kept to a minimum.
Where special sections are required, the material, thickness and finish
shall be as specified for the standard items.
C3.11
WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY (CABLE BASKET)
C3.11.1
General
The wire mesh cable tray system shall be provided for the support and
accommodation of data and/or telecommunication cables where
specified in the Contract or on the Drawings. The wire mesh cable
tray system shall be of proprietary product complying with IEC
61537:2006.
C3.11.2
Material
Section C3
Page 5 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Unless otherwise specified, the wire mesh cable tray shall be
manufactured from steel wires and hot dipped galvanised to ISO
1461:1999 after formation of the cable tray.
C3.11.3
Fittings and Accessories
All fittings and accessories associated with the installation of the wire
mesh cable tray system shall be supplied by the same manufacturer
with the same finish. All the accessories and tools for the connection
of straight run pieces, formation of bends, risers, reducers, T-branch,
etc. shall be provided by the manufacturer.
C3.11.4
Construction of Wire Mesh Cable Tray
The steel wires of wire mesh cable trays shall be welded together and
bent into rigid basket shape. The up-stand edges shall have a
minimum height 50mm to contain the cables. The surface of all
system components, which come into contact with cables, shall not
cause damage to the cables when installed according to the
manufacturer‟s recommendation.
C3.12
CABLE LADDER
C3.12.1
Material
Generally, unless otherwise specified, all cable ladder fittings and
accessories mentioned below shall be manufactured from hot rolled
steel to BS EN 10149-1:1996 and then hot dipped galvanised to ISO
1460:1992 and ISO 1461:1999 after fabrication.
For heavily corrosive environments where specified in the Contract,
Specification or on the Drawings, cable ladder fittings and accessories
shall be manufactured from stainless steel 316S31 to ISO 68313:1986.
C3.12.2
Fittings and Accessories
All fittings and accessories applied to the same cable ladder system
shall be supplied by the same manufacturer to the same finish. In
addition to straight ladders, the standard product range of the same
cable ladder system shall at least include 90° bends, equal tees, fourway crossovers, 45° internal risers, 45° external risers, 90° internal
risers, 90° external risers, straight reducers, left-hand offset reducers,
right-hand offset reducers, various jointing couplers, various
supporting brackets and hangers, various connectors, and various bolt
and nuts.
C3.12.3
Construction of Cable Ladder
Cable ladder shall be of “heavy duty” type. The two rails shall be
90mm minimum in height with top and bottom flanges of sufficient
Section C3
Page 6 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
strength. The rungs shall be spaced at 300mm centers maximum and
shall have slots for cable fixing. The working depth (depth between
top edge of rail and top surface of rung) shall be 60mm minimum.
Section C3
Page 7 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C4
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
C4.1
WIRING ACCESSORIES - GENERAL
Wiring accessories shall meet the general requirements of BS 5733:1995.
Unless otherwise specified, they shall be white or ivory in color, uniform in
color and appearance throughout an installation.
Moulded box or pattress and steel or cast iron box for the enclosure of wiring
accessories shall comply with IEC 60670-1:2003 and other associated Parts of
the Standard and shall meet the requirements specified in this Section and
Sections B2, B4 & C2 of this Specification where appropriate.
C4.2
DOMESTIC SWITCHES
C4.2.1
General
Switch for domestic and similar purposes shall comply with IEC
60669-1:2007.
Switch mounted outdoor, or in positions where it may be exposed to
rain or water, shall be of watertight construction with minimum IP 54
protection in accordance with IEC 60529:2009.
C4.2.2
Lighting Switch
Lighting switch shall be of the microgap type suitable for use in a.c.
circuits, and shall be of the quick make-and-break type when used in
d.c. circuits. The front plate shall be of plastic insulating material.
Suspension pear type switches shall not be used.
Lighting switch shall be single pole of rated fluorescent load not less
than 5AX or 10AX as specified in the Particular Specification or
Drawings.
C4.2.3
Double Pole Switch for Appliance
Double pole switch shall be integrated with a pilot light formed by a
neon lamp with a resistor and a red colored lens.
C4.2.4
Sparkless Switch
Sparkless switch shall be of the tilting mercury type. The contacts of
a sparkless switch shall be contained in a sealed glass capsule.
Section C4
Page 1 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C4.2.5
Time Switch
Time switch shall be designed for 7 days, 24-hour operation and shall
be driven by a quartz oscillator synchronous motor or an electronic
operated clock. Time setting shall be accomplished by plugging in
setting pins and a minimum setting period of 15 minutes shall be
achievable.
All component parts shall be of robust design,
constructed from durable materials and capable of maintaining proper
functions and high accuracy and not subject to easy wear and tear
during normal operation. The whole unit shall be encompassed in a
metal or moulded box with ingress protection not less than IP53 to
IEC 60529:2009. The box shall be suitable for wall mounting and
entry of a 20 mm conduit. An inspection glass window and quick
action fastener shall be fitted on the front lid of the box.
Time switch shall incorporate the following features:
C4.3
(a)
The clock shall be of direct reading type with minute
adjustable knob to set time precisely to the minute. Accuracy
of the clock shall be within  15 sec per month;
(b)
A “long life” cassette type alkaline battery back-up device
shall be incorporated to provide 360 hours continuous
operation upon power failure;
(c)
The switch shall consists of single pole, single throw silver
contacts capable of accommodating a minimum load of 20A at
250V a.c. resistive, 7.5A inductive at 0.7 power factor or 10A
incandescent lamps. The contacts shall be capable of being
isolated for external circuit connection;
(d)
A changeover switch shall be provided for selecting the
ON/AUTO/OFF mode of operation; and
(e)
Rated power consumption of the whole unit shall not exceed
2.5W.
SOCKET OUTLETS
C4.3.1
General
All socket outlets shall be of 3-pin shuttered type. Socket outlet and
plug rated at 13A shall comply with BS 1363-2:1995. Socket outlet
and plug rated at 5A or 15A for general application shall comply with
BS 546:1950.
Section C4
Page 2 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Socket outlet used for supplying appliance mounted at high level shall
be unswitched, otherwise it shall be fitted with an integral switch.
The integral switch shall be of single pole, forming part of the same
front plate as the socket outlet, and with clear indication of the
ON/OFF switching position.
Weatherproof type socket outlet shall comply with IEC 60309-2:2005
and be provided with a push-on cap and cap retaining ring or a screwon cap with rubber gasket. The socket outlet shall have ingress
protection of at least IPX4 to IEC 60529:2009.
C4.3.2
Shaver Supply Unit
Electric shaver supply unit shall comply with IEC 61558-1:2005 and
shall be all insulated, suitable for both flush and surface mounting.
Each unit shall comprise two outlets, one for 110V and the other for
220V, obtained from tappings of a double wound transformer to
IEC 61558-2-5:1997 and with unearthed secondary windings.
C4.3.3
Plug
Unless otherwise specified, plug for 13A socket outlet shall be fitted
with a fuse to IEC 60269-1:2009, rated at 13A.
Each plug shall be fitted with a cord grip which is so designed that no
stress will be exerted on the conductors of the flexible cable
connected to it at the terminals.
C4.4
CONNECTION UNITS
C4.4.1
Blank
C4.4.2
Switched or Unswitched Fused Connection Unit
The connection unit is intended for final connection to a fixed
equipment or appliance which has a full load current not exceeding
13A. It shall be of double pole type with neon/LED indicator
meeting the requirements of BS 1363-1:1995. It shall incorporate a
fuse link to IEC 60269-1:2009 rated to suit the appliance to be
connected in the pole connecting to the phase conductor. An earth
terminal shall also be provided for the connection of the circuit
protective conductor to the appliance.
C4.5
INSULATED TERMINAL BLOCK
The rated voltage of a terminal block shall not be less than 435V between
terminals and 250V to earth.
Terminal block shall comprise copper connectors with screw connections, all
contained within a moulded block suitable for working temperature up to 100C.
Section C4
Page 3 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Terminals shall be designed to clamp the conductors to the metal surface with
sufficient contact pressure but without damaging the conductors. With the
largest recommended conductor in position, and tightly clamped, there shall be
at least two full threads of the screw engaging in the connector.
C4.6
LIGHTING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
C4.6.1
Luminaire Track System
Luminaire track system shall comply with IEC 60570:2003. It shall
be designed for ordinary interior use for mounting on, or suspended
from wall or ceiling. The track shall be of two or four-pole with
provision for earthing, with a rated voltage not exceeding 250V a.c. to
earth and a rated current not exceeding 32A per conductor for
distribution to luminaires.
C4.6.2
Photocell Device
Photocell device shall comply with BS 667:2005 and shall have good
tolerances in physical dimensions and with no moving parts. An
additional circuitry shall be provided to achieve a delay of at least
30 seconds so as to eliminate switching due to lightning or other short
period changes in illumination.
C4.6.3
Ceiling Rose
Ceiling rose of maximum rating of 6A at 250V shall comply with BS
67:1987 and shall be ivory or white moulding with outside diameter
not less than 63mm and 50.8mm fixing centres, 3-plate pillar type
with earth terminal and with integral cord-grip.
C4.6.4
Lampholder
Batten lampholder shall be of bayonet type complying with IEC
61184:2009 or Edison screw type complying with IEC 60238:2008.
The lampholder shall be manufactured from moulded hard white or
ivory color plastic material which shall be unaffected by the heat
from the lamp.
Lampholder for weatherproof luminaire shall be porcelain and
comply with IEC 61184:2009.
Lampholder for use with tubular fluorescent lamp shall be of bi-pin
type, complying with IEC 61184:2009, IEC 60061-1:2005 and IEC
60061-2:2005. It shall be made of moulded white plastic material and
designed to hold the tube in position without the need for additional
clip.
Section C4
Page 4 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C4.7
MEASURING INSTRUMENT
C4.7.1
Watt-hour Meter
Watt-hour meter shall comply with IEC 62053-11:2003. The register
shall be of drum type and the principal unit in which the register
records shall be in kilowatt-hours (kWh). The casing shall be of
black phenolic moulding with an inspection glass window.
Watt-hour meter shall have Class 2 accuracy calibrated at the normal
working voltage and frequency.
C4.7.2
Ammeter and Voltmeter
Ammeter and voltmeter shall be of moving iron type, moving magnet
type or moving coil with transducer type complying with IEC 600511:1997 to IEC 60051-9:1995. The accuracy class shall be "2.5" or
better in accordance with IEC 60051-1:1997 to IEC 60051-9:1995.
The dial shall have a nominal diameter of 100 mm and shall have a
total scale deflection of 240° for ammeter and 120° for voltmeter.
An ammeter for any circuit of rating up to 60A may be connected
directly in series with the circuit, so that the full circuit current passes
through the instrument. For a circuit of rating exceeding 60A, the
ammeter shall be fed through the secondary winding of a current
transformer, and shall give a full scale deflection with a secondary
current of 5A.
C4.7.3
Current Transformer
Current transformer for use with measuring instrument shall comply
with IEC 60044-1:2003 having rated secondary current of 5A and
rated output suitably matched with the loading of the measuring
instrument. The accuracy class shall be "1" in accordance with
IEC 60044-1:2003.
C4.7.4
Selector Switch for Ammeter
Where a single ammeter is used to measure the current in each phase
or the neutral of a three phase circuit, the ammeter shall be connected
to a selector switch which shall enable the ammeter to be inserted in
series with each phase and the neutral in turn. When the ammeter is
connected to the secondary windings of the measuring current
transformers, the selector switch shall have facilities to prevent the
current transformers from being open circuited during change-over
and at "OFF" position.
Section C4
Page 5 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C4.7.5
Selector Switch for Voltmeter
In a three phase circuit in which a single voltmeter is used to measure
the various voltages, the voltmeter shall be provided with a selector
switch to enable the following voltages to be measured:
(a)
voltage between each phase to neutral; and
(b)
voltage between any two phases.
The selector switch shall also have an "OFF" position.
C4.7.6
Meter Chamber
Meter chamber for housing watt-hour meter shall be made from
galvanized steel of not less than 1.6 mm thick and shall be of ample
size to accommodate the required number of watt-hour meters and
meter cables. Provision shall be made to enable the watt-hour meters
to be fixed inside the chamber without removing the chamber from
the wall or other supports. Meter fixing screws shall not project
through the back of the chamber.
When a meter chamber is installed indoor, it shall be fitted with a
hinged metal front cover. Meter chamber installed outdoor shall be
waterproof, with screw-on type front cover. The ingress protection
for the outdoor type shall be at least IP 54 in accordance with IEC
60529:2009.
A glass window of adequate size shall be provided on the front cover
of the meter chamber to enable the registers and serial numbers of the
watt-hour meters to be read easily.
C4.8
OCCUPANCY AND DAYLIGHT SENSOR
C4.8.1
General
The sensor shall be suitable to operate under the following conditions:
Operating voltage:
Operating environment:
: 12 – 36V D.C. or 220V  6% A.C.
: Temperature
: 0℃ – 40℃ indoor,
: Relative humidity: less than 95% noncondensing
Where the computerized lighting management system is specified, the
sensor shall be capable of networking and integrating into the system.
Where the control of air conditioning units by the sensors is specified,
the sensors shall be capable to control the designated air conditioning
units as required to meet the contract requirements. For standalone
application, the occupancy sensor shall be capable of controlling the
lighting circuit connected for direct on/off switching or dimming
performance.
Section C4
Page 6 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C4.8.2
C4.8.3
Passive Infrared (PIR) sensor
(a)
PIR sensor shall detect occupancy in the control area by
sensing the difference between heat emission from human
body in motion and the background space.
(b)
The PIR sensor shall be provided with built-in heat sensing
detector resided behind an optical lens.
(c)
The PIR sensor shall have 360o field of view with provision of
mounting external covering mask for fine adjustment of the
detection zone to meet the various applications.
(d)
When the sensor is mounted under the ceiling at 2.4m above
the finished floor level, the minimum detection coverage area
shall not be less than 5m in diameter.
(e)
A built-in LED lamp shall be provided and illuminated once
the sensor detects movement within the control area.
(f)
Sensing sensitivity and extent of detection area shall be
adjustable in field.
(g)
The sensor shall be provided with its own delay timer for
adjusting the delay of switching off the lights between 5
seconds to 20 minutes when no occupancy being sensed.
Ultrasonic sensor
(a)
Ultrasonic sensor shall detect occupancy by sensing frequency
shift between the emitted ultrasonic wave (normally in the
range of 32 -40kHz) and the reflected wave in the controlled
space.
(b)
The sensor shall comprise one or two pairs of ultrasonic
transducers as specified. For each pair of transducers, one
transducer shall be used for emitting while the other one for
receiving signal.
(c)
The sensor shall have either 180° or 360° field of view to meet
the application need.
(d)
Sensing sensitivity and extent of detection area shall be
adjustable in field.
(e)
The sensor shall be provided with its own delay timer for
adjusting the delay of switching off the lights between 5
seconds to 20 minutes when no occupancy being sensed.
Section C4
Page 7 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C4.8.4
(f)
When the sensor is mounted under the ceiling at 2.4m above
the floor level, the minimum area of coverage shall not be less
than 40 m2 under the 360° field of view.
(g)
LED shall be provided with the sensor to indicate motion being
detected.
(h)
Air current (airflow) compensation device shall be provided
for sensitivity adjustment.
Dual Technology sensor
(a)
Dual technology occupancy sensor shall use both passive
infrared heat change and frequency shifts in ultrasonic wave to
detect occupancy.
(b)
The sensor shall comprise one or two pairs of ultrasonic
transducers and one PIR sensing detector. For each pair of
ultrasonic transducers, one transducer shall be used for
emitting while the other one for receiving signal.
(c)
Ultrasonic detection and PIR detection shall be independently
enabled/disabled to suit the application.
(d)
Sensing sensitivity and extent of detection area shall be
adjustable in field.
(e)
Switching on the lighting associated with the occupancy sensor
shall be triggered either by ultrasonic or PIR signal or both.
(f)
The sensor shall be provided with its own delay timer for
adjusting the delay of switching off the lights between 5
seconds to 20 minutes when no occupancy being sensed.
(g)
The ultrasonic sensor shall have either 180o or 360o field of
vision to meet the application need. The PIR sensor shall have
360o field of view with provision of mounting external
covering mask for fine adjustment of the detection zone to
meet the various applications.
(h)
The minimum area coverage shall not be less than 40 m2 when
the sensor is mounted under the ceiling at 2.4m above the floor
level under the 360° field of view.
(i)
Two LEDs shall be provided with the sensor, one to indicate
the detection of movement by PIR and another for movement
indication by ultrasonic.
(j)
Air current (airflow) compensation device shall be provided
for sensitivity adjustment.
Section C4
Page 8 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C4.8.5
Daylight sensor
(a)
Daylight sensor is used to measure and monitor the ambient
light level for switching on/off or dimming the interior lighting
fittings to maintain the setting illuminance in a given area. The
daylight sensor shall connect to the computerized lighting
management system to perform the dimming function.
(b)
The daylight sensor shall has a dynamic light level measuring
ranging 50 -1000 lux.
(c)
The preset light level and its deadband range of maintaining
the preset light level of daylight sensor shall be able to be
adjusted through the computerized lighting management
system. If the light level stays within the deadband, the light
level at the controlled area shall remain at preset level.
(d)
Device shall be incorporated to compensate rapid light
intensity fluctuations.
Section C4
Page 9 of 9
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C5
SWITCHGEAR AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
C5.1
GENERAL
C5.1.1
Scope
This Section specifies the general requirements of switchgear and
associated equipment operating at low voltages, which may be
assembled on site from individual items of components. The
switchgear and associated equipment shall be manufactured to the
relevant current International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
Standards as indicated below:
IEC 60947-1:2007 :
Low voltage switchgear and control gear
Part 1: General rules
IEC 60439-1:2004 :
Type-tested and partially type-tested
assemblies
Other requirements as specified in Clauses C5.1.2 to C5.1.8, both
inclusive, shall also apply to all items of switchgear and associated
equipment where applicable unless explicitly mentioned elsewhere.
Additional and specific requirements for type-tested low-voltage
switchgear and controlgear assemblies (TTA) as described in IEC
60439-1:2004 shall be given in Section C11 of this Specification, the
Particular Specifications, the Drawings and other documents issued
by the Architect.
The component equipment covered in this Section shall include the
following:
(a)
Switches, disconnectors (isolators), fuse-switches and switchfuses;
(b)
Circuit-breakers including air circuit-breakers (ACB), moulded
case circuit-breakers (MCCB), miniature circuit-breakers
(MCB), residual current-operated circuit breakers without
integral overcurrent protection (RCCB) and residual currentoperated circuit breakers with integral overcurrent protection
(RCBO);
(c)
Fuses;
(d)
Busbar chambers and distribution boards; and
(e)
Electromechanical contactors, motor starters and automatic
changeover switches.
Section C5
Page 1 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.1.2
Service Condition
The following service conditions shall apply:
C5.1.3
(a)
Ambient temperature - peak from minus 5C to plus 40C for
4-hours continuously with an average from 0C to plus 35C
over only 24 hours period;
(b)
Altitude - up to 2000 m above sea level;
(c)
Relative humidity - up to 99%;
(d)
Pollution Degree 3 - Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, nonconductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to
condensation; and
(e)
Climatic condition – Tropical (Hong Kong).
Short-circuit Rating and Continuous Current Rating
Switchgear shall be suitably rated for the specified prospective shortcircuit current which can occur at the point of its installation. It shall
also be rated for uninterrupted duty when carrying continuously the
specified full load current. For non-automatic switching devices, the
rated short-time withstanding current shall be at least 12 times of the
maximum rated operational current for 1 second.
Where equipment components are installed in enclosures, they shall
be suitable for operation at the actual maximum temperatures which
will be reached within the enclosures under normal loaded conditions
when the ambient temperature is 40C.
C5.1.4
Voltage Rating
Same as specified in Clause C1.2.
C5.1.5
Degree of Protection for Enclosure
Enclosures for switchgear and associated equipment shall be of
totally enclosed type. For indoor applications, the enclosure shall
have an ingress protection (IP), in accordance with IEC 60529:2009,
of at least IP 41 for the top surface and IP 31 for the other surfaces of
the enclosure. For outdoor applications, the enclosure shall be of at
least IP 54.
C5.1.6
Material
Unless otherwise specified, switchgear and associated equipment
except MCCB and MCB shall be of metalclad. All ferrous metal
parts shall be galvanised or chrome plated unless the final finish has
been painted or enamelled in the manufacturer's factory.
Section C5
Page 2 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
All extraneous conductive parts shall be electrically continuous.
C5.1.7
ON and OFF Indication
The design of a switching device shall incorporate positive means to
indicate clearly and reliably the ON (or CLOSE) and the OFF (or
OPEN) positions of the contacts. Indication of either position shall
only occur when the ON or OFF position on every pole has been
attained. Such indication shall be provided on the outside of the
device and shall be prominently visible to an operator when the
device is installed in the normal manner.
When the switching device is also used for isolation purpose, then an
indication of the OFF position shall occur only when all contacts are
also in the OFF position and the isolating distance between contacts
in every pole has attained a clearance not less than those specified for
disconnectors according to IEC 60947-3:2008.
C5.1.8
Identification of Circuit
Labels or other means of identification shall be provided for every
item of switchgear and associated equipment to indicate the purpose
of the item. The labels shall either be fixed at the front cover of the
equipment or at the inside surface of the hinged front cover.
C5.2
SWITCH, DISCONNECTOR, FUSE-SWITCH AND SWITCH-FUSE
C5.2.1
Scope of Switch
All reference to switches in this and subsequent Clauses shall include
also fuse-switches or switch-fuses.
C5.2.2
General
Switches, disconnectors, fuse-switches and switch-fuses shall comply
with and be tested to IEC 60947-3:2008 and shall have air-break type
contacts which are designed for uninterrupted duties. They shall be
either three pole with switched neutral (four-pole), triple-pole with
neutral link, double-pole, or single pole with neutral link as specified,
and shall each be fitted with earthing facilities. All live parts shall be
efficiently shrouded with insulating materials. Cam switches or
disconnectors shall not be used for circuits of 50A or above.
Each switch shall be supplied in complete unit consisting of a basic
unit contained within an enclosure. Adequate space shall be provided
in the enclosure for proper cable termination, otherwise cable boxes
shall be provided. Fuse carriers, when required, shall be included.
Section C5
Page 3 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.2.3
Operating Mechanism
Switches and disconnectors shall be of the quick-make and quick
break type. The switching mechanism shall be of independent manual
operation with suitable means such as accelerating springs.
For switches and isolators with switched neutral, the neutral pole
shall open after the phase pole contacts and shall close before or at
the same time as the phase pole contacts.
C5.2.4
Construction
The enclosure shall be of totally enclosed type, made up of heavy
gauge sheet metal, adequately rust and dust protected, and finished in
enamel. An earthing terminal shall be provided. The enclosure shall
be suitable for conduit, trunking and armoured cable entries and also
for connection to busbar chamber from top or bottom. Frame sizes
for the range of switches shall be kept to a minimum.
Switches and isolators shall be constructed with an interlocked front
cover to prevent access to the interior parts of the equipment when the
contacts are in the CLOSE position, and to prevent the contacts from
being switched to close when the front cover is opened. However,
facilities shall be provided to allow the checking of the contact
alignments. The fastening devices for the front cover shall be of
captive type.
Insulation material used shall be of non-hygroscopic and nonignitable type. The contacts shall be self-aligning so that contact
pressure can be maintained at all times. All live parts shall be
adequately shielded from the front of the unit but easily accessible for
maintenance by using a tool.
C5.2.5
Operating Performance
The operating performance of the switches and disconnectors shall be
tested in accordance with IEC 60947-3:2008. The number of
operating cycles corresponding to the rated operational current shall
not be less than the values given in Table 4 of IEC 60947-3:2008.
C5.2.6
Utilization Category
Switches shall be to utilization categories of AC-22A or AC-22B for
general applications and AC-23A or AC-23B for electrical motor
circuits; unless otherwise specified.
C5.2.7
Padlocking Facility
Switches and disconnectors shall be fitted with padlocking facilities
so that they can be padlocked in either ON or OFF position.
Section C5
Page 4 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.3
CIRCUIT BREAKER - GENERAL
C5.3.1
Scope of Circuit Breaker
This Clause covers the general requirements of ACB, MCCB, MCB,
and RCCB and RCBO. Additional requirements relevant to a
particular type of circuit breakers shall be given in Clauses C5.4 to
C5.7, both inclusive.
C5.3.2
Number of Poles
Circuit breakers shall be of triple-pole with switched neutral (fourpole), three-pole, double-pole or single-pole, as specified, and shall
have air-break contacts. All poles, except the neutral poles, shall be
designed to have their contacts open or close simultaneously.
C5.3.3
Operating Mechanism
The operating mechanism of a circuit breaker shall be trip-free.
When a MCCB, MCB, RCCB or RCBO trips and opens its contacts,
the operating toggle shall automatically resume the OFF or TRIPPED
position.
C5.3.4
Casing
The casing of an ACB shall be metalclad.
The casing of a MCCB, MCB, RCCB or RCBO shall be formed from
insulating material. The construction shall be capable of withstanding
the appropriate rated short circuit current and reasonably rough use
without fracture or distortion.
C5.3.5
Current Rating
The rated current of a circuit breaker shall be taken as that rated
continuous current when the circuit breaker is installed in the
enclosure together with other equipment if any under normal
operating conditions as specified in the Particular Specification.
C5.4
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER (ACB)
C5.4.1
General
All circuit breakers shall not be of moulded case type. The neutral
pole shall have cross-sectional areas not less than that of respective
phase pole.
Section C5
Page 5 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
ACB shall be of triple-pole with switched neutral (four pole) or triplepole with bolted neutral, as specified, fully metalclad with earth
terminals. It shall be of horizontally withdrawable type having spring
assisted closing and, where specified, motorised spring charger and
push-button electrical control.
ACB shall comply with and be type tested to IEC 60947-2:2009.
Unless otherwise specified, ACB shall have built-in overload
protection with IDMT characteristics and instantaneous short circuit
interruption. Where an ACB is used as the main incomer, the IDMT
characteristics shall be compatible with those of the Electricity
Supplier.
C5.4.2
Performance Characteristic
ACB shall be certified, in accordance with IEC 60947-2:2009, to
have the following performance characteristics:
C5.4.3
(a)
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity - not less than 50 kA;
(b)
Rated short-circuit making capacity - not less than 105 kA;
and
(c)
Rated short-time withstanding current - not less than 50 kA
for 1 second.
Closing and Tripping Operation
Unless otherwise specified, ACB shall be suitable for independent
manual operation utilizing energy stored in a spring. For automatic
closing ACB, the spring mechanism shall be wound by a universal
motor fitted with limiting switches.
In addition, the spring
mechanism shall have manual charging facilities for emergency use.
Unless otherwise specified, trip coil of 24V or 30V d.c. shall be fitted
for local, remote or relay tripping.
"Trip" push buttons shall be provided on the front plate of each ACB.
These buttons shall be direct acting mechanically.
When automatic closing is specified, the control circuit of the ACB
shall be fitted with suitable anti-pumping devices.
C5.4.4
Racking Gear
The enclosure shall be fitted with a set of racking gear which shall
lock the ACB to the runner rails in three distinct positions, i.e.
CONNECTED, TEST and ISOLATED. The ACB can only be closed
fully when it is in the CONNECTED position. In the TEST position,
it shall be possible to operate the ACB to close and test the secondary
and auxiliary contacts, but not the main isolating contacts.
Section C5
Page 6 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
The racking gear shall consist of rollers fitted to the ACB frame. All
parts shall be accurately aligned and adjusted so that the ACB can be
moved freely along the runner rails within the enclosure between the
two extreme positions, i.e. CONNECTED and ISOLATED. Facilities
shall be provided to padlock the ACB in its CONNECTED, TEST or
ISOLATED position.
Position indicators and breaker-condition indicators shall be provided.
These indicators shall be arranged so as to be prominently visible
when the ACB is in its normally installed position.
C5.4.5
Interlocking Facility
Suitable interlocking facilities shall be provided such that:
C5.4.6
(a)
the ACB cannot be plugged in or withdrawn when it has been
closed;
(b)
the ACB cannot be closed until it is fully engaged in either the
CONNECTED or the TEST position;
(c)
the ACB cannot be slowly closed except in the TEST or
ISOLATED position;
(d)
it shall not be possible to initiate the closing action of the
energy stored spring mechanism until the spring has been fully
charged; and
(e)
Where key interlocking is employed, tripping of a closed ACB
shall occur if an attempt is made to remove the trapped key
from the mechanism.
Main Isolating Contacts and Safety Shutter
The main isolating contacts shall be self-aligning and shall be
protected by insulated barriers forming the safety shutter.
2 sets of safety shutters shall be provided for every ACB, one for the
incoming terminals of the main isolating contacts and the other for
the outgoing terminals. Each set shall be capable of being operated
individually.
When the ACB is not in the CONNECTED position, the safety
shutters shall close automatically, screening off the main isolating
contacts. When the ACB is being racked into the CONNECTED
position, the safety shutters shall automatically open the insulating
barrier, thereby allowing the entry of the movable isolating contacts
but without lowering the degree of protection.
Safety shutters shall be fitted with properly designed and securely
fixed warning labels. In addition, facilities shall be provided to
padlock the safety shutters after the ACB has been withdrawn from
the enclosure.
Section C5
Page 7 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.4.7
Contact
All contacts shall be self-aligning, provided with spring accelerated
opening mechanism.
Main contacts shall be fitted with detachable arc chutes for each pole.
Sufficient auxiliary contacts shall be provided for connection of
secondary wiring. These auxiliary contacts shall remain engaged
when the ACB is in the TEST or CONNECTED position and shall be
disengaged when the ACB is in the ISOLATED position.
All ACB shall be fitted with the maximum number of auxiliary
contacts as the manufacturer's standard provision. In any event, not
less than two pairs of normally-closed auxiliary switches and two
pairs of normally-open auxiliary switches shall be provided. All
auxiliary contacts and switches shall be wired to an easily accessible
terminal strip for external connection.
Terminals for external connections of the secondary/auxiliary
contacts and switches shall be of clamping yoke type for wires of
minimum CSA of 1.0mm². All terminals shall be clearly labelled to
identify the function of the circuits connected to the terminals.
Terminals for each ACB for secondary/auxiliary contacts shall be
separated from all other terminals by means of a spacer of 20 mm
width.
C5.5
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB)
C5.5.1
General
MCCB shall be of four-pole, triple-pole or double-pole as specified.
It shall comply with and be type-tested to IEC 60947-2:2009. It shall
be totally enclosed in a moulded casing formed from an insulating
material. The construction of the casing shall be capable of
withstanding the appropriate rated short circuit current and reasonably
rough use without fracture or distortion. The moulded casing shall
have an ingress of protection not less than IP 30. Utilization category
for those MCCB with built-in protection and rated at 400A or above
shall be class B, unless otherwise specified in the Particular
Specification or on Drawings or the Contractor can substantiate with
calculations to the satisfaction of the Architect that class A MCCBs
are suitable for ensuring discrimination under overload and short
circuit conditions for the circuits concerned.
MCCB shall incorporate overcurrent and earth fault protection as
specified with shunt trip coil operated by protection relays, and shall
be suitable for use as an isolator.
Section C5
Page 8 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.5.2
Operating Characteristic
MCCB with built-in protection shall have thermal-magnetic or solid
state tripping device which features a fixed, stable, inverse timecurrent characteristic. The operating characteristic shall be such that:
(a)
the time delay on overload tripping shall be inversely
proportional to the overcurrents up to a threshold value of
approximately 7 times the rated current; and
(b)
there shall be no intentional time-delay on overcurrent tripping
due to short-circuit or heavy overcurrent exceeding the
threshold value (i.e. approximately 7 times the rated current).
The operating characteristics shall be calibrated at 40C.
When MCCB is specified to be completed with earth leakage tripping
device, the tripping current shall be as specified in the Particular
Specification or on the Drawings. The earth leakage relay and the
zero-sequence current transformer, if any, shall comply with the IEC
60255-1:2009, IEC 60755:2008 and IEC 60044-1:2003 respectively.
C5.5.3
Performance Characteristic
MCCB shall be certified, according to IEC 60947-2:2009, to have the
following performance characteristics:
Rated short circuit breaking capacity - not less than the values given
in the Table C5.5.3.
Table C5.5.3 - Rated Short Circuit Breaking Capacity of MCCB
Frame
size
100A
225A
400A
 400A
C5.5.4
Tested short-circuit
breaking capacity
23 kA
23 kA
23 kA
40 kA
Tested at power factor of:
not exceeding 0.30 lagging
not exceeding 0.25 lagging
not exceeding 0.25 lagging
not exceeding 0.25 lagging
Shunt Trip Release
Where shunt trip release is specified, this shall operate correctly at all
values of supply voltage between 70% and 110% of the nominal
supply voltage under all operating conditions of the MCCB up to the
rated short-circuit breaking capacity of this MCCB. MCCB
incorporating shunt release shall be provided with block terminals
and shunt release lead cables.
C5.5.5
Locking Facility
MCCB shall be provided with facility for padlocking in either the
"ON" or "OFF" position.
Section C5
Page 9 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.6
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB)
C5.6.1
General
MCB shall be of four-pole, triple-pole, double-pole or single-pole as
specified. It shall comply with and be type tested to IEC 608981:2003. It shall be totally enclosed in a moulded insulating case for
safe use by unskilled people and also designed to be maintenance free.
Overall dimensions and fixing centres for the same range of MCB
shall be identical and suitable for fixing individually to a metal back
plate or directly mounted inside a manufacturer's designed
distribution metal box.
Cable terminals of the MCB shall be at top and bottom of the units
with access from front, and suitable for terminating the size of solid
or stranded conductor in accordance with Table 5 of IEC 608981:2003.
MCB with current carrying contacts of plug-in type shall not be
accepted.
Contacts of the MCB shall be of non-weld type.
C5.6.2
Operating Characteristic
The operating mechanism of a MCB shall be thermal-magnetic,
designed to give a fixed, stable, inverse time-current characteristic in
accordance with Table 7 of IEC 60898-1:2003. The calibration
temperature shall be 30C. The classification according to rated
instantaneous tripping current shall be Type B, except for motor
circuit application where Type C shall be provided and 6A circuits in
which either Type B or Type C may be acceptable.
C5.6.3
Short Circuit Breaking Capacity
The rated short circuit breaking capacity shall be certified, in
accordance with IEC 60898-1:2003, to have at least 6000A of rated
short circuit capacity. In addition, energy limiting class of MCB shall
be of class 3 in accordance with table ZA1 and ZA2 of IEC 608981:2003. MCB shall be capable of being connected in cascade with
fuse to IEC 60269-1:2009 or BS 88-1:2007 up to a rating of 160A in
situation where the prospective short circuit current at the supply side
is up to 22 kA.
Section C5
Page 10 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.7
RESIDUAL CURRENT-OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER WITHOUT
INTEGRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (RCCB) AND RESIDUAL
CURRENT-OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH INTEGRAL
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (RCBO)
C5.7.1
RCCB - General
Residual Current-operated Circuit Breaker without Integral
Overcurrent Protection (RCCB) shall be double-pole or four-pole as
specified, type tested to IEC 61008-1:2006. The casing of RCCB
shall be constructed of totally enclosed moulded-case insulating
material to withstand the fault level as certified to IEC 61008-1:2006.
The RCCB shall be suitable for use at ambient temperature between
-5oC and +40oC. It shall be designed to the rail mounting method
inside the distribution board with the other protective devices side by
side.
C5.7.2
RCCB - Electrical and Operating Characteristics
The nominal rated current of RCCB shall be 10A, 13A, 16A, 20A,
25A, 32A, 40A, 63A and 80A as shown on the Particular
Specification or Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, the rated
residual operating current shall be 30mA.
RCCB shall have minimum conditional short circuit making and
breaking capacity of 3000A with rated residual making and breaking
capacity to be ten (10) times the rated current of RCCB or 500A,
whichever is the greater.
Tripping operation of RCCB shall not involve amplification of
operating residual current and shall be independent of the line voltage.
Operating characteristic of RCCB shall be of Type AC as specified in
IEC 61008-1:2006 for which tripping is ensured for residual
sinusoidal alternating current, whether suddenly applied or slowly
rising. Type A RCCB shall be provided as specified in case of
residual currents with d.c. components.
RCCB shall be instantaneous tripping type without time delay
function.
Multi-pole RCCB shall be interlocked internally such that an earth
leakage current through any one phase shall trip all the poles of the
RCCB simultaneously.
C5.7.3
RCCB - Test Device
An integral test device shall be provided on the front of every RCCB
to enable automatic tripping operation be tested. Operation of the test
device shall create “out-of-balance” condition simulating an earth
fault.
Section C5
Page 11 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.7.4
RCBO – General
Residual current operated circuit-breaker with integral overcurrent
protection (RCBO) shall be single-pole, double-pole or four-pole
current operated circuit breaker as specified and housed in a totally
enclosed moulded-case type tested to IEC 61009:2006. The RCBO
shall be suitable for use at ambient temperature between -5oC and
+40oC. It shall be designed to the rail mounting method inside the
distribution board.
C5.7.5
RCBO – Electrical and Operating Characteristics
Technical requirement of RCBO shall refer to Clause C5.7.2
“RCCB – Electrical and Operating Characteristic”, in addition to the
overcurrent requirement as detailed in this Clause.
RCBO shall have minimum short circuit making and breaking
capacity of 6000A with rated residual making and breaking capacity
to be ten (10) times the rated current of RCBO or 500A, whichever is
the greater. In addition, energy limiting class shall be of class 3 in
accordance with table ZD1 and ZD2 of IEC 61009-1:2006.
Unless otherwise specified, RCBO shall have instantaneous tripping
characteristic of type B, except for application of motor circuit or
high inrush current situation where type C shall be provided. The
calibration temperature shall be 30°C.
Multi-pole RCBO shall be interlocked internally such that an earth
leakage current through any one phase shall trip all the poles of the
RCBO simultaneously.
C5.7.6
RCBO - Test Device
An integral test device shall be provided on the front of every RCBO
to enable automatic tripping operation be tested. Operation of the test
device shall create “out-of-balance” condition simulating an earth
fault.
C5.8
FUSE
C5.8.1
Scope of Fuse
All references to fuses shall include fuses forming part of a fuseswitch, or a switch-fuse.
C5.8.2
General
Fuse shall comply with, and be type tested to IEC 60269-1:2009 Low-voltage fuses.
Section C5
Page 12 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.8.3
Fuse Carrier and Holder
Fuse carrier and fuse holder shall be constructed of ceramic porcelain
or thermoplastic. Plastic units shall be unaffected by heat generated
by an overloaded fuse or by a blown fuse. Fuse carrier shall be so
designed that there is no risk of touching live parts when the fuse is
being withdrawn.
The maximum rating of a fuse inserted in a fuse holder shall not be
greater than the rating for which the holder is designed.
C5.8.4
Blank
C5.8.5
Fuse Ratings and Dimensions
Cartridge fuses to IEC 60269-1:2009 shall have a rated breaking
capacity of 50kA at rated voltage and the Utilisation Category shall
be of "gG" unless otherwise specified. All dimensions shall be
standardized in accordance with Figure 101 of IEC 60269-2:2006.
C5.9
BUSBAR CHAMBER
C5.9.1
General
Busbar chambers shall comply with, and be type tested to IEC 604392:2005.
Busbar chambers with rated operational currents above 400A shall be
typed tested to a short time current capacity equivalent at least to that
of the incoming switchgear and type tested to the rated operational
current.
C5.9.2
Construction
A busbar chamber shall contain 4 sets of fully sized, hard drawn, high
conductivity, solid electro-tinned copper busbars and supported on
epoxy resin or other approved insulators. The busbar chamber shall
be totally enclosed and manufactured from sheet steel suitably rustproofed and painted or hot-dip galvanised. The thickness of sheet
steel shall not be less than 1.5 mm for current rating not exceeding
500A, and not less than 2 mm for current rating of 500A and above.
The front cover and end plates shall be removable and normally held
in position by non-ferrous metal screws.
C5.9.3
Color Identification of Busbar
Each busbar shall be colored to indicate the phase to which it is
connected. Coloring shall comprise a band of paint on the busbar at
intervals of not more than 600 mm, but the busbar shall not be painted
throughout its length.
Section C5
Page 13 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.9.4
Interconnection to Other Equipment
Items of switchgear or associated equipment shall be connected or
jointed to a busbar chamber by means of properly designed
connection flanges having similar material and finish of the busbar
chamber, or by means of conduit couplers and bushes complying with
Section B2.
Interconnection cables between a busbar chamber and other items of
switchgear or associated equipment shall be of copper conductors and
shall be sized in accordance with IEC 60439-2:2005 or
IEC 60364:2005.
C5.10
DISTRIBUTION BOARD - GENERAL
C5.10.1
Scope of Distribution Board
This Clause covers the general requirements of MCCB distribution
boards and MCB distribution boards. Additional requirements
relevant to a particular type of distribution board shall be given in
Clauses C5.11 and C5.12 inclusive.
C5.10.2
Construction of Enclosure
The enclosure of a distribution board shall be constructed from sheet
steel, rust proofed and epoxy powder painted or baked enamelled
finish to a color approved by the Architect. Conduit knock-outs shall
be provided on the top and bottom.
The construction shall be of robust design, capable of withstanding
the mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under all working
conditions, including fault conditions.
C5.10.3
Arrangement of Component Parts
Distribution board shall include all necessary components and
accessories to form a complete assembly.
Components and
accessories shall be firmly fixed in position in the distribution board,
and shall be assembled in such a way that it shall be possible to
remove or replace any component parts and to carry out cable
connection from the front. Ample space shall be allowed for cabling.
MCCB, MCB, RCCB, RCBO or fuses shall be arranged neatly in a
row or rows. All components shall be totally concealed. Only the
toggles of the MCCB, MCB, RCCB or RCBO shall protrude through
the cover plate of the distribution board.
C5.10.4
Busbar
All busbar shall be of hard drawn copper having ratings as specified,
and shall be electro-tinned. Neutral busbars shall have CSA not
smaller than that of the phase busbars, and shall have adequate
number of terminals for all outgoing circuits including spare ways.
Section C5
Page 14 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.10.5
Earthing Terminal
Every distribution board shall be provided with an external earthing
terminal. In addition, a multi-terminal connector shall be provided
within the distribution board for connection of protective conductors
of all outgoing circuits including spare ways.
Both the external earthing terminal and the multi-terminal connector
for protective conductor shall be of hard drawn, electro-tinned copper
and shall be labelled in accordance with the requirement of IEC
60439-3:2001.
C5.10.6
Provision of Spare Ways
Each distribution board shall be provided with spare ways for future
expansion. For new installations, the number of spare ways shall not
be less than 20% of the total number of outgoing ways in the
distribution boards. Each spare way shall be blanked off with a
suitable blanking plate having a finish comparable to that of the
distribution board.
C5.10.7
Shrouding of Live Part
All conductive parts shall be properly shrouded against accidental
contact by means of rigid barriers, partitions of insulating materials
such that accidental contact can be prevented during operation of
component replacement or cable connection.
All conductive structural parts of the distribution boards shall comply
with the protective circuit requirements of IEC 60439-3:2001.
C5.11
MCCB DISTRIBUTION BOARD
C5.11.1
General
The enclosure of an MCCB distribution board shall be constructed
from sheet steel having a thickness of not less than 1.5 mm, and shall
be designed for general commercial and light industrial applications.
The enclosure shall be designed with ingress protection not less than
IP 41.
The design, construction and testing specifications of the distribution
board shall comply with IEC 60439-1:2004.
Section C5
Page 15 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.11.2
Type of MCCB Distribution Board
MCCB distribution board shall be of two types, viz. Type A and Type
B.
Type A MCCB distribution board shall be suitable for
accommodating, in any combination, the double-pole and triple-pole
MCCB of 100A and 250A frame size respectively. Type B MCCB
distribution board shall be suitable for accommodating triple-pole
MCCB of 250A frame size.
MCCB distribution board shall each be provided with a moulded-case
isolating switch having a current rating not less than that of the supply
side protective device. Moulded-case isolating switch shall meet the
relevant requirements of Clauses C5.1 and C5.2.
C5.11.3
Busbar
MCCB distribution board shall be provided with vertical triple-pole
and neutral copper busbars of rating not less than that of the supply
side protective device subject to a minimum of 250A. The
configuration of the busbars, busbar supports and busbar mounting
arrangement shall be type tested to a short-time withstand current in
accordance with Table C5.11.3 at a voltage of not less than 380V.
Table C5.11.3 - Busbar Short-time Withstand Current for MCCB
Distribution Board
Type of
board
No. of outgoing
circuits
Busbar rated
current
Busbar rated S.C.
withstand current
A
up to 12
250 A
23 kA for 0.2s
A
up to 36
400 A
23 kA for 0.2s
B
up to 12
400 A
23 kA for 0.2s
B
up to 36
630 A
43 kA for 0.2s
Outgoing MCCB shall be mounted horizontally on both sides of the
vertical busbars. The connection between the MCCB and the phase
busbars shall be by means of copper tapes and bolted joints.
C5.12
MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARD
C5.12.1
General
The enclosure of a MCB distribution board shall be constructed from
sheet steel having a thickness of not less than 1.2 mm, and shall be
designed for general commercial and light industrial applications.
The ingress protection for the enclosure with the functional units and
blanking plates fitted shall be at least IP 41. The design and
construction of MCB distribution boards shall comply with and be
type tested to IEC 60439-3:2001.
Section C5
Page 16 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.12.2
Construction
The moulded back plate assembly shall be of substantial thickness
and attached to the back of the enclosure for mounting of MCB,
RCCB, RCBO and double pole or triple pole all insulated switch as
specified.
MCB distribution board shall be provided with a moulded-case, allinsulated, double-pole or three-pole incoming switch-disconnector
(isolating switch) having a current rating of not less than that of the
supply side protective device. This incoming switch-disconnector
shall meet the relevant requirements of Clauses C5.1 and C5.2 with a
Utilization Category of AC-22A. However, switch-disconnector of
Category AC23A shall be provided in event of any one of the
outgoing circuits being fed for motor circuit.
Ferrules shall be provided for wires, including earthing, phase and
neutral conductors, throughout the distribution board internally for
circuit identification.
The metal front plate shall be screwed onto the metal box, making the
assembly suitable for surface or flush mounting, and shall be supplied
with a hinged cover to conceal all operating handles of the circuit
breakers and isolating switch. The front plate shall be affixed with
phase color labels and circuit identification chart, and shall be
supplied with moulded single way blanking plates.
MCB distribution board shall be provided with phase, neutral and
earthing terminals for the incoming cables. There shall be one neutral
and one earthing terminal for each outgoing MCB circuit and spare
ways.
C5.12.3
Method of Mounting
MCB distribution board shall be suitable for flush or surface
mounting as specified. Flush mounting shall be so arranged that the
assembly is flush with the surface of the wall and shall not cause any
adverse effect to the heat dissipation of internal devices.
Section C5
Page 17 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.13
VOLTAGE DIP RIDE-THROUGH DEVICE
Where specified in the Particular Specification, the contractor shall supply and
install appropriate voltage dip ride-through device for the equipment/installation
specified so as to assure operation of the equipment/installation be free of
interruption as a result of voltage dip occurrence. The voltage dip ride-through
device shall comply with the ride-through duration and voltage dip magnitude as
specified in the Particular Specification in accordance with the testing method
stipulated in IEC 61000-4-11:2004 and IEC 61000-4-34:2005.
C5.13.1
Constant Voltage Transformer (CVT)
(a)
Constant voltage transformer (CVT), also known as
ferroresonant transformer or regulating transformer, shall
contain capacitor at the secondary winding in form of parallel
resonant connection circuit.
(b)
CVT shall perform in an operating principle that when the
secondary magnetic circuit is operating in the saturation region
under a resonant effect, the secondary electric circuit shall be
decoupled from the primary circuit and thus insensitive to the
voltage variation in the primary circuit.
(c)
CVT shall be featured with galvanic isolation to ensure there is
no electrical connection between the primary circuit and
connected load at secondary windings.
(d)
CVT shall be designed to provide a stabilized output voltage of
3% under full load condition when the input voltage varies
between +10% to -50%.
(e)
CVT shall be capable of generating sinusoidal wave voltage at
the output even when its primary winding input voltage is
distorted to non-sinusoidal waveform, such as square or quasisquare waveforms.
(f)
In case of CVT is operated continuously out of the specified
voltage dip ride-through range, the output voltage shall dip as
the input voltage dips.
(g)
CVT shall be designed at minimum efficiency of 90% at an
operating range of full load to 70% of rated load.
(h)
CVT shall be provided with built-in over current protection
against short circuits at the output terminals.
(i)
CVT shall be UL certified or tested to other equivalent
certification.
Section C5
Page 18 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.13.2
C5.13.3
Static Tap Switcher Voltage Regulator (STSVR)
(a)
Static tap switcher voltage regulator (STSVR) shall comprise
multi-tapped autotransformer, static tap switchers and control
circuit.
(b)
STSVR shall be constructed of battery free, maintenance free,
robust design, highly reliable and durable.
(c)
The control circuit of STSVR shall monitor the variation of
input supply voltage and regulate the static tap switcher on the
autotransformer for maintaining the required output voltage,
The tap changing process initiated by the control circuit shall
occur at zero crossing of the supply voltage in order to avoid
interference or switching transient.
(d)
STSVR shall be designed to provide a stabilized output voltage
of 10% when the input voltage varies between +10% and 50%.
(e)
For control circuit voltage ride-through application, STSVR
shall be provided with a built-in timer circuit to control the
ride-through duration. Upon expiry of the timed delay, the
connected load of STSVR shall be automatically disconnected
in case the voltage dip at input supply persists.
(f)
For mains power circuit voltage ride-through application,
STSVR shall be designed to deliver continuous output under
voltage dip situation with current limiting protection so as to
prevent from overloading.
(g)
STSVR shall be provided with built-in over current protection
against short circuits at the output terminals.
(h)
Indicators shall be provided for incoming power supply
healthy and fault alarm.
(i)
STSVR shall be UL certified or tested to other equivalent
certification.
Voltage Dip Ride-through Inverter (VDRI)
(a)
Voltage dip ride-through inverter (VDRI) shall comprise static
bypass switch, energy storage capacitor, inverter and
microprocessor based control circuits.
(b)
VDRI shall be constructed of battery free, maintenance free,
robust design, highly reliable and durable.
Section C5
Page 19 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
The static bypass switch of VDRI shall let utility input voltage
to the connected load under normal operation mode. Upon
detection of under voltage at mains input, the static bypass
switch shall shut off the supply line and trigger the operation
of inverter spontaneously allowing discharge of energy storage
at the capacitor for maintaining continuous supply to the
connected load.
(d)
VDRI shall synchronize with the input voltage, convert and
regulate it into a stepped 50Hz output voltage of square wave
by Pulse Width Modulation technique or other equivalent
technology.
(e)
For control circuit voltage ride-through application, VDRI
shall be provided with a built-in timer circuit to control the
ride-through duration. Upon expiry of the timed delay, the
connected load of VDRI shall be automatically disconnected in
case the voltage dip at input supply persists or the input being
loss of supply.
(f)
VDRI shall be designed to perform in compliance with
Semiconductor Equipment and Materials International, SEMIF47, IEC 61000-4-11, IEC 61000-4-34 or other equivalent
standards. Where specified, VDRI shall be capable of
performing satisfactory ride-through of voltage dip at any one
of the supply phases for 200ms duration under the remaining
supply voltage at 50% of nominal voltage.
(g)
VDRI shall be provided with built-in over current protection
against short circuits at the output terminals.
(h)
VDRI shall be constructed of “Fail-safe” design so that under
all circumstances the failure of VDRI shall not interrupt the
system operation, but with the VDRI unit being inoperative in
the ride-through function.
(i)
VDRI should be high efficiency with at least 97% under full
load operation.
(j)
Indicators shall be provided for incoming power supply
healthy, energy discharge for ride-through operation and fault
alarm.
(k)
VDRI shall be UL certified or tested to other equivalent
certification.
Section C5
Page 20 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.14
ELECTROMECHANICAL CONTACTORS
C5.14.1
General
Electromechanical contactor shall comply with and be type tested to
IEC 60947-4-1:2009. Each shall be of double air-break type with
four pole, triple-pole, double-pole or single pole contacts as specified.
Both the main and auxiliary contacts shall be rated for uninterrupted
and intermittent duty. The main contact of a contactor shall be silver
or silver-faced.
Contactor shall have utilization category suitable for the particular
application as shown in Table I of IEC 60947-4-1:2009.
C5.14.2
Performance Requirements
Contactor shall each be capable of making and breaking currents
without failure under the conditions stated in Table VII and VIII of
IEC 60947-4-1:2009 for the required Utilization Categories and the
number of operation cycle indicated.
C5.14.3
Co-ordination with Short-circuit Protective Devices
Contactor shall comply with the requirements for performance under
short-circuit conditions stipulated in IEC 60947-4-1:2009. Type of
co-ordination shall be Type “1” unless otherwise specified.
C5.14.4
Control Circuit
Rated control circuit voltage of a contactor shall be the same as that
of the main circuit; otherwise, it shall be 24V, 30V or 110V d.c. as
specified.
C5.15
AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER SWITCH
Changeover switch shall be electromagnetically controlled at mains voltage,
double air-break, four-pole type and tested to IEC 60947-4-1:2009.
Changeover switch shall be rated in Utilization Categories AC-3 and capable of
making, breaking and carrying continuously the rated current and making on
fault without overheating, damage or deterioration.
Changeover switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked in
operation. Unless specified otherwise, the changeover action shall be automatic
in response to the failure or resumption of supply mains.
The control circuit of changeover switch shall incorporate a true power off delay
timer to overcome the momentarily mains a.c. power supply interruption.
Illuminated indicator for “Mains On” and “Essential Supply On” shall be
provided at the cover of the compartment housing a changeover switch.
Section C5
Page 21 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.16
ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER
C5.16.1
General Requirements
(a)
Active harmonic filter (hereinafter referred to as “AHF”) shall
be used to eliminate harmonic currents circulating across the
installation so that the Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) may
be limited to a given percentage as specified in the Code of
Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building Services
Installations in Building or Particular Specification.
(b)
AHF shall be installed in parallel with the distribution system,
i.e. shunt connected, wherever attenuation of harmonic current
is needed. Preferably, AHF shall be located close to those
loads generating harmonic currents in order to avoid
circulation of the harmonic currents along the cables.
(c)
AHF shall conform to IEC 61000-4-2:2008, IEC 61000-43:2008, IEC 61000-4-4:2007 and IEC 61000-4-5:2009 or other
similar recognised international standards on Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) compliance for industrial or commercial
applications and shall be manufactured to ISO 9001:2008.
Certificate of compliance shall be issued for each standard
rating of AHF after being fully tested at the manufacturing
facility.
(d)
AHF shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer which
has continuously manufactured AHF for at least 5 years and
their manufacturing facility shall have a local agent to provide
full technical support which includes adequate spares holding
and technical expertise in testing, commissioning and troubleshooting. Training shall be provided by the manufacturer‟s
representatives for government staff on operation and
maintenance aspects including essential trouble-shooting
techniques.
(e)
Full technical details of the AHF as submitted by the
manufacturer shall be provided for the Architect‟s approval
and shall cover the following:
(i)
technical guide on its applications;
(ii)
schematic and wiring drawings down to circuit board
level released by the manufacturer;
(iii)
shop drawings and as-fitted drawings;
(iv)
operation manuals with commissioning guide;
(v)
maintenance manuals with trouble-shooting guide; and
(vi)
parts list and recommended spare parts with price.
Section C5
Page 22 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(f)
C5.16.2
Unless otherwise specified, the rated operational voltage and
services condition shall be as specified in Clause C1.2 and
Clause C1.1.3. The following technical requirements shall
also apply:
(i)
No. of phases
: 3-phase without/with
neutral, 3/4 wires as
specified
in
the
Particular
Specification;
(ii)
Unit capacity
: as specified in the
Particular
Specification;
(iii) Harmonic orders
: 2nd order to 25th order
or more compensation;
(iv)
Filtering efficiency
: 85% or more;
(v)
Power factor correction
: up to 0.98 lagging or
more;
(vi)
Steady state response
: 40 ms or less;
(vii) Ventilation
: Forced air cooled;
(viii) Noise level
: 65 dBA or less; and
(ix)
: 8% of rated capacity or
less.
Heat losses
Performance Requirements
(a)
The operating principle of AHF shall be based upon the
injection of a harmonic current with appropriate phase shift
corresponding to the harmonic current drawn by the load
which shall be analysed by the AHF continuously.
Consequently, the current supplied by the source shall remain
sinusoidal under the effective operating range of the AHF.
(b)
AHF shall be compatible with any type of load, and shall
guarantee efficient compensation, even when changes are
made to the installation. The AHF shall also be capable of
delivering its rated output harmonic current to the point of
connection irrespective of load condition.
(c)
If the compensation of neutral harmonic current is required, in
the neutral conductor, the AHF shall be capable of
compensating the harmonic current three times greater than the
phase current, particularly to compensate harmonic current of
order 3 and its multiples.
Section C5
Page 23 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.16.3
(d)
Start-up and shut down of AHF shall be initiated by control
push buttons or other means as specified in the Particular
Specification. After a main power break-down, start-up of
AHF shall be automatic.
(e)
Should the AHF be overloaded during transient operation of
certain loads or permanently, this should not affect the
reliability of its operation. Under such circumstance, the AHF
shall operate in a current limiting mode and still deliver to the
network its rated harmonic current.
(f)
For better adaptation to any installation, AHF shall be capable
of operating in association with other harmonic reduction
systems. For ease of expansion, it shall be modular type or be
possible to associate 2 or more AHF‟s in parallel to increase
the compensation capacity and to enhance dependability, i.e.
redundant operation.
(g)
To compensate the harmonics at different levels in the
distribution network, it shall be possible to connect the AHF at
any point in the distribution network, or to connect several
AHF‟s at different points in the installation for maximum
effectiveness.
Construction
(a)
AHF shall use an isolated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) bridge
or other similar technique to inject the proper harmonic current
on the network, and will be controlled by a microprocessor
based system.
(b)
AHF shall be housed in an industrial grade cabinet constructed
from high quality steel sheet of minimum 1.2 mm thick side
and back plate and 1.5 mm thick hinged front door with key
lock. Protection class of the cabinet shall be not less than IP44
for indoor and IP55 for outdoor application. The entire surface
shall be applied with chemical rust inhibitor, rust resisting
primer coat and topcoat to give maximum corrosion protection.
(c)
The dimension of AHF shall be as small as possible.
Particularly, it will be preferable to have the AHF fitted in low
voltage cubicle switchboard or in motor control centre.
(d)
AHF shall at least include the following kinds of protection:
(i)
thermal overload protection;
(ii)
internal short circuit protection; and
(iii)
invertor bridge abnormal operation protection.
Section C5
Page 24 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
A three or four poles circuit breaker shall be installed close to
the point of the connection to the system to protect the
connection cables. It shall be selected according to general
selection practice for circuit breakers and the manufacturer
recommendation.
(e)
As a minimum the AHF shall include the following read-out:
(i)
an indicator for each phase of the incoming power
supply;
(ii)
an indicator for normal operating condition;
(iii)
an indicator for AHF shut down; and
(iv)
an indicator for fault condition.
Also a diagnostics panel shall be accessible from the front of
the unit to help the operator to identify the origin of abnormal
situation and control push buttons will be provided for
ON/OFF operation and alarm reset.
(f)
C5.17
AHF shall be equipped with built-in RS 485/232 serial
communication ports for control, programming and monitoring
of the AHF by PC or other user interface.
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE
C5.17.1
General Requirements
(a)
Unless otherwise specified, surge protection device shall be
suitable for the rated operational voltage as specified in Clause
C1.2.
(b)
The operation of surge protection device shall base on the use
of metal oxide varistor or other similar technique to effectively
limit over-voltage under surge conditions and to safely divert
the excessive surge energy to ground.
(c)
Surge protection device shall be manufactured by a reputable
manufacturer which has been continuously manufacturing
surge protection products preferably for at least 5 years and the
manufacturer shall have a local agent to provide full technical
support and after sales services.
(d)
Type test certificate for the surge protection device shall be
submitted for approval by the Architect. The certificate shall,
unless otherwise specified, demonstrate that the equipment can
fulfill the requirements stipulated in IEC 61643-1:2005 with
the following performance:
Section C5
Page 25 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.17.2
(i)
Surge protection device at the main LV switchboard
shall be able to perform under a standard test wave of
20kV 1.2/50s voltage impulse and 10 kA 8/20s
current impulse;
(ii)
Surge protection device at the electrical distribution
system shall be able to perform under a standard test
wave of 6kV 1.2/50s voltage impulse and 3kA 8/20s
current impulse. It shall limit the transient voltage to
below equipment susceptibility levels; and
(iii)
Surge protection device at sub-main distribution board
shall be able to perform under a standard test wave of
6kV 1.2/50s voltage impulse and 0.5kA 8/20s
current impulse.
(e)
Surge protection device shall be shunt or series connected to
the concerned electrical installation to achieve maximum
protection as recommended by the manufacturer. It shall be
installed in strict compliance with manufacturer‟s installation
instructions and relevant safety standards and regulations.
(f)
Except for the panel mounted surge protection device, all
components and circuits of the surge protection device shall be
contained in a metal enclosure suitable for wall mounting. The
enclosure shall be electrically earthed. In case of floor
mounting is required because of its size and weight, the device
shall be installed and mounted on concrete plinth provided for
this purpose.
(g)
Detailed installation instructions and manuals from the surge
protection device manufacturer shall be submitted to the
Architect for approval.
Performance Requirements
(a)
The device shall be able to give protective performance in all
modes, including Phase and Neutral, Phase and Earth, and
Neutral and Earth.
(b)
The device shall be designed in such a way that its
performance shall not be easily affected by field wiring
practice.
(c)
The let-through voltage, i.e. the transient overvoltage which is
allowed through a surge protection device, shall be clearly
specified for the acceptance by the Architect.
Unless
otherwise specified, the let through voltage shall not exceed
the impulse withstand voltage of the equipment to be protected
specified in IEC 60364-4-44:2006. The reaction time between
the start of the surge and the time the surge protection device
initiates the protective action shall be less than 1 nanosecond.
Section C5
Page 26 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
C5.17.3
C5.18
Surge protection device shall be able to withstand repeated
electrical surges appeared in the electrical system without
undue degradation of its surge protection performance under
healthy condition.
Construction
(a)
Surge protection device shall incorporate both high energy
clamping devices and special filtering circuitry to reduce any
electrical surge appearing in the connected electrical system to
an acceptable level without causing any damage to the
connected electrical and electronic equipment.
(b)
For panel mounting, the installation method and construction
of the surge protection device shall refer to the manufactruer‟s
instruction and recommendation. For wall mounting and floor
mounting, surge protection device shall be housed in an
industrial grade cabinet with hinged and lockable front door
made of high quality 1.5 mm thick steel sheet. The device and
the enclosure shall be electrically earthed. The entire cabinet
shall also conform to the requirement of the manufacturer of
the surge protection device.
(c)
Surge protection device shall be equipped with monitoring
facilities so that whenever its surge protection performance is
reduced to a pre-determined level below its original rating after
a number of incident surges it has been subjected to, an audible
and visual alarm shall be given off to indicate that the device
requires servicing or replacement. The audible and visual
alarm may be given through a build-in facility inside the
device or by activating an electrical dry contact to which an
indicator and an alarm bell are connected. As an option, a
surge counter shall be required if specified in the Particular
Specification.
SOLID STATE SOFT MOTOR STARTER
C5.18.1
General Requirements
(a)
The solid state soft motor starter (hereinafter referred to as
“softstarter”) shall be of the power electronic type motor
starting device. It shall control the voltage applied to the
motor smoothly by varying the conduction angle of the solid
stage AC switches which can be triacs, reverse parallel
connected SCR-diode circuit or reverse parallel connected
SCR-SCR circuit, etc. or using other similar technique.
(b)
Softstarter shall be manufactured to conform to the following
relevant standards or other similar recognized international
standards:
Section C5
Page 27 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(i)
IEC 60068-2-6:2007
: for vibration resistance
where softstarter is
affected by vibration;
(ii)
IEC 60068-2-27:2008
: for shock resistance
where softstarter is
affected by shock;
(iii) IEC 61000-4-2:2008
: for
electrostatic
discharge
immunity
test;
(iv)
IEC 61000-4-3:2008
: for radiated, radiofrequency,
electromagnetic field
immunity test;
(v)
IEC 61000-4-4:2007
: for
electrical
fast
transient/burst
immunity test; and
(vi)
IEC 61000-4-5:2009
: for surge
test.
immunity
(c)
The softstarter shall be manufactured by a reputable
manufacturer which has continuously manufactured softstarter
for at least 5 years and their manufacturing facility shall have a
local agent to provide full technical support, including
adequate spares holding and technical expertise in testing,
commissioning and trouble-shooting.
Training shall be
provided by the manufacturer‟s representatives for government
staff on operational and maintenance aspects including
essential trouble-shooting techniques.
(d)
Full technical details of the softstarter provided by the
manufacturer shall be submitted and shall cover at least the
following:
(i)
technical guide on its applications;
(ii)
schematic and wiring drawings down to circuit board
level;
(iii)
shop drawings and as-fitted drawings;
(iv)
operation manuals with commissioning guide;
(v)
Maintenance manuals with trouble-shooting guide; and
(vi)
parts list and recommended spare parts with price.
Section C5
Page 28 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(e)
Degree of Protection of Enclosure
The softstarter shall be protected to at least IP44 for indoor and
IP55 for outdoor application by a single front-access enclosure
and shall be suitable for operation without derating under
ambient temperature of up to 40oC and relative humidity of up
to 99%.
(f)
C5.18.2
Unless other specified, the rated operational voltage shall be as
specified in Clause C1.2. The rated power and quantities of
the softstarters shall be as specified in the Particular
Specification or the Drawings.
Performance Requirements
(a)
Mode of Operation
Softstarter shall provide the following modes of operation and
shall be transitionless without causing any current inrush and
torque surges during operation:
(i)
Voltage ramp - The motor voltage shall begin initially
at a preset „start voltage‟ and increase to line voltage at
a preset „ramp rate‟. The acceleration ramp time shall
be adjustable up to 30 seconds;
(ii)
Current limitation - It shall be capable of limiting the
maximum starting current which shall be adjustable to
at least 4 times of rated current;
(iii)
Soft stop - A deceleration voltage ramp shall be applied
to the motor for applications which require an extended
coast to rest. The voltage ramp down time shall be
adjustable to 30 seconds or above;
(iv)
Kickstart - A current pulse shall be provided in the
softstarter to develop additional torque when started for
loads which may need a boost to get started;
(v)
Energy saving – If specified in the Particular
Specification, when the motor is lightly loaded or
unloaded for long periods of time, it shall automatically
decrease motor power losses by controlling the motor
terminal voltage; and
(vi)
Apart from the above, other modes of operation such as
voltage pedestal starting, full voltage starting, DC
injection braking, etc. shall also be required when
specified in the Particular Specification.
Section C5
Page 29 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
Protection
Softstarter shall have internal protection to the motor and
softstarter and LED diagnostics to aid in set-up and
troubleshooting. The protection shall includes:
(c)
(i)
thermal overload protection of the motor and softstarter;
(ii)
mains supply protection for phase failure and phase
unbalance;
(iii)
internal fault protection; and
(iv)
stalled motor protection.
Auxiliary Contact
The softstarter shall provide auxiliary contacts for end of
starting (by-pass) and fault condition. The output relay contact
shall be suitable for 220V AC operation in category AC11 and
DC operation in category DC11.
C5.18.3
Selection of Softstarter and Operating Precautions
(a)
The starting current-speed transition curve of the selected
softstarter shall closely match with the starting torque-speed
characteristics of the motor and loading. The ratings of the
softstarter shall base on „hot start‟ operation i.e. the motor is
re-started immediately after operating at maximum rating for a
period of time.
(b)
The motor associated with the softstarter shall be capable of
starting the driven load when is supplied at reduced voltage
and current. In case of severe duty, checking with the motor
manufacturer shall be carried out that its derating is compatible
with the operating cycle and the starting times.
(c)
The heat sink of the softstarter shall be of good quality
aluminium construction and shall provide sufficient thermal
inertia to permit successful starting of the motor without
exceeding the permitted junction temperature of the solid state
AC switches.
(d)
The softstarter shall be capable of continuously delivering
rated output voltage (or reduced output voltage under energy
saving mode) at any load. When using a by-pass contactor, the
order to close and open the contactor shall be controlled by the
built-in signal of the softstarter.
(e)
The softstarter shall have the possibility to accept DC input
from external device such as Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC) for controlling the start and stop of the unit.
Section C5
Page 30 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.19
(f)
Semiconductor fuses shall be available as an option and have
the characteristics suitable to protect the softstarter.
(g)
The solid stage AC switches shall have a blocking voltage of at
least 1400V for 415V system with a rate of rise of reapplied
voltage tolerance of at least 1000V per microsecond. However,
an isolation contactor or isolator shall be available as an option
to isolate the supply in the „Off‟ stage to the softstarter for the
safety of the operator.
(h)
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES shall the power factor
correction equipment be connected between the softstarter and
the motor. If power factor correction equipment is employed,
it shall be connected to the supply side of the softstarter.
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR CENTRIFUGAL FANS AND PUMPS
C5.19.1
General Requirements
(a)
Variable speed drive (hereinafter referred to
as “VSD”) shall be a solid-state converter to convert three
phase mains supply of 380V+6% and 50Hz+2% to an
adjustable voltage and frequency output at its rated throughout
power. VSD shall conform to the following standards or other
similar recognised international standards on Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) compliance for industrial or commercial
applications:
(i)
IEC 60068-2-6:2007
: for vibration resistance
where VSD is affected by
vibration;
(ii)
IEC 60068-2-27:2008
: for shock resistance where
VSD is affected by shock;
(iii) IEC 61000-4-2:2008
: for electrostatic discharge
immunity test;
(iv)
IEC 61000-4-3:2008
: for radiated, radiofrequency, electromagnetic
field immunity test;
(v)
IEC 61000-4-4:2007
: for electrical fast
transient/burst immunity
test; and
(vi)
IEC 61000-4-5:2009
: for surge immunity test.
VSD shall be manufactured to ISO 9001:2008. Certificate of
compliance shall be issued for each standard rating of VSD
used in the Contract after being fully tested at the
manufacturing facility.
Section C5
Page 31 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
VSD shall be manufactured by a reputable
manufacturer which has continuously manufactured VSD‟s for
at least 5 years and their manufacturing facility shall have a
local agent to provide full technical support which includes
adequate spares holding and technical expertise in testing,
commissioning and trouble-shooting.
Training shall be
provided by the manufacturer‟s representatives for client on
operational and maintenance aspects including essential
trouble-shooting techniques.
(c)
Full technical details of the VSD shall be
submitted by the manufacturer through the Contractor and
shall cover the following:
(i)
technical guide on its applications;
(ii)
schematic and wiring drawings down to circuit board
level;
(iii)
shop drawings and as-fitted drawings;
(iv)
operation manuals with commissioning guide;
(v)
maintenance manuals with trouble-shooting guide; and
(vi)
parts list and recommended spare parts with price.
(d)
VSD shall be capable of continuously delivering rated output
voltage even when the mains supply voltage is down by 6% of
its nominal value and shall be able to control 3-phase squirrel
cage induction motor of class B insulation over a speed range
of 20% to 100% continuously and smoothly without the need
to derate the motor kW rating and to provide total power factor
of not less than 0.9 lagging, without external chokes or power
factor correction capacitors, at full load within the speed range.
The inrush current shall be zero and during starting, the current
shall start from zero and rises as the load accelerates with no
danger of exceeding full load current.
(e)
VSD shall allow up to 100 meters of cables to be used between
the VSD and the motor.
(f)
VSD shall allow unlimited switching of the motor circuit, at
any load and within the controlled speed range without damage
and without the need of auxiliary control switching. The VSD
shall be capable of automatically reconnecting to a spinning
fan and run without tripping, following mains interruption and
on transfer from backup source. The VSD shall be capable of
running with no motor connected during functional testing.
The VSD shall have voltage/frequency (V/f) ratio suitable for
centrifugal pumps and fans control. Selectable V/f ratios shall
be provided and it shall not be possible to set a constant V/f
Section C5
Page 32 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
ratio, to prevent damage to connected equipment and to
optimise energy usage.
C5.19.2
Performance Requirements
(a)
VSD shall be fully rated to provide the performance as follows:
(i)
minimum efficiency of 95% at 100% load and not less
than 90% at any other operating loads;
(ii)
output torque shall be limited to 105% of full load
torque;
(iii)
no facility for reversing the motor rotation shall be
incorporated;
(iv)
the limit of total harmonic current distortion produced
by the equipment shall not exceed the following limits
for installation supplied at 380/220V;
Circuit current at rated load
condition (I) at 380V/220V
I < 30A
30A < I < 300A
300A < I < 600A
600A < I < 1500A
I > 1500A
(b)
Maximum total
harmonic distortion
20%
15%
12%
8%
5%
(v)
comply with the Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency
of Building Services Installations in Building; and
(vi)
VSD shall have a maximum capacity as specified in the
Particular Specification.
The following minimum features shall be incorporated in the
VSD unit complete with an integral control panel:
(i)
it shall accept digital and analogue 0-10V, 4-20mA
control signals;
(ii)
integral measurement and selectable alpha-numeric
display of:
-
(iii)
output current;
output voltage;
output frequency;
output speed; and
output power;
alpha-numeric display in English for warning / fault /
alarm status;
Section C5
Page 33 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(iv)
information can be transmitted on the RS485/232
output for remote interrogating and reprogramming;
(v)
it shall have 1 programmable relay output (250V 2A)
and 1 programmable analogue output of 4-20mA or 010V d.c.;
(vi)
10 programmable preset speeds (including at least 2
skip frequencies of adjustable bandwidth to overcome
mechanical or air system resonance);
(vii)
selectable local or remote control;
(viii) hardware lock to prevent unauthorised parameter
adjustment;
(ix)
it shall have the following integral protection against:
-
C5.19.3
loss of mains and motor phase;
motor short circuit;
motor circuit earth fault;
motor overheat (without the use of motor
winding thermistors);
overvoltage;
VSD overheat;
under voltage;
input transients;
VSD and motor overload; and
mains input accidentally couples to motor output
terminals;
(x)
it shall have a digital electronic equivalent of a motor
operated potentiometer control or similar device for
open loop operation;
(xi)
it shall have an integral full 3-term PID control to
provide close loop control direct from a signal
transmitter without need for external signal
conditioning; and
(xii)
it shall have a facility for controlling motor anticondensation heater for heater operation when the
motor is idle.
Construction
(a)
VSD shall incorporate a minimum 6-pulse full-wave
uncontrolled diode bridge, fixed voltage-fed d.c. link with
inductors and capacitors to form a filter, a mains filter for
EMC compliance, a pulse width modulation (PWM) inverter
bridge utilising insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) and
output inductors in the motor lines. The inverter bridge shall
be controlled by a microprocessor to produce a pulse width
Section C5
Page 34 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
modulation (PWM) waveform or similar technique which
would result in full motor voltage and sinusoidal current mains
supply in the motor circuit. The VSD shall be equipped with
built-in RS485/232 serial communication ports.
(b)
C5.20
The complete VSD unit shall be housed in a single front-access
enclosure designed and built as an integral part of the VSD.
The enclosure shall be of degree of protection minimum IP 20
for indoor application and minimum IP 54 for outdoor
application. Unless otherwise specified, it shall be suitable for
continuous operation without derating under ambient
temperature of up to 40oC and relative humidity of up to 95%.
The equipment shall be fully tested including motor loading at
manufacturer‟s facility or by an approved testing authority to
certify that the equipment conforms to the aforesaid standard.
Certificate of compliance shall be issued for each standard
rating of VSD used after being fully tested at the
manufacturing facility or by the testing authority.
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION POWER METER
C5.20.1
General Requirements
(a)
The microprocessor based Digital Multifunction Power Meter
shall measure the electrical parameters including current,
voltage, power factor, active and reactive power and frequency
by means of microprocessor technology. The meter shall be
able to communicate with PC-based Building Management
System via a common network protocol (e.g. RS232/RS485)
by means of plugging in communication module and without
further modification of the basic unit.
(b)
Digital Multifunction Power Meter shall be housed in a single
front access industrial grade enclosure designed and built as an
integral part of the meter by the original manufacturer. The
meter shall then be panel mounted in the L.V. switchboard
cubicles. Alternatively, the meter can be configurated for DIN
rail mounting. The display shall either be L.E.D. or L.C.D.
with backlight, with auto blinking function for prolonging the
life of the display.
(c)
The meter shall be so arranged that the replacement of meter
shall not require the switching off of the respective switchgear.
All wiring shall be routed to allow easy removal of the cable
connectors in the event that the meter requires replacement.
Current transformers shorting block shall be provided such that
current inputs can be disconnected without open circuiting the
current transformers. The shorting block shall be wired so as
not to affect the operation of protective relays.
Section C5
Page 35 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
The Digital Multifunction Power Meter shall comply with the
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements in
accordance with the following international standards:
IEC 61000-4-2:2008
:
Electrostatic discharge
immunity
test;
IEC 61000-4-3:2008
:
Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity
test;
IEC 61000-4-4:2007
:
Electrical fast transient/burst
immunity test;
IEC 61000-4-5:2009
:
Surge immunity test; and
IEC 61000-3-2:2009
:
Limits for harmonic current
emissions.
Manufacturer‟s calibration certificate shall be issued for every
Digital Multifunction Power Meter..
Section C5
Page 36 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.20.2
Technical Requirements
(a)
Digital Multifunction Power Meter shall comply with the
following technical requirements:
(i)
Voltage input
-
Minimum
direct voltage
: 380V a.c. between phase;
(ii)
Current input (In)
: On current transformers, In /
5A (secondary);
(iii)
Measurement
: -
-
(iv)
Accuracy
-
(v)
:
:
:
:
:
:
+0.5%
+0.5%
+1%
+2%
+1%
+1%;
Temperature
Relative
humidity
: 0 to 50C
: Up to 80%; and
Communication
-
(b)
Voltage
Current
Power
Power factor
Frequency
Energy
Service condition
-
(vi)
True RMS value of line
current for each phase and
neutral current
True RMS value of phaseneutral voltage for each
phase
True RMS value of line
voltage for each phase
Active power, kW
Reactive power, kVAr
Apparent power, kVA
Frequency, Hz
Power factor
Energy, kWh;
Numeric
: Series link RS-232 or RS-485
: 4-20 mA output
Analog communication can be
regarded as an optional feature.
Digital Multifunction Power Meter shall store in memory the
maximum and minimum values of the each parameter
measured by the unit. The values in memory shall be recalled
and displayed upon pressing of a switch on the meter. Either
using lithium battery or non volatile flash memory for data
Section C5
Page 37 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
storage shall be adopted on condition that the memory shall be
backup not less than 3 years.
C5.21
CHARGER AND BATTERY SET
C5.21.1
General Requirements
(a)
Battery charger set shall be a solid state secondary d.c. power
supply unit operating in parallel with a battery bank. The
maximum rated capacity referred to herein this specification
shall be 3kVA. The exact rated capacity shall be designed by
the Contractor to supply a constant voltage current for the
combined standing load and alarm / switch tripping load , if
applicable, or not less than 15 Amperes or as specified in the
Particular Specification, as well as recharging and restoring the
battery bank back to its constant potential voltage setting
within the specified time limit after fully discharge.
(b)
The charger unit shall consist of a rectifier bridge which has
the a.c. mains input supplied via the isolation transformer and
has the ripples of its d.c. output smoothed by a d.c. filter before
supplying connected load under normal operation or the
battery after discharging in a.c. mains failure. The rectifier
shall be equipped with two voltage levels output, trickle charge
and high rate charge (hereinafter called boost charge) which
shall be fully automatically controlled and switched by a
control logic unit comprising the printed circuit boards
(hereinafter called PCB).
(c)
Battery charger set shall be manufactured to conform to the
currently-in-forced editions of the relevant standards as
indicated below:
BS EN
61204:1995
Specification
for
Performance
Characteristics and Safety Requirements of
Low-voltage Power Supply Devices, d.c.
Output;
Specification for Stabilized
Supplies, d.c.110 Output;
Power
IEC 61204
:2001
Rating and Performance;
BS 7430:1998
Code of Practice for Earthing; and
IEC 609501:2009
Specification for Safety of IT Equipments,
including Electrical Business Equipment.
Section C5
Page 38 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
the unit shall be able to recharge and restoring the battery bank
back to its constant potential voltage setting in not more than
twenty-four (24) hours unless otherwise specified after fully
discharged.
(e)
The battery bank shall have sufficient voltage and rated
capacity in ampere-hour rating to maintain the connected load
at the rated output capacity for the duration specified below.
The Contractor shall submit calculation to demonstrate that the
offered capacity of the battery and charger unit is able to cope
with the power demand of the whole system. In any case, the
ampere-hour rating shall be not less than 10 ampere-hour if it
is not specified in the Particular Specification. The battery
shall be sealed, high rate maintenance free nickel-metal
hydride type, or a type of better functions and performance and
approved by the Architect and shall have a proven life
expectancy of at least 4 years. It shall not have any memory
effect to affect its usable life or performance. The nickel-metal
hydride battery shall comply with IEC 61951-2: 2003 where
applicable.
(f)
Battery charger set shall be designed and manufactured by a
reputable manufacturer which has continuously manufactured
battery set to work in conjunction with a wide range of
applications for at least 5 years and their manufacturing facility
shall have a local agent to provide full technical support which
includes adequate spare holding and technical expertise in
testing, commissioning and trouble-shooting.
(g)
The following technical information shall be submitted to the
Architect for approval prior to ordering of equipment:
(i)
Technical catalogues and specification, calculation
sheet for charger and battery capacity;
(ii)
Power supply unit circuit diagram;
(iii)
Circuit diagram of control and battery disconnected;
(iv)
Printed circuit board diagram;
(v)
Power supply unit front plate layout; and
(vi)
Power supply unit console detail.
Section C5
Page 39 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.21.2
Technical Requirements
The following technical requirements shall apply:
C5.21.3
(a)
Input voltage
: 220V a.c. +10%;
(b)
Frequency
: 50 Hz +5%;
(c)
Output ripple
voltage
: +5% of d.c. output;
(d)
Output voltage
: 12V/24V/30V/48V (+1%) or to suit
application;
(e)
Overcurrent
protection
: Mains fuse, charger fuse, battery fuse
against overload and short circuit
conditions;
(f)
Control
: Manual boost charge, automatic trickle
charge and boost charge;
(g)
Indication
: Mains and charger healthy;
Charger short-circuit;
Battery connected;
Battery low-volt; and
Boost charge;
(h)
Voltage-free
contact
: Voltage-free contacts for “load on
battery” and “battery low voltage” should
be provided if specified in Particular
Specification for remote monitoring; and
(i)
Input
connection
: 13 A fused a.c. supply.
Construction
(a)
The charger and battery set shall be housed in an industrial
grade cabinet constructed from high quality steel sheet of
minimum 1.2mm thick side and back plate and 1.5mm thick
hinged front door with key lock. Protection class of the cabinet
shall be not less than IP31 for indoor and IP55 for outdoor
application as specified in BS EN 60529:1992. The entire
enclosure surface shall be applied with chemical rust inhibitor,
rust resisting primer coat and top coat to give maximum
corrosion protection.
(b)
The logic PCB, together with the isolation transformer and
fused mains input terminals, shall be factory assembled on a
plate located at the rear of the case. The power transistors are
mounted on heatsinks, separately from the PCB, on the back
plate. The instruments and LED indicators are mounted on the
front door of the cabinet. A lower ventilated compartment
inside the cabinet provides adequate space for accommodation
of the storage battery bank and ventilation.
Section C5
Page 40 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
C5.21.4
The cabinet shall be suitable for wall-mount or installation
inside a switch cubicle where appropriate.
Selection Criteria
(a)
The rated kVA capacity, voltage, current of the rectifier
charger and the storage capacity, terminal voltage, amperehour rating of the battery bank shall be designed by the
manufacturer and selected by the Contractor that it is suitable
to work in conjunction with a range of application in switch
tripping / fire alarm and protection system / gas detection
system / security system / PA and audio system.
(b)
For the switch tripping of cubicle switchboards, the selected
charger and battery set shall satisfy the following criteria:
(c)
(i)
Output voltage : 24V, 30V, 48V or operating
voltage of tripping coil as specified
in the Particular Specification;
(ii)
Output current
and re-charge
time
: 15A or 20 times operating current
of tripping coil for air circuit
breaker and upon mains restoration,
adequate to re-charge the battery
from fully discharge to fully charge
within 24 hours as specified in the
Particular Specification; and
(iii)
Ampere-hour
rating
: 10 Amp-hour or Upon mains
failure, adequate to discharge the
tripping current of the associated
air circuit breaker(s) consecutively
at least 20 times up to twenty air
circuit breaker(s) simultaneously or
as specified in the Particular
Specification.
When used in conjunction with in fire alarm and protection
system / gas detection system, the selected charger and battery
set shall satisfy the following criteria:
(i)
Output voltage
(ii)
Output current : 15A or output current for combined
and re-charge
standing load at normal condition
time
and alarm load at maximum alarm
condition
and
upon
mains
restoration, adequate to re-charge
the battery from discharge to fully
charge within 24 hours or as
specified
in
the
Particular
Specification; and
Section C5
Page 41 of 62
: 24V;
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(iii)
(d)
Ampere-hour
rating
: 10 Amp-hour or Upon mains
failure, adequate to discharge the
operating current for the connected
standing load at normal condition
for 24 hours and then the connected
alarm load at maximum alarm
condition for at least 60 minutes or
as specified in the Particular
Specification. If the fire alarm
control system is connected by an
alternative standby supply such as
an automatically started emergency
generator approved by the FSD, the
capacity of the battery and charger
unit may be reduced to that capable
of maintaining the system in
normal operation for eighteen (18)
hours and thereafter capable of
operating in maximum alarm
condition for at least thirty (30)
minutes and/or capable of actuating
the fire service installation as
required.
When used in conjunction with in security system / PA and
audio system, the selected charger and battery set shall satisfy
the following criteria:
(i)
Output voltage : 12V or 24V or as specified in the
Particular Specification;
(ii)
Output current : 15A or output current for combined
and re-charge
standing load at normal condition
time
and alarm load at maximum alarm
condition
and
upon
mains
restoration, adequate to re-charge
the battery from discharge to fully
charge within 24 hours or as
specified
in
the
Particular
Specification; and
(iii)
Ampere-hour
rating
Section C5
Page 42 of 62
: 10 Amp-hour or Upon mains
failure, adequate to discharge the
operating current for the connected
standing load at normal condition
for 24 hours and then the connected
alarm load at maximum alarm
condition for at least 60 minutes or
as specified in the Particular
Specification.
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.22
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
C5.22.1
General Requirements
The power factor correction equipment (hereafter referred to as “the
equipment” in this section) shall include capacitors, protective
devices, contactors, control relays, current transformers, cabinet,
cables, cable glands, trunkings, control wirings, necessary accessories,
etc. For capacitors to be installed in system where the 5th, 7th, 11th ...
harmonics are anticipated, the normal de-tuning factor is around 7%
which will tune the resonance frequency fLC to 189 Hz. For
capacitors to be installed in system where 3rd harmonic is also
present, the normal de-tuning factor is around 12.5% which will tune
the resonance frequency fLC to 141 Hz. The de-tuning reactor shall
be rated to handle 110% of the capacitor fundamental current
continuously to compensate for capacitor tolerance and aging. The
overall power factor at the main switchboard and motor control
switchboard shall be improved to not less than 0.9.
Additional and specific requirements for the equipment shall be given
in the Particular Specifications, the Drawings or other documents
issued by the Architect.
C5.22.2
Requirements of the Components
(a)
Capacitor Units
The capacitors shall be of low loss dry-type, metallized
polypropylene (MPP) film type with self-healing properties
and fitted in a sheet steel plate enclosure filled with noninflammable medium.
The capacitor units shall be
hermetically sealed and manufactured from continuous metal
foil and low loss high quality dielectric material. The total
capacitor losses shall not exceed 0.5 Watt per kVAr. The
capacitors shall comply with the requirement of IEC 609311:1996 and BS EN 60831-2:1996. Oil type capacitors shall be
rejected.
The capacitors shall be provided with directly connected
discharge resistors which shall reduce the residual voltage
from the rated peak alternating voltage to 75V or less
measured at the capacitor bank terminals within 3 minutes
after disconnection from the source of supply. The discharge
resistors shall be protected by an insulating cover.
The capacitor shall have the following characteristics:
(i)
Rated voltage
: 380 V;
(ii)
Frequency
: 50 Hz;
(iii)
Insulation level
: 3 kV rms/15 kV crest;
(iv)
Dielectric
: Polypropylene;
Section C5
Page 43 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
(v)
Discharge resistors
: Fitted;
(vi)
Total capacitor losses
: < 0.5 W/kVAr;
(vii)
Maximum voltage Overload
: 1.1
times
voltage;
rated
(viii) Maximum current Overload
: 1.3
times
current;
rated
(ix)
Power tolerance
: - 5/+10 %; and
(x)
Residual voltage at
Energization
: < 10% of rated voltage.
Protection Units
The capacitor units shall be fed by fuse-switch or MCCB for
protection against high fault currents. Besides, an overpressure
disconnection device for protection against low fault currents
shall be provided.
(c)
Control Relays
The capacitors in each bank shall be controlled by an
automatic multi-step capacitor control relay capable of
switching the appropriate amount of capacitors “IN” or “OUT”
so as to achieve the best average power factor. A no-volt
resetting feature shall be incorporated to ensure that, in the
event of power interruption lasting for a period over 50ms, all
capacitors involved shall be disconnected from the L.V.
installation and re-connected in accordance with the
aforementioned arrangement upon supply resumption.
The relay shall be commanded by a microprocessor which
measures the reactive power of an installation and gives the
necessary instructions to the relay for connecting or
disconnecting the capacitors in order to maintain the desired
power factor. The microprocessor shall be capable to ensure
an uniform aging of contactors and capacitors by using a
circular connection sequence which takes into account the time
that each capacitor has been switched on (First-In-First-Out
(FIFO) System). The control relay shall include a fully
operational alarm system which shall operate in case the
equipment cannot reach the required power factor. LED/LCD
indicator shall be provided to show which step the capacitors
are connected.
The control relay shall have the following characteristics:
(i)
Dual voltage
(ii)
Control current : Can be connected without any
additional adaptor to C.T. 2500/5A
burden 5VA min. Class 1;
Section C5
Page 44 of 62
: 220 or 380 V;
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(iii)
Contacts for
contactor
switching
: Control
relay
capable
of
withstanding 2500V a.c., 5 A and
1200VA;
(iv)
Test voltage
: Supply connecting cable and
contactor connecting cable: 1500V,
50 Hz; C.T. Contactor: 500V
50Hz;
(v)
Harmonics
filtering
: A filter shall be incorporated to
avoid falsified measuring results.
Not to be confused with the filter
circuits for the equipment;
(vi)
Response
current
(C/K setting
range)
: Adjustable from 0.05 to 1A;
(vii)
C/K setting
:
Manual or Automatic;
(viii) Power factor
reversal
point
: Adjustable from 0.85 lagging to 1
and prevent leading P.F. during
light load condition;
(ix)
Power factor
setting
: 0.85
inductance
capacitance;
(x)
Switching time : Adjustable from 10s to 3 minutes
from one step to
according to reactive load;
another
(xi)
Indicator for
operating and
steps
: LED/LCD;
(xii)
No-voltage
release
: If voltage fails, the no-voltage
release operates automatically due
to drop-out of control relay;
to
0.95
(xiii) Alarm relay
: Yes;
(xiv) Manual
switching
: Two push-buttons for manual
operation, suitable to check
functioning of relay;
(xv)
: Plug-in connector; and
Connection
(xvi) Mounting
Section C5
Page 45 of 62
: With angle brackets and threaded
bolts.
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
Contactors
The equipment shall be equipped with special contactors for
limiting over-current on itself from high inrush current at
capacitor switching. The contactors are characterized for
having auxiliary contacts equipped with pre-charge resistors.
These auxiliary contacts shall be closed before the power
contacts such that the connection peak is strongly limited by
the effect of the resistors.
Contactors shall be adequately rated to make and break the
capacitive current at low power factor. This current limitation
increases the life of all the components of the equipment, in
particular that of the protective devices and capacitors. The
contactors shall comply with the requirement of BS EN 609474-1:2001.
The contactor shall have the following characteristics:
(e)
(i)
Prospective peak current at : 100 times rated current;
Switch-on
(ii)
Maximum operating rate
: 150 operations/hour;
(iii) Electrical life at rated load
: 100,000
–
200,000
operations; and
(iv) Utilization category
: AC6b.
Cabinet
The equipment shall be of cabinet type of at least IP31 (Indoor)
and contained in a separate cubicle with control switchgear and
all other necessary accessories and shall comprise multiple
identical capacitor units connected and easily dismountable for
its replacement. Integrated cubicle with the LV Switchboard
installation is not acceptable. The equipment shall be installed
in separate compartment segregated from the rest of the LV
Switchboard such that failure of the equipment will not affect
the operation of the LV Switchboard. The equipment shall be
housed in a front-access industrial grade enclosure with epoxy
powder coating.
All exposed ferrous metal surfaces of the capacitor bank where
applicable shall be treated with rust-inhibiting primer paint,
undercoat and finished to a colour approved by the Arhitect.
Section C5
Page 46 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(f)
Blocking Filter or De-tuning Reactor
Each power factor correction capacitor bank/step shall be
equipped with series connected blocking filter or de-tuning
reactors if specified in the Particular Specification to suppress
harmonic and inrush currents for the protection of capacitors
and components of the installation, as well as to avoid or
attentuate the harmonic amplification present in the power
distribution network. The equipment here refers to the power
factor correction equipment. The reactors shall be constructed
to IEC 60076-6:2007 and shall be rated to handle 110% of the
capacitor fundamental current continuously to compensate for
capacitor tolerance and aging. The reactor shall be rated to
handle 5th harmonic current of a magnitude equal to 15% of
the capacitor current rating. The nameplate on the de-tuning
capacitor bank shall indicate the rated fundamental and
harmonic currents and frequencies. The reactors shall be
copper wounded with class H (180°C) insulation system and
shall be suitable for an ambient temperature of 40°C and a
maximum temperature rise of 100°C. Power loss of the reactor
shall be less than 1% of the capacitor kVAr rating. Reactors
shall be manufactured in flat or round copper wire technology.
They shall be dried and impregnated in a vacuum, which
ensures they can withstand high voltages and maintain a long
operating life.
C5.23
DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY
C5.23.1
General Requirements
(a)
This digital protection relay is used as standalone type. The
microprocessor-based digital protection relay shall accept
three-phase inputs from industrial standard current
transformers with nominal secondary current of 1 or 5
Amperes and shall sense the true RMS current values.
(b)
The digital protection relay shall provide time delayed threephase overcurrent protection and earth fault protection and
shall allow a variety of selectable time-current IDMT
characteristic curves according to IEC 60255-26:2008 and
associated requirements.
(c)
The digital protection relay shall have remote operation feature
and shall be able to communicate with PC-based Building
Management System via a common network protocol such as
Modbus/Lonworks via RS232/RS485/Ethernet communication
link by means of plugging in communication module and
without further modification of the basic unit.
Section C5
Page 47 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
The digital protection relay shall be suitable for protection at
main incoming circuit breaker in low voltage electrical system
and the tripping characteristics of the relay shall match with
the power supply companies' breaker/fuse tripping
characteristics for discrimination. The protection scheme and
tripping characteristics of the digital relay shall be approved by
the power supply companies in Hong Kong.
(e)
The digital protection relay shall have continuous selfsupervision feature to monitor the control circuit. Fault
recording function shall be triggered upon fault detection or
tripping operation for diagnostic use. The monitoring
information and relay setting shall be recallable and
programmable by means of front panel keypad or remote
access by software. The digital relay shall have security
password feature to protect access to relay parameter settings
and remote tripping.
(f)
The digital protection relay shall be type tested for
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and other relevant
requirements in accordance with the following international
standards:
IEC 60255-22-2:2008
:
Electrostatic discharge tests;
IEC 60255-22-3:2007
:
Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance test;
IEC 60255-22-4:2008
:
Electrical fast transient/burst
immunity test;
IEC 60255-22-5:2008
:
Surge immunity test;
IEC 60255-25:2000
:
Electromagnetic emission
tests;
IEC 60255-21-1:1988
:
Vibration tests; and
IEC 60255-21-2:1988
:
Shock and bump test.
Manufacturer‟s calibration certificate shall be issued for every
digital relay.
Section C5
Page 48 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.23.2
Technical Requirements
(a)
The digital protection relay shall comply with the following
technical requirements:
Current input
: 1A or 5A via standard protection
current transformer;
Overcurrent setting
: 50% to 200% in step of 5% of
nominal current In;
Earth fault setting
: 10% to 40% in step of 5% of In;
Time multiple setting
: 0.1 to 1.0 in step of 0.05;
AC burden (maximum)
: 0.25VA at In = 1A
0.50VA at In = 5A; and
Service condition
: Temperature range: 0 to 40C
Relative humidity: Up to 95%.
(b)
The monitoring and fault records of the digital relay shall be
stored in nonvolatile memory and retained in the event of
control power interruption. Either using lithium battery or non
volatile flash memory for data storage shall be adopted on
condition that the memory shall be backup not less than 3
years. Each fault/event record shall include at least the type of
faults/alarms, current values, date & time of tripping, etc. The
memory shall be capable of storing minimum 5 fault records.
(c)
The digital relay shall be accommodated in a dust-proof case to
IP51 and shall be draw-out type flush mounted on the front
panel of switchboard cubicle. Facility shall be provided for
automatic short-circuiting the associated current transformers
upon withdrawal of the module.
(d)
The digital relay shall be able to receive auxiliary d.c. power
supply at 30V or 48V for control operation. A battery set and
charger shall be provided for digital relay operation.
(e)
The digital relay shall provide at least 4 auxiliary contacts for
the input/output of other functions such as remote tripping,
alarms, blocking logic, watchdog, etc.
(f)
Trip indicators shall be provided for identification of the type
of fault condition.
Section C5
Page 49 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.24
DIGITAL POWER ANALYZER
C5.24.1
General Requirements
(a)
The microprocessor based digital power analyzer shall
measure and monitor the electrical parameters including
current, voltage, power factor, energy, frequency and power
quality parameters by means of microprocessor technology.
The digital power analyzer shall be able to communicate with
PC-based Building Management System via a common
network protocol such as Modbus/Lonworks via
RS232/RS485/Ethernet communication link by means of
plugging in communication module and without further
modification of the basic unit.
(b)
The digital power analyzer shall continuously monitor the
power system and trigger alarm/event logging for power
monitoring and analysis. The stored and instantaneous
measurement data shall be recalled and displayed on the front
panel upon pressing of keypad on the digital power analyzer
and alternatively monitored by PC-based application software
supplied together with the analyzer.
(c)
The digital power analyzer shall have waveform capture
capability which shall be either initiated from the software or
by the power analyzer as a user defined response to an alarm
condition. The captured waveform samples shall be able to
transmit over the network to PC-based workstation for display,
archival and analysis.
(d)
The digital power analyzer shall comply with the
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements in
accordance with the following international standards:
IEC 61000-4-2:2008
:
Electrostatic discharge
immunity test;
IEC 61000-4-3:2008
:
Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field
immunity test;
IEC 61000-4-4:2007
:
Electrical fast transient/burst
immunity test;
IEC 61000-4-5:2009
:
Surge immunity test; and
IEC 61000-3-2:2009
:
Limits for harmonic current
emissions.
Manufacturer‟s calibration certificate shall be issued for every
digital power analyzer.
Section C5
Page 50 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.24.2
Technical Requirements
(a)
The digital power analyzer shall comply with the following
technical requirements:
(i)
Voltage input
Maximum direct : 600V a.c. between phase
voltage
Other voltages : Through potential transformers;
(ii)
Current input (In)
: On current transformer, In / 5A
(secondary); and
(iii)
Measurement
:-
-
-
-
-
Section C5
Page 51 of 62
True RMS value of line
current for each phase
Neutral current
% current unbalance
True RMS value of phaseneutral voltage for each phase
True RMS value of line
voltage for each phase
% voltage unbalance
Active power, kW for each
phase and three-phase total
Reactive power, kVAr for
each phase and three-phase
total
Apparent power, kVA for
each phase and three-phase
total with instantaneous and
average over configurable
time periods
Frequency, Hz
Power factor
Active energy, kWh for threephase total with instantaneous
and accumulated values
Demand current for each
phase and three-phase average
Demand active power, threephase total
Demand apparent power,
three-phase total
Harmonic
distortion
for
voltage and current, up to 30th
harmonic orders
Total harmonic distortion for
voltage and current;
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(iv)
Accuracy
- Voltage
- Current
- Power
- Power factor
- Energy
- Harmonic
: 1.0%;
(v)
Services Condition
- Temperature
:0° to 40°C
- Relative
:Up to 95%
humidity; and
(vi)
Communication
- Digital
- Analog
Service condition
: Serial link RS-232 or RS-485
: 4 – 20mA output.
The digital power analyzer shall provide date and time
stamped event log. The type of alarm events and size of the
event log shall be user definable. The following classes of
events shall be available as alarm events:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(c)
: 0.5%
: 0.5%
: 0.5%
: 0.5%
- Frequency
(b)
: 0.5%
: 0.5%
Over /under voltage;
Over /under current;
Current or voltage unbalance;
Phase loss, voltage or current;
Over /under frequency;
Overall/total kVA, kW or kVAr into /out of load;
Under power factor, true or displacement;
Over THD;
Over demand, current or power;
Phase reversal; and
Voltage or current sag /swell.
All setup parameters required by the digital power analyzer
shall be stored in nonvolatile memory and retained in the event
of control power interruption. The memory shall maintain the
maximum and minimum values of each parameter measured
by the unit. Either using lithium battery or non volatile flash
memory for data storage shall be adopted on condition that the
memory shall be backup not less than 3 years.
Section C5
Page 52 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.25
ELECTRIC MOTORS
C5.25.1
General
All electric motors shall be of the high efficiency squirrel-cage
induction totally enclosed fan-cooled type and comply with IEC
60034-1:2004 and other associated Parts of the Standard.
The motors shall be insulated to IEC 60085:2004 with Class F as the
minimum insulation, unless otherwise specified.
Motor enclosures shall be in accordance with IEC 60034-5:2006 and
the 'degree of protection' shall be appropriate to the location in which
the motors are operating and the environment indicated. Unless
otherwise specified, motors shall be protected with enclosures to at
least IP 44 for indoor and IP 55 for outdoor application.
Motors of 2.2 kW output or above shall be suitable for operation from
three-phase supply.
The synchronous speed of the motor shall not exceed 25 rev/s unless
otherwise approved.
C5.25.2
Insulation Test
All low voltage motors shall have a minimum insulation resistance of
1 megaohm between phases and to earth when tested with an
approved 500V DC insulation tester.
C5.25.3
Starting Torque and Current
Motors shall have starting torque characteristics to suit the connected
load and the type of starting.
Starting current conditions shall conform to the requirements as
stipulated in the latest edition of the Supply Rules of the power utility
companies. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the power
utility company, maximum starting current shall be in accordance
with Table C5.25.3 below:
Table C5.25.3 - Maximum Starting Current
Motor Size
(M)
Supply
in
Arrangement
Kilowatts
From Power Utility
M < 1.5
Company‟s Overhead 1.5 < M < 3.8
Line System
3.8 < M < 11
From Power Utility
M < 2.2
Company‟s Non2.2 < M < 11
overhead Line System 11 < M < 55
Section C5
Page 53 of 62
No. of
Phases
1-phase
3-phase
3-phase
1-phase
3-phase
3-phase
Maximum Starting
Current (in
Multiple of Full
Load Current)
6
6
2.5
6
6
2.5
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.25.4
Maintenance Access and Safety
The electrical and mechanical arrangements of all motors shall be
such that the necessary periodical testing, cleaning and maintenance
can be carried out in a minimum of time with economy of labour.
C5.25.5
Noise and Vibration
All motor rotors shall be dynamically balanced. The vibration and
noise level generated by the motors shall not exceed the
recommended limits as stipulated in IEC 60034-9:2007 and IEC
60034-14:2007 respectively. The Architect will reject motors that
operate with unacceptable noise and vibration.
C5.25.6
Minimum Motor Efficiency
Unless otherwise specified, the efficiency at rated output of the
single-speed, three-phase, cage-induction motors shall comply with or
better than the nominal efficiency limits for „High Efficiency‟ (IE2)
class in IEC 60034-30:2008 and the efficiency levels shall be
measured based on the test methods defined in IEC 60034-2-1:2007.
The nominal efficiency limits for High Efficiency (IE2) motors are
listed below:
Table C5.25.6 - Minimum Motor Efficiency at Full Load
Rated output power
(kW)
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200 up to 375
2
77.4%
79.6%
81.3%
83.2%
84.6%
85.8%
87.0%
88.1%
89.4%
90.3%
90.9%
91.3%
92.0%
92.5%
92.9%
93.2%
93.8%
94.1%
94.3%
94.6%
94.8%
95.0%
Section C5
Page 54 of 62
Number of Poles
4
79.6%
81.4%
82.8%
84.3%
85.5%
86.6%
87.7%
88.7%
89.8%
90.6%
91.2%
91.6%
92.3%
92.7%
93.1%
93.5%
94.0%
94.2%
94.5%
94.7%
94.9%
95.1%
6
75.9%
78.1%
79.8%
81.8%
83.3%
84.6%
86.0%
87.2%
88.7%
89.7%
90.4%
90.9%
91.7%
92.2%
92.7%
93.1%
93.7%
94.0%
94.3%
94.6%
94.8%
95.0%
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C5.25.7
Continuous Rating
The motors shall be continuously rated to IEC 60034-1:2004. They
shall be adequately rated to meet the service demands of driven units
connected thereto under normal conditions without overload. The
continuous rating of the motors shall cover the full specified range of
duty plus a further 5% margin for compressors, 15% margin for fans
and 10% for pumps.
C5.25.8
Tachometers
In all cases of direct drive (except hermetic), an application point
shall be provided for speed checking by a tachometer.
C5.25.9
Terminals
One large terminal box of approved design shall be provided,
mounted on the stator casing only. Each end of each stator phase
must be brought out to a terminal in the box. For motors rated 10 kW
and above, adequate clearance between termination shall be allowed
for the use of cable lugs.
C5.25.10 Anti-condensation Heater
Anti-condensation heater shall be provided in damp environment such
as sea water pump motors located inside water-front pump chambers,
or motors above 30 kW.
C5.25.11 Belt Drives and Pulleys
Belt drives shall comply with BS 3790:2006 and be capable of
transmitting at least the rated power output of the driving motor with
one belt removed. A minimum of two belts per drive shall be used
and all multi-belt drives shall use matched sets.
Slide rails shall be provided for all motors driving through belts.
Purpose-made adjusting devices shall be provided to enable belt
tension to be altered and motors to be secured.
Belt driven machinery such as fans shall be fitted with pulleys
suitable for the belt drive used. Pulleys may use split taper bushings
for drives up to 30 kW. Alternatively, and in any case for output
above 30 kW, pulleys shall be secured to the fan and motor shafts by
keys fitted into machined keyways. Keys shall be easily accessible so
that they can be withdrawn or tightened. Where gib head keys are
used they shall not protrude beyond the end of the shaft. For keys
without gib heads, they shall be drilled and tapped to accept an
extractor bolt.
C5.25.12 Protective Guards
Protective fixed guards shall be provided at all forms of open power
Section C5
Page 55 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
transmission systems including belt drives and drive couplings, and to
dangerous parts of machinery to prevent inadvertent access or contact.
The guards shall comply with the safety requirements stipulated by
the Labour Department.
For belt drives, the guards shall be of galvanized steel wire of not less
than 2.5 mm diameter attached to a rigid galvanized steel rod or angle
framework. The mesh size and the location of the guard shall prevent
finger contact with any enclosed danger point. Alternatively guards
may be constructed from galvanized sheet steel of not less than 0.8
mm thick stiffened to ensure a rigid enclosure. Removable access
panels shall be provided in guards to allow tachometer readings to be
taken on both driving and driven shafts and also belt tension to be
tested. The sizes of guards including the dimensions and locations of
access panels shall also allow the size and position of the motor.
C5.25.13 Motor Fed by Converter
As converter drive can generate repetitive voltage overshoots at the
terminals of a motor connected by cables, which can reduce the life of
a motor winding insulation system if these repetitive voltage
overshoots exceed the repetitive voltage stress withstand capability of
the motor winding insulation system, the motor winding insulation
shall have the pulse withstand capability at least equal that depicted
by Curve A (for motors upto 500V AC) of Figure 17 of IEC TS
60034-25:2007.
In order to avoid damage by bearing currents in converter fed
operation, motor of frame size 225 or larger shall be fitted with
isolated bearing at the non-drive end.
C5.26
MOTOR SWITCHGEAR, STARTERS AND CONTROL PANEL
C5.26.1
General
Motor switchgear, starters and controls shall be supplied and installed
to perform the operation and control of the equipment to be provided.
The control panels or switchboards shall incorporate all control
devices, timers, accessories and wiring necessary for proper operation.
C5.26.2
Local Motor Control Panels
The local motor control panel shall be of wall-mounted factory built
assemblies of low voltage switchboard housing the motor starter and
switchgear.
The panel shall be a verified assembly as defined in IEC 614392:2009 and constructed generally to Form 2.
The panel shall be of steel construction, self supporting, with modular
top, side and back panels and doors of sheet steel built up on
Section C5
Page 56 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
substantial framing with all necessary stiffeners, supports and return
edges to provide a rigid construction and clear accessibility to all
internal components within the panel. The thickness of the sheet steel
shall be at least 1.6 mm.
The panel enclosure shall be of degree of protection of IP 44 for
indoor application to IEC 60529:2009. All doors shall have hinges
and be provided with dust-excluding gasket.
All panels shall, but not be limited to, include the following
operational features:
-
Local Auto/On/Off switch for each equipment;
A starter for each motor;
Fuse switch or circuit breaker for each equipment;
Isolating switch for each main incoming supply and for each
motor starter;
Protective, control and auxiliary relays;
Current transformer;
Current ammeter for each equipment with phase selection
switch for each motor;
Voltmeter for panel with power supply of 60A or above;
Hour run meter;
Indicating lamps, push buttons, selectors and control switches;
Emergency stop push buttons; and
Labelling.
Unless otherwise specified, the components above shall comply with
the requirements stipulated in the respective sections of this
Specification.
C5.26.3
Motor Control Switchboard
The motor control switchboard (hereafter called the “MC
Switchboard”) shall be a free-standing floor-mounted low voltage
switchboard to group centrally the motor starters, controls and
switchgear for the air-conditioning and ventilation equipment etc.
The MC Switchboard shall, but not be limited to, include the
following provisions:
-
Local Auto/On/Off switch for each equipment;
Air circuit breaker, fuse switch and/or moulded case circuit
breaker;
Busbars;
Isolating switch for each main incoming supply and for each
motor starter;
A starter for each motor;
Protective, control and auxiliary relays;
Current transformer;
Current ammeter for each equipment with phase selection
switch for each motor;
Voltmeter for panel with power supply of 60 A or above;
Section C5
Page 57 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
-
C5.26.4
Hour run meter;
Indicating lamps, push buttons, selector and control switches;
Emergency stop push buttons; and
Labelling.
Unless otherwise specified, the MC Switchboard and associated
components above shall comply with the requirements stipulated in
the respective sections of this Specification.
Motor Starters
(a)
General Requirements
(i)
Motor starters shall generally comply with the
requirements of the IEC 60947-4-1:2009 or IEC
60470:2000.
(ii)
The duty of the starters shall be suitable for the
mechanical and electrical duties imposed by the motors
being switched and in particular, the starting torque,
current, starting time and frequency of operation.
(iii)
Motor of more than 0.5 kW rating shall be provided
with a starter designed to perform the following
functions efficiently and safely:
(iv)
-
To start the motor without damage to the drive
or driven equipment whilst regulating the
starting current to the satisfaction of the power
supply company and ensuring that at all stages
of starting, the motor will develop sufficient
torque to accelerate the load;
-
To stop the motor;
-
To prevent damage to the motor due to overload,
under voltage, disconnection of one phase;
-
To prevent damage to reduced voltage started
motors and danger to personnel due to
resumption of the electricity supply following a
failure;
-
To limit the damage to the motor due to stalling
or internal electrical or mechanical faults by
quickly disconnecting the supply; and
-
To prevent damage to the motor or the starter
itself due to improper unskilled or hesitant
operation or failure to complete a starting
sequence once it is connected.
Motor starters shall comply with the Supply Rules of
the power utility companies.
Section C5
Page 58 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(v)
Each motor starter assembly shall comprise fused
switchgear, contactors, protection relays, main and
auxiliary contacts, and associated accessories. For
starter to be installed in motor control switchboard, the
whole unit shall be enclosed in the switchboard from
which no access can be gained to adjoining sections of
the switchboard. Both the main and auxiliary contacts
shall be rated for uninterrupted and intermittent duty.
(vi)
All starters shall be of the electrically held-on pattern
and shall not release until the voltage falls below 75%
of nominal value.
(vii)
All starters shall be of the air-break triple-pole electromagnetic type and shall comply with IEC 60947-41:2009 or IEC 60470:2000, with utilisation category
suitable for the particular application as shown in Table
I of IEC 60947-4-1:2009. The starter shall be capable
of making and breaking currents without failure under
the conditions stated in Table VII and Table VIII of
IEC 60947-4-1:2009 for the required utilisation
categories and the number of operation cycle indicated.
The duty rating of the contactors shall not be less than
intermittent duty class 0.1 60% on-load factor. Where
specified in the Contract Document, the solid state soft
motor starter can be used to start motors over 2kW.
(viii) The starter shall comply with the requirements for
performance under short-circuit conditions stipulated in
IEC 60947-4-1:2009, and type of coordination shall be
Type “1” unless otherwise specified.
(ix)
Overload relay for a starter shall be of thermal type
unless otherwise specified. The trip class of starters
shall be according to the classification of Table II of
IEC 60947-4-1:2009. Overload relay shall be able to
operate at an ambient air temperature of 40oC and have
a setting range of 50% to 150% rated operational
current.
(x)
For an assisted start starter, timer shall be of solid state
plug-in type with 0 to 15 seconds setting. For star/delta
and reversing starter, mechanical and electrical
interlocks shall be fitted with the contactor.
(xi)
Control circuits shall be operated on main supply
derived from the control panel or switchboard, and
protected by fuse to IEC 60269-1:2006.
(xii)
Where duplicate equipment is provided, the starter for
each equipment shall be housed in a separate panel.
Unless otherwise indicated, where an equipment is
Section C5
Page 59 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
provided with duplicate motors, two starters shall be
supplied; a single starter with a local changeover switch
will not be accepted.
(b)
Direct-on-line (DOL) Starters
(i)
Unless otherwise specified in the General Specification
or Particular Specification for the specific type of
installations, motors rated below 11kW shall be directon-line provided that the maximum starting current
does not exceed six times the rated motor full load
current, otherwise star-delta starters shall be provided.
(ii)
The starters shall, but not be limited to, include the
following:
-
Fused switchgear;
-
Triple pole air break contactor;
-
A triple pole motor protection unit incorporating
over-current and single-phasing protection with
manual reset facilities;
-
Under-volt release protection device. Unless
otherwise specified, it shall be arranged to
provide automatic restart on restoration of mains
voltage;
-
Current transformers with suitable ratio, output
and accuracy for motor protection;
-
Local/off/remote control
lockable in each position;
-
Start and stop push buttons;
-
Indicating lamps for motor running, off and
tripped on fault;
-
Dry contacts wired to terminals for remote
indication of motor running, off, tripped on fault
and summary alarm to supervisory control
panels;
-
Terminals wired to provide for connection to
emergency stop push button and remote
start/stop of the motor;
-
Hour run meter; and
-
Lamp test button.
Section C5
Page 60 of 62
selector
switch
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
(d)
Star-delta Starters
(i)
Unless otherwise specified in the General Specification
or Particular Specification for the specific type of
installations, motors rated at and above 11kW and up
to 55kW shall be star-delta started to limit the
maximum starting current to within 2.5 times the rated
motor full load current.
(ii)
Star-delta starters shall be equipped as per DOL starters
specified above, with the following additional
provisions:
-
Triple pole air break contactors with electrical
and mechanical interlock arranged for automatic
star-delta transition;
-
Calibrated and adjustable solid state timer for
automatic star-delta transition; and
-
A triple pole motor protection unit incorporating
over-current, single-phasing and earth leakage
protection with manual reset facilities. The
earth leakage protection unit shall be selected to
isolate the motor circuit with a maximum fault
disconnection time of 5 seconds in case of earth
leakage without causing nuisance tripping of the
motor circuit due to motor starting and transient
current transformer saturation.
Auto-transformer Starters
(i)
Unless otherwise specified in the General Specification
or Particular Specification for the specific type of
installations, motors rated above 55kW shall be reduced
voltage started by means of auto-transformer to limit
the maximum starting current to within 2.5 times the
rated motor full load current.
(ii)
Reduced voltage starters shall be equipped as per stardelta starters specified above, with the following
additional provisions:
-
Triple pole air break contactor with electrical
and mechanical interlock arranged for automatic
reduced voltage transition;
-
Air-cooled copper winding auto-transformer
with Class F insulation enclosed in an earthed
metal casing suitably ventilated by splash proof
louvres. Suitable tappings shall be arranged for
closed transition reduced voltage motor starting;
and
Section C5
Page 61 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
-
Calibrated and adjustable solid state timers for
switching over from reduced voltage to full
voltage connection.
Section C5
Page 62 of 62
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C6
BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM
C6.1
GENERAL
Busbar trunking system shall be designed to operate on 220/380V 3 phase
4 busbar at 50 Hz system and shall be manufactured and type tested to
IEC 60439-2:2005. Busbar trunking systems manufactured to other standards
(such as National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) of USA and
UL listed) with insulation voltage of 415V may be considered as acceptable
provided that the standard of manufacture is not inferior to the relevant IEC
standard and that the busbar trunking system meets all the requirements of this
Section. All material, components and accessories (such as bends, joints, tees,
feeder units, tap-off units, etc.) used for the busbar trunking shall be of the same
origin of manufacture. Busbar trunking system shall be certified by testing
laboratories or organizations as stated in the Code of Practice for the Electricity
(Wiring) Regulations.
In case where busbar trunkings are manufactured under license from the
Principal Company, a letter shall be produced by the Principal Company to
guarantee that the products manufactured by the licensee will be equivalent in
every respect to the type-tested standard products.
C6.2
BUSBAR TRUNKING CONSTRUCTION
The busbar trunking system shall be of the totally enclosed type with ingress of
protection not less than IP54 of IEC 60529:2009 for indoor erection in nonsprinklered areas, IP55 of IEC 60529:2009 for indoor erection in sprinklered
areas and mechanical plantrooms and IP66 of IEC 60529:2009 for outdoor
erection. It shall be constructed to withstand heavy mechanical loads as stated
in IEC 60439-2:2005. The casing shall be finished in enamel paint to a grey
color or the nearest manufacturer‟s color of standard production.
Adjacent lengths of the busbar casing shall be butt-jointed and the joint shall be
mechanically and electrically continuous. The mechanical strength of the joint
shall not be less than that of the busbar casing.
Colour circles indicating the phase arrangement of the busbars shall be painted
on the casing of the terminal units and at any physical compartment. Removal
of the cover for access facility shall necessitate the use of tools.
For long busbar run, phase transposition of busbar shall be incorporated in
accordance with manufacturer‟s recommendation.
Section C6
Page 1 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C6.3
BUSBAR INSULATION
The busbars shall be insulated from the busbar casing to maintain a clearance
and creepage distance as specified in IEC 60439-2:2005 with Pollution Degree 3.
The insulation material shall be of heat resistant, self-extinguishing, nonhygroscopic, high electrical and mechanical strength to withstand the stresses
under all normal and short-circuit conditions.
C6.4
BUSBAR
Busbars shall be three phase and full rated neutral made of hard drawn, high
conductivity solid copper bars to BS EN 13601:2002.
The busbar including all electrical contact surfaces shall be silver or tin plated.
The busbars shall be of adequate size to carry the rated current continuously at
mean ambient temperature of 35 oC and shall not exceed the temperature rise
limits in accordance with Clause 7.3 of IEC 60439-2:2005.
Each bar shall be painted to indicate the phase to which it is connected. Painting
shall comprise a band of color at each accessible position to the busbars.
C6.5
FEEDER UNIT
Feeder unit shall be of manufacturer‟s proprietary product. The rated current
and rated short-time withstand current of the feeder unit shall not be less than
that of the busbar trunking system to which it is connected.
C6.6
TAP-OFF UNITS
Tap-off units shall be used for branch circuits taken off from the busbars.
MCCB to IEC 60947-2:2009 or H.R.C. fuses to IEC 60269-1:2009 and other
associated Parts of the Standard of appropriate current ratings and short-circuit
breaking capacities shall be provided as near as practically possible to the
tapping position for protection of the branch circuits.
Plug-in tap-off units shall be attached on the busbar casing and held in position
by means of wing nuts or other quick fastening and quick releasing device.
Tap-off units shall make positive earth connection and shall be equipped with
internal barriers to prevent direct contact.
Mechanical interlock shall be incorporated such that the tap-off unit cannot be
inserted or removed from the busbar trunking unless it is in the switch OFF
position.
Section C6
Page 2 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C6.7
BUSBAR EXPANSION UNIT
The busbar expansion unit shall be of a single pole laminated copper strip design
of appropriate current rating and shall be arranged to take up the axial expansion
or contraction of the busbar trunking system under normal service conditions.
The expansion unit shall be prevented from short-circuit from adjacent bar either
by ample space between phases or alternatively by segregation between phases.
C6.8
FIRE BARRIER IN BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM
Fire barrier shall be made of non-hygroscopic material having a fire-resistant
period of not less than that of the corresponding compartmentation wall or slab
at where it is installed. Factory fabricated internal barrier shall be used.
C6.9
BUSBAR TRUNKING ACCESSORIES
Bends, tees and intersection units shall be specifically designed and
manufactured for the particular type of busbar system with which it is to be used.
The casing of the accessories shall be of same material and finish as the busbar
casing and shall have a cross-sectional area not less than that of the busbar
casing. No loss in mechanical strength, electrical continuity, rated current and
rated short-circuit capacity shall be incurred due to insertion of bends or tees.
C6.10
REQUIREMENT FOR AIR-INSULATED BUSBAR TRUNKING
SYSTEM
C6.10.1
Busbar Enclosure
Enclosure of the busbar trunking shall be of steel construction, made
of sheet steel of not less than l.2 mm thick for busbar trunking's width
or height of casing not exceeding 100 mm and not less than 1.5 mm
thick for a width or height exceeding 100 mm, formed in such a way
as to give a rigid structure of sufficient strength. Both the main
portion of the enclosure and cover shall be flanged at the side edges.
The cover shall be fixed onto the body of the busbar trunking at the
front by means of heavily electroplated hexagonal head screws and
nuts, one of which shall be firmly fixed onto the trunking assembly.
The cover shall be removable except where the busbar trunking
passes through the floor slab.
Steel work shall be treated to prohibit corrosion by hot-dip
galvanizing or electrolytically coated with zinc. The inside and
outside surfaces of the enclosure shall then be coated with two layers
of stoved enamel finish paint with contrasting colors or one layer of
stoved epoxy powder paint.
Section C6
Page 3 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C6.10.2
Busbar Supports
Busbars shall be supported on insulated racks or blocks to
IEC 60667-1:1980 and other associated Parts of the Standard:
C6.10.3
(a)
At each location of the busbar support insulator, the busbar
shall be insulated with self-extinguishing heat shrinkable
insulating sleeve of suitable operating temperature extended to
50 mm on each side of the busbar support insulator; and
(b)
The busbar supports shall be mechanically strong enough to
withstand the force between busbars produced by a short
circuitof negligible impedance between two or more busbars.
Busbar Jointing
Jointing of sections of busbars shall be made by clamps tightened by
bolts and nuts. Soldered, welded or riveted joints shall not be used.
Bolts for jointing busbars shall be of steel either hot dip galvanized or
heavily electroplated with zinc or cadmium to guard against corrosion.
C6.10.4
Suspension Unit, Flexible Joint and Stop-end Unit
Suspension unit and flexible joint shall be capable of taking up the
busbar movements due to axial expansion and contraction. The
flexible joint shall be insulated with self-extinguishing heat
shrinkable insulating sleeves of suitable operation temperature.
Stop-end unit and built-in thrust block shall be of the same material
and finish as the busbar casing. The unit shall contain an insulated
support to enable the ends of the busbars to be properly supported.
C6.10.5
Tap-off Unit
Proper tap off devices in the form of tap-off clamps and cable lugs
where necessary shall be provided for tap-off cables and such devices
shall not reduce the effective size or rating of the busbars. Slots
through enclosures for tap-off cables shall be sealed with phenolic
resin bonded paper laminated sheet.
Section C6
Page 4 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C6.10.6
Testing and Certification
Busbar trunking shall be type tested in accordance with Clause 8.1.1
of IEC 60439-2:2005. The verification of short-circuit strength shall
be carried out by Short Circuit Testing authorities internationally
recognized as having equal standing as ASTA.
Short-circuit test on the phase and neutral busbars shall be carried out
in accordance with Clause 8.2.3 of IEC 60439-2:2005 to the value of
short-circuit current specified below:
(a)
Under 800A
:
(b)
800A to 1600A inclusive:
Short-time withstand
current of 40kA minimum for
one second; and
(c)
Above 1600A
Short-time withstand current of
50kA for one second.
:
Fused* short-time withstand
current of 40kA minimum;
* IEC 60269-1:2006 and other associated Parts of the Standard
The busbar insulation shall be tested in accordance with IEC 604392:2005. All test certificates shall be submitted for endorsement prior
to ordering.
C6.11
REQUIREMENT FOR ALL INSULATED BUSBAR TRUNKING
SYSTEM
C6.11.1
Busbar Enclosure
The enclosure of the busbar trunking shall be rigidly constructed from
galvanized sheet steel of not less than 1.5 mm thick or aluminium of
minimum 2.5mm thick clamped on rigid casing side steel channels.
Where a combination of sheets of these two materials is used as the
assembly, no apparent visible stress shall be observed during
operation when the busbar trunking are properly supported. However,
the thickness of the metal sheets employed shall, in no cases, be less
than 1.5 mm each.
Steel work shall be treated to prohibit from rusting and corrosion by
hot-dip galvanizing or electrolytically coated with zinc. The inside
and outside surfaces of the enclosure shall then be coated with two
layers of stoved enamel finish paint, or one layer of stoved epoxy
powder paint.
Sheet metal shield or appropriate protective cover with neoprene
gasket shall be provided to prevent contamination of busbar trunking
if it is for outdoor use or it is running near any services water pipe.
Section C6
Page 5 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C6.11.2
Busbar Insulation
Busbar shall be insulated over their entire length except at joints and
plug-in contact surfaces and the insulation material shall be of at least
Class B (130C) rating.
The temperature rise at any point in the busbar trunking shall not
exceed 55C rise above ambient temperature when operating at rated
load current.
C6.11.3
Tap-off Units
Tap-off unit shall be equipped with internal barriers to prevent
accidental contact of draw wire and conductors with the live parts at
the terminals of the outgoing protective device during the time of
conductor fixing.
Bolt-in tap-off unit enclosure shall be provided with sufficient
spacing for cable connection to other sub-circuit devices.
Plug-in tap-off unit shall be polarized to prevent incorrect insertion
and be mechanically interlocked with the busbar trunking housing to
prevent insertion or removal of the plug-in unit while the protective
device is in the ON position and shall be equipped with an operating
handle which always remains in control of the switching mechanism.
The protective device shall be fusible switch type with visible blade
quick-make and break mechanism unless otherwise specified. Plugin unit enclosures shall make positive ground connection with the
earthing conductors before the jaws make contact with the phase
busbars.
C6.11.4
Joint in Busbar Trunking System
Joints shall be of removable type with through-bolts that can be
checked for tightness without de-energizing the system. It shall be
possible to make up a joint from one side in the event the busbar
trumking is installed against a wall or ceiling. The joint shall be so
designed as to allow removal of any length without disturbing
adjacent lengths. All bolts shall be tightened up either by means of a
torque wrench to a strength figure as recommended by the
manufacturer, or in accordance with the manufacturer‟s provision of
special torque-indicating tightening device.
C6.11.5
Testing and Certification
Busbar trunking shall be type tested in accordance with Clause 8.1.1
of IEC 60439-2:2005. The verification of short-circuit strength shall
be carried out by Short Circuit Testing authorities internationally
recognized as having equal standing as ASTA.
Section C6
Page 6 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Short-circuit test on the phase and neutral busbar shall be carried out
in accordance with Clause 8.2.3 of IEC 60439-2:2005 to the value of
short-circuit current specified below:
Busbar Rating
Test Current
(a)
Under 800A
:
(b)
800A to 1600A inclusive:
Short-time withstand
current of 40kA minimum for
one second; and
(c)
Above 1600A
Short-time withstand current of
50kA for one second.
:
Fused* short-time withstand
current of 40kA minimum;
* IEC 60269-1:2006 and other associated Parts of the Standard
The busbar insulation shall be tested in accordance with Clause 8.2.2
of IEC 60439-2:2005. All test certificates shall be submitted for
endorsement prior to ordering.
Section C6
Page 7 of 7
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C7
FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE AND LAMP
C7.1
GENERAL
C7.1.1
The luminaires, including the control gear, shall be suitable for
operation at 220V 6%, 50 Hz 2%, single phase, a.c. supply.
C7.1.2
The luminaires shall comply both in manufacturing and testing with
the following international standards and their manufacturing process
shall conform to the relevant quality standard of ISO 9000:2008:
Luminaires
: IEC
60598-1:2008
for
general
requirements and tests; and IEC 605982-1:1987
for
general
purpose
luminaires or IEC 60598-2-2:1997 for
recessed luminaires;
Ballast
: IEC 60920:1990 and/or
IEC 60921 :2006 as applicable;
Miscellaneous
electronic circuits
: IEC 61347-2-11:2001;
Electronic ballast
: IEC 61347-2-3:2006 and/or
IEC 60929:2006 as applicable;
Capacitor
: IEC 61048:2006 and/or
IEC 61049:1992 as applicable;
Starter, glow type
: IEC 60155:2006;
Starter, electronic type : IEC 61347-1:2007,
IEC 61347-2-1:2006 and/or
IEC 60927:2007 as applicable;
Lampholder
: IEC 60400:2008;
Lamp
: IEC 60081:2005 and/or
IEC 60901:2007 as applicable; and
Internal cable
: Internal wiring shall be made with
conductors of a suitable size and type
to handle the power occurring during
normal use. The insulation of the
wiring shall be made of a material
capable of withstanding the voltage and
the maximum temperature to which it is
subjected, without affecting the safety
when properly installed and connected
to the mains.
Section C7
Page 1 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C7.1.3
The luminaires excluding the fluorescent lamp shall be supplied in
complete set comprising control gear, lampholders, cable terminal
block, etc.
C7.1.4
The lamp circuit power factor for luminaire employing
electromagnetic ballast shall not be less than 0.85, whilst that for
luminaire employing electronic ballast shall be higher than 0.95.
C7.1.5
Type test certificate shall be provided and the luminaires shall be
marked in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60598-2-1:1987
for general purpose luminaires or IEC 60598-2-2:1997 for recessed
luminaires.
In execeptional cases like tailor-made luminaires having been
specified where type test certificate for the luminaire is not available,
compliance of individual components to the respective interational
standards as stipulated in this Section to ensure safety in use shall be
demonstrated to the approval of the Architect.
C7.2
TYPE OF LUMINAIRES
Group 1
This group includes all recessed modular luminaires and surface mounted batten
luminaires and the combination of different reflectors or diffusers.
Group 2
This group covers special luminaires including glass fibre, garage pit and flameproof luminaires.
Group 3
This group covers self-contained emergency fluorescent luminaire.
C7.3
GROUP 1 LUMINAIRES
(Recessed modular luminaires and surface mounted batten luminaires and the
combination of different reflectors or diffusers)
C7.3.1
Unless otherwise specified, the starting arrangement for these
luminaires shall be electronic start, and the position of the starter shall
be readily accessible. Starter is not required if electronic ballast is
used.
C7.3.2
Unless otherwise specified, the basic batten shall be made of sheet
steel of minimum 0.5 mm thickness and finished in white stove
enamel/stove miracryl enamel/stove miracoat enamel to IEC 605981:2008 Class I. The ingress protection shall be at least IP2X to IEC
60529:2009.
Section C7
Page 2 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C7.3.3
The basic batten shall be suitable for 20 mm diameter conduit
suspension and/or direct-on-ceiling mounting. Two 20 mm diameter
clearance holes shall be provided at 610 mm fixing centres on 1200
and 1500 mm long luminaires, but only one clearance hole at central
position on 600 mm long luminaire. All clearance holes shall be
surrounded by four number 50.8 mm Pitch Circle Diameter (P.C.D.)
holes for circular conduit box fixing.
C7.3.4
The basic batten shall have a 20 mm diameter knockout at the centre
(except for 600 mm long luminaire) and in each end face for back or
end cable entry. Where the end face of the basic batten is made of
non-metallic material, additional means shall be provided to ensure
the continuity of earthing when the luminaire is used for surface
conduit installation.
C7.3.5
For back entry installation, if the basic batten cannot fully cover the
circular conduit box, a pattress block cover made of 0.5 mm thick
mild steel, finished in white stoved enamel shall be supplied with
each basic batten to shield the conduit box outlet.
C7.3.6
The basic batten shall be capable to accept the metal cover plate and
different reflectors or diffusers.
C7.3.7
The metal cover plate, open-end metal angle reflector, and open-end
metal trough reflector shall be manufactured and finished to the same
specification as the basic batten, and shall be suitable for direct fixing
to a basic batten of the appropriate length. The luminaires of this
group include:
C7.3.8
(a)
Batten luminaire with metal cover plate
Luminaire composed of basic batten and metal cover plate;
(b)
Batten luminaire with metal angle reflector
Luminaire composed of basic batten and open-end metal angle
reflector;
(c)
Batten luminaire with metal trough reflector
Luminaire composed of basic batten and open-end metal
trough reflector; and
(d)
Batten luminaire with plastic diffuser
Luminaire composed of basic batten, metal cover plate and
plastic prismatic diffuser.
The plastic prismatic diffuser with clip-on-end-plates shall be
manufactured from extruded plastics with external reeding suitable
for fixing to a basic batten with metal cover plate. The plastic clipon-end-plate shall be simply fitted to the basic batten thus enabling
the diffuser to be quickly and easily removed for cleaning and general
maintenance.
Section C7
Page 3 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C7.4
GROUP 2 - SPECIAL LUMINAIRES
C7.4.1
C7.4.2
C7.4.3
Luminaires of this group are categorized as follows:
Cat. A:
Glass-fibre luminaires;
Cat. B:
Garage pit luminaires; and
Cat. C:
Flameproof luminaires.
Cat. A: Glass-fibre luminaires
(a)
Unless otherwise specified, the starting arrangement shall be of
electronic start, and the control gear components shall be fixed
in a removable tray. The construction of the luminaire shall be
suitable for chemically corrosive atmosphere and complying
with IEC 60598-1:2008, Class I or II, but preference will be
given to Class II. The ingress protection shall be at least IP55
to IEC 60529:2009.
(b)
The luminaire shall comprise glass fibre reinforced polyester
base canopy and high impact resistant polycarbonate diffuser
with internal prisms held together by corrosion resistant clips.
Wide seamless polyurethane gasket shall be fitted between
diffuser and canopy.
(c)
The luminaire shall be suitable for 20 mm diameter conduit
suspension and direct-on-ceiling mounting. Two 20 mm
diameter clearance holes shall be provided at 610 mm centres,
surrounded by four number 50.8 mm Pitch Circle Diameter
(P.C.D.) holes for circular conduit box fixing. One number. 20
mm diameter knockout shall also be provided in one end face
of the fitting.
Cat. B: Garage pit luminaires
(a)
Unless otherwise specified, the starting arrangement shall be of
electronic start. The construction of the luminaire shall
comply with IEC 60598-1:2008, Class II and suitable for use
in Zone 2 hazardous area as defined by IEC 60079-10-1:2008.
The ingress protection shall be at least IP65 to IEC 60529:2009.
(b)
The luminaire shall be made of sheet steel and finished in
white stove enamel internally and grey externally. The
luminaire shall have a removable opal polycarbonate front
cover which shall be clamped securely into a soft rubber gasket
by means of quick release fasteners. Fixing holes shall be
provided in the front flange together with 20 mm diameter
knockout at each end.
Section C7
Page 4 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C7.4.4
Cat. C: Flameproof luminaires
(a)
The luminaires shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with IEC 60079-1: 2008, flameproof enclosure
Ex‘d’ and certified flameproof by an approved independent
testing authorities, such as the British Approval Services for
Electrical Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres (BASEEFA).
The luminaire shall be suitable for installation in Zone 1
hazardous area as classified in IEC 60079-10-1: 2008. The
enclosure of the luminaire shall comply with the requirements
for temperature classification T6, i.e. maximum surface
temperature does not exceed 85C, as stated in IEC 600790:2007 and Gas Group IIB as stated in IEC60079-20-1:2010
The ingress protection shall be at least IP66 to IEC 60529:
2009.
(b)
The body casting, control gear housing and end covers shall be
constructed with cast aluminium at least to ISO 3522:2006 AlSi5Cu3 or grade LM4 of BS 1490:1988 and with suitable
coating for increased protection against corrosion. The
fluorescent lamp shall be housed in a cylinder of borosilicate
glass and flamesealed at the end of the casing.
(c)
Unless otherwise specified, the starting arrangement shall be
electronic start and the control gear components shall be
installed on a removable metal tray enclosed in a separate
housing which shall be provided with at least 20 mm conduit
entries for through connections.
(d)
The luminaire shall be suitable for either 20 mm diameter
conduit suspension or direct-on-ceiling mounting by hook
brackets with locking screw which mates with catch bracket.
The luminaire shall also be suitable for wall mounting without
diminution of performance.
(e)
The incoming terminal chamber shall be an integral part of the
body casting complete with phase, neutral and earth terminal
blocks. The cover of chamber shall be provided with
weatherproof gasket and with at least 20 mm conduit entries
fitted with hexagonal headed flameproof plug.
Section C7
Page 5 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C7.5
GROUP 3 - SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT
LUMINAIRES
C7.5.1
General
The specified type of self-contained emergency fluorescent
luminaires shall be of the following types:
C7.5.2
Type I
: 14W T5 550mm or 18W T8 600 mm long, single
fluorescent lamp;
Type II
: 28W T5 1150mm or 36W T8 1200 mm long, single
fluorescent lamp; and
Type III
: 35W T5 1450mm or 58W T8 1500 mm long, single
fluorescent lamp.
Standards
In addition to Clause C7.1.2, the luminaire shall comply with the
following standards:
C7.5.3
Luminaire
:
IEC 60598-2-22:2008; and
Control gear
:
IEC 61347-2-7:2006.
Functional Requirements
(a)
Emergency luminaire shall be of maintained type. Under
normal supply, a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery unit
complying to IEC 61951-2:2003 where applicable shall be
charged to maintain in a fully charged state ready to supply
power as required and lamp should be operated by the mains
supply through a separate circuit. When a failure of mains
supply occurs, the unit shall automatically switch to batterypowered operation. Upon restoration of the mains supply, the
lamp should be switched back to mains supply operation and
the batteries shall be re-charged again. The whole operation
shall be performed automatically.
(b)
Battery cells shall be capable of continuous operation at cell
wall temperature up to 60C. The battery shall have ample
capacity to maintain the output of the fluorescent lamp upon
mains supply failure as specified below for up to a period of
2 hours. The life time of the battery cells shall be not less than
4 years.
(c)
Charging system shall be capable of recharging the battery to
full capacity in 24 hours after a total discharge of the battery.
Facilities shall be provided to prevent the battery from
over-charging.
Section C7
Page 6 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
Circuit of the fitting shall be so designed such that a lighting
switch can be installed to control the lamp in the ON or OFF
position under the mains-powered operation. Upon mains
supply failure, the lamp shall be switched on under battery
power irrespective of whether the lighting switch is in the ON
or OFF position.
(e)
Light output throughout the average mid-tube life when using
4000K fluorescent tube shall be not less than:
(i)
When in normal operation mode
Type I : 1,200 lumen (T5) or 1,350 lumen (T8);
Type II : 2,600 lumen (T5) or 3,350 lumen (T8); and
Type III : 3,300 lumen (T5) or 5,200 lumen (T8);
(ii)
Throughout the 2-hour discharging period when mains
fails
Light output shall not be less than 50% of the nominal
light output under the maintained mode.
C7.5.4
Construction
(a)
(b)
The luminaire shall be supplied complete with the following
component parts integrated in the interior of the fitting:
(i)
A battery charger/inverter unit complete with a main
power failure detector, an automatic change-over
switch, capable of changing over within 8 ms from
mains supply to battery supply, a low voltage “cut-out”
battery protective device and a battery over-charging
protective device;
(ii)
A sealed, rechargeable, maintenance free, nickel-metal
hydride battery;
(iii)
Electronic ballast;
(iv)
Capacitors and radio interference suppressors;
(v)
Indications that the mains supply is normal or that the
battery is discharging;
(vi)
A test button for checking battery condition; and
(vii)
Fluorescent tube.
The basic spine of the fitting shall be manufactured from sheet
steel to form a complete enclosure, and finished in white
stoved enamel.
Section C7
Page 7 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
The luminaire shall be suitable for conduit, rod chain or
conduit box mounting at normal suspension centres.
Alternative mains entry shall also be provided in the centre
back of the spines or by a knock-out in each end plate.
(d)
A fused terminal block fitted with cartridge fuses of
appropriate rating shall be provided separately for both the
charger and the maintained circuit.
C7.6
BLANK
C7.7
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
C7.7.1
Lamp Features
Lamps shall have, but not limited to, the following features:
(a)
Superb Color Rendering Index (CRI) with values not less than:
Areas served
Car parking spaces or similar
Office areas or similar
Hospitals or other clinical functional areas
(b)
(c)
(d)
C7.7.2
Values of
CRI
70
80
90
Energy saving;
Compatible to the type of lamp circuit; and
Tubular shape with preheated cathode and suitable for
operation in ambient temperature up to 40C and 100%
relative humidity.
All fluorescent lamps shall have lumen output not less than those
listed in Tables C7.7.2-1 to C7.7.2-7 at an ambient temperature of
25oC.
Table C7.7.2 – 1 Lumen Output for 26 mm Diameter (T8)
Tubular Fluorescent Lamps (LBS ref. (LM) T26)
Rated power
of lamp(W)
– Cap G13
18
36
58
Min. Lumen output
3000°K
4000°K
1350
3350
5200
1350
3350
5200
Section C7
Page 8 of 13
6000°K &
Above
1300
3250
5000
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Table C7.7.2 – 2 -
Rated power
of lamp (W)
- Cap G5
14
21
28
35
24
39
49
54
80
Lumen Output for 16 mm Diameter (T5)
Tubular Fluorescent Lamps (LBS ref. (LM)
T16)
Min. Lumen output (25oC/35 oC)
3000°K
4000°K
1200/1350
1900/2100
2600/2900
3300/3650
1750/2000
3100/3500
4300/4900
4450/5000
6150/7000
1200/1350
1900/2100
2600/2900
3300/3650
1750/2000
3100/3500
4300/4900
4450/5000
6150/7000
6000°K&
Above
1100/1250
1750/1950
2400/2700
3050/3400
1600/1900
2850/3325
4100/4650
4050/4750
5700/6650
Table C7.7.2 – 3 Lumen Output for Compact Fluorescent,
Single-ended, 4 Pin Base Lamps (LBS ref. (LM) TC-L)
Rated power
of lamp (W)/
Cap type
2700°K
3000°K
4000°K
5400°K
5 / 2G7
7/ 2G7
9 / 2G7
11/ 2G7
18 / 2G11
24 / 2G11
36 / 2G11
40 / 2G11
55 / 2G11
265
400
600
900
1200
1800
2900
3500
4800
--600
900
1200
1800
2900
3500
4800
265
400
600
900
1200
1800
2900
3500
4800
---900
1170
1560
2750
3325
4550
Table C7.7.2 – 4 -
Rated power
of lamp (W)
- Cap G23
5
7
9
11
Min. Lumen output
Lumen Output for Compact Fluorescent,
Single-ended, 2 Pin Base Lamps (LBS ref.
(LM) TC-SEL)
Min. Lumen output
2700°K
3000°K
4000°K
5400°K
250
400
600
900
250
400
600
900
250
400
600
900
-375
565
850
Section C7
Page 9 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Table C7.7.2 – 5 -
Rated power
of lamp (W)
- Cap G24d
10
13
18
26
Table C7.7.2 – 6 -
Rated power
of lamp (W)
- Cap GX24d
13
18
26
Table C7.7.2 – 7 -
Rated power
of lamp (W)
- Cap GX24q
13
18
26
32
42
C7.7.3
Lumen Output for Compact Fluorescent,
Twin Independent Single-ended, 2 Pin Base
Lamps (LBS ref. (LM) TC-DEL)
Min. Lumen output
2700°K
3000°K
4000°K
600
900
1200
1710
600
900
1200
1710
600
900
1200
1710
Lumen Output for Compact Fluorescent,
Triple Independent Single-ended, 2 Pin Base
Lamps (LBS ref. (LM) TC-T)
Min. Lumen output
2700°K
3000°K
4000°K
900
1200
1710
900
1200
1710
900
1200
1710
Lumen Output for Compact Fluorescent,
Triple Independent Single-ended, 4 Pin Base
Lamps (LBS ref. (LM) TC-TEL)
Min. Lumen output
2700°K
3000°K
4000°K
900
1200
1710
2400
3200
900
1200
1710
2400
3200
900
1200
1710
2400
3200
All fluorescent lamps shall have average rated life not less than those
listed below at 50% failure:
Table C7.7.3 - Average Rate Life for Fluorescent Lamp
Fluorescent Lamp Type
T8 fluorescent lamp
T5 fluorescent lamp
Compact fluorescent lamp
Section C7
Page 10 of 13
Average Rated Life
(Hour)
15000
20000
8000
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C7.8
ELECTRONIC BALLASTS
C7.8.1
General
The electronic ballast for both fixed output and dimmable types shall
be a solid-state converter to convert single phase mains supply of
220V + 6% and 50Hz +1Hz to a high frequency voltage output at its
rated throughout power to suit the lamp(s) connected. The electronic
ballast shall conform to the following international standards:
(a)
IEC 61347-2-3:2006:
AC-supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps General & safety requirements;
(b)
IEC 60929:2006:
AC-supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps Performance requirements;
(c)
IEC 61000-3-2:2009:
Limits for harmonic current emission
(equipment input current < 16A per phase);
(d)
EN 55015:2009:
Limit and method of measurement of radio disturbance
characteristics of lighting and similar equipment; and
(e)
IEC 61547:2009:
Equipment for general lighting purposes - EMC immunity
requirements.
Certificates of compliance with the above standards shall be issued by
a recognised test laboratory for each standard rating of electronic
ballast to be used in the Contract.
C7.8.2
Construction
The electronic ballast shall incorporate a low-pass filter for limitation
of harmonic distortion, radio interference, inrush current and high
mains voltage peak, a full diode bridge rectifier, a power factor
correction part, a high frequency oscillator and an internal control
circuit.
C7.8.3
Performance Requirements
The maximum power loss of the electronic ballast shall not be more
than those listed in Table C7.8.3:
Section C7
Page 11 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Table C7.8.3 – Maximum Allowable Power Loss of Electronic
Ballast
Lamp Type
T8 linear
fluorescent
lamp
T5 linear
fluorescent
lamp
Compact
fluorescent
lamp – 2
tubes
Compact
fluorescent
lamp – 4
tubes
Compact
fluorescent
lamp – 6
tubes
Circular
fluorescent
lamp
Rated lamp rating
operated at high
frequency
16W
24W
32W
50W
60W
14W
21W
24W
28W
35W
39W
49W
54W
80W
4.5W
6.5W
8W
10W
16W
22W
32W
40W
55W
9.5W
12.5W
16.5W
24W
16.5W
24W
32W
42W
19W
22W
40W
55W
Maximum allowable power loss in
Wattage
3
4
4
5
8
3
3
3
4
4
4
6
6
8
2.2
2.5
3
4
3
3
4
5
6
1.5
1.5
2.5
3
2.5
3
4
5
3
4
4
5
For the fluorescent lamp(s) operated by electronic ballast, the
regulated light output shall be less than +2% over a supply voltage
range of 220V + 10% to the electronic ballast.
The Ballast Lumen Factor of the electronic ballast shall not be lower
than 0.95 or higher than 1.05 with reference to a standard
conventional ballast.
The electronic ballast shall be rapid or preheat start and the lamp
operating frequency shall be above 30kHz.
Section C7
Page 12 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
The Total Power Factor (TPF) of the luminaire employing electronic
ballast shall be higher than 0.95 and its maximum Total Harmonic
Distortion (THD) shall be less than 15% when tested on a pure
sinusoidal mains supply.
The complete electronic ballast shall be housed in a single frontaccess enclosure with appropriate terminal blocks for easy connection
of wiring. The electronic ballast shall be suitable to operate at an
ambient temperature range from 0oC to 50oC and at a maximum
relative humidity of 95%. The maximum case temperature of the
electronic ballast shall be 70oC.
The electronic ballast shall go into a shutdown or low power stand-by
state when defective lamps are connected or when overload occurs in
the lamp circuit.
The maximum inrush current of the electronic ballast shall not exceed
15A peak at starting and shall not last longer than 0.5 ms.
The rated life of the electronic ballast shall not be less than 50,000
hours at the test point of 70oC.
The failure rate of the electronic ballast shall be less than 1% per
4000 hours operation at the maximum case temperature.
C7.8.4
Additional Requirements for Dimmable Electronic Ballasts
Electronic ballasts with dimmable function shall meet the following
additional requirements:
(a)
high energy efficient dimming system providing continuous
dimming range of 5% - 100%;
(b)
the electronic ballast shall be compatible with the dimming
circuit provided;
(c)
dimming performance shall follow logarithmic characteristics
that is optimised according to the sensitivity of human eye; and
(d)
provide flicker-free dimming operation throughout the
complete operation temperature range.
Section C7
Page 13 of 13
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C8
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LUMINAIRE AND LAMP
C8.1
GENERAL
This Section covers the requirements for the following high intensity discharge
(HID) lamps:
Tubular sodium vapour discharge lamps (SON-T or LBS : HST)
Elliptical sodium vapour discharge lamps (SON-E or LBS : HSE)
Elliptical mercury vapour discharge lamp (MBF or LBS : HME)
Linear metal halide (MBIL) or LBS: HIT-DE / linear high pressure sodium lamp
(SON-TD) or LBS: HST-DE
The lamp, in connection with the control gear, shall be suitable for operation at
220V ± 6%, 50Hz ± 2%, single phase, a.c. supply.
The lamp shall be compatible with the luminaire and the control gear of the
luminaire.
C8.2
HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR DISCHARGE LAMP (SON-T
AND SON-E OR LBS : HST AND HSE)
The lamp shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 60662:2002.
The lamp shall consist of a high pressure sodium discharge operating within a
sintered alumina arc tube. The arc tube shall be mounted in a clear glass bulb
completed with an E40 lamp cap.
The lamp shall have a universal operating position and shall be suitable for use
with external ignitor.
The correlated color temperature of the lamp shall be in the order of 2000°K.
The light output of the lamp shall be constant and shall not be less than the
following figures for the respective wattage type in the initial 2000 hours:
Nominal Lamp Wattage
150W
250W
400W
Initial Light Output
16500 lumens
28000 lumens
48000 lumens
The rated average life of the lamp shall not be less than 24000 hours at 50%
failure.
Section C8
Page 1 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C8.3
ELLIPTICAL HIGH PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR DISCHARGE
LAMP (MBF OR LBS : HME)
The lamp shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 60188:2001.
The lamp shall consist of a high pressure mercury discharge operating within a
quartz arc tube. The arc tube shall be mounted in an elliptical glass bulb coated
with a fluorescent phosphor and complete with a cap of the type compatible with
the respective lamp wattage type.
The correlated color temperature of the lamp shall be in the range of 3400K to
4000K with respective to the selected nominal lamp wattage.
The lamp shall have a universal operation position.
The light output of the lamp shall be constant and shall not be less than the
following figures for the respective wattage type in the initial 2000 hours:
Nominal Lamp Wattage
50W
80W
125W
250W
400W
Initial Light Output
2500 lumens
4000 lumens
6500 lumens
13750 lumens
22000 lumens
The rated average life of the lamp shall not be less than 16000 hours or
24000 hours with respective to the selected nominal lamp wattage at 50% failure.
C8.4
LINEAR METAL HALIDE/LINEAR HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM LAMP
This Sub-section covers the following lamps:
(a)
750W/1500W linear metal halide (MBIL or LBS : HIT-DE); and
(b)
400W linear high pressure sodium (SON-TD or LBS : HST-DE)
MBIL (or LBS : HIT-DE) linear metal halide lamp shall be manufactured and
tested according to IEC 61167:1998. The lamp consists of an arc burning
between tungsten electrodes in an atmosphere of mercury and additional metal
halides enclosed in a double-ended quartz arc tube. The halides shall be chosen
to have a high efficiency light output of good color rendering and correlated
color temperature of 5200°K. The lamp shall be 750/1500W as specified. The
rated average life of the lamp shall not be less than 6000 hours at 50% failure.
The luminous efficacy of the MBIL lamp shall not be less than the following
figures for the respective wattage type in the initial 2000 hours:
Nominal Lamp Wattage (L)
750W
1500W
Section C8
Page 2 of 4
Initial Light Output
63750 1umen
127500 1umen
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SON-TD (or LBS : HST-DE) linear high pressure sodium lamp shall be
manufactured and tested according to IEC 60662:2002. The lamp shall be
tubular, double ended in construction and shall consist of an arc tube made of
sintered aluminium oxide and mounted in a clear tubular quartz outer bulb
having a single contact ceramic cap at each end. The lamp shall be rated at
400W and have a correlated color temperature of 2100°K. The rated average
life of the lamp shall not be less than 24000 hours at 50% failure.
The luminous efficacy of the SON-TD lamp shall not be less than the following
figures for the respective wattage type in the initial 2000 hours:
Nominal Lamp Wattage (L)
400W
C8.5
Initial Light Output
34000 1umen
LUMINAIRE FOR FLOODLIGHTING
C8.5.1
General
The floodlighting luminaires shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with IEC 60598-1:2008 and IEC 60598-2-5:2001.
The floodlighting luminaires shall have a degree of protection of not
less than IP54 to IEC 60529:2009 and they shall be constructed from
corrosion resistant materials.
The floodlighting luminaires shall be suitable of continuous outdoor
operation at an ambient temperature of 35°C without unduly affecting
the life and performance of the floodlighting luminaires, the control
gear and the lamps.
The floodlighting luminaires shall be supplied in complete set
including the main body, reflectors, front glass, lampholder
assemblies, terminal box, internal wirings, control gear, control gear
box and mounting facilities as specified and as required.
C8.5.2
Construction
The main body shall be manufactured from die cast aluminium,
which is fixed to two aluminium alloy end castings. The luminaire
should also incorporate removable drain plugs for use in humid
conditions.
Internal reflectors consisting of the main body and two end cheeks
and the two optional reflectors, baffled and faceted, are to be
constructed from highly specular aluminium. The metal reflector
shall be polished, anodized and shall be designed to give an
asymmetrical light distribution of beam angle to 1/10 peak to
approximately the following requirements:
Section C8
Page 3 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(a)
for 750/1500W MBIL (or LBS : HIT-DE) lamp
Horizontal 90°
Vertical 9° above peak, 41° below peak; and
(b)
for 400W SON-TD (or LBS : HST : DE) lamp
Horizontal 84°
Vertical 4° above peak, 19° below peak
The heat resistant toughened glass shall be fitted to a non-ferrous
metal front frame with corrosion resistant hinges and four swivel
bolts (stainless steel) for securing to the main body and provided with
weatherproofing silicon rubber gasket between the main body and
toughened front glass.
The lampholder assembly shall be suitable for accepting the lamp as
specified. They shall be incorporated with appropriate heat sinks if
necessary to avoid overheating.
Weatherproof wiring terminal box shall be mounted at the rear side of
the main body suitable for housing a two-way terminal block, each
terminal suitable for 1x10 mm2 cable. Cable entry is provided via a
combined cable gland/cord grip. Earthing stud/terminal shall be
provided. Internal wiring shall be of heat resistant type to the
appropriate IEC Standard.
The control gear shall be suitable for operation of the lamp as
specified, and shall consist of a ballast, ignitor, transformer and
power factor correction capacitor(s) as appropriate, to enable the
whole assembly to operate at the specified voltage with an overall
power factor not less than 0.85.
Control gear shall be provided with facilities for easy and securely
fixing to a metal back plate or gear box. Control gear shall be
suitable for continuous operation under an ambient temperature of
35°C.
The floodlighting luminaires shall be complete with the stirrup
arrangement which permits the floodlighting luminaires to be rotated
in azimuth and adjusted in elevation. An aiming stop shall be
provided on the floodlighting luminaires to ensure that the aiming
angle remains undisturbed even if the floodlighting luminaires are
removed from the stirrup for servicing.
C8.5.3
Lamps
All types of lamps suitable for fixing to the specified luminaire shall
have a high efficiency and a fairly constant output and be constructed
with appropriate lamp caps.
Section C8
Page 4 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C9
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE LUMINAIRE & DRIVER
C9.1
GENERAL
C9.1.1
The „Light Emitting Diode‟ (LED) luminaires, including the
electronic driver and LED module shall be suitable for operation at
220V ± 6%, 50 Hz ± 2%, single phase a.c. supply.
C9.1.2
The LED luminaires shall be fully assembled and tested before
shipment from factory. The LED luminaire shall comply with the
following international standards and their manufacturing process
shall conform to the relevant quality standard of ISO 9000:2008:
IEC 60598-1:2008
: Luminaires – Part 1:
General requirements and tests; and
IEC 60598-2-1:1987 : Luminaires – Part 2 Particular
requirements. Section 1: Fixed general
purpose luminaires or
IEC 60598-2-2:1997 : Luminaires – Part 2 Particular
requirements. Section 2: Recessed
luminaries.
Type test certificate shall be provided to demonstrate the compliance
with the above standards issued by an accredited test laboratory for
the LED luminaries.
C9.1.3
The LED luminaires shall be marked in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 60598-2-1:1987 for general-purpose luminaires
or IEC 60598-2-2:1997 for recessed luminaries. The ingress
protection for indoor and outdoor LED luminaire shall be at least
IP2X and IP54 respectively to IEC 60529:2009.
C9.1.4
The irradiance and radiance emission limits of the LED luminaires,
that are exposed to view directly, shall be tested to comply with the
hazard „Risk Group 1‟ (low risk) as stated in the requirements of the
IEC 62471:2006 – Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems.
C9.1.5
The LED luminaires shall be rated for continuous service at an
ambient temperature of 40 ℃ without affecting the performance
requirements as stated in clause C9.4 of this specification. The
Contractor shall be responsible to advise the Architect if the
performance of the LED luminaires will be affected by the
installation conditions.
C9.1.6
The LED luminaires shall be „Restriction of Hazardous Substances
(RoHS) Compliance‟.
Section C9
Page 1 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C9.1.7
C9.2
The LED luminaires shall have a full set of photometric data prepared
to CIBSE TM5 or IES format for general lighting design purpose.
ELECTRONIC DRIVER
C9.2.1
The electronic driver (driver) for the LED luminaire shall include the
components of power factor correction, radio interference suppression
and also dimming facility if it is specified. The driver shall conform
to the following international standards if applicable:
: Lamp controlgear – Part 1: General and
safety requirements; and
IEC 61347-1:2007
IEC 61347-2-13:2006 : Lamp controlgear – Part 2-13: Particular
requirements for d.c. or a.c. supplied
electronic controlgear for LED modules;
and
IEC 62384:2009
: DC or AC supplied electronic control
gear for LED modules – Performance
requirements; and
IEC 61000-3-2: 2009
: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) –
Part 3-2: Limits – Limits for harmonic
current emissions (equipment input
current ≦ 16A per phase); and
IEC 61547:2009
: Equipment
for
general
lighting
purposes – EMC immunity requirements;
and
EN 55015:2009
: Limits and methods of measurement of
radio disturbance characteristics of
electrical lighting and similar equipment
Certificates of compliance issued by accredited test laboratories shall
be provided for different ratings of drivers to be used in the Contract.
C9.2.2
Technical information of the drivers shall be provided to indicate the
performance of the drivers. The data shall include, but not limited to,
minimum and maximum input voltage, frequency, maximum
operating temperature, rated output voltage, rated output current,
rated output power and power factor.
C9.2.3
The rated life of driver shall not be less than 35,000 hours operating
at 40°C ambient temperature.
C9.2.4
Electronic ballast shall be compatible with the dimming circuit
provided. Unless other specified, the electronic ballast shall have at
least continuous dimming range 40% - 100% without flickering.
Section C9
Page 2 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C9.3
LED MODULE
C9.3.1
The LED module, self-ballasted LED module or self-ballasted LED
lamp shall be manufactured and tested to comply with the following
standards if applicable:
LED module & Selfballasted LED module
: IEC 62031:2008: LED modules for
general
lighting
–
Safety
specifications.
Connector for LED
modules
: IEC 60838-2-2:2006: Miscellaneous
lampholders – Part 2-2: Particular
requirements – Connectors for LED
modules
Certificate of compliance with the above standards shall be issued by
an accredited test laboratory or the manufacturer of LED module.
C9.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
C9.4.1
The performance of the LED luminaire and self-ballasted LED lamp
shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
Luminaire efficacy (lumen/watt):
The luminaire efficacy of different types of luminaires under
different colour temperatures to be used in the Contract shall
be provided to indicate its performance.
(b)
Lumen maintenance (L70)
The lumen output of LED luminaire shall deliver at least 70%
of its initial lumen output after operating 35,000 hours and
25,000 hours for LED luminaire and self-ballasted LED lamp
respectively. For compliance with the L70 threshold lumen
maintenance requirements, the lumen maintenance data of each
colour temperature LED luminaire using 6000 hours is
acceptable for projecting the L70. The required lumen
maintenance at 6,000 hours shall not be less than 94.1% and
91.8% for L70 = 35,000 hours and L70 = 25,000 hours
respectively.
(c)
Colour Rendering Index (CRI):
CRI shall be minimum 75 for colour temperature from 2700 –
6000K for indoor luminaires and minimum 80 for selfballasted LED lamp.
Section C9
Page 3 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
Power factor:
The power factor of the LED luminaire circuit and selfballasted LED lamp shall be minimum 0.9 and minimum 0.6
respectively.
(e)
Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) and its tolerance limit:
The colour temperature of a group of LED luminaires in the
same space or room shall not be visually noticeable. The
nominal CCT of the LED light source shall preferrably be one
of the following values. The tolerance limits shall be within the
below ranges:
2700 K
3000 K
3500 K
4000 K
5700 K
6500K
C9.4.2
2725 ± 145 K
3045 ± 175 K
3465 ± 245 K
3985 ± 275 K
5665 ± 355 K
6530 ± 510 K
Each model of LED luminaire or self-ballasted LED lamp shall be
tested to comply with the above performance requirements. The
Contractor shall submit the test report from the accredited
laboratories to certify each model of LED luminaire or self-ballasted
LED lamp complying with the standards or other recognized
international/national standards or other standards proposed by the
Contractor and agreed by the Architect.
Section C9
Page 4 of 4
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C10
DOMESTIC APPLIANCES
C10.1
GENERAL
C10.1.1
Compliance with Regulation
Domestic appliances together with their electric components and
cabling shall comply with the currently-in-forced edition of
C10.1.2
(a)
Electrical Products (Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws of
Hong Kong; and
(b)
IEC 60335-1:2006 Household and similar electrical
appliances – Safety – Part 1 : General requirements.
General Requirements
(a)
Unless otherwise specified, the domestic appliances shall be
designed for operation on 220V + 10%, 50 Hz +2%, single
phase, a.c. supply.
(b)
Unless otherwise specified, the domestic appliances shall be
suitable in all respects for operation in ambient air condition of
temperature range between 0°C and 40°C, and relative
humidity range between 0% and 99% with condensation due to
temperature changes.
(c)
Unless otherwise classified, all accessible metal parts of the
domestic appliances that may become live in the event of
electric fault shall be effectively and suitably bonded to earth
via to a common earthing terminal provided within the
domestic appliances.
(d)
Twin core cables without earth wire are only allowed for
double insulated appliances classified as Class II appliances
under the specified IEC or equivalent standards.
(e)
Where specified, 3-core flexible cord connected to the
domestic appliances shall conform to BS 6500:2000. The size
of the cable shall not be less than that specified and shall be
compatible with the rating of the respective domestic appliance.
Twin core cables without earth wire are only allowed for
double insulated appliances.
(f)
Where specified, 13 A plug connected to the flexible cord shall
conform to BS 1363-1:1995. The fuse of the plug shall be of a
rating compatible with the rating of the respective domestic
appliance.
Section C10
Page 1 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(g)
C10.1.3
Unless otherwise specified, domestic appliances and office
equipment shall be incorporated with the associated Energy
Label if relevant scheme is available under the Hong Kong
Voluntary Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme from Electrical
and Mechanical Services Department.
Technical Literature
The following technical literatures in Chinese and/or English shall be
provided, where applicable:
C10.2
(a)
Certificate of safety compliance;
(b)
Product catalogue;
(c)
Assembly drawings with dimensions;
(d)
Electrical circuit diagram;
(e)
Installation, operation and service manuals;
(f)
Trouble-shooting guide; and
(g)
Spare part list with itemized price.
900mm, 1200mm AND 1400mm CEILING FAN
C10.2.1
C10.2.2
General Requirements
(a)
The fan shall be fully balanced after assembly to ensure that
the fan shall not oscillate/vibrate due to out-of-balance forces
or whatsoever during operation.
(b)
The fan shall conform to the latest edition of the following
standards:
(i)
IEC 60879:1992 Performance and construction of
electric circulating fans and regulators; and
(ii)
IEC 60335-2-80:2008 Household and similar electrical
appliances – Part 2-80 : Particular requirements for fans.
Performance Requirements
(a)
The sweep diameter of the fans shall be:
Size of Fan
900 mm
1200 mm
1400 mm
Section C10
Page 2 of 50
Sweep Diameter
900 mm ± 5%
1200 mm ± 5%
1400 mm ± 5%
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
The air delivery rate of the fans shall be:
Size of Fan
900 mm
1200 mm
1400 mm
(c)
C10.2.3
Air Delivery Rate
not less than 2.2 m³/s
not less than 4.0 m³/s
not less than 4.5 m³/s
The power factors of the fans shall not be less than 0.85 at any
speed.
Construction
(a)
Fan unit
(i)
Fan motor
The motor shall be a totally enclosed, capacitor run
induction motor with internal stator and external
squirrel-cage rotor.
The rotor shall be mounted on sealed-for-life grease
lubricated ball bearings.
(ii)
Fan blades
The fan shall be fitted with two or more well balanced
blades so as to be reasonably free from vibration.
The blade assemblies shall consist of blades
manufactured from heavy gauge aluminium riveted to
steel blade carriers.
The blade carriers shall be manufactured from mild
steel plate of not less than 40 mm width at the
narrowest point, pressed to shape.
Where the blade carriers are twisted to give the
required angle of incidence to the blades, there shall be
large radius bends to prevent stress concentrations in
the blade carriers.
The blade carriers shall be securely fastened to the
frame of the motor by machine screws and spring
washers, the whole designed to ensure that there is no
possibility of a blade becoming detached during
operation.
Section C10
Page 3 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
(c)
Connecting piece (capacitor housing)
(i)
The plastic terminal block and capacitor shall be
mounted in a ferrous metal connecting piece located
between the fan and the down-rod assembly. The leads
from the stator windings shall be connected to the
terminal block. An earthing terminal, consisting of a
round head brass screw and washer, shall be provided
on the connecting piece. All exposed metal parts of the
fan shall be connected to this earthing terminal
(ii)
The bottom portion of the connecting piece shall be
screwed on the shaft of the motor. The connecting
piece shall be tightened on to a shoulder formed on the
motor shaft.
A 4 mm minimum thickness steel
hexagonal lock-nut with lock bracket underneath shall
then be fitted and tightened. The connecting piece shall
be secured in the fully tightened position by two (2)
hardened steel grub screws. These screws shall engage
in shallow depressions drilled in the shaft after the
connecting piece has been tightened in place to ensure
positive locking.
Down-rod assembly
(i)
The down-rod assembly shall consist of a steel downrod complete with shackle and hard rubber roller for
suspension of the fan. The down-rod shall be supplied
in lengths of 200 mm, 300 mm, 450 mm, 600 mm,
750 mm, 900 mm and 1200 mm as specified in the
Particular Specification.
(ii)
Cable of such a length as to suit the down-rod shall be
provided. The down-rod shall be manufactured from
steel tube to BS EN 10255:2007, having an outside
diameter of approximately 21 mm, with minimum wall
thickness of not less than 3 mm as specified in Table 5
of BS EN 10255:2007. It shall be accurately threaded
at one end and shall be screwed into the top portion of
the fan connecting piece (capacitor housing) from
which it shall protrude by a minimum of 2 mm. The
minimum wall thickness of the threaded portion,
measured from the minor diameter of the thread to the
internal diameter of the tube, shall be not less than
1.8 mm.
(iii)
The down-rod shall be locked in position by two (2)
hexagonal steel lock nuts, having a minimum thickness
of 6 mm, tightened on to the upper machined surface of
the fan connecting piece.
Section C10
Page 4 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(iv)
The down-rod shall also be locked to the fan
connecting piece by means of a steel split-pin, of not
less than 5 mm diameter, passing through both the fan
connecting piece and the down-rod.
(v)
The split-pin holes in the fan connecting piece shall be
of such diameter that the split-pin is a light push-fit
there in. The matching split-pin holes in the down-rod
shall be just sufficiently large so that the split-pin shall
be a light push-fit, when the hole is in its worst position
relative to the threading. All burrs and sharp edges
shall be removed from the split-pin holes in both the
fan connecting piece and the down-rod.
(vi)
The steel suspension shackle shall be welded to the
down-rod. Welding shall be of good quality. The
rubber roller shall be mounted on an 8 mm diameter
steel clevis pin secured by a split-pin.
(vii)
The ends of the down-rod shall rounded off and free
from burrs. There shall be no sharp edges which could
cause damage to the insulation of the wiring.
(viii) Suspension joints and threaded parts:
Joints along the suspension rod must be of doublelocking design, i.e. at least two independent positive
locking devices must be employed to prevent a joint
from loosening itself.
All factory-assembled threaded components which
form part of a suspension joint must be bonded with
glue as approved by the Architect.
The maximum clearance between threaded mating parts
must not exceed 1% of their mean diameter.
The direction of rotation of the fan shall be such that all
screwed joints tend to be tightened when the fan is in
operation.
(ix)
(d)
Two (2) canopies manufactured from plastic or pressed
steel sheet and fitted over the upper and lower ends of
the down-rod shall be provided. They shall be fixed to
the down-rod by grub screws.
Surface finish
The whole fan shall be finished in high quality stove enamel in
white or ivory colour.
Section C10
Page 5 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(e)
C10.3
Speed regulator
(i)
A speed regulator shall be supplied with each fan.
(ii)
The speed regulator shall be of robust construction and
built on a flame-retardant moulded plastic or insulated
steel base and enclosed by a flame-retardant moulded
plastic cover or metal cover. Plastic cover shall be in
white or ivory colour to match the fan. Metal cover
shall be of stainless steel or metalclad finish.
(iii)
The speed regulator shall be equipped with at least
three (3) speed controls and an “OFF” position.
(iv)
The rotary switch of the speed regulator shall be
designed for smooth and easy movement by hand
between different speed positions.
(v)
For choke type regulator, an earth terminal shall be
provided on the base with an earth wire permanently
connected to the steel core of the choke unit.
400mm SWEEP AUTO CYCLE/OSCILLATING FAN
C10.3.1
General Requirements
(a)
The fan shall be provided with cable entries, conduit opening
or glands for permanent connection to fixed wiring.
Connection terminal shall be provided and secured by means
of screws, nuts or equally effective devices.
(b)
The power factor of the fan shall not be less than 0.8.
(c)
The fan shall comply with the latest edition of safety standards
for household electric fans and regulators as follows:
(i)
(ii)
C10.3.2
IEC 60335-2-80:2008; and
JIS C 9601:1990 issued by Japan Standards Association.
Performance Requirements
(a)
The fan blades shall have a sweep diameter ranging from 385
to 415 mm.
(b)
The air delivery rate of the fan shall be not less than 1 m³/s.
(c)
The noise level of the fan at all operating speeds shall not
exceed 58 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.
Section C10
Page 6 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
C10.3.3
The fan shall be provided with double oscillating mounting of
not less than 360° (i.e. the direction of the axis of the air flow
is changed automatically and continuously in more than one
plane).
Construction
(a)
The fan shall be designed for ceiling-mounted application.
(b)
The fan motor shall have sealed-for-life roller bearings or
bushes.
(c)
The fan shall have adequate mechanical strength and be so
constructed as to withstand such rough usage as may be
expected in normal use.
(d)
The material of the fan shall be fire-resistant and non-flame
propagating.
(e)
The fan shall be of domestic type with smooth, safe edges and
„easy-to-disassemble‟ design for cleaning.
(f)
The fan blades shall be enclosed in a chromed and closely
meshed metal guard. The gap of the guard slots shall not be
greater than 13 mm.
(g)
The fan shall equip with a thermal cut-out device to protect the
fan from abnormal operation.
(h)
The fan shall include a separate fan regulator which shall
comprise of three speed settings and a switching-off function.
(i)
The fan shall equip with a control device for adjustment of its
angle of oscillation.
(j)
The fan shall be designed with shock-proof device for quiet
operation.
(k)
The fan shall be finished to manufacturer‟s standard light
colour to be approved by the Architect.
(l)
The construction of the fan shall be so designed that end-user
does not need any tools to assemble/disassemble the fan guard
and fan blade for cleaning.
(m)
The fan shall be subject to function test for not less than 72
hours of continuous running and shall show no abnormal
conditions such as overheat, failing to oscillate and, etc. during
the testing period.
Section C10
Page 7 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.4
400mm SWEEP WALL FAN
C10.4.1
General Requirements
(a)
The fan shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1.5 m in length;
and a suitably fused 13 A plug.
(b)
The power factor of the fan shall be not less than 0.8.
(c)
The fan shall comply with the latest edition of safety standards
for household electric fans and regulators as follows:
(i)
(ii)
C10.4.2
C10.4.3
IEC 60335-2-80:2008; and
JIS C 9601:1990 issued by Japan Standards Association.
Performance Requirements
(a)
The fan blades of the fan shall have a sweep diameter ranging
from 385 to 415 mm.
(b)
The air delivery rate of the fan shall not be less than 1 m³/s.
(c)
The noise level of the fan at all operating speeds shall not
exceed 58 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.
Construction
(a)
The fan shall be designed for wall-mounted application. Fans
converted from desk type fan will NOT be accepted.
(b)
The fan motor shall have sealed-for-life roller bearings or
bushes.
(c)
The fan shall have adequate mechanical strength and be so
constructed as to withstand such rough usage as may be
expected in normal use.
(d)
The material of the fan shall be fire-resistant and non-flame
propagating.
(e)
The fan shall be of domestic type with smooth, safe edges and
„easy-to-disassemble‟ design for cleaning.
(f)
The fan blades shall be enclosed in a chromed and closely
meshed metal guard. The gap of the guard slots shall be not
greater than 13 mm.
(g)
The fan shall equip with a thermal cut-out device to protect the
fan from abnormal operation.
Section C10
Page 8 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.5
(h)
The fan shall equip with an integral regulator comprising three
speed settings and a switching-off function.
(i)
The fan regulator shall be of push-cord type.
(j)
The fan shall be provided with oscillating and tilting
mechanism for horizontal swing and vertical adjustment
respectively.
(k)
The fan head shall be capable of being clamped or locked at
any desired position within a range of tilting angle.
(l)
The tilting mechanism shall be of robust and durable
construction. If plastic stand is used, a U-shape sheet steel of
suitable thickness shall be inserted into the pivot spring
chamber as a reinforcement of supporting strength of the tilting
mechanism, otherwise the design of the tilting mechanism
shall be approved by the Architect.
(m)
The oscillating mechanism shall have a reinforced and reliable
clutch that will slip or disengage the steering-gear of the
oscillating mechanism if the fan meets an obstruction as it
swings. The oscillating mechanism shall be easily disengaged
when not required.
(n)
An oscillation switch for controlling of „oscillation‟ and „not
oscillating‟, must be provided in a hand-touch position and
easily accessible by the operator at floor level.
(o)
The fan shall be finished to manufacturer‟s standard light
colour approved by the Architect.
(p)
The construction of the fan shall be designed that end-user
does not need any tools to assemble/disassemble the fan guard
and fan blade for cleaning.
(q)
The fan shall be subject to function test for not less than 72
hours of continuous running and shall show no abnormal
conditions such as overheat, failing to oscillate and, etc. during
the testing period.
400mm SWEEP DESK FAN
C10.5.1
General Requirements
(a)
The fan shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1.5 m in length;
and a suitably fused 13 A plug.
(b)
The power factor of the fan shall be not less than 0.8.
Section C10
Page 9 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
The fan shall comply with the latest edition of safety standards
for household electric fans and regulators as follows:
(i)
(ii)
C10.5.2
C10.5.3
IEC 60335-2-80:2008; and
JIS C 9601:1990 issued by Japan Standards Association;
or other equivalent standards.
Performance Requirements
(a)
The fan blades of the fan shall have a sweep diameter ranging
from 385 to 415 mm.
(b)
The air delivery rate of the fan shall not be less than 1 m³/s.
(c)
The noise level of the fan at all operating speeds shall not
exceed 58 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.
Construction
(a)
The fan shall be free-standing type and portable.
(b)
The fan motor shall have sealed-for-life roller bearings or
bushes.
(c)
The fan shall have adequate mechanical strength and be so
constructed as to withstand such rough usage as may be
expected in normal use.
(d)
The material of the fan shall be fire-resistant and non-flame
propagating.
(e)
The fan shall be of domestic type with smooth, safe edges and
„easy-to-disassemble‟ design for cleaning.
(f)
The fan blades shall be enclosed in a chromed and closely
meshed metal guard. The gap of the guard slots shall be not
greater than 13 mm.
(g)
The fan shall equip with a thermal cut-out device to protect the
fan from abnormal operation.
(h)
The fan regulator shall comprise three speed settings and shall
provide a switching-off function, complete with a timer switch
for controlling of continuous operation and at least providing
of time setting of 1 hour.
(i)
The fan shall be provided with oscillating and tilting
mechanism for horizontal swing and vertical adjustment
respectively.
(j)
The fan head shall be capable of being clamped or locked at
any desired position within a range of tilting angle.
Section C10
Page 10 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.6
(k)
The construction of the tilting mechanism shall be of robust
and durable construction.
(l)
The oscillating mechanism shall be easily disengaged when not
required.
(m)
The oscillating mechanism shall have a reinforced and reliable
clutch which will slip or disengage for avoiding overturning
when meeting an obstruction, otherwise a mechanism shall be
incorporated into the fan which can automatically swing to
opposite direction when the fan meets an obstruction.
(n)
The fan shall have sufficient degree of mechanical stability
that it shall not overturn during operation in any normal
position on a plane inclined at an angle of 10° to the horizontal.
(o)
The fan shall be finished to manufacturer‟s standard light
colour approved by the Architect.
(p)
The construction of the fan shall be so designed that end-user
does not need any tools to assemble/disassemble the fan guard
and fan blade for cleaning.
(q)
The fan shall be subject to function test for not less than 72
hours of continuous running and shall show no abnormal
conditions such as overheat, failing to oscillate and, etc. during
the testing period.
400mm SWEEP PEDESTAL FAN
C10.6.1
General Requirements
(a)
The fan shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1.5 m in length;
and a suitably fused 13 A plug.
(b)
The power factor of the fan shall be not less than 0.8.
(c)
The fan shall comply with the latest edition of safety standards
for household electric fans and regulators as follows:
(i)
(ii)
C10.6.2
IEC 60335-2-80:2008; and
JIS C 9601:1990 issued by Japan Standards Association;
or other equivalent standards.
Performance Requirements
(a)
The fan blades shall have a sweep diameter ranging from 385
to 415 mm.
(b)
The air delivery rate of the fan shall not be less than 1 m³/s.
Section C10
Page 11 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
C10.6.3
The noise level of the fan at all operating speeds shall not
exceed 58 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.
Construction
(a)
The fan shall be of free-standing type complete with a vertical
supporting rod of adjustable working height.
(b)
The maximum working height of the fan shall be 1.5 m ± 10%
above the floor.
(c)
The fan motor shall have sealed-for-life roller bearings or
bushes.
(d)
The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall
not have abnormal vibration or creeping on the floor during
operation.
(e)
The fan shall have adequate mechanical strength and be so
constructed as to withstand such rough usage as may be
expected in normal use.
(f)
The material of the fan shall be fire-resistant and non-flame
propagating.
(g)
The fan shall be of domestic type with smooth, safe edges and
„easy-to-disassemble‟ design for cleaning.
(h)
The fan blades shall be enclosed in a chromed and closely
meshed metal guard. The gap of the guard slots shall be not
greater than 13 mm.
(i)
The fan shall equip with a thermal cut-out device to protect the
fan from abnormal operation.
(j)
The fan regulator shall comprise three speed settings and shall
provide a switching-off function, complete with a timer switch
for controlling of continuous operation and at least providing
of time setting of 1 hour.
(k)
The fan shall be provided with oscillating and tilting
mechanism for horizontal swing and vertical adjustment
respectively.
(l)
The fan head shall be capable of being clamped or locked at
any desired position within a range of tilting angle.
(m)
The construction of the tilting mechanism shall be of robust
and durable construction.
Section C10
Page 12 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.7
(n)
The oscillating mechanism shall have a reinforced and reliable
clutch that will slip or disengage for avoiding overturning
when meeting an obstruction, otherwise a mechanism shall be
incorporated into the fan which can automatically swing to
opposite direction when the fan meets an obstruction.
(o)
The fan shall be fitted with adjustable height pedestal with
positive locking arrangement. The extended part of the
pedestal shall be chromium-plated and incorporated with a
stopper at the end. The base weight shall be sufficiently heavy
to hold the fan in a stable manner when the fan is extended to
its maximum height of approximately 1.5 m above the floor.
At the maximum working height the fan shall not overturn
when operated in any normal position on a plane inclined at an
angle of 10° to the horizontal.
(p)
The fan shall be finished to manufacturer‟s standard light
colour to be approved by the Architect.
(q)
The construction of the fan shall be so designed that end-user
does not need any tools to assemble/dissemble the fan guard
and fan blade for cleaning.
(r)
The fan shall be subject to function test for not less than 72
hours of continuous running and shall show no abnormal
conditions such as overheat, failing to oscillate and, etc. during
the testing period.
DOMESTIC EXHAUST FAN
C10.7.1
General Requirements
(a)
The design, construction, and testing of the fan shall be in
compliance with the requirements of IEC 60335-2-80:2008.
(b)
All electrical components, parts and accessories shall be
manufactured conforming to the relevant IEC standards.
(c)
The fan shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in length.
2-core cord is allowed only for double insulated appliances
classified as Class II.
(d)
The power factor of the fan shall not be less than 0.8.
Section C10
Page 13 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.7.2
Performance Requirements
(a)
The fan diameters of the respectively exhaust fans shall be:
Fan Size (mm)
150
230
300
(b)
Fan Diameters (mm)
150 ± 5%
230 ± 5%
300 ± 5%
The exhaust fans shall be capable of providing the following
air extraction rate:
Fan Size (mm)
150
230
300
(c)
The noise level of the fan during operation shall not exceed
65 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.
(d)
Maximum overall height and width:
Fan Size
(mm)
150
230
300
C10.7.3
Air Extraction Rate (m³/s)
0.06
0.15
0.3
Maximum Height (mm) Maximum Width (mm)
232
323
413
230
305
391
Construction
(a)
The exhaust fan shall be designed of robust construction. The
exhaust fan shall be suitable for mounting on windows and
partitions which shall have a opening of the following diameter:
Fan Size (mm)
150
230
300
Diameter of Opening (mm)
175 to 185
250 to 260
315 to 325
(b)
The impeller, fan duct, outlet grille and shutter assembly shall
be constructed of high quality flame retardant plastic material.
(c)
The motor winding shall have Class B insulation and protected
by a thermal cut-out. The fan motor shall be totally enclosed
in an aluminium alloy casing.
(d)
Motor bearings shall be of self-aligning, oil impregnated
porous bronze brushes.
(e)
The exhaust fan shall comprise an electrically operated back
draught shutter assembly.
Section C10
Page 14 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.8
(f)
The inner and outer clamp plate/grille assembly shall have
rubber gasket.
(g)
The exhaust fan impeller shall be fully balanced to avoid
vibration during operation.
(h)
The exhaust fan shall be designed for easy
assembling/dismantling to facilitate servicing and maintenance
work.
PROPELLER FAN – RING MOUNTED TYPE
C10.8.1
C10.8.2
General Requirements
(a)
The fan shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient
temperature up to 50°C.
(b)
The motor shall have Class E insulation to IEC 60085:2007.
The power factor of the fan motor shall not be less than 0.85
under any operating condition.
(c)
The fan shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in length.
2-core cord is allowed only for double insulated appliances
classified as Class II.
Performance Requirements
(a)
The fan diameters of the respectively propeller fans shall be:
Fan Size (mm)
241
305
381
457
610
(b)
The air flow rate of the propeller fan of respective sizes shall
be not less than the following:
Fan Diameter
(mm)
241
305
381
457
610
(c)
Fan Diameters (mm)
241 ± 5%
305 ± 5%
381 ± 5%
457 ± 5%
610 ± 5%
Fan Speed
(rpm)
1300
900
900
900
700
Air Flow Rate
(m³/min)
(cfm)
12
440
19
700
39
1350
70
2500
129
4600
The sound pressure level emitted by the fan shall not exceed
65 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan outlet.
Section C10
Page 15 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.8.3
Construction
(a)
The fan impeller shall be mounted on the same shaft as the
driving motor and constructed of heavy gauge pressed steel
blades fitted to cast aluminium alloy hubs, fully balanced after
assembly.
(b)
The motor shall be of squirrel cage induction type, with
capacitor start and run, and of totally enclosed construction
with dust seals.
(c)
Ball or roller bearings shall be provided and shall be filled with
lithium based grease suitable for operating temperature
between -30°C and 120°C.
(d)
The fan and motor assembly shall have heavy duty and robust
steel mounting arms.
(e)
The mounting arms shall be fixed to the mounting ring through
a rubber or neoprene resilient cushion to reduce the
transmission of vibration to the fixing surface.
(f)
The mounting rings shall be constructed of steel pressing and
have sufficient flexibility to prevent fracture when fixed to
slightly uneven surfaces.
(g)
The fan shall be suitable for both vertical and horizontal
mounting.
(h)
The fan shall be supplied for air discharge away from the
motor.
(i)
The fan assembly shall be protected with corrosion resistant
resin based paints. All bolts and nuts and washers shall be hot
dip galvanized. The finishing coat shall be in grey colour
unless otherwise specified.
(j)
All exposed metal parts shall be effectively bonded together
and connected to a common earthing terminal.
(k)
If screws and nuts are fitted onto the fan blades for balancing
purpose, spring washer should be provided to avoid loosening.
Other securing mechanism such as welding shall be subject to
the approval of the Architect.
Section C10
Page 16 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.9
FUME CUPBOARD EXHAUST FAN
C10.9.1
C10.9.2
C10.9.3
General Requirements
(a)
The equipment shall be of axial flow design composed of
durable materials and quiet in operation.
(b)
Duct connector, cupboard adaptor, clamp ring, Jubilee clips
shall be provided. All of them shall be highly resistant to
corrosive gases and chemical fumes emitted during chemical
reactions as resulted from laboratory experiments and shall be
capable of handling gases and fumes of from 0°C to 40°C.
Performance Requirements
(a)
The fan shall cover the range from 240 to 300 mm in nominal
diameter.
(b)
The revolution speed of the fan shall be not less than 2700 rpm.
(c)
The air volume flow rate shall be not less than 0.35 m³/s in
static pressure of 100 N/m².
(d)
The noise level of the fan at all operating speeds shall not
exceed 58 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.
Construction
(a)
Motor
(i)
The fan shall be driven by a totally enclosed but
externally cooled single phase induction motor of
metric design to the latest edition of IEC 60034-1:2004.
(ii)
Insulation shall be not lower than Class E as defined in
IEC 60085:2007.
(iii)
The motor shall be rated for continuous running at
ambient temperature of up to 40°C.
(iv)
The motor shall be protected by a sealing coat of
polyurethane compound or equivalent material.
(b)
The impellers shall be moulded in phenolic resin or equivalent
material.
(c)
Circular fan casing shall be made from rigid PVC or
galvanized steel coated with epoxy resin or equivalent material.
Ends of the casing shall be spigotted for attachment of duct
and fume cupboard connectors respectively.
Section C10
Page 17 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
C10.10
Terminal box
(i)
Terminal box shall be made of the same material as the
casing and shall be located outside air stream and
affixed to the casing.
(ii)
Terminal box shall be suitable for reception of a 2 m
long, 3-core 1.25 mm² flexible cable to BS 6500:2000.
The cable shall be fitted with the fan. 2-core cord is
allowed only for double insulated appliances classified
as Class II.
(iii)
Duct/cupboard connectors and accessories shall be
made from corrosion resistant material such as
neoprene, epoxy resin or other approved material.
(iv)
The fan shall be suitable for mounting vertically,
horizontally or at an inclined angle. Normally, the
duct/cupboard connectors will support the fan when
fitted to the duct work. Extra supporting facilities in
the form of two extended ribs shall be provided on the
casing and shall be drilled for fixing supporting
brackets.
1 kW ELECTRIC FIRE, WALL MOUNTED TYPE
C10.10.1 General Requirements
(a)
The electric fire shall comply with IEC 60335-2-30:2009.
(b)
The electric fire shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1.5 m in
length.
C10.10.2 Performance Requirements
The electric fire shall be fitted with one replaceable infra-red heating
element of 1 kW rating.
C10.10.3 Construction
(a)
The electric fire shall be of wall mounted type.
(b)
The electric fire shall be of all metal construction incorporating
an attractive chromium plated reflector which can be swiveled
for directional adjustment of the reflected heat beam.
(c)
A close mesh chromium plated fire guard shall be provided
over the entire length of the heating element and over the
major portion of the reflector. The gap of the guard slots shall
be not greater than 13 mm.
Section C10
Page 18 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.11
(d)
The electric fire shall have adequate mechanical strength and
stability to withstand rough handling as may be expected in
normal use.
(e)
The electric fire shall be fitted with a pull cord “ON/OFF”
switch.
2 kW CONVECTOR FIRE
C10.11.1 General Requirements
(a)
The convector fire shall comply with IEC 60335-2-30:2009.
(b)
The convector fire shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 3m in
length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.
C10.11.2 Performance Requirements
The power rating shall range from 2 kW to 2.5 kW.
C10.11.3 Construction
C10.12
(a)
The convector fire shall be of vertical floor-standing type.
(b)
The convector fire shall be of robust and all steel construction
with no sharp edges, non-marking feet if applicable and
suitably finished and protected with corrosion and heat
resistant paints of approved type.
(c)
The convector fire shall have an on-off switch incorporating an
indicating lamp showing that power is available.
(d)
The convector fire shall have an adjustable thermostat for
room temperature control.
(e)
The convector fire shall be fitted with a close mesh chromium
plated front grille. The gap of the grille slots shall be not
greater than 13 mm.
2 kW OIL-FILLED ELECTRIC RADIATOR
C10.12.1 General Requirements
(a)
The radiator shall comply with IEC 60335-2-30:2009.
(b)
The radiator shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 3m in
length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.
Section C10
Page 19 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.12.2 Performance Requirements
The power rating shall range from 2 kW to 2.5 kW.
C10.12.3 Construction
C10.13
(a)
The radiator shall be of vertical floor-standing type.
(b)
The casing of the radiator shall be constructed of sheet steel, or
equivalent. The casing shall be leak-proof and robust in
construction and complete with castor wheels.
(c)
The external of casing shall be finished with white or grey
stove enamel paints.
(d)
All fins shall be rounded and free from sharp edges.
(e)
The radiator shall have a selector switch providing at least 2
stages of heating.
(f)
The radiator shall have an on-off switch incorporating an
indicating lamp showing that power is available.
(g)
The radiator shall have an adjustable thermostat for room
temperature control.
(h)
The heating element shall be totally immersed in non
flammable oil.
300mm AND 1200mm SINGLE TUBULAR HEATER COMPLETE WITH
WIRE GUARD
C10.13.1 General Requirements
(a)
The design and the construction of the heater shall comply
with IEC 60335-1:2006 and IEC 60335-2-30:2009.
(b)
The heater shall be designed for use as wardrobe heater.
(c)
The heater shall be of robust construction, durable and
maintenance free under normal operating condition.
(d)
The hottest accessible part of the heater shall not exceed 80°C.
C10.13.2 Performance Requirements
The maximum power rating of the heaters shall be:
Size (mm)
300
1200
Section C10
Page 20 of 50
Maximum Power Rating (W)
60
240
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.13.3 Construction
(a)
The heating element shall be totally enclosed in an enclosure
of such material that must be heat resistant, non-combustible
and non-corrosive.
(b)
A built-in automatic on/off thermostat of preset temperature
80°C shall be fitted.
(c)
Wiring terminal shall be made of heat-resistance terminal
block, preferably in porcelain, capable of withstanding the
design working temperature.
(d)
The heater shall be provided with mounting brackets.
(e)
The heater shall be protected from causing heat-burns to
persons.
(f)
The heater shall be free from any potential fire hazards.
(g)
The diameter of the heater enclosure shall not exceed 50 mm.
(h)
The heater shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 3 m in
length; and a 13 A plug fused at 5 A or less.
(i)
The heater shall be effectively bonded to earth through the
flexible cord.
(j)
An adhesive label of safety instruction in both English (in
letter not less than 3 mm) and Chinese (in letter not less than
5 mm) written as below: “Do not use without fitting the wire
guard. Do not cover.”
(k)
A recommended installation instruction sheet with diagram
shall be provided with each heater.
(l)
The wire guard shall consist of a frame of 1mm thick steel
sheet or equivalent material to which an 1mm thick 12 x
12 mm wire mesh is welded.
(m)
The wire guard complete with the end plate and accessories
shall be hot-dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461:2009 or
constructed of equivalent material.
(n)
The clearance between the heater and the wire guard shall be
not less than 20 mm.
Section C10
Page 21 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.14
10-LITRE OPEN-OUTLET TYPE, ELECTRIC SINK WATER HEATER
C10.14.1 General Requirements
(a)
The hot water capacity shall not be less than 10 litres.
(b)
The sink water heater shall be suitable for installing above the
water sink.
(c)
The sink water heater shall be of wall-mounted type.
(d)
The sink water heater shall comply with IEC 60335-2-21: 2009.
C10.14.2 Performance Requirements
(a)
The sink water heater shall be capable of maintaining water
temperature in the container between 55°C and 78°C
irrespective of the water inlet temperature and ambient air
conditions.
(b)
The water container shall be suitable for connection to a mains
water supply having a pressure of not less than 205 kPa. A
pressure test certificate shall be provided for each sink water
heater quoting the manufacturer‟s serial number and
confirming that a pressure test to manufacturer‟s standard or
50 kPa, whichever is greater, has been successfully applied.
(c)
The nominal power rating of the sink water heater shall be
3 kW.
C10.14.3 Construction
(a)
The sink water heater shall be provided with an adjustable
thermostat with ample current rating to maintain water
temperature from 55°C to 78°C.
(b)
The sink water heater shall be provided with a non-resettable
thermal cut-out to protect the water temperature inside the
container from exceeding 90°C in order to provide additional
safety protection.
(c)
Earthing terminal shall be provided.
(d)
The inner hot water container shall be suitable for local
installation.
(e)
The construction material of the inner hot water container shall
be designed and chosen by the combined merits on
expandability, thermal conductivity, susceptibility to surface
fouling, reaction to water acidity and alkalinity on boiler
applications, such as tinned copper, or equivalent.
Section C10
Page 22 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.15
(f)
The outer casing shall be drip-proof and constructed from
heavy gauge sheet steel properly treated to prevent corrosion
or equivalent material.
(g)
The outer casing shall be in white colour.
(h)
The thermal insulating material shall be of non-combustible
and non-CFC type.
(i)
A swivel spout at outlet of 300 mm approx. in radius shall be
provided.
(j)
The sink water heater shall be provided with a permanent
warning label in English and Chinese characters as follows:
“The outlet from the water heater must not be blocked or
connected to any form of fitting with an isolating valve”.
(k)
The following pipe fittings shall be provided at inlet side:
(i)
A water control valve
(ii)
A non-return valve
(iii)
A water strainer
90-LITRE AND 135-LITRE THERMAL STORAGE ELECTRIC WATER
HEATER
C10.15.1 General Requirements
(a)
The water heater shall comply with the relevant requirements
of Electrical Products (Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws
of Hong Kong.
(b)
The water heater shall comply with the relevant requirements
of Waterworks Ordinance, CAP 102, Laws of Hong Kong.
(c)
The water heater shall comply with Code of Practice for the
Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued by the Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department, the Government of HKSAR.
(d)
The water heater shall comply with the relevant requirements
of Boilers and Pressure Vessels Ordinance, CAP 56, Laws of
Hong Kong.
(e)
The power rating of the product shall range from 2.5 kW to
3 kW.
Section C10
Page 23 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(f)
The water heater shall comply with the latest edition of the
following standards:
(i)
For unvented thermal storage type electric water heater
(ii)
-
IEC 60335-2-21:2009 Household and similar
electrical appliances – Safety – Part 2-21 :
Particular requirements for storage water heaters;
and
-
BS EN 12897:2006 Specification for unvented
hot water storage units and packages;
For thermal cut out
BS EN 60730-2-15:2007 Specification for electrical
controls for household and similar general purposes;
and
(iii)
For temperature and pressure relief valve
BS 6283-2:1991 Safety and control devices for use in
hot water systems. Specification for temperature relief
valves for pressures from 1 bar to 10 bar.
(g)
The water heater shall have obtained Energy Label Grade 1 or
2 of the Energy Efficiency Office (EEO) of Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department.
C10.15.2 Performance Requirements
(a)
The hot water cylinder shall be suitable for a working pressure
of 10 bar or below. A test certificate shall be provided for each
water heater quoting the manufacturer‟s serial number and
confirming that a pressure test to manufacturer‟s standard or
1.5 times the working pressure, whichever is greater, has been
successfully applied.
(b)
The hot water storage capacity shall be:
Size of water heater (litres)
90
135
Section C10
Page 24 of 50
Hot Water Storage Capacity
(litres)
From 90 litres to 100 litres
From 135 litres to 155 litres
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.15.3 Specific Safety Requirements
(a)
The safety standard to which the product conforms and the
storage capacity in litres (l) should be clearly and permanently
marked on the body of the product in additional to the marking
requirements stipulated in the essential safety requirements for
electrical products in Electrical Products (Safety) Regulation,
CAP 406G, Laws of Hong Kong.
(b)
Manufacturer‟s
installation
instructions
including
recommendations and warnings to users and installers, etc.,
should also be provided and clearly marked.
(c)
The construction material of the hot water cylinder shall be
corrosion resistance, such as copper, stainless steel or other
equivalent material.
The cylinder shall be capable of
withstanding 1.5 times the working pressure.
(d)
The water heater shall be fitted with a thermostat (with a
maximum setting temperature of 80°C) to control the heating
of the stored water.
(e)
The water heater shall be fitted with a thermal cut-out
(complying with BS EN 60730-2-15:2007 and with a
temperature setting of 85°C) to cut off the supply of electricity
if the stored water is heated above the temperature setting of
the thermostat and before the operation of the temperature and
pressure relief valve is initiated. The thermal cut-out should be
connected in series with the thermostat and should be reset
manually after dismantling of the enclosure of the product.
(f)
The water heater shall be fitted with
EITHER
(i)
a non-resettable temperature relief valve (complying
with BS 6283-2:1991), having a setting of 90°C, and
complete with manual test easing gear; AND
a pressure relief valve (complying with BS 62832:1991), having a set pressure of not greater than the
maximum design pressure of the water heater or 10 bar,
and complete with manual test easing gear;
OR
(ii)
a non-resettable temperature and pressure relief valve
complying with the requirements of BS 6283-2:1991,
having a set temperature of 90°C and a set pressure of
the water heater or 10 bar, and complete with manual
test easing gear.
Section C10
Page 25 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.15.4 Construction
C10.16
(a)
The hot water cylinder shall be suitable for local installation.
(b)
The water heater shall be provided with an anti-vacuum valve
complying with BS 6282-1:1982 or other relevant Parts to
prevent heated water from being siphoned back to supply pipe
during water shortage period.
(c)
A draining device shall be provided to discharge water and
shall be arranged so as to be clear of all the electrical
connections and terminals.
(d)
The outer casing shall be drip-proof and constructed from
heavy gauge sheet steel properly treated to prevent corrosion
or equivalent material.
(e)
The outer casing shall be in white colour.
(f)
The thermal insulating material shall be of non-combustible
and non-CFC type.
(g)
The water heater shall be suitable for vertical floor or wall
mounting. It shall be completed with water inlet and outlet
suitable for connection to standard water pipe. The inlet and
outlet pipes shall be clearly marked on the product and the
British Standard Pipe (BSP) sizes shall be clearly stated in
installation instructions.
(h)
Material used in the connection to the hot water cylinder shall
be of corrosion resistant type, especially on the water side.
(i)
The electric terminal box with cover and suitable for fitting
with waterproof metallic flexible conduit shall be provided.
ELECTRIC TEA URN
C10.16.1 General Requirements
(a)
The tea urn shall be suitable for providing boiling water for tea.
(b)
The tea urn shall comply with the standard IEC 60335-275:1998.
(c)
All electrical components shall comply with the relevant IEC
Standards, or of fully equivalent quality and capacity.
C10.16.2 Performance Requirements
(a)
The capacity of the tea urn shall be 14-20 litres.
(b)
The power rating shall range from 2.5 kW to 2.8 kW.
Section C10
Page 26 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.16.3 Construction
C10.17
(a)
The water container of the tea urn shall be constructed from
stainless sheet steel or material of equivalent quality.
(b)
The tea urn shall be of circular table standing model complete
with a full size detachable top cover and two heat-insulated
handles.
(c)
The tea urn shall be provided with either a simmerstat
temperature control or 3 heat rotary switch.
(d)
The tea urn shall be provided with a self-resettable thermal cutout against failure due to boiling dry.
(e)
The tea urn shall be provided with rapid draw off tap with
heat-insulated handle.
(f)
The tea urn shall be fitted with a flexible power supply cable
and a suitably fused 13 A plug complying with the Electrical
Products (Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws of Hong Kong.
The minimum length of the flexible cable shall be 1.5 m.
(g)
Internal wiring of the tea urn shall be suitable for high
temperature operation.
ELECTRIC KETTLE 3.5-4.5 LITRES
C10.17.1 General Requirements
(a)
The kettle shall comply with the latest edition of IEC 60335-215:2008.
(b)
The kettle shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1.5 m in
length complete with an “appliance connector” and a suitably
fused 13 A plug.
C10.17.2 Performance Requirements
(a)
The water capacity of the kettle shall be ranged from 3.5 to 4.5
litres.
(b)
The electrical power capacity of the kettle shall range from
2 kW to 2.6 kW.
Section C10
Page 27 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.17.3 Construction
C10.18
(a)
The kettle shall be designed for providing boiling water for
drinking.
(b)
The construction material shall be made from heavy gauge
chromium plated copper; or high quality heavy gauge polished
aluminium; or stainless steel.
(c)
The kettle shall be fitted with a safety cut-out to keep the kettle
from boiling dry.
MAINS-SUPPLY DRINKING WATER DISPENSER FOR “COLD”
WATER
C10.18.1 General Requirements
(a)
The water dispenser shall be suitable for local installation and
must comply with the statutory requirements of the
Waterworks Regulation 24, CAP 102A , Laws of Hong Kong.
(b)
The water dispenser shall comply with the Telecommunication
(Control of Interference) Regulations, CAP 106B, Laws of
Hong Kong.
(c)
The water dispenser shall comply with the latest edition of
IEC 60335-2-24:2005.
C10.18.2 Performance Requirements
The water dispenser shall provide not less than 45.5 litres per hour of
chilled drinking water at a temperature of between 10°C and 13°C
from a water inlet temperature of 27°C under ambient air conditions
of 32°C and 85% relative humidity.
C10.18.3 Construction
(a)
The water dispenser shall be designed to receive water supply
from the standard premises water mains and shall be provided
with a single ½ inch BSP male threaded connection located at
the back and protruding by not more than 25 mm.
(b)
The water dispenser shall be designed for heavy duty
application.
(c)
The water dispenser shall be provided with an automatic
thermostat to control the “cold” water delivery at the above
specified temperatures, irrespective of water inlet temperature
and ambient air conditions, within the range specified above.
Section C10
Page 28 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
The cabinet shall be constructed, of brushed finished stainless
steel, of minimum 1 mm thickness to ensure complete rigidity
and to resist “in-use” denting, or equivalent.
(e)
The drip pan below the tap(s) shall be of a suitable grade of
stainless steel to ensure that no rusting will occur during the
expected service life of the unit. It shall be connected to a
drain pipe terminating at the back of the unit and shall have a
1” BSP male thread for connection to the premises drainage
system.
(f)
The cold water reservoir shall be manufactured from a suitable
grade of stainless steel or copper, fitted with an external copper
pipe refrigerant coil and foamed in place with high efficiency
insulation of appropriate thickness.
(g)
The base plate shall be at least 20 mm above the ground level.
(h)
The faucet(s) shall be manufactured from polypropylene or
chromium plated steel, and either the push-button or swivel
type, self-closing, easy to operate and suitably positioned for
filling cups, glasses, etc.
(i)
The refrigeration system shall be of the hermetically sealed
type, suitably rated to meet the above specified duty. The
condenser shall be air cooled with either natural, or, forced
circulation.
(j)
The refrigerant used shall be non-toxic, non-explosive,
odourless and non-CFC type.
(k)
The water dispenser shall be fitted with the following devices:
(l)
(i)
A “power ON” indicator light; and
(ii)
An indicator light for the refrigeration unit to indicate
its operation.
The water dispenser shall be fitted with a 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cable conforming to BS 6500:2000 or
equivalent standards, and complete with a suitably fused 13 A
plug conforming to the Electrical Products (Safety) Regulation,
CAP 406G, Laws of Hong Kong. The supply cable shall be
approx. 2 m long.
Section C10
Page 29 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.19
DOMESTIC ELECTRIC COOKER (TABLE MODEL)
C10.19.1 General Requirements
(a)
The cooker shall be designed for table top use.
(b)
The cooker shall have two radiant rings, grill and oven.
(c)
The cooker shall comply with IEC 60335-2-6:2005.
(d)
The overall dimensions of the cooker shall be 390 mm (height)
x 470 mm (width) x 420 mm (depth) approximately.
C10.19.2 Performance Requirements
The total electrical loading shall be made up with the components
having the ratings as below:
(a)
Radiant rings (total)
:
not less than 2 kW;
(b)
Grill
:
not less than 1 kW; and
(c)
Oven
:
not less than 1 kW.
C10.19.3 Construction
(a)
The diameter of the two radiant rings shall be as follows:
(i)
one radiant ring of diameter 145 mm approximately;
and
(ii)
one radiant ring of diameter 170 mm approximately.
(b)
The dimensions of the grille shall be 310 mm (width) x
155 mm (depth) approximately.
(c)
The dimensions of the oven shall be 200 mm (height) x
380 mm (width) x 290 mm (depth) approximately and the
volume of the oven shall be 20 litres approximately.
(d)
All radiant rings, grill, and oven shall be simmerstat controlled
with power-on and oven indicator lamps.
(e)
All screws, nuts and bolts shall be rust-proof or manufactured
from non-ferrous metal.
(f)
The main terminals shall be mounted on the base at the back
and accessible for mains connections by removing the exterior
back panel.
(g)
The cooker shall have adequate mechanical strength and be so
constructed as to withstand such rough usage as may be
expected in normal use.
Section C10
Page 30 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.20
(h)
Radiant rings and oven shall be easily removable to facilitate
cleaning.
(i)
The cooker shall be finished in white or cream vitreous enamel
paint.
(j)
Internal wiring of the cooker shall be suitable for high
temperature operation.
(k)
The cooker shall be fitted with a 3-core, 2 m long
approximately power supply cable conformed to BS
6500:2000; and controlled by a 20 A D.P. switch.
(l)
The cooker shall be fitted with overload protection switch.
DOMESTIC ELECTRIC COOKER (FOUR RADIANT PLATES TYPE)
C10.20.1 General Requirements
The cooker shall comply IEC 60335-2-6:2005.
C10.20.2 Performance Requirements
The total electrical loading shall be made up with the components
having the ratings as below:
(a)
Radiant Plates (total)
(b)
Grilling Compartment :
(c)
Oven
:
:
not less than 5.8 kW;
not less than 2.5 kW; and
not less than 2.5 kW.
C10.20.3 Construction
(a)
(b)
The overall dimensions shall be:
(i)
Total Height
:
approximately 1300 mm;
(ii)
Height to Hob
:
approximately 900 mm;
(iii)
Width
:
approximately 550 mm; and
(iv)
Depth
:
approximately 600 mm.
The capacity shall be:
(i)
Grilling Compartment
Grilling Usable Area
Section C10
Page 31 of 50
:
not less than 850 cm²; and
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(ii)
Oven Compartment
Oven Volume
: not less than 55 litres.
(c)
The cooker shall consist of four radiant plates on the hob, an
oven compartment and an individual grille compartment.
(d)
The cooker shall be constructed basically from mild steel or
material of equivalent strength and quality, and shall be
finished externally white with vitreous enamel paint.
(e)
The oven components shall be removable to facilitate cleaning.
All screws, nuts and bolts in the oven compartment and
grilling compartment shall be rust-proof or manufactured from
non-ferrous metal.
(f)
Each radiant plate and the grilling compartment shall be
equipped with an adjustable control to obtain variable heat
output.
(g)
The radiant plate shall not be of the sealed plate type.
(h)
The hob could be lifted up for replacement of the radiant plates
and cleaning purpose. When the hob is raised, a supporting
device shall be provided to prevent the falling down of the hob.
(i)
The temperature inside the oven compartment shall be
thermostatically controlled with adjusting knobs on the front
panel.
(j)
The heater of the oven shall be suitably guarded off so as to
protect the user from heat burn.
(k)
The oven door shall be of glass pull out type hinged at the
bottom.
(l)
The oven shall be provided with an interior light.
(m)
Internal wiring of the cooker shall be suitable for high
temperature operation.
(n)
The supply cable of the cooker shall conform to BS 6500:2000
or other equivalent standards and the cooker shall be controlled
by a 60 A D.P. cooker control unit.
Section C10
Page 32 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.21
ELECTRIC HOT PLATE
C10.21.1 General Requirements
The hot plate shall comply with IEC 60335-2-6:2005.
C10.21.2 Performance Requirements
The capacity shall range from 2 kW to 2.6 kW.
C10.21.3 Construction
(a)
The hot plate shall be designed for use on the table top.
(b)
The heating element shall be metal sheathed.
(c)
The diameter of the heating surface shall range from 180 mm
to 200 mm approximately.
(d)
The top plate shall be constructed of steel plate of minimum
thickness 3 mm, or equivalent material.
(e)
The top plate shall be protected with heat resisting coating to
prevent thermal oxidation of the steel plate during operation.
(f)
The level of top plate shall range from 120 to 130 mm above
the table top.
(g)
The casing/stand of the hot plate shall be constructed of
chrome plated sheet or stoved with heat resisting enamel.
(h)
The hot plate shall have integral power and temperature
control switch which shall have at least 3 temperature settings.
(i)
All bare metal conductors except the top plate shall properly be
heat insulated.
(j)
Internal wiring of the hot plate shall be suitable for high
temperature operation.
(k)
The hot plate shall be provided with a 3-core flexible power
supply cable of approximately 1.5 m in length complete with a
suitably fused 13 A plug.
Section C10
Page 33 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.22
10-PERSONS AND 15-PERSONS ELECTRIC RICE COOKER
C10.22.1 General Requirements
(a)
The rice cooker shall comply with IEC-60335-2-15:2008.
(b)
The rice cooker shall be provided with a detachable 0.75 mm²
3-core circular cotton braided, rubber sheathed or PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1 m in
length and complete with an “appliance connector” and a
suitably fused 13 A plug.
(c)
The rice cooker shall have obtained Recognition Type Energy
Label of the Energy Efficiency Office (EEO) of Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department.
C10.22.2 Performance Requirements
The capacities of the rice cookers shall be:
Size (Persons)
10
15
Capacity (Persons)
From 7 to 10 persons
From 11 to 16 persons
C10.22.3 Construction
(a)
The rice cooker shall be finished with heat resisting paint in
white or a manufacturer‟s standard colour approved by the
Architect.
(b)
The rice cooker shall be fitted with automatic heat preservation
mechanism and overheating protection.
(c)
Internal wiring of the rice cooker shall be suitable for high
temperature operation.
Section C10
Page 34 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.23
2 kW ELECTRIC TOASTER
C10.23.1 General Requirements
The toaster shall comply with IEC 60335-2-9:2008.
C10.23.2 Performance Requirements
The total power rating of the heating elements shall not exceed 2 kW.
C10.23.3 Construction
C10.24
(a)
The toaster shall have two separate chambers for toasting two
slices of bread simultaneously.
(b)
The toaster shall have an automatic pop-up mechanism that
shall be controlled by a damper to eliminate excessive shock
and vibration during operation of the mechanism.
(c)
A selector switch shall be provided for selection of the degree
of toasting.
(d)
The casing shall be constructed of stainless steel or chromium
plated steel.
(e)
The toaster shall be designed for easy operation and
maintenance.
(f)
The supply cable shall conform to BS 6500:2000 and complete
with a suitably fused 13 A plug conforming to the Electrical
Products (Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws of Hong Kong.
The length of the supply cable shall be not less than 1.5 m.
ELECTRIC HAND/FACE DRYER
C10.24.1 General Requirements
(a)
The hand/face dryer shall comply with IEC 60335-2-23:2008.
(b)
The hand/face dryer shall be designed of wall-mounting type.
(c)
The hand/face dryer shall be provided with a detachable
1.25 mm² 3-core PVC insulated and sheathed flexible cord of
approximately 1 m in length.
C10.24.2 Performance Requirements
(a)
The front cover shall withstand a static force of not less than
111 N for 1 minute and an impact of not less than 6.8 J for 1
minute.
Section C10
Page 35 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
The power rating of the heating element shall not be less than
2 kW.
C10.24.3 Construction
(a)
The front cover shall be manufactured from a fully developing
one piece metal or approved high strength plastic.
(b)
The thickness of the front cover shall not be less than 3 mm.
(c)
The starting method of the dryer shall be any of the following
as specified in the Particular Specification:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
C10.25
capacitive touch switch;
insulated metal push button; and
automatic sensing device.
(d)
Metallic covers shall be finished with acid resistant porcelain
enamel or equivalent.
(e)
The front cover shall be firmly secured to the base of the
product by recessed Allen head or similar type bolts.
(f)
The base shall be designed so that it can be secured to the wall
by at least three mounting bolts.
(g)
The air inlet shall be at the bottom and protected by metal
vanes inside.
(h)
The air outlet shall be similarly protected by metal vanes inside
the nozzle.
(i)
The air outlet shall be fixed with downward air discharge for
hand dryer, but shall be movable to an upward direction when
used as face dryer.
(j)
All metal parts shall be made of corrosion resistant materials
such as stainless steel or equivalent.
(k)
The hand/face dryer shall be suitable for back and side cable
entry with an insulated bushing.
(l)
The hand/face dryer shall be completed with internal electrical
overload protection for the fan motor and thermal cut-out
protection for the heater unit.
(m)
The hand/face dryer shall be marked with the symbol for dripproof or splash-proof construction.
BLANK
Section C10
Page 36 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.26
WALL CLOCK BATTERY-OPERATED
C10.26.1 General Requirements
The clock shall be accompanied with the necessary battery adequate
for operating the clock for at least 1 month.
C10.26.2 Performance Requirements
(a)
The clock shall be tropicalised and dust-proof.
(b)
The accuracy of timekeeping shall not exceed ±20 sec/month
at room temperature (25°C).
C10.26.3 Construction
(a)
The clock-face shall either be round or square in shape as
specified in the Particular Specification.
(b)
For round clock-face clock, the nominal clock-face diameter
shall range between 300 mm and 350 mm.
(c)
For square clock-face clock, the nominal clock-face side length
shall range between 300 mm and 350 mm.
(d)
The clock shall be flush mounted design on the wall and is to
be free of any projections on the rear surface.
(e)
The clock dial shall be white with large Arabic Numerals in
black and graduated in minutes. Alternative colour and design
shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.
(f)
The hour, minute and second full sweep hands shall be of
distinct colour.
(g)
The clock shall be completed with a clear glass or plastic front
cover.
(h)
The voltage rating of the battery powering the product shall not
exceed 1.5 V.
Section C10
Page 37 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.27
ELECTRIC DRY IRON
C10.27.1 General Requirements
(a)
The dry iron shall be designed for household and domestic
application.
(b)
The dry iron shall comply with IEC 60335-2-3:2008.
(c)
The dry iron shall have adequate mechanical strength and
stability to withstand rough handling as may be expected in
normal use.
(d)
The dry iron shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in
length and a suitably fused 13 A plug.
C10.27.2 Performance Requirements
The rated input power of the dry iron shall be 1000 W.
C10.27.3 Construction
(a)
The dry iron shall have an adjustable, self-resetting thermostat
control complete with indication lamp for power ON/OFF
indication.
(b)
The power cord shall be connected to the iron body in such a
manner that no part of the power cord or any accessories
associated thereto shall be in contact with the hand of the
operator during the normal ironing operation.
(c)
The non-stick coated plate of the dry iron shall be constructed
of chromium plated or heat resistant aluminium alloy.
(d)
The dry iron shall have the appropriate degree of protection
against moisture.
Section C10
Page 38 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.28
VACUUM CLEANER
C10.28.1 General Requirements
(a)
The vacuum cleaner shall comply with IEC 60335-2-2:2009.
(b)
The vacuum cleaner shall be suppressed against radio
interference in compliance with the Telecommunication
(Control of Interference) Regulations, CAP 106B, Laws of
Hong Kong.
The vacuum cleaner shall be designed of domestic type and for
dry load.
(c)
(d)
The vacuum cleaner shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core
PVC insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately
5 m in length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.
C10.28.2 Performance Requirements
(a)
The minimum dust capacity shall be 3.4 litres.
(b)
The suction capacity shall be not less than 13.7 kPa.
(c)
The minimum air flow rate shall be 1.8 m³/min.
(d)
The operating noise level shall not exceed 80 dBA measured at
one (1) m from the vacuum cleaner under a background noise
level of 55 dBA.
C10.28.3 Construction
(a)
The vacuum cleaner shall be a double insulated product (Class
II appliance) and shall have the symbol for Class II
construction marked on its body.
(b)
The following accessories shall be supplied with the vacuum
cleaner as standard fittings:
(i)
Joint pipe;
(ii)
Flexible hose;
(iii)
Curved joint pipe;
(iv)
Extension pipes;
(v)
Combination rug and floor tool;
(vi)
Crevice nozzle;
(vii)
Dusting brush; and
(viii) Fabric nozzle.
Section C10
Page 39 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.29
FLOOR POLISHER
C10.29.1 General Requirements
(a)
The floor polisher shall comply with IEC 60335-2-40:2006.
(b)
The floor polisher shall be suppressed against radio
interference in compliance with the Telecommunication
(Control of Interference) Regulations, CAP 106B, Laws of
Hong Kong.
(c)
The floor polisher shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 6 m in
length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.
C10.29.2 Performance Requirements
(a)
The power rating shall not be less than 400 watts.
(b)
The dust bag volume shall not be less than 2.7 litres.
C10.29.3 Construction
(a)
The floor polisher shall be a double insulated product (Class II
appliance) and shall have the symbol for Class II construction
marked on its body.
(b)
The floor polisher shall be of the suction type with
interchangeable 3 sets of brush of three pieces each,
comprising 3 hard texture brushes, 3 soft brushes and 3 felt
pads, suitable for household and similar purposes.
Section C10
Page 40 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.30
7-LITRES AND 9-LITRES DEHUMIDIFIER
C10.30.1 General Requirements
(a)
The dehumidifier shall comply with IEC 60335-2-40:2006.
(b)
The dehumidifier shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in
length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.
(c)
The dehumidifier shall have obtained Recognition Type
Energy Label of the Energy Efficiency Office (EEO) of
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department.
C10.30.2 Performance Requirements
(a)
The moisture removal capacity, when measured under the
operating conditions at 27°C, 60% R.H. shall be as follows:
Size (litres)
7
9
Minimum Moisture Removal Capacity
7 litres per 24 hours
9 litres per 24 hours
(b)
The power factor of the dehumidifier shall be not less than
0.85.
(c)
The noise level generated whilst in operation shall not exceed
60 dBA measured at 1.5 m from the product under a
background noise level of not exceeding 50 dBA.
C10.30.3 Construction
No “Controlled Refrigerant”, as defined under the Ozone Layer
Protection (Controlled Refrigerants) Regulation, CAP 403B, Laws of
Hong Kong, shall be used.
C10.31
ROOM COOLER
C10.31.1 Type of Room Cooler
(a)
12 types of room cooler are under this specification, their
Schedule of References are:
„C‟ Type
C26
C29
C32
C40
C49
C58
Schedule Reference
„R‟ Type
R26
R29
R32
R40
R49
R58
Section C10
Page 41 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
The Schedule Reference composes of three characters.
(i)
The first character is an alphabet of either “C” or “R”,
where:
C
R
(ii)
- Room cooler provides cooling air only; and
- Room cooler provides cooling with reversed
cycle heating
The last two characters are numerals indicate the
cooling capacity of the room cooler with details shown
below:
Last Two
Characters
26
29
32
40
49
58
Cooling Capacity
Watt
Btu/hr
2638 – 2931
9000 – 9999
2931 – 3224
10000 – 10999
3224 – 3517
11000 – 11999
4103 – 4396
14000 – 14999
4982 – 5275
17000 – 17999
5861 – 6154
20000 – 20999
C10.31.2 General Requirements
(a)
The room air cooler supplied shall conform to the safety
standard IEC 60335-2-40:2006, in accordance with Electrical
Products (Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws of Hong Kong.
(b)
The room cooler shall be supplied with appropriate radio
interference suppression device to meet the requirements
prescribed in Telecommunications (Control of Interference)
Regulations of the Telecommunications Ordinance (CAP 106).
(c)
The room cooler shall have obtained Energy Label Grade 1 of
the Energy Efficiency Office (EEO) of Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department.
(d)
The room cooler shall be fitted with a 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in length
which shall be connected to a connection unit and controlled
by a D.P. switch with pilot light. Size of the 3-core flexible
cord shall have current carrying capacity not less than that of
the circuit breaker protecting the room cooler.
C10.31.3 Performance Requirements
(a)
All room coolers shall have a power factor of not less than
0.85 at full load.
(b)
All room coolers shall achieve the ratings as stated above.
Section C10
Page 42 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
The capacity of rating shall be proved by the production of
printed manufacturer‟s rating sheets showing also the test
condition.
(d)
All the ratings quoted shall conform to ISO 5151:1994.
(e)
The maximum noise level generated by the room coolers
operating at high cool and high fan setting shall be in
accordance with the table below. The noise level shall be
measured at a distance of 1.5 m from the cool air discharge and
at 1.2 m above the ground under a background noise level of
less than 50 dBA.
Schedule Reference
C26,
R26,
C29,
R29,
C32,
R32,
C40,
R40,
C49,
R49,
C58,
R58.
Noise Level
Not exceeding 60 dBA
Not exceeding 65 dBA
C10.31.4 Construction
C10.32
(a)
The refrigerant used in the room coolers shall be of non-CFC
type.
(b)
An adjustable thermostat control shall be provided for each
room cooler. The thermostat shall be built into the case of the
unit and not fixed on the outside. Only the adjusting knob or
dial is to protrude.
REFRIGERATOR
C10.32.1 Type of Refrigerator
6 types of refrigerator are under this specification, they are:
Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
170 litres
170 litres, not exceeding 1600 mm in height
270 litres
270 litres, not exceeding 1600 mm in height
345 litres
345 litres, not exceeding 1600 mm in height
Section C10
Page 43 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.32.2 General Requirements
(a)
The refrigerator shall comply with the safety standard
IEC 60335-2-24:2005 Household and similar electrical
appliances – Safety – Part 2-24 : Particular requirements for
refrigerators and food freezers.
(b)
All the ratings quoted, characteristics and test methods shall
conform to ISO 8187:1991.
(c)
The overall dimensions of the refrigerators shall comply with
the following requirements:
Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
(d)
Maximum depth Maximum width Maximum height
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
660
620
N/A
660
620
1600
720
700
N/A
720
700
1600
750
750
N/A
750
750
1600
The corresponding food storage capacities shall be:
Minimum Total Storage Capacity of Frozen Food
Type Storage Capacity
Storage Compartment
(litres)
(litres)
1
170
35 to 70
2
3
270
50 to 85
4
5
345
70 to 110
6
(e)
The refrigerator shall at least comprise two separate
compartments, i.e. Fresh Food Storage Compartment and
Frozen Food Storage Compartment.
(f)
For Types 3 to 6, the Fresh Food Storage Compartment shall
have a chiller compartment (chilled room) with transparent
front opening door.
(g)
The refrigerator shall be of the „Frost-free‟ or „Automatic
defrost‟ type.
(h)
The refrigerator shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in
length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.
Section C10
Page 44 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(i)
The refrigerator shall have obtained Energy Label Grade 1 of
the Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme (EELS) for
Household Refrigeration Appliances of Energy Efficiency
Office (EEO) of the Electrical and Mechanical Services
Department, the Government of the HKSAR.
C10.32.3 Performance Requirements
(a)
The refrigerator shall be completely suitable for operation
under sub-tropical climate class. The range of ambient
temperatures in which the equipment are intended to be used,
and for which the required storage temperatures shall be
fulfilled is between 18°C to 38°C. No condensation shall be
present on the exterior of the refrigerator at all times.
(b)
The Fresh Food Storage Compartment and Frozen Food
Storage Compartment shall be equipped with separate
temperature control.
(i)
Fresh Food Storage Compartment
The refrigeration system shall be designed to maintain
the temperature between 0°C to 10°C and the mean
temperature shall be 5°C within the compartment at all
operating conditions.
(ii)
Frozen Food Storage Compartment
The storage temperature of the Frozen Food Storage
Compartment shall be maintained at a temperature not
warmer than -18°C at all operating conditions. The
Compartment shall be labeled with a “***” mark as
defined in ISO 8187:1991.
C10.32.4 Construction
(a)
The cabinet shall be of all steel construction designed for
maximum rigidity and robustness to form an assembly
sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion during handling,
transportation, etc. In addition, concealed adjustable feet shall
be fitted to ensure that the cabinet will stand firm on uneven
floor. High quality steel panel work treated with a suitable rust
preventive primer and anti-corrosion undercoat and finished
with white hard finish material giving maximum resistance to
abrasion and corrosion.
(b)
Doors:
(i)
The refrigerator shall be fitted with flush-fitting door(s).
The door shall be fitted with chromium plated/
matching coloured fasteners and semi-concealed door
hinges. The interior of the door shall be complete with
bottle racks, cheese and butter storage section;
Section C10
Page 45 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
(ii)
The design and construction of the door shall withstand
heavy usage and suitably braced or otherwise
constructed to prevent distortion in usage;
(iii)
The plastic door liner must be of uniform thickness
(gauge) throughout particularly in relation to all inner
radiused corners and be sufficiently rigid to prevent
sagging when fully loaded with bottles, etc. The bottle
retainer strips shall be robustly constructed and secured;
and
(iv)
If the refrigerator is designed with only one door, the
Fresh Food Storage Compartment and the Frozen Food
Storage Compartment shall be separated well according
to appropriate temperatures.
Insulation Material:
No “Controlled Product”, as defined under the Ozone Layer
Protection (Products Containing Scheduled Substances)
(Import Banning) Regulation, CAP 403C, Laws of Hong Kong,
shall be used as insulation material in the refrigerator.
(d)
Internal Lighting:
The Fresh Food Storage Compartment of the refrigerators shall
be supplied with an interior light of sufficient capacity to
illuminate the entire interior. This light complete with air-tight
flame retardant lamp guard shall be activated by a door
operated switch. The light and switch shall be protected from
condensate drip.
(e)
(f)
Refrigeration Unit:
(i)
The refrigeration unit shall be hermetically sealed in a
steel housing and fitted with an automatic self-resetting
motor overload device; and
(ii)
The refrigeration unit shall be designed to be free from
radio or TV reception interference or if necessary shall
be fitted with an appropriate suppression system as laid
down in the Telecommunication (Control of
Interference) Regulations, CAP 106B, Laws of Hong
Kong.
Door Gasket:
(i)
The door gasket shall be robust and manufactured from
a rubber base material;
(ii)
It shall contain a fungoid inhibitor to prevent fungoid
growth and discolouration; and
Section C10
Page 46 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(iii)
(g)
(h)
In the case of a magnetic gasket, the magnetic ceramic
insert must be full length on all sides so fitted, with
absence of gaps at the corners.
Shelves and Internal Fittings:
(i)
The shelves made of either wire or bar shall be
adequately protected against rusting and corrosion and
must be sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion under
full load conditions. The mesh of the wires shall be
closely enough to prevent small based containers from
toppling and spilling their contents; and
(ii)
Shelves shall preferably be supported from full height
adjustable supports, all must be of ample strength,
easily adjustable and designed to prevent the accidental
tilting or release, of one end of a shelf.
Refrigerant:
No “Controlled Refrigerant”, as defined under the Ozone
Layer Protection (Controlled Refrigerants) Regulation, CAP
403B, Laws of Hong Kong, shall be used.
(i)
Accessories:
The refrigerator shall be supplied with all manufacturer‟s
standard accessories which shall include the following:
Quantity
(No.)
Shelves in refrigerator compartment
3
Large full-width egg racks
1
or half-width egg racks
2
Ice cube trays
2
Butter tray plastic crisper with see through
1
plastic cover
Description of Accessories
(j)
Labelling:
The refrigerator shall bear a label showing serial number,
power consumption, voltage, amperes and frequency. The
label shall be fixed rigidly at a conspicuous position on the
equipment.
Section C10
Page 47 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C10.33
LED TABLE LAMP
C10.33.1 General Requirements
The LED table lamp shall be the lighting fitting including the driver,
lamp source, diffuser, flexible cord and all necessary accessories.
(a)
The design of the LED table lamp should be aesthetically
pleasing, contemporary stylish appearance, user friendly,
electrically/mechanically sound and appropriate for office
environment. It shall be designed for use on working desk in
offices as task lighting to provide localized lighting.
(b)
The LED table lamp shall be free standing type or clampmounted type and the LED lamp shall be either integral or
built-in LED module or self-ballasted LED lamp as specified
in the Particular Specification.
(c)
The LED table lamp shall be rated for continuous service at an
ambient temperature of 40°C without affecting the
performance requirements as stated in this specification.
(d)
The LED table lamp shall be manufactured in a process
conforming to the relevant quality assurance standard ISO
9000: 2008.
(e)
The LED table lamp shall be fully assembled and tested to
required standards before delivery.
C10.33.2 Safety Requirements
(a)
The LED table lamp shall comply with IEC 60598-2-4:1997.
(b)
The LED table lamp shall be „Restriction of Hazardous
Substances (RoHS)‟ compliance.
(c)
The LED table lamp shall comply with the risk group „Exempt
Group (RG 0)‟ of IEC 62471:2006 – Photobiological safety of
lamps and lamp system.
(d)
The LED table lamp shall be suitably protected from electric
shock and shall comply with the latest edition of the Guidance
Notes for the Electrical Product (Safety) Regulation.
C10.33.3 Performance Requirements
(a)
The LED table lamp shall have locally on/off or dimmable
on/off switch that is easily reachable by user. For the light
output to be dimmable as specified in the Particular
Specification, the light output shall be continuous dimmable or
at least 3-step discrete dimmable settings ranging from 40100% without flickering.
Section C10
Page 48 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
(c)
The LED table lamp shall comply with the following
performance requirements:
(i)
Luminaire efficacy not lower than 30 lumen/watt
including the ballast, thermal and lighting fixture losses.
(ii)
Color Rendering Index (CRI) not lower than 80.
(iii)
For lumen maintenance requirements of the LED table
lamp, it shall comply with clause C9.4.1(b).
(iv)
The nominal Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall
be 4000K.
(v)
Power factor not lower than 0.85 and 0.6 for built-in
LED module and self-ballasted LED lamp respectively.
The LED table lamp source shall have suitable cover and/or
diffuser built-in for glare control. The LED lamp source shall
not be directly visible to the user when it is positioned at
600mm above desk level.
C10.33.4 Electrical Requirements
(a)
The LED table lamp, including the electronic driver and LED
module, shall be suitable for operation at 220V±6%, 50Hz±2%,
single phase, a.c. supply.
(b)
Where the offered LED table lamp is to receive extra low
voltage DC input by using external driver, provision of an
electrical switch at convenient position that can readily
accessible from the desk chair shall be provided to switch off
the luminaire.
(c)
The LED table lamp shall have minimum 2 meters of ordinary
duty rubber insulated and sheathed flexible cord, 3-core with
minimum cross sectional area of 0.75mm², in conformance
with B.S. 6500 or IEC 60245.
(d)
Suitable rated fuse protection shall be provided in the 13
Ampere socket plug to B.S. 1363-1 which shall be
permanently connected to each of the LED table lamp.
(e)
The LED driver and the extra low voltage DC driver shall
comply with the following standards where applicable:
(i)
IEC 61347-1:2007 Lamp controlgear – Part 1: General
and safety requirements;
(ii)
IEC 61347-2-13:2006 Lamp controlgear – Part 2-13:
Particular requirements for d.c. or a.c. supplied
electronic controlgear for LED modules;
Section C10
Page 49 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(f)
(iii)
IEC 62384:2009 DC or AC supplied electronic control
gear for LED modules – Performance requirements;
(iv)
IEC 61000-3-2:2009 Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) – Part 3-2: Limits – Limits for harmonic current
emissions (equipment input current≦16A per phase);
(v)
IEC 61547:2009 Equipment for general lighting
purposes – EMC immunity requirements; and
(vi)
EN 55015:2009 Limits and methods of measurement of
radio disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting
and similar equipment.
The Light Emitted Diode (LED) module shall comply IEC
62031:2008 LED modules for general lighting – Safety
specifications, for the part of “LED modules without integral
control gear for operation under constant voltage, constant
current or constant power”.
C10.33.5 Mechanical Requirements
(a)
The LED table lamp shall have adjustable outreach arm for
free adjustment of lighting angle by the user such that the LED
lamp head can tilt and swivel in two axes to achieve an optimal
ergonomic position.
(b)
The design of the outreach arm should have suitable length and
flexibility to suit the intended application without obstruction
to the user.
(c)
The hinges and/or springs for adjustment of outreach arm
and/or angle of lamp head shall be robust for frequent
adjustment and can hold the lamp head in sturdy position after
adjustment.
(d)
The materials of the adjustable arm shall be mechanically
sound and durable. No sharp edges shall be present.
(e)
The LED table lamp shall be self-balanced with the out
reaching arm fully extended.
C10.33.6 Testing Standards for Compliance
The relevant requirements as stated in clause C10.33.1 – C10.33.4 of
the LED table lamp shall be tested and certified by the accredited
laboratories. The test reports shall be submitted for approval.
Section C10
Page 50 of 50
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C11
LOW VOLTAGE CUBICLE SWITCHBOARD
C11.1
GENERAL
This Section covers the design, supply and installation of type-tested switchgear
and controlgear assembly (TTA) of Low Voltage Cubicle Switchboard
(hereafter called the Switchboard).
C11.2
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise specified, the scope of work shall include the design of the
Switchboard and selection of equipment and components including due
consideration of other components of the Electrical and other Installations to
ensure that the Switchboard conforms to the specified performance requirements.
All design works including relevant information, data and calculations shall be
submitted to the Architect for approval.
C11.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
The Switchboard shall comply with IEC 60439-1:2004.
All materials and workmanship shall comply, where applicable, with all relevant
IEC, B.S. or EN Standards and all relevant sections of this Specification.
The Switchboard shall comply with the electromagnetic compatibility
requirement of IEC 60439-1:2004. Immunity and emission tests shall be carried
out for the switchboard assemblies in accordance with the testing requirements
in IEC 60439-1:2004 unless the exemption conditions stipulated in Clause
7.10.2 of IEC 60439-1:2004 are satisfied.
The Works shall be carried out in a manner consistent with good practice in
Hong Kong.
The Switchboard shall be of multi-cubicle type assembled from compartments
housing the busbars, switches, etc. as shown on the Drawings, suitable for
service conditions detailed in Clause C11.6 of this Specification and complying
where relevant, with the appropriate Standards and Codes of Practice listed in
this Specification. Where an alternative standard is proposed, the tenderer shall
prove by means of adequate supporting documents that the alternative standard
meets the requirements of the relevant Standard.
Section C11
Page 1 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
The Switchboard comprising a combination of one or more low-voltage
switching devices together with associated control, measuring, signalling,
protective, regulating equipment, etc., shall be completely assembled with all
the internal electrical and mechanical interconnection and structural parts. The
Switchboard shall conform to an established type without deviations likely to
significantly influence the performance from the typical Switchboard verified to
be in accordance with IEC 60439-1:2004 by a competent and independent
internationally recognised testing authority. Appropriate technical information
and literature in English language and copies of type-test certificate and
drawings must be available for examination.
C11.4
CONSTRUCTION AND FINISH
The Switchboard shall be constructed from steel, self supporting, so formed as
to give a rigid and robust construction without cross-struts, and shall be
structurally, mechanically and electrically sound, with cubicle top, panels and
doors of sheet steel or the equivalent metal, not less than 2 mm. Alternatively, if
the Switchboard thickness is less than 2 mm, the design and the whole
construction shall satisfy all the following structural requirements as type tested
and certified by a competent and independent internationally recognized testing
authority:
Test
Shock
Bump
Random
Vibration
Standard
IEC 60068-227:1987
IEC 60068-229 :1987
IEC 60068-264 :1993
Severity
Equivalent peak acceleration of 15 g for a
duration of 11 ms.
Equivalent acceleration of 10 g for a duration
of 16 ms, and 1000 Nos. of bump in each
mutually perpendicular direction.
Total r.m.s. acceleration of 0.26 g for a
frequency range from 10 Hz to 150 Hz.
Appropriate technical information and literature in English language and copies
of the type test certificate and drawings must be available for examination.
The Switchboard shall have clear accessibility to all internal components within
it. Steel work shall be treated to prevent corrosion before being painted. Steel
parts, normally left bright, shall be corrosion resistance plated.
The bottom of the Switchboard shall be closed and made to vermin-proof by
means of non-magnetic, fire-proof barrier plates cut away where required to suit
the cables as specified. In general, the Switchboard shall be suitable for indoor
use to IP 31 as specified in IEC 60529:2009. In the event that top entry cabling
facilities are required, the top of the Switchboard shall also be constructed in
like manner.
Detachable panels at the back of the Switchboard shall each be provided with a
pair of handles for easy fixing/removal of the panels.
The Switchboard shall be of uniform height and uniform depth front-to-back,
throughout its length and shall present a neat and tidy appearance.
Section C11
Page 2 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Unless otherwise specified, the Switchboard shall be constructed generally to
Form 3b of IEC 60439-1:2004.
The switch/control units in each cubicle shall be arranged to form a multi-tier
arrangement.
The compartment for housing the incoming/outgoing terminals for external
conductors shall be of ample dimensions for accommodating the external
conductors, including space for spreading of the cores. Suitable mounting
brackets or cable supports shall be provided to prevent the terminals or cables
being subjected to stresses which may reduce their normal life or performance.
All switches shall be provided with mechanical interlocks so that their doors,
covers, and the like can only be opened when the switches are in the off position
and it shall not be possible to close the switches while the doors, covers and the
like are opened, except by overriding the interlock or using a tool. The interlock
shall automatically be restored on reclosing the doors, covers and the like.
The exterior of each Switchboard shall be finished to a light grey or the
manufacturer‟s nearest standard colour. The end plates shall be of noncorrosive type and finished to match with the color of the switchboard whereas
the external fixing bolts and set screws shall be of chrome-plated finish or
equivalent anti-corrosion treatment.
The "space" provision for future outgoing circuits shall comprise blank panels,
undrilled, and provision for accommodating fuseswitches and/or circuit breakers.
Busbars shall be extended as necessary and drilled for future connection of
conductors. The spaces scheduled or shown on the Drawings are indicative of
minimum requirements and may be varied to suit the arrangement offered,
subject to approval.
Insulators, including busbar supports, shall be non-hygroscopic and nondeteriorating. The use of fibrous materials, linseed oil, varnish, etc. is prohibited.
The Switchboard shall be provided with one or more plates, marked in a durable
manner and located in a place such that they are visible and legible when the
Switchboard is installed. The following information shall be given on the
nameplates:
(a)
The manufacturer‟s name or trade mark;
(b)
Type designation or identification number or other means of
identification making it possible to obtain relevant information from the
manufacturer;
(c)
IEC 60439-1:2004;
(d)
Type of current;
(e)
Rated operation voltage (and frequency in case of a.c.);
(f)
Rated insulation voltage;
(g)
Short-circuit withstand strength;
Section C11
Page 3 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(h)
Degree of protection; and
(i)
Rating of main busbars.
Other information as required under Clause 5.1 of IEC 60439-1:2004 shall be
provided in the relevant documents, the circuit diagrams or in the
manufacturer‟s list or catalogues.
C11.5
ELECTRICITY CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SWITCHBOARD
The electrical characteristics of the Switchboard shall be as follows unless
otherwise specified:
C11.6
(a)
Rated operational
voltage
:
380/220V + 6%, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50
Hz., + 2%, a.c.;
(b)
Neutral earthing
:
Solid at transformer;
(c)
Rated short-time current
:
50 kA for 1 second withstanding current;
and
(d)
Power factor
:
Incoming 0.25 lagging.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
The service conditions stipulated in Clause C5.1.2 of this Specification shall be
applicable.
The Switchboard shall only be provided with the built-in natural cooling
facilities as furnished in accordance with the recommendations endorsed by the
licenser to suit the service conditions specified.
C11.7
BUSBARS, WIRING AND EARTHING
The busbar chamber shall contain triple phase and neutral busbars of equal
cross-sectional areas rated as shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere.
The configuration of the busbar assembly contained in the Switchboard shall be
the same as shown on the type test drawings. Any change in the configuration
will require separate type test certificates unless substantiation otherwise
submitted by the Contractor is approved by the Architect.
The whole busbars, including the conductors connecting the busbars to each
outgoing circuit, shall be arranged to withstand short circuit at any point. All
conductors between the main busbars/droppers and the outgoing protective
devices not short-circuit type tested to a fault current of 50 kA for 1 second at
0.25 lagging power factor shall be insulated by approved means to comply with
the requirement that "an internal short-circuit between phases and/or between
phases and earth is only a remote possibility" as stipulated in Clause 7.5.5.1.2 of
IEC 60439-1:2004.
Section C11
Page 4 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
All busbars shall be made of hard drawn high conductivity copper to BS EN
13601:2002 and shall be electro-tinned. Construction, marking and arrangement
of the busbars, connections and auxiliary wiring shall be to IEC 60439-1:2004.
External busbars for connection to the Switchboard shall be fully insulated and
arranged in such a manner that they will not obstruct access to other equipment.
All neutral conductors shall have cross-sectional areas not less than that of the
respective phase conductors and shall be distinguished by the color blue or by
the initial letter N.
Whenever a vertical section of the Switchboard contains more than one outgoing
circuit, busbar risers or droppers to which the outgoing circuits are connected
shall be provided and shall be arranged in such manner that an internal shortcircuit is not to be expected under normal operating conditions.
All auxiliary circuit wiring shall be PVC-insulated with designated conductor
temperature of 90oC to BS 6231:2006. They shall, wherever possible, be
grouped and placed together in a neat manner. Different insulant colours shall
be provided to distinguish the various circuits at different voltage. All wires
shall also have at both ends a coded ferrule of insulating materials permanently
marked with suitable characters and codes. Each connection shall terminate at
an approved type of terminal block, which shall also be suitably labelled.
Cable for auxiliary circuits shall be run inside cable compartments or special
cable ways designed to provide adequate protection against mechanical damage.
They shall also be bunched neatly and be identifiable throughout their length of
run.
Wiring from the fixed part of the Switchboard to the movable part, such as
hinged door, shall be enclosed by a flexible PVC tubing. If apparatus with a
voltage exceeding the limits of extra-low voltage are attached to lid, door, etc.,
the continuity of the protective circuits shall be ensured in accordance with
Clause 7.4.3.1.5 of IEC 60439-1:2004.
Connectors or soldered joints are not permitted in the auxiliary circuit wiring.
Exposed live terminals shall be suitably shrouded or covered.
A continuous tinned copper earthing bar of adequate rating per Clause 7.4.3.1.7
of IEC 60439-1:2004 shall be fixed at the rear interior, bottom portion
throughout the length of the switchboard, bonding the framework of all modular
sections. An earthing terminal shall be provided at the external portion of the
Switchboard suitable for the connection of 25 x 3 mm copper tape. The position
of the earthing terminal shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.
Section C11
Page 5 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C11.8
CIRCUIT BREAKERS, FUSESWITCHES AND AUTOMATIC
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
Unless otherwise specified, circuit breakers (including ACB, MCCB),
fuseswitches (including switchfuses), and automatic changeover switches shall
comply with the requirements stipulated in Section C5 of this Specification.
Circuit breakers shall have the breaking capacity to withstand the prospective
fault level at the switchboard.
C11.9
METERING, PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND INDICATING LAMPS
For every incoming circuit, facilities shall be provided to measure or indicate the
following:
(a)
current;
(b)
voltage;
(c)
power factor; and
(d)
supply healthy.
Wiring from the measuring devices shall be brought out and be terminated in
approved type of rail-mounted termination/feed through blocks housed inside
separate compartments accessible from the front. Test plugs shall also be
provided at each termination points to measure the voltages and/or currents
flowing in that particular measuring circuit by external testing instruments.
Instruments, meters and relays shall be of the flush mounted pattern, with bezels
black finished, positioned on the front of the Switchboard. All terminals shall
be suitably insulated and potential circuits shall be suitably fused, using H.R.C.
fuses.
Indicating instruments shall be to IEC 60051:1997, of moving iron spring
controlled type or moving coil with transducer type with 100 mm nominal
diameter, 240o scale dials and external zero adjustment. Integrating meters shall
be to IEC 62053:2003. The accuracy class shall be "2.5" for indicating
instruments and "2" for integrating meters, or better. Selector switches shall be
provided such that voltmeters can read voltages between phase and phase and
between phase and neutral, and that ammeters can read all phase and neutral
currents.
Power factor meters shall be suitable for 3-phase, 4 wire, balanced or
unbalanced loads, having a four-quadrant 360o scale to indicate both leading and
lagging power factors.
Alternatively, Digital Multifunction Power Meter complying with Clause C5.20
of this Specification can also be used.
Section C11
Page 6 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Separate current transformers (CT) in compliance with IEC 60044-1:2003 shall
be used for measuring and protection applications. Current transformers shall
have accuracy Class of "3" or better for use with ammeters, "1" or better for use
with Watt-hour meters and "10P" or better for protection applications. The
product of rated accuracy limit factor and rated output of the protection CT shall
not be less than 10 times the total rated burden of the trip circuit including the
relays, connection leads and overcurrent release where applicable.
Current transformers shall be mounted without reduction of area of busbars or
connections and be arranged for easy removal.
Protective relays shall be to IEC 60255-1:2009 and of the type as shown on the
Drawings or as specified. Where a protective relay consists of multi-elements,
suitable labels shall be provided to indicate the phases to which the
corresponding elements are connected.
Indicating lamps shall be of long life, operating on 6V through a built-in
transformer.
All air circuit breakers other than those used for controlling the incoming supply
and unless specified, shall have overcurrent tripping facilities to give time delay
overload current protection and instantaneous short circuit interruption. The
time-current characteristics shall be submitted for inspection. Shunt trip coils
operated by power supply from the mains shall not be used.
For air circuit breakers controlling the incoming supply to the Switchboard, the
circuit protection shall be provided by the following devices:
(a)
Electromechanical Type I.D.M.T. Overcurrent Protection Relay:
This relay shall have triple elements with current setting ranging from
50% to 200% in 25% tappings and with time setting from 0 to 1.3
seconds in variable steps. The relay shall be of draw-out-case type flush
mounted on the front panel. The characteristic of the relay shall match
with that of the Supply Company;
(b)
Electromechanical Type I.D.M.T. Earth Fault Relay:
One single pole earth fault relay with current setting from 10% to 40% in
5% tappings and with time setting from 0 to 1.3 seconds. The relay shall
be of draw-out-case type, flush mounted on the front panel. The
characteristic of the relay shall match with that of the Supply Company;
and
(c)
Shunt-Trip Release:
It shall be operated by a d.c. supply of 24V or 30V++ obtained from the
secondary batteries complete with battery charger, etc. of suitable rating.
++
Note: Other voltages may be specified to suit particular project.
Section C11
Page 7 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Alternatively, Digital Protection Relay complying with Clause C5.23 of this
Specification can also be used.
Unless otherwise specified, Digital Power Analyzer to be used shall comply
with the requirements stipulated in Clause C5.24 of this Specification.
C11.10
SUPPLY COMPANY METERING
Provision shall be made, where specified and/or shown on the Drawings, for the
accommodation of the Supply Company's metering equipment upon the
Switchboard. The metering equipment will be supplied and mounted by the
Supply Company on Site. The metering compartment shall be complete with a
hinged glazed door for meter viewing.
The accommodation for the Supply Company's metering equipment shall
include a suitable insulating panel for mounting the meters and suitable fuses to
protect the voltage coil circuits to each meter. The "mains" side of the
fuseholders shall be wired to the incoming supply mains. Fuses shall be of the
H.R.C. type rated at 6A, with provision for sealing to prevent unauthorised
removal.
The Switchboard shall also be provided with suitable provisions of C.T.
Chambers for mounting the Supply Company's current transformers (C.T.s) in
accessible positions.
Wiring between the current transformers and the meters will be carried out by
the Supply Company on Site, but adequate and appropriate cabling facilities for
installing the said wiring shall be provided in the Switchboard.
C11.11
LABELS
Laminated self-colored material labels of ample sizes shall be provided for each
of the units both at the front and in the cabling compartment on the Switchboard,
engraved in English and Chinese characters. A means of fixing these labels shall
be provided other than by adhesives.
During the progress of manufacture of the Switchboard, a schedule of labels
shall be submitted for approval before engraving is carried out.
Warning labels shall be affixed to the rear panels and shall be colored red with
white lettering in both English and Chinese characters denoting „DANGERLIVE BUSBARS INSIDE/ 危險 – 內有帶電匯流排‟.
Similar warning labels shall be affixed at the front and in the cabling
compartment for each automatic/remote closing or changeover switching
denoting Beware-automatic closing/注意 – 自動接合 in English and Chinese
characters.
In addition to automatic screening shutters and barriers, warning labels shall
also be provided for all live parts, such as test terminal blocks.
Section C11
Page 8 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C11.12
CABLE ARRANGEMENTS
The Switchboard shall be provided with all necessary cable lugs, etc., fixed in
positions on mounting plates and straps, to suit the types and directions of entry
of the cables as shown on the Drawings or as specified.
Cable conductors for all circuits within the Switchboard shall be arranged in a
tidy manner and mechanically secured at regular intervals such that any
movement occurring to the conductors, either under normal operation conditions
(e.g. thermal expansion, vibration, etc.) or due to short circuit in any one of the
circuits, shall not cause any damage or short circuit to any healthy bare live parts
in the Switchboard.
C11.13
AUTOMATIC INTERLOCKING FACILITY
When automatic interlocking facility is specified or shown on the Drawings, the
design shall be that it is safe, reliable and well proven. Unless otherwise
approved by the Architect, the mechanical part of the automatic interlocking
facility shall be of rod-type design to ensure a safe and reliable interlocking
system. For locally assembly switchboard containing automatic interlocking
facility, the interlocking design shall be endorsed by the respective licenser.
C11.14
ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
The Switchboard shall be supplied complete with one hydraulic operated
handling truck in the main switchroom suitable for handling all sizes of air
circuit breakers on the Switchboard, and one set of portable earthing equipment
for each main incoming air circuit breaker. Portable earthing leads will not be
accepted as an alternative to the earthing equipment.
The battery charger/battery sets shall comply with the requirements of Clause
C5.21 of this Specification unless otherwise specified below. The battery
charger and batteries shall be housed in separate enclosures from the
Switchboard and shall be the same type of enclosures as the Switchboard. All
secondary batteries to be supplied with the Switchboard shall be of the nickelmetal-hydride type, sealed or ventilated, requiring little or no maintenance and
having long life. The capacity of the batteries, with charger disconnected, shall
be adequate to trip the associated air circuit breaker(s) consecutively at least 20
times. In case there are more than one air circuit breakers being tripped by the
same bank of batteries, the batteries shall be capable of tripping at least two air
circuit breakers simultaneously.
Site tests shall be carried out for the charger and battery set after completion of
the installation and the connection of the permanent supply according to the
manufacturer‟s instruction in the presence of the Architect‟s inspectorate staff
and in accordance with Section D1 of this Specification.
The Switchboard shall be supplied complete with all operating handles, jigs, etc.
required for the normal charging, closing, opening, racking in and out operations
of all circuit breakers of the Switchboard and shall be properly fixed in a neat
manner on a wooden board with brass hooks inside the main switch room where
Section C11
Page 9 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
the Switchboard is installed.
The Switchboard shall be provided with two rubber mats of ribbed surface,
complying with BS 921:1976 or IEC 61111:2009, laid in front of and at the rear
of the Switchboard. The rubber mats shall be continuous sheets of minimum
thickness of 10 mm, each of same length as the Switchboard and minimum
width of not less than 1000 mm or the width of the space between the front or
back of the Switchboard to the adjacent wall.
The Switchboard shall be provided with one complete spare set of fuses equal in
number for each rating of fuses in all switch-fuses and fuse-switches and fitted
in a conveniently accessible position on wooden board(s) in the relevant Main
Switchroom. The spare fuses should be appropriately covered to prevent the
contacts from rusting due to corrosion.
C11.15
OPERATION INSTRUCTION/DRAWING AT THE MAIN SWITCH
ROOM
For each Switchboard a schematic wiring diagram contained in a framed,
transparent perspex at a conspicuous position adjacent to the Switchboard shall
be provided. In case that the Switchboard has more than one incoming air
circuit breakers with interlocking facility, a brief operation instruction listing out
all
the
relevant
switching
steps
and
interlocks
for
commissioning/decommissioning of part or whole of the Switchboard shall also
be provided in a similar manner to the schematic diagram.
C11.16
INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR LOW VOLTAGE CUBICLE
SWITCHBOARD INSTALLATION
(a)
Testing before Connection of Power Supply
These tests shall be carried out after completion of installation of the
Switchboard and before the connection of the incoming supply cable.
(i)
Dielectric Test
(ii)
Insulation Test
(iii)
Secondary
Injection Test
(iv)
Primary
Injection Test
(v)
Polarity Check
for CT
This shall be carried out at power frequency
as defined in IEC 60439-1:2004;
This shall be carried out by means of a 1000V
"Megger" tester or similar instrument;
This shall be carried out using a.c. and shall
check (approximately) that protection relays
or devices function in accordance with their
performance curves by a test at the lowest
setting and two further tests of current and
timing;
This shall be carried out to prove the correct
operation of protective devices or system
when set at the agreed setting;
This shall be carried out to ensure that all CTs
are correctly connected;
Section C11
Page 10 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(vi)
Functional Test
This shall be carried out to ensure that all
devices operate properly as intended;
(vii) Contact
This shall be carried out by means of
Resistance Test "Ductor" tester or similar instrument to ensure
that contacts and joints for switchgears,
cables, busbars as well as the contacts and
joints for outgoing cables and busbars are
maintained in good condition; and
(viii) Temperature
This shall be carried out as defined in IEC
Rise Limits Test 60439-1:2004.
Note: Tests (i) to (vii) must be carried out on site and test (viii) can be
carried out in factory.
(b)
Testing after Connection of Supply
The following tests shall be carried out after the incoming supply cables
are connected and the “Switchboard” successfully commissioned on no
load:
(i) Phase-to-phase voltage test;
(ii) Phase-to-neutral voltage test;
(iii) Phase-to-earth voltage test;
(iv) Neutral-to-earth voltage test; and
(v) Phase sequence test on each and every outgoing circuit.
All tests shall be witnessed by and carried out to the satisfaction of the Architect
and all test results must be submitted in quadruplicate to the Architect for record
purposes.
C11.17
REQUIREMENTS DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Requirements during maintenance period are specified in Section E3 of this
Specification.
Section C11
Page 11 of 11
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C12
DIESEL GENERATING SET INSTALLATION
C12.1
REQUIREMENTS OF DIESEL GENERATING SETS
C12.1.1
Generating Set Rating
Each diesel generating set shall be of 3 phase, 4 wire output and rated
at 50 Hertz, 380V, 0.8 power factor lagging.
Each generating set shall comply with ISO 8528:2005 and shall be of
Prime Power (PRP) rating for the transient as well as the steady state
power requirements of the connected essential loads. Offers based on
standby rating will not be considered. The actual rating of each
generating set shall be clearly indicated on the name plate fixed on
the generating set.
C12.1.2
General Requirements of Diesel Engine
(a)
The engine shall be a fresh water-cooled, four stroke, direct
injection, naturally aspirated or pressure charged, diesel engine
of industrial type complying with the requirements of all parts
of ISO 8528:2005 and continuously rated to meet the load
requirements under site conditions at a crank shaft speed not
exceeding 1500 rpm, and suitable for running on "Ultra Low
Sulphur Diesel” (ULSD) fuel to BS EN 590:2004.
(b)
The engine shall be complete with the following equipment (i)
Engine mounted instrument panel, incorporating
lubrication oil pressure gauge, lubrication oil
temperature gauge, cooling water outlet temperature
gauge, tachometer and hour-meter. The tachometer
shall sense the actual engine speed. Frequency sensing
type is not acceptable. Ammeter indicating the charging
rate of the engine driven dynamo shall also be provided;
(ii)
Protective screens for flywheel, and coupling (if
exposed) and other exposed moving parts;
(iii)
Engine cooling system incorporating engine driven
water circulating pump, thermostatically controlled
water temperature regulating device, and engine driven
tropicalized radiator with mechanically driven fan;
(iv)
Air cleaner of the dry type or 'oil bath' type
incorporating replaceable element;
(v)
Lubricating oil system (full flow, replaceable element
type filter);
Section C12
Page 1 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(vi)
Fuel oil system comprising filter, fuel transfer pump,
injection pump and injectors;
(vii)
Governor with manual adjustment of + 5% of normal
speed. The governing accuracy shall comply with
performance Class G3 in ISO 8528-2:2005
"Specification for Reciprocating Internal Combustion
Engines, Performance - Speed governing". Governor
shall sense the actual engine rotation. Governor
designed for sensing the frequency of generator output
voltage is not acceptable;
(viii) Fuel control solenoid (electrically operated) together
with an emergency fuel shut off valve (manually
operated);
(ix)
Two stage engine protective devices for high cooling
water temperature and low lubricating oil pressure.
Engine protective device for engine over-speed shall
also be provided, the engine over-speed sensor shall
sense the actual engine rotating speed and shall be free
from harmonic interference;
(x)
All wiring of the control and protection systems,
carried out in suitable heat and oil resisting cable, shall
be wired out to a suitable cable termination block; and
(xi)
Earth terminal for bonding the engine and alternator to
the earthing system.
(c)
In accordance with ISO 8528:2005, an additional engine power
of 10% of the rated power of the generating set shall be
provided for governing purpose only (e.g. transient load
conditions and suddenly applied loads).
(d)
The difference in height between the generator set and the
daily service tank shall not exceed the maximum value
recommended by the generator set manufacturer.
The equipment and accessories to be installed and the details
of the fuel oil supply system shall be subject to the approval of
the Architect.
(e)
If an underground fuel oil storage-tank is installed, the
associated piping, fittings and accessories shall be installed as
required to complete the fuel oil system of the generator set.
The underground fuel oil storage tank shall be complete with
float control and other necessary accessories. A solenoid
control valve energised by the starting circuit shall be installed
in the fuel oil pipe from the daily service tank to the storage
tank.
Section C12
Page 2 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.1.3
General Requirements of Alternator
(a)
The alternator shall be of self-exciting, self regulating and
brushless type, complete with permanent magnet exciter and
shall comply generally with the requirements of ISO 85283:2005.
(b)
The voltage regulation of the alternator apart from satisfying
the requirements of the electrical loads as specified in terms of
steady state and transient conditions shall be of three phase
sensing type.
The steady state and transient behaviour shall comply with
performance Class G3 in ISO 8528-5:2005 The maximum
percentage of voltage dip shall not exceed 20% of the rated
value under all loading conditions including step load
application. In case that electronic equipment and computers
form a substantial amount of supply loads, the maximum
voltage dip shall not exceed 10%.
(c)
The machine shall be constructed with the type of enclosure to
IP 21 as specified in IEC 60529:2001. Anti-condensation
heating elements bounded to the winding of the alternator and
suitable for connection to the mains electricity supply (220V)
shall be fitted to the alternator. The anti-condensation heaters
should be thermostatically controlled and arranged to cut off
when the alternator is in operation. They shall be easily
accessible for maintenance and replacement.
(d)
A termination box shall be provided suitable for
accommodating and terminating cables or busbar trunking
entering from the bottom, sides or top. If busbar trunking is
used for power-feeder between the alternator and switchboard,
special provision shall be made to prevent the vibration of the
diesel generating set affecting the tightness of the terminations.
Due to site condition, cable termination may only be made at a
particular side of the alternator.
(e)
The rating assigned to the alternator by the manufacturer shall
be of maximum continuous rating.
(f)
The alternator shall be provided with winding insulation of
class H, but it shall be designed to operate continuously at
temperature class F rating in accordance with IEC 60085:2004.
Section C12
Page 3 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.1.4
Starting System
Electrical battery starting system for each diesel generating set with a
set of 24V electric starting equipment comprising starter motor,
battery charger, starting battery and all necessary wiring and
switchgear shall be provided. The battery shall be of the nickel
cadmium type, with clear plastic cases complete with a hardwood
floor stand with hardwood cover suitable for installation adjacent to
the starter motor. The battery shall be rated to give six engine
cranking cycles each of six seconds within a 60 second period. The
battery shall also be capable of providing adequate power to supply
the control circuit and to trip the main MCCB/ACB. Separate
batteries shall be provided for engine starting and the shunt trip coil if
their operating voltages are different. The connection bars of the
batteries shall be protected with corrosion resistant petroleum jelly. A
suitable double pole switch should be provided to isolate the supply
from the battery to the engine starter unit.
The battery charger shall be of 2 rate charging and of constant voltage
type installed in the control cubicle, and arranged to maintain the
batteries in fully charged condition. In addition, when the engine is
running, the batteries shall be charged by an engine driven dynamo
controlled by an AVR and cut out.
The battery charger shall be capable of charging up to 75% battery
capacity specified in the previous paragraph in 6 hours. Current
limiting device shall be provided to limit the charging current with
the limit recommended by the battery manufacturer.
C12.1.5
Electrical Loads
The electrical loads to be connected to the diesel generating set will
be of continuous duty-type. Motor loads will be designated as S1 in
accordance with IEC 60034-1:2004.
Thyristor controlled lifts and other thyristor loading such as
uninterrupted power supply (UPS), variable voltage variable
frequency speed controller (VVVF) etc. will be connected to some of
the generators. High current harmonics are generated by these
thyristor loading which could have adverse effects on the diesel
generating sets on voltage distortion, system instability, overheating
of buffer windings, etc. The generator design shall take necessary
precautions (including the provision of engine overspeed sensing
device free from harmonic interference, etc.) to guard against the
occurrence of the above adverse effects caused by the harmonics.
In addition, the generator sets shall be able to tolerate a reasonable
amount of lift regenerative power. The generator set shall be suitably
sized to cater for the possible regenerative power. Appropriate
dummy loads and associated accessories shall be provided, if
necessary, for the absorption of the excessive regenerative power.
Section C12
Page 4 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.1.6
Suitability for Cold Starting and Step Load Acceptance
The generating set shall be suitable for cold starting and for the
acceptance of step loads immediately after attaining normal voltage
and frequency.
C12.1.7
Radio Interference Suppression
The alternator shall be fully equipped for radio interference
suppression to BS EN 55014:1997.
C12.1.8
Painting
All exposed ferrous metal surfaces of the machines, under-frame and
auxiliary equipment shall, where applicable, be treated with rustinhibiting primer paint, undercoat and finishing coat. Hot face parts
shall be coated with heat resisting paint work which can tolerate high
temperature up to 650oC without deterioration.
C12.1.9
Baseframe Assembly
The generating set shall comprise a diesel engine directly coupled to
an alternator and mounted in line on a steel section baseframe. This
diesel alternator baseframe shall be provided with anti-vibration
mountings complete with holding down of adequate strength bolts
and nuts for installation onto a concrete plinth. The complete
assembly shall be equipped with four lifting eyes to facilitate lifting
and transporting.
Grouting shall not be carried out until the final agreement from the
Architect. Grout shall be composed of equal parts of cement and fine
granular sand mixed with fresh water.
C12.1.10 Welding
All welding shall be carried out only by welders of the recognized
proficiency. The welding electrodes, equipment and process shall also
be in accordance with BS EN 1011-2:2004, BS 1821:1982 and BS
2640:1982 for arc welding or oxy-acetylene welding respectively.
Welding shall not be carried out under unfavorable conditions. All
welded surfaces shall be clean and dry before any welding is to be
done.
C12.1.11 Structural Steel
Structural steel used shall comply with BS 7668:2004 Grade
S345J0WPH. All forms of steel used shall be of standard section with
dimensions, tolerances and properties complying with BS 4:2005.
Supplier of structural steel work shall provide certificates of the
material.
Section C12
Page 5 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
All exposed edges shall be ground to produce a chamfer not less than
2 mm in width to ensure proper adherence of paint.
C12.2
CONSTRUCTION OF CONTROL CUBICLE
C12.2.1
The control cubicle shall be of totally enclosed type and meet the
requirements of IP 44 as specified in IEC 60529:2001 enclosures. The
cubicle shall be painted against corrosion after completion of all
drilling and operation.
C12.2.2
All control cubicles shall have labels made from laminated selfcoloured materials and engraved with descriptions in both English
and Chinese to be agreed by Architect's Representative. Fixing of
labels shall be by mechanical means.
C12.2.3
The contactors, switch fuses, relays and all other
shall be housed in the appropriate control panel
arranged with front access for maintenance. It shall
to prevent unauthorised access and malicious
equipment inside.
C12.2.4
Each relay shall be labelled appropriately to its service either by
function or by code, in which case a code index shall be securely
attached to the panel for easy and positive identification.
C12.2.5
A control cubicle shall be installed for each diesel generating set.
C12.2.6
All circuits shall be accommodated in accordance with IEC 604391:2004.
C12.2.7
The cubicle shall be equipped with anti-condensation heater which
shall be thermostatically controlled.
C12.2.8
The cubicle shall have adequate space mountings for cable terminal
box or boxes suitable for armoured cables or busbar entering and
leaving both at the top and the bottom of the control cubicle, for
connection of mains feeders.
C12.2.9
Terminal blocks and provision for conduit termination shall be
provided for small outgoing wiring. All small wiring shall be
appropriately ferruled and coded for identification.
necessary items
which shall be
also be lockable
damage to the
C12.2.10 The cubicle shall be so partitioned to allow maintenance of the panel
in a safe manner without interrupting the power supply from the
mains to the external loads.
C12.2.11 The cubicle shall be constructed to Form 3b of IEC 60439-1:2004.
Section C12
Page 6 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.2.12 The cubicle shall be provided with two rubber mats of ribbed surface,
complying to BS 921:1976 or other technically equivalent national or
international standards, laid in front of and at the rear of the cubicle.
The rubber mats shall be continuous sheets of minimum thickness of
10 mm, each of same length as the cubicle and minimum width of not
less than 1000 mm or the width of the space between the front or back
of the cubicle to the adjacent wall.
C12.3
OPERATION REQUIREMENT
C12.3.1
Automatic Operation
Unless otherwise specified, the generating set shall be arranged for
automatic start, automatic full load transfer and automatic stop. All
automatic operations shall be provided with manual override facilities.
(a)
Failure of one or more phases of the mains supply, or a
reduction in voltage to less than 80% normal, shall initiate a
timing device adjustable in the range of 0 to 5 seconds. If the
failure persists at the expiry of this pre-set time delay, the
engine start sequence shall be initiated.
(b)
On receipt of the start signal the set shall run up to speed and
accept the essential loads automatically as soon as possible and
within a maximum period of 12 seconds. The automatic load
transfer shall be by means of the change-over switch or remote
opening/closing of A.C.B. at the main L.V. switchboard.
(c)
On restoration of the mains supply the set will continue to run
and supply essential loads for an adjustable period of 0 to 10
minutes. Thereafter automatic transfer of essential load to
mains supply shall take place as soon as the adjusted period
expired.
(d)
At the end of the adjustable period in (c) the set shall continue
to run on no load for an adjustable period of 0-15 minutes.
(e)
If the mains power fails again for a duration exceeding 0.5
second during the adjustable period specified in (c), the control
timer setting of the adjustable period (0-10 minutes) shall be
cancelled and when the mains power is restored again, the
operating sequence will start again from (c).
(f)
If the mains fails again during the adjustable period specified
in (d) the essential loads will be connected immediately and
automatically back to the set and the operating sequence will
continue as if the connection had been made in the manner as
described in (b).
Section C12
Page 7 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.3.2
(g)
In the event of failure of the engine to start the set shall, after a
pre-determined time delay, make a second attempt to start. A
third attempt may be initiated. Eventually, if it fails to start,
the starting circuits shall be lock-out, and a visible and audible
alarm given which shall remain until reset.
(h)
Both electrical and mechanical interlocking devices shall be
provided to prevent starting engagement when the engine is in
motion.
(i)
In the event of electrical failure such as over-current, short
circuits or earth fault during the operation of the generator set,
the ACB/MCCB connecting the generating set and the L.V.
Switchboard shall be tripped, the engine shall be shut down
and both visual and audible warning signal shall be given.
(j)
Provision shall be made for manual control of the set for
testing purpose, including one "auto-off-manual" selector
switch, "start" and "stop" push-buttons, and a "simulate mains
failure" key switch.
(k)
Restoration of normal mains supply during the starting period
shall not interrupt the starting sequence but shall prevent the
load transfer to the alternator. Therefore the operating
sequence will follow the mode as described in (d).
(l)
As ACB is used for the protection/ isolation of the generator,
ACB lifting truck shall be provided.
Protection
Protective devices are required to guard against mechanical and
electrical failure and any continuous running may result in severe
damage of the generating set. In the event of a fault the devices shall
shut down the engine and to initiate both audible and visible alarms.
The audible alarm shall be cancelled by an acknowledge push button.
The setting for each of the system being monitored shall be specified
by the engine manufacturer.
Following are the general requirements for protection of the
generating set.
(a)
Protection of Engine
Suitable protection against engine over-speed,
temperature and low oil pressure shall be provided.
(b)
coolant
Protection of Alternator
Suitable protection against electrical short circuit, overload,
earth fault of the stator and rotor windings, over/under-voltage
and over/under-frequency, loss of excitation, under-speed and
rotation failure of the alternator shall be provided.
Section C12
Page 8 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.4
CONTROL REQUIREMENT
C12.4.1
Instruments and functions for control cubicle
(a)
Voltmeter and selector switch and fuse 0-500V range.
(b)
Ammeter, current transformers and selector switch.
(c)
Frequency meter in 45 to 55 Hz range.
(d)
Hour-meter.
(e)
4 Poles withdrawable air circuit breaker or 4 Poles MCCB
complete with d.c. shunt trip facility and protection against
overload and short circuit and earth fault by means of overcurrent and earth fault protection relay.
(f)
3-phase mains voltage sensing unit.
(g)
Auto/off/manual selector switch.
(h)
"Start", "Stop" push buttons for manual operation.
(i)
"Simulate main failure" key switch.
(j)
Diesel generating set anti-condensation element "On-off"
switch.
(k)
Automatic 2-rate battery charging equipment complete with
voltmeter and charging rate ammeter.
(l)
Automatic voltage regulation unit and excitation controls.
(m)
"Engine Fault" automatic shut-down indication lamps, alarm,
and reset buttons.
(n)
"Failure to start" indicating lamp, alarm and reset button.
(o)
"Diesel generating set Supply Available" indication lamp.
(p)
"Mains Available" indication lamp.
(q)
"Diesel generating set on Load" indication lamp.
(r)
"Mains on Load" indication lamp.
(s)
Diesel generating set output under-voltage and over-voltage
protection device. The devices shall be capable of monitoring
the three phase supply and with an adjustable range.
(t)
Lamp test push button.
Section C12
Page 9 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(u)
Any other function controls to meet the requirements of
"Clause 3: Operation Requirements".
(v)
Cable terminal box or boxes suitable for armoured cables or
busbar trunking entering from the bottom or top of the control
cubicle as appropriate for each site, for connection of mains
cables.
(w)
Clean contacts shall be provided in the Control Cubicle for the
following alarms/indications to enable them to be connected
for remote indications:
Alarms/Indications
Location
(i)
Generator on load
Fire control main panel
(ii)
Generator fails to start
- ditto –
(iii)
Auto/off/manual selector
switch in manual position
- ditto –
(iv)
Generator Engine Fault
- ditto –
(v)
Generator running
- ditto –
(vi)
Essential Power Supply
ON/OFF
Lift Machine
Room
(vii)
Essential Power Supply
NORMAL/TRIP
- ditto -
(x)
The fuel oil tank shall be fitted with two stages fuel capacity
limiting control to alert building management and shut down
non-FSI essential services when the remaining fuel capacity
falls to 7 hours and 6.5 hours continuous running of the
emergency generator respectively.
(y)
Contacts shall be provided for controlling each of the generator
room air supply and exhaust fans, remote radiator fans, cooling
water booster pump etc. which shall be ON automatically
when the diesel generating set is started. All indication lamps
shall be operated at a voltage not greater than 50V.
Section C12
Page 10 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.4.2
C12.5
Interfacing with CCMS System
(a)
All necessary contactors, relays, micro switches, transducers,
transformers, signal and control cables, conduits and other
necessary accessories to facilitate the monitoring by the
Central Control and Monitoring System (also referred to as the
Direct Digital Control System, CCMS or DDC) shall be
provided. These provisions shall include termination works at
dedicated terminal strips in individual control panels of
equipment for connection to an interfacing panel in the
Emergency Generator room of the Building.
(b)
The parameters of diesel generating sets system such as engine
oil pressure, coolant temperature, engine rpm, system DC volts,
engine running hours, generator AC volts, generator AC amps,
generator frequency, low oil pressure, high coolant
temperature, over-speed, over-crane, emergency stop, fault
shutdown, fuel oil pump fault and Underground tank/Daily
services oil tank low level alarms shall be all repeated and can
be retrieved in the CCMS for remote monitoring and recording.
(c)
The interfacing panel shall be constructed from 1.6 mm thick
stainless steel, with front lockable hinged door.
INSTALLATION OF DIESEL GENERATING SETS
C12.5.1
Position
Special attention shall be paid for the construction dimensions and
location of the air intake/outlet louvers and shall ensure that the
capacity of the radiator fan is sufficient for the air requirements of the
generator set. Air discharge restriction of the radiator fan and the air
intake restriction of the generator set shall be selected with
appropriate noise attenuators.
The diesel generating sets shall be properly erected and aligned onto
the concrete plinth and the vibration generated by the set shall be
isolated from the generator room.
C12.5.2
Guards and Insulations
All moving parts, bare exhaust manifolds, pipes and pressure charger
(if any) shall be properly and completely guarded and or insulated in
accordance with the relevant regulations. The guards shall be of such
design that will guard against the serviceman from coming into
contact with any part which is likely to cause injury to personnel. All
guards shall be detachable.
Section C12
Page 11 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.5.3
Air-ducts
An exhaust air duct from the radiator to the louvers mounted in the
wall shall be of 1 mm galvanised M.S. sheet and shall be properly
supported near the radiator end. It shall then be connected to the
radiator flanges through a flexible joint to isolate the vibrations
generated by the diesel generating set. An inspection panel shall be
provided for the ease of future maintenance.
C12.5.4
C12.5.5
Engine Exhaust System
(a)
The engine exhaust system shall comprise silencer, bellows,
hangers, piping, clamps, flange couplings, heat resisting
jointing. All installation works shall be carried out to suit
actual site requirements.
(b)
The silencer shall be capable to attenuate the noise generated
from the exhaust air to a level to cope with the Environment
Protection Department‟s requirement.
(c)
The complete exhaust from the exhaust manifold to the end of
the exhaust pipe including the silencers, flexible joint and
pressure charger (if any) shall be coated with heat resisting
paint, lagged with non-combustible insulating material and
enclosed with aluminium cladding. Asbestos shall not be used
for insulation. The exposed portion of exhaust pipe outside the
generator room shall be of stainless steel, grade 316.
(d)
The exhaust system shall not create a back-pressure exceeding
the amount recommended by the engine manufacturer, and
shall be sufficiently flexibly installed in order to allow for
reasonable amount of expansion and contraction.
(e)
The engine exhaust pipe hangers shall incorporate antivibration spring mechanism.
(f)
Suitable water draining device shall be provided for the
exhaust system so that no fluid could enter to the diesel
generating set through the exhaust outlet.
(g)
The installation of the exhaust outlet shall comply with all
requirements of the Environment Protection Department.
Electrical Works
(a)
(i)
Independent earthing system shall be provided for each
of the neutral connection and earthing of the diesel
generating set. The installation of diesel generating set
shall be solidly and effectively earthed in accordance
with the latest edition of the code of practice for the
electricity (wiring) regulations.
Section C12
Page 12 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.6
(ii)
An earth fault protection relay and the necessary
accessories shall be provided to complete the earth
protection system.
(iii)
Joints in copper earth bar shall be brazed together using
pan head riveted and sweated.
(iv)
When the plant is subject to vibration, or where
circumstances necessitate, the earthing connections
shall be made of flexible copper conductor having PVC
sheath.
(v)
The exposed conductive part of all equipment shall be
earthed into separate earthing terminal.
(b)
Sufficient of clean contacts shall be provided in the control
cubicle for each Air Circuit Breaker of the L.V. Main
switchboard for the remote open/close operation of the
respective Air Circuit Breaker.
(c)
The control cubicle shall have clean contacts and related
transducers for indications of alarms and status at the Central
Control and Monitoring System (CCMS).
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM USING REMOTE RADIATOR
C12.6.1
General
If remote radiator cooling is required, the following specification in
this section shall be complied with.
C12.6.2 Remote Radiators
(a)
The remote radiator shall be suitable for outdoor installation
with ample capacity to comply with the cooling requirement of
the diesel engine. The radiator shall be a forced draft design
with cooling core and fans.
(b)
The core shall be encased in a galvanised steel frame and
covered with a removal guard of zinc plated or galvanised steel
wire. The core shall be bolted to a heavy gauge galvanised
steel structure which supports it all points and is capable of
withstanding wind loads to 45 metre/sec. Core shall consist of
the non-ferrous cooling coil tube mechanically expanded into
aluminium plate fins for a permanent bond. Vents and drains
shall be provided in the core.
(c)
The fan shall be of the propeller type with aluminium blades.
The fan motor shall be of totally enclosed type, class B
insulated. Zinc plated, close mesh steel wire fan guard shall be
provided. Weatherproof push lock turn reset emergency stop
switch shall be provided to stop the fan in case of emergency.
Section C12
Page 13 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
C12.6.3
C12.6.4
The radiator shall be designed so that the overall sound
pressure level shall not exceed the value specified by the
Environmental Protection Department.
Heat Exchangers
(a)
Heat exchanger shall be of the horizontal shell and tube pattern
with the coolant from engine flowing inside the tubes which
shall be straight.
(b)
The shell shall consist of either a seamless steel or brass pipe
or a fusion welded steel cylinder with the necessary parts and
flange welded in place.
(c)
The tubes may be externally finned or grooved to increase
exchange surface and shall be expanded into grooved holes in
the tube plates and the ends belled. Welding of the tubes to the
tube plate shall not be accepted.
(d)
The tubes shall be made of either copper or brass. The tube
plates and supports shall be of stainless steel.
Water Circulating Pumps
(a)
Two water circulating pumps (one duty and 1 standby) shall be
provided for each diesel generating set. The two pumps shall
work automatically and alternatively as duty and standby or
controlled manually by a selector switch on the control panel.
(b)
The pump shall be centrifugal type and direct driven through
flexible coupling by electric motor fixed on a common bed
plate.
(c)
The pumps shall be constructed to meet the following
requirement:
Pump casing
Impeller
Shaft
Bearing
Seals
Bolt and Nuts
(d)
:
:
:
:
:
:
Cast Iron;
Leaded Gunmetal;
Stainless Steel Grade 316;
Ball or Ball and Roller;
Mechanical; and
Stainless Steel.
The pump motor shall be Class B insulation suitable for 380V
50 Hz 3 phase supply. The speed of the motor shall not exceed
1500 rpm.
Section C12
Page 14 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.6.5
C12.6.6
Expansion Tank
(a)
An expansion tank of suitably capacity for each water
circulating system with ballcock, valve, overflow, drain and all
necessary accessories shall be provided to meet the local
regulations and the operational requirement.
(b)
The tank shall be fabricated from mild steel plates of 3mm
thickness welded onto a mild steel frame. To stiffen the tank,
mild steel flat bars are to be intermittently welded on the inside
of the tank.
(c)
All steel work, mild steel angle stand including the surfaces of
the tank shall be painted with one coat of best quality primer
and two coats of best quality paint. Colour of the tank shall be
directed by the Architect or his Representative.
Pipework and Valve
All pipework shall be R250 copper pipe to BS EN 1057:1996.
Jointing method for pipe size 65 mm and above shall be of the
flanged brazing or bronze welded type.
All pipes shall be properly pitched and supported with strong hangers,
brackets and saddles. The support system shall be designed to take
into account the size of the pipelines, their content and materials of
construction, the vibration isolation components, the amount and
direction of movement, the location of the pipeline in relation to the
building fabric and other services and the need for access. Adequate
provision shall be provided for free expansion and contraction of the
pipeline.
Gate valves shall be flanged cast iron body with bronze trim, cast iron
wedge, bronze rising stem. Globe valves shall be flanged cast iron
body, renewable bronze disc and seat, outside screw and bronze rising
stem.
Disconnecting flanges shall be installed at valves and at suitable
locations for cleaning and removal of piping. Where pipes pass
through walls or slabs, pipe sleeves shall be provided.
Pipes and valves shall be painted in colours with directional arrow
indication.
C12.6.7
Hydraulic Test
(a)
Water system and circuits shall be hydraulically tested.
(b)
Test pressure for water circuits and components shall be 2
times working pressure, or 1.5 working pressure plus 3.5 bar
whichever is lower.
Section C12
Page 15 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.6.8
C12.7
Power Supply and Control System
(a)
Power supply to the remote radiator and the pump shall be fed
from the control cubicle. All cables shall be PVC insulated to
IEC 60189-2:1981 and run in steel conduits or PVC armoured
cable as appropriate.
(b)
Control panel housing fuseswitch, the starter and control
circuit for the remote radiator and the water pump shall be
provided. They shall be automatically started and stopped in
line with the operation of the diesel generating set.
FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM.
C12.7.1
Underground Horizontal Fuel Storage Tank
(a)
Construction
(i)
The construction of the underground fuel storage tank
shall comply with BS 2594:1975 or other technically
equivalent national or international standards.
(ii)
All joints in the tank shell and dished ends shall comply
with EN 1011-1:1998 and BS EN 499:1995.
(iii)
Tank shells shall be made of rings and each ring shall
be formed from a single plate or from not more than
two plates welded together, rolled into a true circle. No
longitudinal weld in any ring shall lie within the bottom
third of the tank circumference in accordance with BS
2594:1975 or other technically equivalent national or
international standards. Longitudinal seam welds in
adjoining rings of plate shall be staggered from one
another by a minimum of 45 degrees. Joints or seams
shall not be placed in the positions of the cradles. All
openings in the tank shall be located clear of the
welding seams.
(iv)
An end plate made up from two smaller plates is
acceptable. The welded joint between them shall be
horizontal and above the centre of the tank end.
(v)
The inside surfaces of the tank shall be smooth and free
from any obstruction apart from essential pipe
connections. No internal bracing or gusset plates will
be permitted inside the tanks.
(vi)
Tank-hole covers and all flanges and pads associated
with each manhole cover shall be provided and
complete with bolts, washers and joint rings as shown
on the Drawings.
Section C12
Page 16 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(vii)
After the construction has been completed, the tank
shall be thoroughly cleaned and all loose debris
removed. It shall than be tested hydraulically at a
pressure of 70 kPa, measured at the top of the tank. The
pressure shall be maintained for a period of 2 hours to
ensure that the tank is sound and shows no leaks or
undue distortion. The test shall be carried out in the
presence of and to the satisfaction of the Architect or
his Representative.
The pressure gauge employed for the test shall be tested
and calibrated by approved laboratory before use.
Pressure gauge with full-scale deflection readings more
than 3 times the test pressure shall not be used.
(viii) Immediately after hydraulic test of the tank, the tank
shall be drained and dried out and a thick coat of
linseed oil shall be applied on the interior surfaces of
the tank to prevent rusting.
(b)
Protection of Tank
All parts of the exterior surfaces of the tank shall be
thoroughly cleaned by mechanical means to remove all rust,
mill scale, grease and other foreign matters to achieve a bright,
rust free and dry surface. The painting procedures shall comply
with ISO 12944:1998.
(c)
Calibration
(i)
The tank shall be calibrated after it has been installed in
the tank chamber, by dipstick. The measuring device
shall be calibrated.
(ii)
The dipstick shall be made from 20 mm diameter brass
pipe. When the tank has been calibrated, the dipstick
shall be marked on all faces by clearly scribed lines of
100 litres intervals for the tanks up to 10000 litre in
capacity and of 250 litres interval for those above
10000 litre, and have the volume in figures stamped on
two opposite faces at interval of 1000 litres.
(iii)
After calibration, the tank shall be thoroughly dried out
and applied with a thick coat of linseed oil on the
interior surface to prevent rusting.
(iv)
The results of calibration shall be tabulated and
submitted for record purpose.
Section C12
Page 17 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.7.2
Daily Service Fuel Tank
(a)
Construction of the Daily Service Fuel Tank
The daily service tank shall be fabricated from mild steel plates
welded onto a mild steel frame. To stiffen the tank, mild steel
flat bars are to be intermittently welded on the inside of the
tank.
(b)
Accessories of Daily Service Fuel Tank
The tank shall be fitted with the following standard accessories:
(i)
A tapped filling socket connection on top of the tank
complete with all the necessary fittings and union
coupling for connection to the filling pipe.
(ii)
A tapped overflow socket connection close to the top
and on the side of the tank complete with all the
necessary fittings and union coupling for connection to
the overflow pipe or plugged with a brass screw cap if
it is not used.
(iii)
A tapped outlet socket connection close to the bottom
and on the side of strainers, and union coupling for
connection to the delivery pipe strainer must be
submitted for approval before installation.
(iv)
A tapped drain socket connection at the bottom of the
tank complete with all the necessary fittings connection
to and including the 20 mm gate valve.
(v)
A tapped return socket connection on the top of tank
complete with all the necessary fittings and union
coupling for the connection to the return pipe; or
plugged with a brass screw cap if it is not used.
(vi)
A tapped vent socket connection on the top of tank
complete with all the necessary fittings and union
coupling for the connection to the vent pipe.
(vii)
One quick closing valve installed on the delivery pipe
complete with all necessary linkage for operation from
outside the building. If steel wire linkage and pulleys
are used, the wire must be properly adjusted in length
and protected; and the pulleys securely anchored.
Section C12
Page 18 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(viii) The tank shall be fitted with an approved content gauge
unit. Provide an accurate measuring device for the
calibration of the content gauge and a supporting stand
which shall be fabricated form angle iron complete with
strut and tie members as may be deemed necessary.
They shall be designed in such a way that it will be
possible to remove the tank without first lifting it. A
mild steel oil drip tray welded to the angle bracket or
stand shall also be included. Exact height of the frame
shall be determined to suit site requirement.
(c)
Painting of the Daily Service Fuel Tank
All parts of the exterior surfaces of the tank shall be
thoroughly cleaned by mechanical means to remove all rust,
mill scale, grease and other foreign matters to achieve a bright,
rust free and dry surface and then painted with one coat of zinc
rich primer, one coat of epoxy based under coat and two
finishing coats of approved paint.
The interior surface of the tank shall be thoroughly dried out
and applied with a thick coat of linseed oil to prevent rusting.
C12.7.3
Fuel Transfer Pumping System
(a)
Electrical Fuel Transfer Pumps
Rotary fuel transfer pumps complete with all necessary
accessories including strainers, check valves, gate valves etc.
shall be provided.
(i)
The pumps shall be positive displacement type, with
high quality cast iron body, high tensile steel shafts and
built in internal relief valve.
(ii)
Each pump shall be capable of delivering 'ultra low
sulphur' diesel fuel oil at 300 kPa 950 rpm maximum
with capacity. For each pair of pumps a manual switch
shall be provided to select the pump running mode as
"duty" or "standby" respectively.
(iii)
The coupling motor shall be flame proof 3 phase, 50 Hz,
380V with no volt release and overload protection. It
shall have a manual/auto/off switch with connections
for remote start/stop operation by the level switch at the
daily service tank. The duty pump shall be actuated
when the fuel level in the daily service tank fall below
30% of the tank capacity, cut off automatically when
the tank is 90% full. The pumps shall also be
inoperative when the fuel level in the underground
storage tank falls below a pre-set level.
Section C12
Page 19 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(iv)
Audible alarm shall be given off under the following
conditions:
-
(v)
(b)
underground storage tank fuel level low; and
pump fail to start.
A composite pump control cubicle in the pump room
incorporating the starters, safety and protection devices,
all necessary wiring work, relays, fuel level control and
alarm, push button and indication lights shall be
provided. The cubicle shall be of wall-mounted type,
type of protection EEx d flameproof enclosures for
operation in Zone 1 hazardous area as classified
IPMCSP and IP 66 enclosure to IEC 60529:2001. The
drawings and the official certificate issued by
BASEEFA (British Approvals Services for Electrical
Equipment in Flame Atmosphere) of the cubicle shall
be submitted.
Control Equipment
The following controls and indicator lights shall be
incorporated on the control cubicle:
(i)
A suitably rated main supply door-interlocked isolator
with "Supply On" indicator light;
(ii)
An "Automatic/Off/Manual" selector switch;
(iii)
Push button manual "star/stop" of each of the pump set,
and the corresponding indicator lights;
(iv)
Indicator lights showing "pump running";
(v)
Selector switch to select duty pump;
(vi)
Clean contacts for connection to CCMS for the status
monitoring of the pumps;
(vii)
Engraved labels in both English and Chinese for all
control operations shall be incorporated on the
composite control cubicle; and
(viii) Indicator lights showing the remaining fuel capacity
falls to 7 hours and 6.5 hours continuous running of the
emergency generator respectively.
(c)
Hand Pump
A semi-rotary double acting hand pump shall be provided for
each daily service tank and consist of 25 mm diameter inlet
and outlet and a 25 mm diameter flexible oil resistant inlet pipe
of adequate length to suit site condition.
Section C12
Page 20 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.7.4
Pipeworks and Fittings
(a)
General
(i)
Supply and install all necessary fittings and pipework
of approved design as required by the emergency
generating plants and as generally shown on the
Drawings. However exact dimension of piping shall be
determined on site and any modification of pipe route
indicated on Drawings requires prior approval from the
Architect.
(ii)
All pipes up to 80 mm diameter shall confirm with ISO
65:1981 heavy quality and pipes 80 mm diameter and
above with BS 1600:1991 or other technically
equivalent national or international standards.
(iii)
Flanges shall be slip-on-welding type in accordance
with ISO 7005-1:1992 Class 150. Screwed fittings
shall be made of malleable iron and threads shall
comply with ISO 7-1:1994.
(iv)
All screwed joints shall be cleaned, threaded and pulled
up tightly. All jointing materials shall be diesel resistant.
Gaskets made of rubber or compressed asbestos fibre
shall not be used.
(v)
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that all pipes
and fittings are carefully reamed to ensure that the full
bore of the pipe is maintained and where necessary
cleaned out before erection.
(vi)
Square elbows shall not be used, where practicable,
long sweep bends shall be used in preference to round
elbows.
(vii)
Valves shall be of 'fully way' type to allow free flow of
fuel. A sample valve shall be submitted to the Architect
for approval before installation. Valves shall be made
of bronze.
(viii) Round piping supports and anchors as necessary to be
suitably placed to the instruction of the Architect, in
order to provide rigidity to reduce stresses due to
unstable ground.
(b)
(ix)
Jointing materials shall be diesel resistant.
(x)
A return diesel pipe shall also be provided from the
generator back to the daily service tank.
Protection of Buried Pipe
Section C12
Page 21 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
The procedures for protection of the buried pipes shall be as
follows:
(c)
(i)
Clean the outer surface of the pipe to remove all rust,
mill scale, grease and other foreign matters to achieve a
rust free and dry surface;
(ii)
apply one layer of petrolatum compound primer paste
or approved equivalent as primer to give a thin
continuous coating over the area to be protected;
(iii)
apply petrolatum compound tape or approved
equivalent spiral on the pipe with minimum 55%
overlap. Care should be taken to ensure the tape is in
contact with the underlying surface of the pipe and to
smooth out any wrinkles or air pockets; and
(iv)
apply bitumen fabric-reinforced tape or approved
equivalent on the pipe with minimum 55% overlap as
an outerwrap.
Painting of Pipework
All pipework, other than the buried pipes, shall be painted with
one coat of zinc rich primer before installation and painted
immediately after installation with one coat of epoxy based
under coat and two finishing coats of best quality paint.
C12.7.5
Diesel Fuel Level Switches
(a)
General
(i)
The level switches shall be manufactured to
-
(b)
IEC 60079-0:2004 Electrical Apparatus for
Explosive Gas Atmospheres; and
IP Model Code of Safe Practice (Electrical) of
the Institute of Petroleum Code of Great British
(IPMCSP).
Classification
(i)
The level switch shall be of Group IIA and
Temperature Class T1 in accordance with IEC 600790:2004.
(ii)
The electrical components of the level switch installed
in the vapour space above fuel and inside the fuel
tank(s) shall be of the type of protection of EEx ia
which is suitable for installation in Zone 0 Hazardous
Area as classified in IPMCSP.
Section C12
Page 22 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(iii)
The electrical components of the level switch installed
outside of the fuel tank shall be of the type of
protection of
-
(c)
EEx ib or
EEx d or
EEx P which are all suitable for installation in
Zone 1 Hazardous Area as classified in IPMCSP.
Performance Requirements
Unless otherwise stated, the level switch (in general
accompanied with a controller) shall be capable to control
on/off operation of a remote system when a preset level of the
diesel fuel in the storage tank is reached. Details of the
operation and the exact control level settings shall be as stated
in the Specification. The level switch shall be suitable for onsite calibration of the level settings.
Sufficient of level settings are required for fuel capacity
limiting control to alert building management and shut down
non-FSI essential services when the remaining fuel capacity
falls to 7 hours and 6.5 hours continuous running of the
emergency generator respectively.
(d)
General Construction
(i)
The level switch shall consist of two major components
- a level sensor and a switch unit, both of which shall
meet the classification as specified in Sub-section
C12.7.5(b). Where applicable, the level switch shall be
accompanied with a controller to perform the function
as stated in Sub-section C12.7.5(c).
(ii)
The level sensing element shall be installed in a tube of
stainless steel and places inside the fuel storage tank. It
shall be mounted horizontally or vertically depending
on the principle of operation.
(iii)
The switch unit shall be mounted on the tank and with
the level sensor to form an integral set. The unit shall
be housed inside a casing made of cast iron or
aluminium alloy. It shall be capable of detecting the
signal from the sensor and transmitting it (in general
through a controller) to control the on/off operation of a
remote system.
Section C12
Page 23 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(e)
Certification
A copy of certificate to prove the apparatus rating shall be
submitted. Certificate issued by authorities other than
BASEEFA (British Approvals Services for Electrical
Equipment in Flame Atmosphere) shall be furnished with
details of relevant standard.
(f)
Technical Information
A full descriptive technical brochure giving details of the
equipment offered, including construction, dimensions, method
of installation etc. shall be submitted.
C12.8.
ACOUSTIC TREATMENT INSTALLATION
C12.8.1
C12.8.2
Performance Requirements
(a)
The acoustic treatment package shall be designed to ensure
that when the generator set is running under full load the
generated noise complies with the "Noise from Places other
than Domestic Premises, Public Places or Construction Sites"
under the Noise Control Ordinance.
(b)
For Commissioning and Testing purposes, the proposed points
at which measurements have to be carried out according to the
method set out in the "Technical Memorandum for The
Assessment Of Noise From Places Other Than Domestic
Premises, Public Places or Construction Sites".
Scope of work
The scope of work shall include but not limit to the followings:
(a)
Pipework acoustic sleeving.
(b)
Duct Silencer for all air passage including air inlet louvre, air
discharge outlet louvres, ventilation fan and coupled radiator.
(c)
Mufflers/silencer for the engine exhaust air system including
exhaust flues.
(d)
Acoustic wall and ceiling lining inside Generator Room.
(e)
Acoustic enclosures including silencer and acoustic lining for
the remote radiator, if required.
(f)
Other acoustic treatments required.
(g)
Measurement of Noise level at the specified point.
Section C12
Page 24 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
All vibration and noise suppression equipment shall be sound
workmanship and robust design and shall be supplied by
manufacturers experienced in the design and construction of
similar equipment and who have made equipment and
materials for similar duties for at least 5 years.
C12.8.3
Installation of the Acoustic Treatment System
(a)
Pipework Acoustic Sleeving
Wherever necessary to maintain acoustic integrity of the
system acoustic seal sleeving to all pipes penetrating the
building structure shall be provided.
Pipework sleeves shall consist of an inner pipe lined with
mineral wool and clamping end plates with neoprene seals.
Pipe in situ shall be fitted with split clamping rings. Pipe
temperatures above 115 oC shall have silicon fibre seals.
Pipes shall be resiliently supported on either side of the
penetration by resilient hangers.
Seals shall comply with FSD requirements wherever
appropriate.
(b)
Duct Silencers for All Air Passage
The duct silencers shall consist of an outer casing fabricated
from galvanised steel sheet not less than 1.6 mm thick and a
number of splitters made from 0.8 mm perforated galvanised
steel sheets which divide the silencer into separate longitudinal
airways. Sound shall be attenuated by the sound absorptive fill
in the splitter as air passes through those airways.
The sound absorbent material shall be non-combustible
inorganic glassfibre or mineral wool or other approved and
equivalent material and shall have a glass fibre mat facing.
The material shall be fitted in the splitters with at least 10%
compactness. The material shall also be non-hygroscopic,
resistant to attack by moulds and insects. The material should
be supported so that it does not shake down but remains intact
during the life of the plant. Bird screen made of galvanized
wire mesh shall be provided with all intake silencers.
The acoustic fill shall be suitable for continuous exposure up to
260oC with the galvanised steel sheet having a temperature
limit of 400oC. A polyester membrane shall be used to line up
the silencer to prevent ingress of dust and/or water into the
sound absorptive fill. The absorptive fill in the splitters shall
be firmly secured as to be free from erosion for channel
velocity up to 30 m/s.
Section C12
Page 25 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
The shape of the splitters shall be designed for maximum
possible sound attenuation with the minimum possible
resistance to air flow. Maximum allowance pressure drop is
50 Pa. The minimum sound insertion loss (dB) of the silencer,
tested in accordance with or other technically equivalent
national or international standards, shall be as follows:
Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
Frequency (Hz)
Minimum
Insertion Loss
(dB)
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
8
18
24
40
45
46
41
The silencer shall have fully welded seams or duct sealer to
ensure air tightness. All weld affected parts shall be touched
up with an zinc rich paint and all exposed ferrous parts
including the frame shall be protected from corrosion by
applying rust-inhibiting primer paint, an undercoat and
finishing coat of colour as determined by the Architect on Site.
All such primer and paint shall be resistant to heat up to the
working temperature of 260oC.
(c)
Mufflers for Engine Exhaust
Exhaust gas muffler (or mufflers) of low noise level type shall
be provided for each engine such that the noise level standard/
requirement can be achieved.
In case that the above standard cannot be achieved with the
installation of exhaust gas mufflers, suitable acoustic enclosure
shall be provided at the engine exhaust pipe outlet to attenuate
the noise before the hot exhaust air is discharged. The acoustic
enclosure shall be capable to withstand the hot engine exhaust
air which may be up to 650oC.
(d)
Acoustic Wall/Ceiling Lining Inside Generator Room
Acoustic treatment to the generator room walls, doors and
ceiling wherever else necessary in order to reduce the room
reverberant noise level and time is required.
Acoustic wall/ceiling lining shall be fabricated from sound
absorptive material firmly hold in position by G.I. channels
and protected by perforated galvanised sheet steel.
Section C12
Page 26 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
The material shall be in form of the high density rigid section
fibreglass or rock-wood slabs or other similar approved
material having a minimum thickness of 50 mm and a density
around 48 kg/m3. The acoustic fills shall be of Class 1 or 2 rate
of surface flame spread as laid down in BS 476-7:1997 or
other technically equivalent national or international standards.
The minimum random incidence absorption coefficient of
material when fixed as specified shall be as follows:
Frequency (Hz)
Absorption
Coefficient
125
250
500
1000
2000
0.26
0.78
1.11
1.10
1.04
Material shall be selected of suitable random incidence
absorption coefficient to suit the site condition and equipment
offered.
A polyester membrane shall be lined between the glass fibre
and perforated sheet for better protection against dust and
water.
The fixing GI channels shall be 25 x 50 x 1.0 mm thick and
shall be fixed by fastener onto the wall surfaces at an intervals
of 600 mm approximately.
The protective perforated steel sheet shall be fabricated from
galvanised sheet of not less than 0.8mm thick and shall be
secured by self tapping screws to the G.I. channels. The holes
shall be 2.4mm diameter with 4.8mm centre to centre distance.
The perforated metal sheet shall be removable to enable future
maintenance.
The acoustic lining shall not pack down or settle after
installation. All metal surfaces shall be undercoated and
finished with 2 coats white gloss paint.
Samples and recognised test certificates for the absorption
material shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
(e)
Acoustic Enclosure for Remote Radiators if Required
A complete acoustic treatment to the remote radiator shall be
provided to achieve the standard specified in the previous
section which include the whole remote radiators with opening
for air intake and discharge. Duct silencer shall be installed for
every air passage. The sound absorptive material for the duct
silence shall be capable to withstand high temperature
generated from the remote radiator.
The whole acoustic enclosure shall be designed to facilitate
easy access to the remote radiator for maintenance.
Section C12
Page 27 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.9
EXHAUST FAN FOR EMERGENCY GENERATOR ROOM
Ventilation of the generator room is achieved by an axial flow exhaust fan with
air duct silencer and other accessories. The air flow capacity of the fan shall
have a minimum value of 10 air change/hour.
The design, material and workmanship of the axial fan, duct work and silencer
of the ventilation system shall comply, with all relevant sections of the "General
Specification for Air-conditioning, Refrigeration, Ventilation and Central
Monitoring and Control System Installation in Government Building, Hong
Kong" published by Architectural Services Department, the government of the
Special Administrative Region.
C12.10
LIFTING HOIST
C12.10.1 One manual lifting hoist complete with trolley shall be supplied and
installed for each diesel generating set. The hoist shall be chain driven
for maintenance and relocation purposes.
C12.10.2 The load chain shall be of malleable quality, electrically welded,
pitched and of calibrated steel complying with ISO 1834:1999,
1835 :1980, 3075:1980, 3076:1984, 3077:2001 and proof tested to
twice the safe working load specified for the hoist and trolley.
C12.10.3 The hooks shall comply fully with EN 1677-5:2001 or other
technically equivalent national or international standards. They shall
be able to rotate upon ball or roller bearings for ease of swivelling,
and provided with a catch to prevent displacement of wire rope from
the hook.
C12.10.4 All moving parts of the hoist and trolley shall be greased or oiled
after installation. Ball or roller bearings shall be packed with
appropriate grease.
C12.10.5 Standard I-beam completed with end stopper shall be provided and
ensure that the construction of the stoppers of the I-beams is suitable
to stop the trolley motion outside the working range.
C12.10.6 A qualified surveyor to carry out the formal test under load conditions
is required. The hoist with trolley shall be tested to a proof load of at
least 125% of safe working load on site. Original surveyor certificate
and copy of completed forms for Labour Department shall be
submitted.
Section C12
Page 28 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C12.11.
WARNING SIGN
A warning sign of reasonable size stating "Attention - Engine starts
automatically without warning. Do not come close." in lettering not less than
10 mm high with Chinese translation (注意: 發動機會隨時啓動) shall be
provided and fixed at a prominent position in the generator room.
The warning sign board shall be made from laminated self coloured materials
and engraved with the description as mentioned in the previous paragraph.
C12.12.
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
The electrical and control schematic diagrams for the diesel generating set shall
be fixed in wooden frame with transparent pane of suitable size. These
schematic diagrams shall be placed at a prominent position in the generator
room
C12.13
TESTING
C12.13.1 Testing of Diesel Generating Sets
(a)
The complete and fully assembled diesel generating set shall
also be tested at the manufacturer's works before despatch,
including full operating tests as well as tests on control,
protections such as over-voltage protection, under-voltage
protection, engine over-speed protection and protection device
overload trip, alarms, governor trials and fuel consumption
tests, and tests showing the step load acceptance capability, in
accordance with the relevant British Standard Specification.
(b)
The performance tests for all equipment and systems installed
shall be tested in accordance with "Commissioning and
Testing Procedure for Emergency Generator Installation in
Government Buildings, Hong Kong" published by the Building
Services Branch, Architectural Services Department. This
shall include the necessary adjustment and setting of all
controls, checking the operation of all overload protection and
safety devices and the commissioning of the completed
installation.
(c)
All apparatus, fuels, tools and instruments necessary for testing
the installation shall be available. Test methods and
measurements shall be in accordance with ISO 8528-6:2005.
All readings given by the measuring instrument shall be in S.I.
units.
Section C12
Page 29 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
Diesel fuel, water, lubricants etc. shall be provided for all tests
including dummy load test, actual load test and other fire
services test. Sufficient quantities of these consumables shall
be topped up before carrying out such tests. Two additional
fire service tests shall be allowed following satisfactory
completion of dummy load tests.
(e)
Four copies of certified results of the tests are required to show
that the installation of diesel generating set has been tested and
commissioned in accordance with the Commissioning and
Testing Procedure .
(f)
Sound pressure level measurement, with octave band
frequency analysis shall be conducted.
C12.13.2 Testing of Control Cubicle
(a)
Performance tests for Control Cubicle shall be conducted in
accordance with "Commissioning and Testing Procedure for
Electrical Installation in Government Buildings, Hong Kong"
published by the Building Services Branch, Architectural
Services Department.
(b)
Electrical resistance test (Ductor Test) and temperature rise test
for the control cubicle shall be carried out before the cubicle is
accepted and energised. The test shall include the measurement
of electrical resistance for all joints, connections and internal
resistance of protective devices e.g. ACB, MCCB, F/SW etc.
All instruments used inclusive of make, serial number shall be
recorded and the results of the measurements shall be properly
documented.
C12.13.3 Testing of Daily Service Tank, Fuel Storage Tank and Pipework
(a)
(b)
The daily service tank, fuel storage tank and the completed
pipework shall be hydraulically tested for a period of time not
less than 2 hours without undue deformation and leaking. The
following test pressure shall be used:
(i)
70 kPa for the daily service tank and the fuel storage
tank; and
(ii)
700 kPa for the completed pipework, valves and fittings.
Pressure gauges with full scale deflection readings more than 3
times the test pressures shall not be used. The pressure gauges
employed in test shall be tested and calibrated by approved
laboratory before use.
Section C12
Page 30 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
Immediately after the hydraulic testing, the daily service tank
and fuel storage tank must be drained and dried out and a thick
coat of linseed oil or equivalent coating shall be applied on the
interior surfaces of the tank to prevent rusting. All pipework,
fittings and valves after tests shall be drained, dried and
flushed out with linseed oil to remove all traces of water to
prevent rusting.
(d)
The following information shall be permanently and clearly
marked on a nameplate to be attached to daily service tank and
fuel storage tank in an agreed position:
-
Contractor's name;
Gross capacity in litres; and
Date of hydraulic test.
C12.13.4 Testing of Noise Control System
After the completion of the acoustic installation, a sound pressure
level measurement, with octave band frequency analysis, at the
agreed points shall be conducted.
The method of measurement shall generally be in accordance with BS
4142:1997 or other technically equivalent national or international
standards. Measurement shall be taken by an industrial grades sound
level meter.
C12.13.5 Testing of Exhaust Fan
The testing of Exhaust Fan and all accessories shall comply with the
testing requirement in accordance with the Building Services Branch,
Commissioning and Testing for Air-conditioning, Refrigeration,
Ventilation and Control Systems in Government Buildings, Hong
Kong.
C12.14
SUBMISSION TO THE AUTHORITIES
4 weeks after the award of the contract, the Contractor shall provide all
necessary information for the submission to the Authorities for the Diesel
Generator Installation for the compliance of various Statutory Regulations,
including but not limit to the Fire „Service Regulations, the Dangerous Goods
Regulations and the Air Pollution Control Regulations. The information shall
include drawings, equipment catalogues, data sheets, calculations and other
information as required by the relevant Authorities.
Section C12
Page 31 of 31
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C13
HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND EQUIPMENT
C13.1
HIGH VOLTAGE - GENERAL
This section covers the design, manufacture, testing and delivery of high voltage
induction motors and associated switchgear of rated voltages 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV or
11 kV.
Unless otherwise specified by the Electricity Supply Company, the following
system fault level shall be assumed:
Table C13.1 - System Fault Level
Nominal system voltage
Maximum symmetrical fault level
C13.2
3.3 kV
150 MVA
6.6 kV
225 MVA
11 kV
380 MVA
HIGH VOLTAGE - ELECTRIC MOTORS
C13.2.1
Performance Requirements
(a)
(b)
General Requirements
(i)
Type
- High
efficiency
3-phase
squirrel cage induction motor;
(ii)
Standards
- IEC 60034-1:2004;
(iii) Duty rating
- Maximum Continuous Rating
(MCR), SI duty;
(iv) Insulation
- Class F design for Class B
operation, IEC 60034-1:2004;
(v)
- 25 rev/s synchronous speed;
Maximum speed
(vi) Vibration level
- IEC 60034-14:2007; and
(vii) Power factor
- 0.85 minimum under full load
conditions, otherwise power
factor
correction
be
incorporated.
Electricity Supply
The electricity supply to the high voltage motors shall be 3.3
kV, 6.6 kV or 11 kV 3 phase, as specified in the Contract
Documents.
Section C13
Page 1 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
Starting Performance
Unless otherwise specified, the motor shall be provided with
auto-transformer starter to limit the starting current to not
exceeding 2.5 times of full load current.
The motor shall be designed to permit not less than three starts
per hour equally spaced during normal running conditions.
The motor shall also be suitable for two starts in succession
followed by a 30 minutes interval before attempting another
starting sequence.
The minimum voltage at motor windings at starting shall be
50% nominal for motor with auto-transformer starter.
The starting (run-up) torque characteristics of motor at
minimum voltage shall be adequate for driving the load to full
running speed under the most arduous conditions specified.
The accelerating torque at any speed up to the peak torque
point shall not be less than 10% of the motor rated full load
torque.
Motor with auto-transformer starting shall be with 50% rated
voltage across its winding and without changing to its final
connection, and shall run to at least 90% of its synchronous
speed within 10 seconds.
(d)
Power Rating
Motors shall be capable of operating continuously at any
voltage in the range 90-110% of rated voltage and shall have
power output of not less than 120% of the maximum power
absorbed by the driven machines.
(e)
Transient Recovery
Motors shall be capable of recovering normal operation in the
event of a system disturbance causing temporary loss of supply
voltage for periods of up to 0.2 seconds (fault clearance-time)
followed by a sudden restoration to 80% rated voltage. At this
voltage the motors shall then be capable of accelerating to
ultimate recovery under the most arduous load conditions.
C13.2.2
Enclosure
For open type motor drive, the enclosure shall have the degree of
protection of minimum IP 44 unless otherwise specified. Dimensions
and frame number of motors shall comply with IEC 60072-1:1991
and IEC 60072-2:1990.
The motor frame shall be designed to facilitate easy removal of rotor
assembly and to permit access from both motor ends for cleaning and
rewinding of the stator winding and replacement of the complete
Section C13
Page 2 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
stator core assembly.
The motor shall be provided with suitable arrangement to facilitate
lifting and handling during erection and overhaul.
C13.2.3
Thermal Insulation & Characteristics
The motor windings and accessories shall be designed for Class F
insulation with Class B maximum temperature limit to IEC 600341:2004.
Natural rubber insulated cables shall not be used between the stator
windings and motor terminals.
C13.2.4
Motor Stators & Windings
The motor winding insulation shall withstand voltage stress caused by
switching of motor starter using SF6 circuit breaker, vacuum circuit
breaker or vacuum contactor.
Motors shall be designed to permit high voltage tests in accordance
with IEC 60034-1:2004 to be conducted after erection on site.
End windings shall be rigidly braced to prevent their movement at the
specified service duty.
The insulation system of stator windings shall be of the resin-rich
type or the vacuum pressure impregnated type. Windings shall be
given a surface treatment where necessary to prevent deterioration
resulting from adverse environmental conditions and for corona
shield.
Winding coils shall be of the pre-formed type. Random-wound type
windings and hair-pin type windings are not acceptable. Stator slots
shall be of the open type to facilitate easy insertion of replacement
windings.
C13.2.5
Rotor
Unless otherwise specified, the rotor shall have cage type
copper/copper alloy winding.
The limits of vibration shall comply with IEC 60034-14:2007.
The rotor shall be dynamically balanced at its rated speed or a speed
not less than 600 rpm to confirm that vibration levels are within the
specified limit. Means for fixing balancing weights in-situ shall be
provided at both ends of the rotor without the need to dismantle the
motor for balancing on site.
For motors of 750 kW rating and above or where the induced shaft
voltage exceeds 0.15V, an insulated bearing arrangement shall be
provided. Where such provision is made, all motor bearings shall be
Section C13
Page 3 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
insulated from the stator frame and a removable earth bonding link
shall be provided at the driving end to facilitate insulation tests. Oil
and water pipes etc. where fitted shall be insulated to prevent a
current return path through the bearings of the motor shaft. Care shall
be taken to ensure that any insulation is not short circuited by the
application of electrically conducting paints or fixing clips.
C13.2.6
Bearings
(a)
General
Bearings shall be exclusively of metric sizes.
Unless otherwise specified or approved, bearings for horizontal
motors shall be provided in accordance with Table C13.2.6
below.
Table C13.2.6 - Type of Bearing
Number of Poles
4
6 or more
Motor Rating
Above 500 kW
Up to 500 kW
Above 750 kW
Up to 750 kW
Types of Bearing
Plain
Rolling
Plain
Rolling
The motor manufacturer shall examine the external axial and
radial load imposed from the shaft and the driven device in the
selection of the type of bearing to be used. Where damage is
likely to occur to rolling bearings due to thrust load or
stationary vibration, plain type bearings shall be preferred.
Consideration shall also be given to bearing service life, noise,
losses and maintenance convenience in the selection of
bearings. Where rolling type bearing is selected to be used, the
manufacturer shall provide calculation to verify that the L10
life of bearing is not less than 50,000 hours at the most onerous
operating conditions.
Bearings shall be easily accessible for inspection and shall be
liberally rated to ensure cool, even running. Bearings shall be
suitable for reverse rotation at 150% of the normal running
speed.
Motor bearings supplied shall be prevented from damage by
any stray currents as detailed in Sub-section C13.3.5.
Protective and auxiliary equipment applicable as per Clauses
C13.2.11(b) and C13.2.11(c) shall be provided for bearings.
Section C13
Page 4 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
Plain Type Bearings
Plain type bearings shall be self-lubricated. The lubrication oil
shall be water-cooled unless otherwise specified. The cooler
shall be such as to avoid any electrolytic action or corrosion.
Bearings shall be designed to exclude the ingress of dust and
water and adequately sealed to prevent leakage of oil.
The water pipes shall not run over or adjacent to the HV
terminal boxes and shall not impede access to the bearing for
inspection. The initial filling of bearing lubricating oil shall be
supplied and delivered in an oil drum.
Bearings shall be provided with a filling hole, an air breather,
an accessible drain plug and a clearly visible oil level indicator
to show oil levels during running and at standstill. Sight level
indicators of the type fitted externally to the bearing shall be
designed to prevent rotation about the gland connection.
Besides the normal running operation, the lubrication shall also
be adequate during starting and running down periods.
The bearing design shall avoid oil being drawn into the
winding through the shaft by centrifugal force or the effect of
ventilation fan.
The bearing mounting bracket assembly shall be capable of
completely detached from the stator, viz. no welding to the
stator frame shall be permitted.
Bearing pads shall be self aligning in design, and shall not
require any jacking screws for adjustment.
(c)
Rolling Type Bearings
Rolling type bearings shall be adequately lubricated by grease
and sealed against leakage of lubricant along the shaft.
Construction shall be such that bearings can be dismantled and
reassembled without risk of damage.
The bearing assembly shall be designed to prevent the entry of
dust or water. It shall be provided with a separate grease
nipple to serve each lubricating point and a grease relief device
such that when the motor runs at its rated speed any surplus
grease is ejected out of the bearing casing to a separate
container.
Housings for ball/roller bearings shall be packed with
approved lithium-based grease at the time of assembly. The
required re-lubrication interval shall be more than 4,000 hours.
Section C13
Page 5 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Grease nipples, oil cups and dip sticks shall be readily
accessible without removal of guarding. Where necessary for
accessibility, nipples shall be remotely mounted at a point as
near as is practicable to the lubrication point.
C13.2.7
Motor Foundation
A motor bedplate/foundation block shall be provided unless the motor
is to be mounted on the soleplate of the compressor.
C13.2.8
Provision for Cabling and Termination
(a)
Cabling Provision at Bedplates
Provision shall be made in the steel bedplate where necessary
to facilitate straight run of cable to the bottom of the motor
cable terminal box.
(b)
Cabling Provision at Cable Boxes
Unless otherwise specified or approved, the cable terminal box
for the motor shall be positioned at the side of the motor.
Cable entry shall be from below for all box types unless
otherwise specified.
An earthing terminal with the same current carrying capacity
as the line terminals with the minimum size suitable for 25 x 6
mm copper strip shall be provided. A tapped hole with screw
external to the cable box would be acceptable.
Permanent terminal marking and direction of rotation in
accordance with IEC 60034-8:2007 shall be provided in the
cable boxes.
(c)
Cabling Provision at Motor Casing
The terminal leads from cable box terminals or connectors to
the windings for a distance of 150 mm beyond their point of
entry into the motor frame, shall be adequately braced to
withstand the forces produced by maximum fault current.
The phase windings shall be accessible for testing. For this
purpose, neutral leads shall be brought out to a separate starpoint terminal box and shorted with an insulated copper bar of
cross-sectional area not less than the conductor of the terminal
lead.
Studs shall be so fixed as to prevent the terminal leads from
turning when the nuts are tightened down. Means shall be
provided to prevent slackening of cable connections due to
vibration.
Section C13
Page 6 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(d)
Motor Supply Cables
Motor terminations shall be suitable for connection of high
voltage power supply cables which shall be cross linked
polyethylene insulated, PVC-sheathed, galvanised steel wire
and PVC covered XLPE/SWA/PVC copper cables as specified
in Clause C13.6.
(e)
Clearances and Creepage Distances
Electrical clearance and creepage distances shall comply with
Table C13.2.8(e) below. These clearance and creepage
distances shall also apply to terminals or connectors which
have to be insulated on site, and shall apply even though the
terminals or connectors are fully insulated, but are not intended
to apply to permanently insulated conductors.
Table C13.2.8(e) Clearance and Creepage Distances for
High Voltage Terminations
Rated
Voltage
Minimum Clearance
Between
Phases
mm
50
90
125
To Earth
kV
3.3
6.6
11
C13.2.9
mm
50
63
75
Minimum Creepage
Distances over Bushings
and Surfaces Resistant
Between
To Earth
Phases
mm
mm
59
75
90
132
125
190
Motor Termination Boxes
(a)
Construction
Cable boxes for motor power supply shall be of a type faulttested design as follows:
3.3 kV
-
Phase-insulated pressure relief post
type; and
6.6 kV, 11 kV
-
Phase-segregated
containment
pressure relief post type.
The cable box for motor line connections shall each comprise a
sealing chamber and an air insulated termination chamber
bolted together, of degree of protection to IP56. Sealing
chamber is not required for the stator winding star point
termination box.
Termination boxes shall be fabricated from mild steel of a
minimum of 6 mm thickness. Cast iron boxes shall not be
accepted.
Section C13
Page 7 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
The termination chamber shall be bolted to the motor casing
such that its sides are vertical, with high tensile steel studs and
nuts. The cable sealing chamber shall be fixed to the bottom
of the termination chamber by means of high tensile steel bolts
or studs and nuts.
The cable sealing chamber for XLPE cable shall be of the dry
type suitable for cable termination in heat shrinkable sleeving.
Sealing chamber shall be fitted with a horizontal gland plate
suitable for bottom cable entry.
The termination chamber shall have an insulated assembly and
be fitted with 3 stud terminals in insulating mouldings of
epoxy resin, glass fibre, polyester or approved similar material.
Porcelain insulators shall not be used. Cable-coupler type
terminals shall not be acceptable.
Front access detachable cover plates shall be fixed by studs
and nuts. Separate plates shall be supplied for sealing and
termination chambers.
Joints shall be machined flat and fitted with neoprene rubber
gaskets.
(b)
Termination Box Auxiliaries
Brass cable glands shall be provided for motor supply cables.
Cable lugs shall be supplied for the motor supply cable.
Unless special lugs are used in the short circuit type test, cable
lug shall be of the compression type manufactured from tinplated seamless copper tubing with single bolt palm terminal.
The cable lug shall be type-tested to IEC 61238-1:2003 with
dimensions conforming to BS 91:1998 Table 2.
C13.2.10 Markings and Data Plates
An instruction and a data plate, of stainless steel, brass or other
approved non-tarnishing metal shall be provided. The instruction
plate shall give the connections and phase rotation for the required
direction of rotation. The required direction of rotation shall be
marked on the motor.
The data plate shall be stamped with the information required by IEC
60034-1:2004. Data plates on which the above required information
is only painted will not be accepted.
The motor serial number shall be stamped with metal dies on the
driving end shaft face of the motor in addition to being stamped on
the stator.
Section C13
Page 8 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.2.11 Temperature Detectors for Motor Protection
(a)
Embedded Temperature Detectors (ETD)
Unless otherwise specified, embedded temperature detectors of
linear characteristics, e.g. thermocouple or resistance
thermometer, and complete with monitoring unit shall be
provided to offer protection against over-heating on load and
stalling of the motor. Resistance temperature detector (RTD)
shall comply with Grade 2 of IEC 60751:2008.
At least two detectors of the same characteristics suitably
embedded in the stator shall be installed, positioned at points at
which the highest temperatures are likely to occur, e.g. one
detector between coil sides within the slots, one detector under
the coils at the bottom of the slots and one detector between
the coils and slot wedges. Detector leads shall be wired to an
auxiliary cable box such that any ETD may be isolated for
testing.
The ETD monitoring unit for each motor shall have the
following features:
(b)
(i)
Alarm contacts to operate at a temperature of 120ºC
which is adjustable for individual detecting elements;
(ii)
Trip contacts to operate at a temperature of 140ºC
which is adjustable for individual detecting elements;
and
(iii)
A common digital temperature gauge and selection
buttons for reading the winding temperatures of the
individual detecting elements.
Temperature Detectors for Bearings
A temperature detector shall be installed for each bearing for
high temperature alarm and trip operation.
Unless recommended otherwise by the motor manufacturer,
alarms detectors shall operate 10C lower than the trip
detectors.
Insulated thermometer pockets shall be provided to enable easy
insertion or removal of a temperature detector. Dial type
thermometers or digital indicators, with independently
adjustable alarm and trip contacts, shall be provided at the
motor control switchboard to monitor the bearing temperatures.
Contacts shall be arranged to close for alarm indication or
tripping and shall be so arranged that the operation of the
alarm or tripping may be checked manually.
Section C13
Page 9 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(c)
Bearing Coolant Failure Detector
Where water cooled bearings are used a flow failure detector
shall be provided.
Suitable timers and relays shall be provided to obviate any
false alarm during the starting up of the motor set or on flow
surges.
C13.3
HIGH VOLTAGE - MOTOR CONTROL SWITCHBOARDS
C13.3.1
General Requirements
(a)
The motor control switchboards shall be of the single busbar,
indoor air-insulated, metalclad type formed into complete
switchboards. The high voltage switchgear and switchboards
shall comply with IEC 62271-100:2006 and IEC 62271200:2003 respectively.
(b)
The power to the high voltage motors shall be distributed from
the high voltage motor control switchboards through the motor
starters incorporated in the switchboards.
The control
switchboards shall contain a motor starter for each motor set.
(c)
The switchboards shall, but not be limited to, include the
following equipment:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Incoming circuit breaker;
Motor starter;
Overcurrent and earth leakage protective relays and
devices;
(iv) Motor temperature monitoring unit;
(v)
Motor bearing temperature gauges;
(vi) Emergency stop button;
(vii) Local controls for ancillary equipment;
(viii) Sufficient terminals and cable glands for external cable
connections;
(ix) Anti-condensation heater and associated thermostat;
(x)
Isolators, fuses and other wiring ancillaries; and
(xi) Power factor correction capacitors and controlgear.
(d)
Type test certificates shall be available for each rating of
circuit breaker and switchboard to be supplied. The results of
all type tests shall be recorded in type test reports containing
sufficient data to prove compliance with the Specification.
Type test certificates shall be issued preferably by the
Association of Short-circuit Testing Authorities (ASTA) or
N.V. tot Keuring van Elektrotechnische Materialen (KEMA).
Test certificates issued by other organisations will only be
accepted if the testing authority is established as being of equal
standard as ASTA or KEMA.
Section C13
Page 10 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(e)
General Design Information
Table C13.3.1(e) - General design information
Rated operational voltage
3.3 kV, 6.6 kV or 11 kV as
specified, 3-phase
Earthing of system
Solid
System frequency
50 Hz
Installation type
Indoor
Power supply for circuit 110 V dc ± 15%
breaker Operation, controls
and protection
Power supply for auxiliary
220V ac ± 10% 1-phase
Equipment
50 Hz
Degree of protection
IP 31
Insulation class
Class B
(f)
Standards
The switchgear and cubicles for high voltage switchboard shall
comply, in particular, with the following Standards where
appropriate:
Table C13.3.1(f) - Standards
IEC 60269-1:2009
IEC 60051:1997
IEC 60255-1:2009
IEC 60282-1:2009
IEC 60044-1:2003
IEC 60044-2:2003 &
IEC 60044-5:2004
IEC 60947-5-1:2009
IEC 60376:2005
IEC 62271-200:2003
IEC 62271-100:2006
IEC 62052-11:2003
BS 6231:2006
IEC 62271-1:2007
Section C13
Page 11 of 38
Low–voltage fuses – Part 1:
General requirements
Direct acting indicating electrical
measuring instruments and their
accessories
Electrical protective relays
Fuses for voltages exceeding
1000V a.c.
Current transformers
Voltage transformers
Control Switches
Sulphur hexafluoride for electrical
equipment
A/C metal-enclosed switchgear
and controlgear of rated voltage
above 1 kV and up to and
including 52 kV
A/C circuit breakers for rated
voltage above 1 kV
Electricity meters
PVC-insulated
cables
for
switchgear and controlgear wiring
High-voltage switchgear and
controlgear standards
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.3.2
General Construction
The switchboards shall consist of dust and vermin-proof cubicles
segregated into single or multi-tier compartments. They shall be
made from sheet steel of 2.5 mm minimum thickness.
The edges of hinged panel doors shall have deep return flanges for
rigidity and fitting of gaskets. Gaskets shall be of neoprene or rubber,
continuous without joints around corners and suitably arranged to
minimise the transmission of vibration and to prevent the entry of
dust. Hinged panel doors shall be fitted with chromium plated solid
rod type detachable hinges and chromium plated car door type
lockable handles.
Forced ventilation shall not be allowed under an ambient temperature
of 40oC. Ventilating grills, where required, shall not be located on
top of a panel.
Each switchgear unit shall comprise three main portions:
(a)
Separate chambers at the top of the switchboard housing the
busbars, current transformers and voltage transformers, and
shall be accessible through bolted covers only;
(b)
A compartment housing the relays and instruments; and
(c)
A moving portion comprising a carriage complete with circuit
breaker. The circuit breaker shall preferably be arranged for
vertical isolation from the busbars.
The circuit breaker compartment shall be accessible through a hinged
door fitted with a glazed window for viewing the circuit breaker
mechanical status indicators.
The relay and instrument compartment shall be located at the front of
each switchgear unit and shall be provided with a hinged door for
access to the internal wiring and terminals. Moulded gaskets of nonaging material shall be used to provide close sealing. The height of
the instrument panel above floor level shall not exceed 2400 mm. All
panels constituting a complete switchboard shall be of equal height.
Bolted-on rear and top covers shall be designed to gain access to
individual circuits without exposing other circuits which may be alive.
Switchboards shall not be located across floor expansion joints.
Before steelworks is painted, it shall be treated and degreased by an
approved method such as grit blasting to ISO 8501-1:1994 or
chemical pickling and an approved anti-rusting priming coat applied.
The panels shall be externally finished in semi-gloss stoved enamel or
cellulose to a color to be approved by the Architect.
Section C13
Page 12 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.3.3
Primary Busbars and Connections
Primary busbars and connections between the several pieces of
apparatus forming the equipment of a switchboard shall be of high
conductivity copper to BS EN 13601:2002. Construction, marking
and arrangement of busbars, connections and auxiliary wiring shall be
to IEC 62271-200:2003 and BS 159:2006.
Primary busbars shall be contained in a separate compartments within
the switchboard and access shall be possible only by means of boltedon sheet steel covers which shall clearly be marked 'BUSBARS'.
Busbars and busbar connections shall not be exposed when covers
and doors are opened for access to the remainder of the switchgear.
Busbars shall be readily extensible.
Each phase conductor of the primary busbars including all through
joints and tapping connections shall, in addition to being spaced at
such intervals as to give the necessary air clearance for the voltage
rating, shall be epoxy encapsulated solid copper bars. Joints shall be
insulated with moulded removable insulated covers. Taping shall not
be accepted.
Primary busbars, connections and their supports shall be capable of
carrying the short-time current associated with their short-circuit
ratings for a period of 3 seconds.
Where busbar supports use insulation of moulded or resin bonded
material, it shall have a durable anti-hygroscopic surface finish with
high anti-tracking properties.
The connections from busbars in individual units shall have a
continuous current rating of not less than that of the equipment
comprising the unit.
At all points where connections or joints occur, the busbars and
connecting pieces shall be tinned or silver-plated. The resistance of
any length of conductor containing a joint shall not be greater than
that of an equal length without a joint.
Jointing of sections of busbars shall be done by mechanical means.
Soldered, braced, welded or riveted joints shall not be used in busbars.
Jointing faces of copper conductors shall be tinned or silver plated, or
applied with other approved treatment to maintain effective
conductivity of the joint. All necessary busbar jointing bolts, nuts,
and fixing accessories shall be provided. The recommended torque
for tightening the bolts shall be stated in the maintenance manual.
Primary busbars and connections shall be clearly marked and shall be
displayed for standard phase sequence in accordance with the cable
colour coding system, i.e. L1, L2 and L3, counting from front to rear,
top to bottom, or left to right as viewed from the switching device
operating mechanism side to IEC 62271-100:2006 or IEC 62271200:2003.
Section C13
Page 13 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.3.4
Circuit Breakers
(a)
General
Unless otherwise specified, the 11 kV circuit breaker units
shall be of the vacuum type complying with IEC 62271100:2006, and the 3.3 kV or 6.6 kV circuit breaker units shall
be of the vacuum type or the sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) type
complying with IEC 62271-100:2006. They shall be of a
design with vertical isolation, horizontal withdrawal facilities.
The moving portion of each circuit breaker unit shall consist of
a three-pole circuit breaker with operating mechanism, primary
and secondary disconnecting devices, auxiliary switches,
position indicators and the necessary control wiring all
mounted on a substantial steel framework. The framework and
all metal part of the moving portion apart from current carrying
parts, shall be solidly earthed via the fixed portion. The
earthing of the moving portion shall be to the approval of the
Architect. Means of registration shall be provided so that
circuit breakers may be readily placed and secured in the
correct position in the fixed portion.
Circuit breakers of the same current and voltage rating shall be
fully interchangeable with one another. Means shall be
provided to prevent circuit breakers from being placed into
fixed housings of different ratings. This device shall also
prevent damage to isolating and other contacts.
(b)
Vacuum Circuit Breakers
For vacuum circuit breakers, means of confirming the validity
of vacuum by the occurrence of flash-over when a voltage is
applied between the vacuum interrupter contacts shall be
included in the maintenance tools. Vacuum leakage shall be
monitored to initiate an alarm and it shall not be possible to
close a circuit breaker when vacuum leakage is serious enough
to threaten safe operation of the switchgear.
Vacuum circuit breakers for motor circuits shall incorporate
surge suppressers to minimise the effects of switching transient
voltage on the motor insulation.
(c)
SF6 Circuit Breakers
A pressure switch shall be provided on the SF6 gas
compartment to monitor the gas pressure. The system of gas
monitoring shall be temperature compensated.
Section C13
Page 14 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Alarm and lockout feature shall be incorporated. Alarm signal
shall be initiated and the breaker shall be inhibited from
closing whenever the gas pressure drops below a preset level.
The circuit breaker shall be prevented from operation. Means
shall be provided in the gas compartment for the connection of
service equipment and for the topping up of the gas.
The circuit breaker shall be suitable to interrupt its rated
normal current with SF6 gas at atmospheric pressure. The
sealing of the gas compartment shall be designed so that there
is no need for the SF6 gas to be replenished within reasonable
periods. The gas leakage shall not exceed 1% per annum at
site ambient temperature.
An external contact indicator shall be provided to check the
extent of contact wear. Means shall also be provided to allow
access to the contacts of the interrupter units for necessary
inspection and maintenance. All contact assemblies shall be
replaceable. Safeguards shall be provided to prevent incorrect
replacement of contacts.
The designed electrical and mechanical life shall be at least
5,000 and 10,000 cycles respectively. The circuit breaker shall
be capable of undergoing 40 cycles of fault breaking
operations at 50% rated short-circuit breaking current or
equivalent without any need of opening up the tank for
inspection or contact replacement.
Instructions for post-fault maintenance, gas top-up contact and
seal replacement shall be clearly detailed in the manual.
(d)
Operating Mechanisms
The circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be of the
following types as specified:
-
Stored energy operation by means of a manually
charged spring with mechanical release;
-
Stored energy operation by means of a motor-charged
spring with manual and electrical release; and
-
Solenoid operated.
The mechanism shall be of the trip free type so that the circuit
breaker shall be free to open during the closing operation
immediately its tripping device operates. The circuit breaker
shall be capable of closing fully and latching against its rated
making current.
Section C13
Page 15 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Spring operated mechanisms shall have the following
additional measures:
-
If the circuit breaker is opened and the springs charged
the circuit breaker shall be able to be closed and then
tripped;
-
If the circuit breaker is closed and the springs charged
there shall be sufficient energy to trip, close and then
trip the circuit breaker;
-
Mechanical indication and an auxiliary switch for
remote electrical indication shall be provided to
indicate the state of the springs;
-
Motor charged mechanisms shall be provided with
means for charging the springs by hand, and also a
shrouded push button for releasing the springs. An
electrical release coil shall also be provided;
-
Under normal operation, motor recharging of the
operating springs shall commence immediately and
automatically upon completion of each circuit breaker
closing operation. The time required for spring
recharged shall not exceed 30 seconds; and
-
It shall not be possible to close a circuit breaker, fitted
with a motor charged closing mechanism, whilst the
spring is being charged. It shall be necessary for the
spring to be fully charged and the associated charging
mechanism fully prepared for closing before it can be
released to close the circuit breaker.
All circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be fitted with an
electrical shunt trip release coil and in addition a mechanical
hand tripping device.
The electrical tripping and closing devices shall be suitable for
operation from a 110 V d.c. battery supply and but shall
operate continuously with their coils at an ambient temperature
of 40°C, over a voltage range as follow:
-
Closing solenoid
-
Spring charging motor
-
Closing release coil
-
Shunt trip release coil
Section C13
Page 16 of 38
80 to 120%
voltage;
80 to 110%
voltage;
80 to 110%
voltage; and
50 to 120%
voltage.
of nominal
of nominal
of nominal
of nominal
EE_GS
2012 Edition
except that under battery boost charge conditions when they
shall be capable of operating at rated output and 130% of
nominal voltage for up to two hours.
All operating coils for use on the d.c. supply shall be
connected so that failure of insulation to earth does not cause
the coil to become energised.
Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with a fuse in
each pole on each unit and shall be independent of each other
on all other circuits.
Approved, positively driven mechanically operated indicating
devices shall be provided to indicate whether a circuit breaker
is in the open or closed service, isolated or earthed position.
(e)
Isolating Devices
All circuit breakers shall be connected to their associated
busbars and cables through isolating devices of an approved
design to IEC 62271-100:2006 and IEC 62271-200:2003
which shall be arranged for operation whilst the main circuit is
live but no current passing.
The design shall be such that it is impossible for the isolating
devices to be opened by forces due to current in the primary
circuit and shall be interlocked with the circuit breaker so that
it is impossible to make or break current with the isolating
device. Attempted isolation shall not trip the circuit breaker.
When isolation is effected by withdrawal of the circuit breaker,
provision shall be made for positively locating the circuit
breaker in the service, isolated and, earthing positions. Stops
shall be provided to prevent over-travel and each position shall
be clearly indicated.
Preferably a mechanical selector
mechanism shall be utilised such that when a particular
position is selected, it is impossible to locate the circuit breaker
in any other position.
Isolating devices shall incorporate self-aligning contacts, the
fixed contact of which shall be such that access can readily be
obtained for maintenance purposes.
(f)
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection
All circuit breakers other than those used for controlling the
incoming supply, shall have overcurrent tripping facilities to
give time delay overload current protection and instantaneous
short circuit interruption. The time-current characteristics shall
be submitted for inspection. Shunt trip coils operated by
power supply from the mains shall not be used.
Section C13
Page 17 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
For circuit breakers controlling the incoming supply to the
Switchboard, the circuit protection shall be provided by the
following devices:
-
Overcurrent Protection Relay;
Earth Fault Relay; and
Shunt-Trip Release.
It shall be operated by a DC supply of 110 V obtained from the
secondary batteries complete with battery charger, etc. of
suitable rating.
(g)
Safety Shutters
Metal shutter shall be provided to completely shroud fixed
isolating contacts of the circuit breaker busbar and feeder
circuits.
These shutters shall be opened and closed
automatically by the movement of the circuit breaker carriage
and shall prevent access to fixed isolating contacts when the
circuit breaker is withdrawn.
The shutters for fixed isolating contacts connected to busbars
and cables shall have independent operating mechanisms. All
shutters shall have painted labels indicating whether they are
busbar or feeder shutters.
To facilitate high voltage and current injection testing via
isolating contacts, a device shall be provided for fixing, but not
locking, shutters in the open position and for releasing them to
the closed position. This device shall be arranged to be
disengaged as soon as the circuit breaker is pushed into the
service position to ensure that the automatic features of the
shutters are restored.
Self-aligning plug and socket isolating devices shall be
provided for all auxiliary circuits. The position of these
devices shall be such that individual circuits on different units
are in the same relative physical positions.
(h)
Interlocking Gear
Interlocks shall be of the mechanical or key operated type and
shall be provided to prevent the following operations:
(i)
(ii)
A moving portion from being withdrawn from or
inserted into the isolating contacts when the circuit
breaker is closed;
The closing of the circuit breaker unless the movable
portion is correctly plugged in or isolated from the
equipment;
Section C13
Page 18 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(iii)
The movable portion being withdrawn or replaced
unless the circuit breaker is isolated and in the
appropriate position;
(iv)
The movable portion being plugged in without the
circuit breaker tank in position;
(v)
The circuit breaker being closed in the 'SERVICE' or
'EARTH' location without completing the appropriate
auxiliary circuits; and
(vi)
To apply an earth to busbars until all circuit breakers
which can feed the busbars, are locked open.
When key interlocking is employed, any attempt to remove the
trapped key shall not cause closing or opening of the
associated equipment.
Where a circuit breaker is fitted with means for mechanical or
electrical operation, interlocks shall be provided so that it is
impossible for the mechanical and electrical devices to operate
simultaneously.
The earthing devices shall be provided with interlocks to
ensure correct operation in conjunction with the associated
circuit breaker.
In the case of circuit breaker earthing, the electrical tripping of
the circuit breaker shall be rendered inoperative during
earthing operations both when closing and when closed in the
earthed position. It shall not be possible to return to the
service position and close the circuit breaker until the electrical
tripping is again operative.
A mechanical key interlocking system shall be provided
whereby it is not possible to apply an earth to busbars until all
circuit breakers which can feed the busbar are locked open. In
addition it shall not be possible to earth busbars and cable
circuit at the same time by means of the same circuit breaker.
In addition to safety interlocking which is integral to a circuit
breaker unit to prevent wrong or dangerous operation of the
unit itself, further interlocking shall be provided.
In general, interlocking shall be electrically isolating the
closing contactor coil circuit of a circuit breaker being
interrupted unless the necessary conditions for closure are met.
The interlocking shall be designed on a system wide basis to
ensure that subsequent operation of a non-interlocked circuit
breaker does not result in a set of conditions that would
contradict the original 'permission to close'.
Section C13
Page 19 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(i)
Interlocking Circuits
Where interlocking over a distance is required, two
independent criteria shall be used, such as absence of a voltage
and remote feeding circuit breaker open. Indication of the
remote condition shall be by single purpose circuit, care being
taken that the conductors used are adequately screened and
shielded to minimise both transverse and longitudinal voltages
resulting from electromagnetic induction and differences in
earth potential. The cable containing cores for interlocking
circuits shall be separate from all other multi-core cables.
All interlocking circuits shall be of the 'go and return' design,
and in no instance will interconnection of batteries in different
locations be permitted.
Where a circuit breaker is capable of manual operation in
addition to electrical operation, except where such manual
operation is possible only for maintenance purposes, keyoperated interlocking shall additionally be provided, operative
only in the instance of manual operation.
Electrical interlocks on withdrawable equipment shall be
arranged so that when withdrawn, the equipment operation will
be independent of the remote interlocking contacts. In addition,
the interlocks shall be such that, when the equipment is
withdrawn, the interlocking of associated apparatus is correct,
and operation of the equipment in the withdrawn position will
have no effect.
(j)
Locking Facilities
Locking facilities shall be provided so that the circuit breaker
can be prevented from being closed when it is open and from
being manually tripped when it is closed. These facilities shall
not require the fitting of any loose components prior to the
insertion of the single padlock required. It shall not be
possible, without the aid of tools, to gain access to the tripping
toggle or any part of the mechanisms which would permit
defeat of the locking of the manual trip. It shall not be possible
to lock mechanically the trip mechanisms so as to render
inoperative the electrical tripping.
In addition, the following padlocking facilities shall also be
included:
(i)
Selector mechanisms on circuit breaker isolated and
service positions; and
(ii)
Safety shutters on primary contact isolating orifices in
closed position.
Section C13
Page 20 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
All switchboard access doors, other than those which are
interlocked with a switching device, shall be provided with an
integral type locking facility.
C13.3.5
Earthing and Earthing Devices
All metal parts other than those forming part of an electrical circuit
shall be connected in an approved manner to a hard drawn, high
conductivity copper earth busbar which shall run the full length of,
and be bolted to, the main frame of the switchboard. At the position
where joints occur, the earth busbar shall be tinned. The earth busbar
shall be rated to carry currents equal in magnitude and duration to that
associated with the short circuit rating of the equipment.
The design and construction of the equipment shall be such that all
metal parts, other than the current carrying parts, or the withdrawal
equipment are earthed before the primary connections are made.
Metal cases supports and bases of all instruments, relays or other
associated components mounted on the switchgear shall be connected
to the earth busbar by conductors of not less than 2.5 mm2 crosssectional area.
When components are provided for mounting separately each shall be
provided with an earthing terminal of not less than 30 mm2 cross
sectional area.
Earthing devices shall be provided on all circuit breaker units
whereby the circuit can be earthed. With the circuit earthed, shutters
over unearthed fixed main isolating contacts shall be closed.
Busbar earthing facilities shall be provided on selected circuits of
each separate switchboard, these circuits shall be agreed with the
Architect.
Circuit and busbar earthing shall be of the transfer circuit breaker
arrangement and it is preferred that the facilities shall be integral in
the design and construction of the switchgear. Earthing devices for
fitting to the circuit breakers are acceptable but they shall be supplied
in a separate container together with a set of instructions for fitting
and operating the equipment. Designs effecting earthing by means of
a separate fault-making switch are not acceptable.
Feeder and busbar earthing devices shall have a short circuit rating
equal to that of their associated circuit breaker.
Padlocking facilities shall be provided for the purpose of preventing
inadvertent earthing.
Labeling shall be provided to show whether the equipment is
prepared for 'SERVICE', 'BUSBAR EARTH' or 'CIRCUIT EARTH'.
Such indication shall be visible from the front of the equipment at all
times. Duplicate labels in Chinese and English shall be provided.
Section C13
Page 21 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.3.6
Testing Facilities
All circuit breaker units shall be provided with facilities to enable
applied high voltage tests to be carried out.
Provision shall also be made for temporarily completing the auxiliary
circuits when the circuit breaker is isolated and if applicable,
withdrawn to enable the functioning of the circuit breaker to be tested.
When current transformers and protective relays are fitted, facilities
shall be provided for primary and secondary injection tests to be
carried out.
These facilities shall preferably be such that wires and connections
need not be disconnected for the tests to be carried out.
C13.3.7
Mechanical Indication
Indication shall be provided to clearly indicate whether a circuit
breaker is in the open or closed service, isolated or earthed position.
Positively driven mechanical indicating devices shall be provided on
all equipment to indicate the following where applicable:
C13.3.8
(a)
Circuit breaker 'OPEN' or 'CLOSED'; and
(b)
Circuit breaker 'SPRING CHARGED' or 'SPRING FREE'
Auxiliary Switches
Auxiliary switches of the double-break type and positively driven in
both directions shall be provided on all circuit breakers and isolators
for indication, control and interlocking.
Auxiliary switches shall be strong, have a positive wiping action
when closing and shall be mounted in an accessible position clear of
operating mechanisms.
They shall be designed to make, break and carry, without undue
heating, the current of their associated circuit. Auxiliary switches
shall be rated for 10A operational current, and shall be capable of
breaking at least 2A at 110 V d.c.
No less than eight spare auxiliary switches shall be provided with
each circuit breaker and no less than four with each isolator. Each
spare contact shall be readily changeable from normally open to
normally closed and vice versa. All auxiliary switches shall be wired
up (via secondary disconnecting devices if on withdrawable
equipment) to a terminal board on the front of the fixed portion,
arranged in the same sequence for each individual unit of the same
type.
Section C13
Page 22 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.3.9
Anti-Condensation Heaters
Anti-condensation heaters of an approved type shall be provided
inside each cubicle. They shall be thermostatically controlled and
shall operate at black heat and shall be shrouded and located so as not
to cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment. The heaters
shall be controlled from a double-pole miniature circuit breaker, with
a lamp to indicate 'cubicle heaters on'. The circuit breaker and
indicating lamp shall be mounted externally at one end of the
switchboard. The heaters shall operate from 220 V 50 Hz single
phase a.c. supply.
C13.3.10 Current Transformers
Current transformers shall comply with IEC 60044-1:2003 and shall
be suitable for the operation of protective gear, instruments and/or
metering equipment.
Current transformers shall be of the epoxy resin encapsulated type
and shall have necessary output to operate the connected protective
devices or instruments.
The primary windings shall have a short time current rating not less
than that specified for the associated circuit breaker. The rated
secondary current shall be 1A or 5A.
Protection current transformers shall be of Class 10P accuracy or
better. The product of rated accuracy limit factor and rated output of
the protection current transformer shall not be less than 10 times the
rated burden of the trip circuit including the relays, connection leads
and overcurrent release where applicable.
Measurement current transformers shall be suitably rated and have
accuracy Class of 3 for use with ammeters, and Class 1 for other
types of meters.
The polarity of the primary and secondary windings of each current
transformer shall be clearly indicated and in addition labels shall be
fitted in a readily accessible position to indicate the ratio, class and
duty of each transformer. The current transformer particulars as
specified in IEC 60044-1:2003 shall be given on an accessible plate
mounted external to the current transformer.
All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and
taken by means of separate insulated leads to a terminal board
mounted in an accessible position. Where multi-ratio secondary
windings are required, a label shall be provided at the secondary
terminal board clearly indicating the connections required for each
ratio.
Section C13
Page 23 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Current transformers for indication or metering shall have their
secondary windings earthed at the switchgear. The secondary
windings of current transformer for protection shall be earthed at the
panel which accommodates the associated relay.
The earth
connection shall be made via a removable link.
Each current transformer shall have a certified maximum rating of at
least 1.2 times the rated current.
C13.3.11 Voltage Transformers
Voltage transformers shall comply with IEC 60044-2:2003 and IEC
60044-5:2004 and suitable for the operation of protective gear,
voltage regulating equipment, instruments and/or metering. All
voltage transformers shall be of the dry type with epoxy
encapsulation. The rated output per phase at a power factor 0.8
lagging shall not be less than 100 VA. The rated voltage factor shall
be 1.2. They shall have a measuring accuracy class of 0.5 and a
protective accuracy class of 3P.
Voltage transformers shall be capable of carrying continuously
without injurious heating 50% burden above their rated burden. The
rated primary voltage of voltage transformers shall be the appropriate
nominal system voltage.
Unless specified otherwise, voltage transformer primary windings
shall be connected to the circuit side of the current transformers
remote from the busbars so as to be included in the protected zone of
the associated feeder.
The primary of a single phase voltage transformer shall be connected
across L1 and L2 or A and B phases, unless otherwise approved. L1
and L2 phases shall be used in a synchronising scheme, unless
otherwise approved.
Voltage transformers shall be capable of being connected and
disconnected from the equipment whilst in service. Facilities for
padlocking in the service position shall be provided. Where isolating
is carried out by withdrawal, a set of shutters, capable of being
padlocked, shall be provided to cover the stationary isolating contacts.
The shutters shall operate automatically by positive driven drive
actuated by movement of the voltage transformer assembly.
The primary windings shall preferably be connected via renewable
fuses with current limiting features which shall be readily accessible
with the circuit alive and the secondary windings through fuses and
links, labelled to indicate their function and phase color, to the
appropriate circuits.
Section C13
Page 24 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
For single phase voltage transformers, both ends of each secondarywinding shall be brought out to insulated links. For three phase
voltage transformers, each phase end shall be brought out to fuses,
and the neutral of the secondary winding shall be brought out to
insulated links. The fuses and links shall then be brought out to
insulated terminals located in a terminal box.
The primary and secondary fuses shall be capable of being removed
and replaced when the circuit breaker is closed in the service position.
Isolation of the primary fuses for this purpose shall be carried out,
preferably by withdrawing the entire voltage transformer assembly.
Additionally, it shall be possible to remove secondary fuses whilst the
voltage transformer is padlocked in the service location.
For single phase units, separate earth links for each secondary
winding shall be provided. Each of the neutral leads shall be
connected together at a single point and earthed as close as possible to
the voltage transformer.
Voltage transformer secondary windings shall be earthed at the
switchgear through a link which can be removed for insulation testing.
Voltage transformers having the neutral point of their higher voltage
windings earthed, shall be designed so that saturation of the core and
dangerous over-heating arising therefrom shall not occur when 1.73
times normal voltage is applied to each winding for a period of 15
minutes.
Secondary circuits of voltage transformer shall not be parallel.
The secondary voltage connections to metering circuits shall be
broken automatically when the circuit breaker is opened.
C13.3.12 Cables Boxes
Cable boxes shall be suitable for terminating the cables directly into
the switchgear. The dimensions and terminal arrangements, together
with details of air insulated heat-shrinkable elastomeric PCP cable
termination, shall be submitted for approval by the Architect before
manufacture.
All cable boxes shall be suitable for use with air insulated heatshrinkable elastomeric PCP cable termination and shall be designed
with joint faces which will ensure leak-free operation and exclude the
entry of air, dust or moisture. The internal surfaces of cable boxes
shall be cleaned of all scale and rust and after cleaning and priming,
shall be finished with a hard setting paint compatible with the filling
medium.
Section C13
Page 25 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Where cable boxes are provided for three-core cables, the sweating
sockets on the two outer phases shall be inclined towards the centre to
minimise bending of the cable cores. Where there is more than one
core per phase, the socket block shall be so designed as to minimise
bending of the cable cores, and spacer clips shall be incorporated.
All cable terminals shall be of adequate size to ensure no overheating
takes place at rated current.
The insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric and
climatic conditions, ozone, acids or alkalis, dust deposits or rapid
temperature changes likely to arise when operating in the specified
site conditions and shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning.
C13.3.13 Protective Relays
Unless otherwise specified, Clause C5.26 shall apply.
C13.3.14 Control and Timer Relays
Control and timer relays shall be of the plug-in type, rack mounted,
provided with cable connection terminal and anchored by quick
fastening vibration-proof devices. Timer shall be of the solid-state
type with proven reliability.
C13.3.15 Indicating Instruments
Unless otherwise specified, Clause C5.26 shall apply.
C13.3.16 Labels and Warning Notice
Laminated 'Traffolyte' or similar labels of ample size shall be
provided for each of the units on the switchboards engraved in
English and Chinese characters. Labels shall be fixed by screws on
the non-detachable parts of the panel at a height of 1350 mm or above.
During the progress of manufacture of the switchboard, a schedule of
labels shall be submitted for approval by the Architect before
engraving is carried out.
'Danger - H.V. Live Terminals/ 危險 – 高壓帶電電極' warning labels
shall be attached to the access covers of the air insulated cable boxes,
CT chambers and busbar, and shall be colored red with white lettering
in both English and Chinese characters.
In addition to automatic screening shutters and barriers, warning
labels shall also be provided for all live parts, such as test terminal
blocks.
Section C13
Page 26 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.3.17 Ancillary Equipment
Battery charger/batteries system shall be provided for the proper
functions of the switchgear in the switchboard.
The switchboard shall be supplied complete with one hydraulic
operated handling device suitable for handling all sizes of air circuit
breakers in the switchboard, and one set of portable earthing
equipment for each main incoming air circuit breaker. Portable
earthing leads will not be accepted as an alternative to the earthing
equipment.
The switchboard shall be supplied complete with all operating
handles, jigs, etc. required for the normal charging, closing, opening,
racking in and out operations of all circuit breakers of the
switchboard and shall be properly fixed in a neat manner on a board
with brass hooks inside the main switch room where the switchboard
is installed.
The switchboard shall be provided with two rubber mats of ribbed
surface, complying to BS 921:1976, laid in front of and at the rear of
the switchboard. The rubber mats shall be continuous sheets of 10
mm minimum thickness, each of the same length as the cubicle
switchboard and a minimum width of not less than 1000 mm or the
width of the space between the front or back of the switchboard to the
adjacent wall.
C13.3.18 Operation Diagram
For high voltage switchboards with interlocking facility, a brief
operation instruction of the switchboards together with a detailed
schematic wiring diagram, listing out all the relevant switching steps
and interlocks for commissioning/decommissioning of part or whole
of the high voltage switchboards shall be provided in a framed,
transparent perspex sheet mounted adjacent to the switchboards.
Section C13
Page 27 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.4
HIGH VOLTAGE - AUTO-TRANSFORMERS
C13.4.1
General
The auto-transformers for the auto-transformer motor starters shall
comply with the following specific requirements:
(a)
Type
- Indoor and floor mounted type for no
breaking starting of squirrel cage 3-phase
induction motor;
(b)
Standard
- IEC 60076:2000;
(c)
System Voltage
- 3.3 kV, 6.6kV or 11kV as specified;
(d)
Frequency
- 50 Hz;
(e)
Connections
- Auto-star for auto-transformer starting;
(f)
Insulation Level - 45 kV peak impulse voltage for 1/50
microsecond;
(g)
Cooling
- Natural air cooled; and
(h)
Tappings
- Off load tap changers with 60%, 75% and
85% of the line voltage to limit the
starting current to 2.5 times of full load
current.
The auto-transformers shall be mounted on wheels to facilitate
positioning and removal. The transformers shall be externally
finished in semi-gloss stoved enamel or cellulose.
C13.4.2
Rating
The rating of the auto-transformer shall be designed to suit the
starting duty of the motor. Motor starting time shall be taken as 10
seconds at 75% or higher taps and 15 seconds at 60% or lower taps
unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification.
C13.4.3
Insulation
(a)
Insulation Medium
Unless otherwise specified, for 11 kV nominal voltage, oilfilled transformers are preferred. Epoxy resin encapsulated
auto-transformers shall be preferred for nominal voltage up to
6.6 kV.
Section C13
Page 28 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
Class
Oil immersed transformer windings shall be designed for Class
E insulation for Class E operation.
Epoxy resin encapsulated transformer windings and live parts
in air shall be designed for Class F or Class B insulation for
Class B operation.
(c)
Coordination of equipment insulation
Table C13.4.3(c) - Coordination of Equipment Insulation
Rated system voltage
Nominal system voltage
Minimum impulse withstand
voltage (1.2kV per microsecond)
Minimum
power
frequency
withstand voltage (1 min)
C13.4.4
12kV
11kV
75kV
7.2kV
6.6kV
60kV
3.6kV
3.3kV
40kV
28kV
20kV
10kV
Transformer Windings
All windings, terminals and connections shall be of copper. To
protect windings against high humidity, the core shall be protected by
a resin encasement which shall be resistant to moisture but elastic
enough to withstand the expansion and contraction caused by the
loading cycles.
Impregnation shall be carried out under vacuum to obviate the
presence of any air bubbles. Means shall be employed to eliminate
any partial discharge or corona that may occur after a prolonged
service period. For epoxy resin transformers, suitable fillers shall be
mixed in the epoxy resin to provide high mechanical strength and
resilience to shock.
Natural ventilation shall be used for attaining the rated output and air
channels through winding spools to attain sufficient cooling shall not
be accepted.
Internal electrical connections shall be brazed and/or fixed with bolts
and nuts. Soldered or mechanically crimped joints shall not be
accepted.
Core bolts where used shall be insulated from the respective magnetic
circuits with material capable of withstanding a test voltage of 2000V
r.m.s. for one minute.
Section C13
Page 29 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.4.5
Tap Changers
The off-load tap changers shall be accessible through the transformer
top cover plate by means of copper links. The transformer top cover
plate shall be fitted with an electrical and mechanical interlock
designed to prevent access to the transformer tapping links until the
auto-transformer starter circuit breakers are open and the 'START'
and 'RUN' circuit breakers are in the 'CIRCUIT EARTH' position.
C13.4.6
Internal Earthing of Transformers
Metal parts of the transformer with the exception of individual core
laminations, core bolts and associated individual clamping plates
shall be maintained at some fixed potential. Where metal parts of the
core are connected to earth this shall be done by way of accessible
links to allow the insulation between core and earth to be tested. This
insulation shall be able to withstand a test voltage of 2000V r.m.s.
The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one
point only through a removable link placed in an accessible position
beneath an inspection opening in the tank cover. The connection to
the link shall be on the same side of the core as the main earth
connection.
Where coil clamping rings are of metal at earth potential, each ring
shall be connected to the adjacent core clamping structure.
C13.4.7
Enclosure
(a)
General
The enclosure shall be of rigid construction and shall not be
damaged at short-circuit faults. Exterior corners and edges
shall be rounded to give a smooth overall appearance. The
design of the enclosure shall ensure adequate ventilation and
air circulation without forced cooling or additional electric fans.
The enclosure shall be designed so as to allow the complete
auto transformer in the tank and filled with oil, to be lifted by
crane or jacks, transported by road, rail or water, skidding in
any direction on plates or rails without over-straining any
joints and without causing subsequent leakage of oil.
The tank or enclosure exterior shall be fitted with a M12 stud
at the bottom of the unit suitable for termination of a copper
earthing bar of 32 x 3 mm.
Section C13
Page 30 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(b)
Enclosures for Epoxy Resin Cast Auto-transformers Additional Requirements
Unless otherwise specified, a rectangular splash-proof
enclosure of degree of protection to IEC 60529:2009, IP32
shall be provided covering the entire unit. The enclosure shall
be sheet steel of 2 mm minimum thickness and suitably braced
to form a rigid structure. The enclosure shall be bolted to the
transformer frame and shall be easily removable when required.
Access panels and openings shall be provided to facilitate
routine inspection and maintenance, and changing of tap
position without the need for dismantling the enclosure
completely.
(c)
Enclosure (Tank) for Oil-filled Auto-transformers
(i)
General
A rectangular totally enclosed tank to IP65 shall be
supplied covering the entire unit.
Oil tank shall be fabricated from weldable structural
steel to BS EN 10025:2004, BS EN 10029:1991 or
products having equivalent functions or performance,
with all welding to BS EN 1011-1:2004 or equivalent.
Fabricated under bases shall be provided with skids and
detachable rollers. The exterior of the tank shall be of
plain sheet steel without stiffeners. Tank stiffeners
shall be continuously welded.
Wherever possible the transformer tank and its
accessories shall be designed without pockets wherein
gas may collect. All joints of the oil tank other than
those which may have to be broken shall be welded.
Caulking of defective welded joints will not be
permitted. All joint faces shall be designed to prevent
the ingress of water or leakage of oil with a minimum
of gasket surface exposed to the action of oil or air.
Unless otherwise approved, oil resisting synthetic
rubber gaskets shall not be used, except where the
synthetic rubber is used as a bonding medium for cork
or similar material.
(ii)
Pressure Relief Device
Each tank shall be fitted with an approved pressure
relief device designed to protect the tank from damage
and control the explosion of oil under internal fault
conditions. The device shall operate at a static pressure
of less than the hydraulic test pressure for transformer
tank but not exceeding 70 kPa. Means shall be
provided to prevent the ingress of moisture and dust.
Section C13
Page 31 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Unless otherwise approved the relief device shall be
mounted on the main tank and, if on the cover, shall be
fitted with a skirt projecting 25 mm inside the tank to
prevent gas accumulation. If a diaphragm is used, it
shall be of approved design and material and situated
above the maximum oil level.
(iii)
Tank Cover
Each tank cover shall be of adequate strength, and shall
not distort when lifted. Inspection openings shall be
provided as necessary for changing tap position. Each
inspection opening shall not be less than 450 mm by
360 mm and shall not weigh more than 25 kg. The tank
cover shall be provided with lifting welded eyes. The
bolt holds in all cover plates shall be provided with
washers which will prevent the collection of moisture
in the bolt hole.
The tank cover shall be fitted with pockets for a
thermometer and for the bulbs of the winding or oil
temperature indicators. Protection shall be provided
where necessary for each capillary tube.
The
thermometer pocket shall be fitted with a captive
screwed cap to prevent the ingress of water. The
pockets shall be located in the position of maximum oil
temperatures at full rated power and it shall be possible
to remove the instrument bulbs without lowering the oil
level in the tank.
(iv)
Transformer Auxiliaries
Each transformer shall be fitted with:
-
An oil level indicator of prismatic glass visible
from ground level and indicating the oil levels
over the range specified. The oil level indicator
shall be marked to indicate the correct oil level
with the oil at a temperature of 15ºC, 50ºC and
90ºC; and
-
An oil seal silica gel breather or other approved
type device complete with dehydrating agent,
indicator and sight glass. Breathers shall be at
least one size larger than the size that would be
fitted in temperate climate and shall be mounted
approximately 1000 mm above ground level.
Section C13
Page 32 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
(v)
Transformer Oil
The transformer oil shall comply with IEC 60296:2003.
The first filling of transformer oil shall be supplied with
the Contract. All oil that may be used for works
processing or testing shall be compatible with the oil to
be used on site.
(vi)
Valves and Flanges
All valves up to and including 100 mm shall be of
gunmetal. Larger valves may be gunmetal or may have
cast iron bodies with gunmetal fittings. They shall be
of the full way type with internal screw and shall be
opened by turning counter-clockwise when facing the
handwheel. Butterfly type valves shall only be used for
isolation of radiator.
Means shall be provided for padlocking the valve in the
open and closed positions.
Every valve shall be provided with a mechanical
indicator to show clearly the position of the valve.
All valves shall be provided with flanges having
machined faces.
Each transformer shall be fitted with the following:
-
One 50 mm filter valve at the top and one 50
mm combined filter and drain at the bottom of
the tank mounted diagonally opposite to each
other for connection to oil circulating equipment;
-
A robust sampling device at the top and bottom
of the main tank. The sampling devices shall
not be fitted on the filter valves specified above;
-
A drain valve for oil tank; and
-
Flanged type air release plugs as necessary.
All valves opening to atmosphere shall be fitted with
blank flanges.
Section C13
Page 33 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.4.8
Finishes
(a)
Surface Preparation
Before untreated steelwork is painted it shall be thoroughly
cleaned by an approved method such as grit blasting to ISO
8501:1994 or chemical pickling and an approved anti-rusting
priming coat applied. Treated steelwork shall be suitably
cleaned and degreased.
(b)
Painting - External Surfaces
Panel surfaces shall have not less than one primer coat, two
stoved undercoats and two top stoved coats of paint.
Undercoats shall be epoxy based and easily distinguishable in
shade or color from the priming and finishing coats. The two
final coats shall have a total minimum dry film thickness of
0.075 mm with each coat separately stoved in an air-circulating
oven. The final paint coating shall be of semi-matt finish and
the color shall be approved by the Architect.
Oil tanks and other accessories shall be coated with air-drying
paints by cold airless spray to a minimum total dry film
thickness of 0.127 mm.
Bright/gloss parts shall be protected with a coat of readily
removable composition which shall be effective in preventing
corrosion during transport and storage.
(c)
Painting - Internal Surfaces
In oil tank, interior surfaces shall be painted in an identical
manner to the external surface with air-drying oil and
petrol-proof paint. The finishing color of oil tank shall be red.
For epoxy resin transformer enclosures, the interior surfaces
shall be finished in white with anti-condensation paint.
Section C13
Page 34 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.4.9
Rating Plates and Diagrams
The following plates shall be fixed to the transformer enclosure or
tank at 1700 mm average height above ground level:
(a)
A rating plate bearing the data specified in IEC 60076:2000
and the duty rating;
(b)
A diagram plate showing the internal connections and in
addition a plan view of the transformer giving the correct
physical relationship of the terminals. The percentage tapping
shall be indicated for each tap;
(c)
For oil immersed transformers, a plate showing the location
and function of all valves and air release cocks or plugs. This
plate shall also warn operators to refer to the Maintenance
instructions before applying vacuum treatment; and
(d)
Identification plates for the purpose of each removable
inspection cover e.g. tap changer access etc.
The above plates shall be of stainless steel or brass.
External plates and labels shall be fixed by phosphor bronze, stainless
steel or brass screws with 3 mm thick fibre washers at the front and
back of the fixing holes. Tapping holes in transformer tank walls for
fixing plates will not be accepted.
C13.4.10 Cable Boxes
The auto-transformer cable boxes complete with cable glands shall be
suitable for the termination of high voltage power cables.
Cable boxes shall be air insulated and designed to suit the termination
of high voltage cables.
Cable boxes shall be designed to accommodate all cable joint fittings
or sealing-ends required by the manufacturers of the cables, including
stress cones or other approved means for grading the voltage stress on
the terminal insulation of cables.
Provision for earthing the body of each cable box shall be made.
Cable boxes designed for three-core cable shall have seating sockets
on the two outer phases inclined towards the centre to minimise
bending of the cable cores. Where there is more than one core of
cable per phase, the socket block shall be so designed as to minimise
bending of the cable cores.
Section C13
Page 35 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.5
HIGH VOLTAGE - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
The power factor correction capacitors for the high voltage chiller motors shall
improve the overall power factor of the chiller motors to 0.95 lagging at rated
output power. The kVAr rating of the capacitor shall not exceed 85% of the no
load magnetising kVAr of the chiller motor.
Specific requirements of the power factor correction capacitors shall be as
follows:
(a)
Type
- Low loss dielectric type, indoor and enclosed in
floor-mounted cubicles;
(b)
Rated Capacity
- To suit the power factor to be improved;
(c)
System voltage
- 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV or 11 kV as specified;
(d)
Frequency
- 50 Hz;
(e)
Connection
- Delta-connected single-phase units;
(f)
Insulation Level
- 45 kV peak impulse
microseconds; and
(g)
Protection
- 3 line connected high voltage HBC fuses to IEC
60282-1:2005 with striker pin.
voltage
for
1/50
The output ratings of the power factor correction capacitor may require
modification subject to the no-load magnetising kVAr rating of the high voltage
motors to be driven.
The power factor correction capacitors shall be provided with combined jacking
and haulage lugs to facilitate positioning. The capacitors shall be externally
finished where applicable in semi-gloss stoved enamel or cellulose.
The power factor correction capacitors shall be protected by high voltage high
breaking capacity fuses with striker pins to IEC 60282-1:2005. The striker pin
shall be arranged to operate an auxiliary contact to trip the starter circuit
breakers.
The power factor correction capacitor cable box complete with cable glands
shall be suitable for the termination of the high voltage power cables.
Section C13
Page 36 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C13.6
HIGH VOLTAGE - POWER CABLES
C13.6.1
General
All high voltage power cables shall be insulated with cross-linked
polyethylene. The 3.3 kV power cables shall comply with IEC 605021:2004 whereas 6.6 kV and up to 33 kV power cables shall comply
with IEC 60502-2:2005. Where specified, cables shall be wire
armoured and finished overall with a continuous outer sheathing of
polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
All cables shall be designed for operation on a system earthed either
direct or through resistance or reactance at one or more neutral points.
No straight through cable joints shall be installed without the
approval of the Architect.
For identification the rating of the cable shall be impressed into the
outer insulation at regular intervals.
C13.6.2
Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Cables
High voltage cross-linked polyethylene insulated (XLPE) cables shall
be of the 1900/3300 V grade for 3.3 kV power cables, 3800/6600 V
grade for 6.6 kV power cables and 6350/11000 V grade for 11 kV
power cables.
Multi-core cables shall comprise stranded annealed copper
conductors. The insulation shall consist of cross-linked polyethylene
applied by extrusion, bedded in a minimum of two layers of suitable
tape. Armouring, where specified, shall comprise a single layer of
galvanised steel wires or aluminium strip and the cable shall be
served with an extruded layer of PVC.
Single core cables shall comprise circular copper conductors and
where armoured shall comprise non-magnetic aluminium wire or strip.
C13.6.3
Conductors
Copper conductors shall be stranded and shall consist of plain
annealed copper.
Before stranding, the conductors shall be
approximately circular in section, smooth, uniform in quality, free
from scale, inequalities, spills, splits and other defects. There shall be
no joints in the wire except those made in the base rod or wire before
final drawing.
The term 'annealed' signifies that the wire before stranding is capable
of at least 15 percent elongation without fracture, the test piece being
not less than 150 mm and not more than 300 mm long.
The stranded conductor shall be clean and reasonably uniform in size
and shape and its surface shall be free from sharp edges.
Section C13
Page 37 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
In the formation of shaped conductors containing less than 19 strands
the same number of strands shall be used as for a circular conductor
of equivalent area.
For conductors having 19 strands or more the number of strands shall
be the same as in a circular conductor of equivalent area, subject to a
maximum permissible variation of plus or minus one strand. All the
strands in any given shaped conductor shall be of the same nominal
size.
C13.6.4
Cable Terminations
Cables shall be terminated in approved non-ferrous mechanical
glands which comply with BS EN 50262:2005 complete with
compression devices for securing the cable sheath. An armour clamp
may be required for bonding to metal sheaths. Where the cables are
installed in entirely dry situations, the gland shall be designed with a
compressible gasket or packing for securing the inner sheath and
means of anchoring the armour. For cables installed wholly or partly
in outdoor or damp conditions compressible sealing and clamping
features shall be provided for securing the inner and outer sheaths and
also the armour; barriers shall be incorporated to prevent the ingress
of moisture.
Section C13
Page 38 of 38
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION C14
COMPUTERIZED LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
C14.1
GENERAL
(a) Where specified in the Particular Specification or shown on the Drawings,
Computerized Lighting Management (CLM) System shall be provided for
overall control of lighting system.
(b) All materials and equipment of the CLM system shall be products of
manufacturer certified under ISO 9001:2008 quality assurance standard.
The CLM system shall be of proprietary product and have well-proven
relevant local job references. For new CLM system which has not been
installed before, demonstration the performance of the CLM system shall
be provided to the satisfaction of the Architect before approval of it.
C14.2
SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
(a) The CLM system shall consist of servers, user/operator workstations,
router/gateway and/or interfacing unit, controllers, lighting control modules,
field devices and distributed intelligence communication bus network that
enables complete control, monitoring & configuration of the lighting
system from the operator workstation. The user/operator workstation shall
comprise of the followings:
-
Keyboard and mouse;
minimum 21” LED LCD monitor display; and
A3 laser/ink printer capable of handling continuous paper.
(b) Field devices shall include, but not limited to, local lighting control
switches, dimming control switches, lighting scene controller,
infrared/radio frequency receiver/transmitter, occupancy sensors, photocell
and daylight sensors, venetian blind switches, air conditioning sensors and
other devices as specified.
(c) The CLM system shall be fully addressable and designed in a total system
integrated approach, allowing the connected field devices be independently
supervised by the intelligent lighting control modules.
(d) The CLM system and equipment including the lightings shall be designed
in high degree of flexibility in ease of extension, modification, adaptability
and re-programming of the lighting installation by the building operator to
cater for future alteration and rezoning/re-grouping of lighting control.
(e) The CLM system shall be a widely distributed intelligent system, any
single point failure shall not impair the operation of the whole system.
(f)
The CLM system shall be designed in decentralized and non-master slave
configuration having addressable lighting control modules widely
distributed throughout the areas as specified for connection of lighting
Section C14
Page 1 of 3
EE_GS
2012 Edition
fittings, lighting circuits and various field devices to suit the lighting
control requirements. With the distribution of lighting control modules
amid the lighting fittings and/or lighting circuits, the control of its
connected lighting fittings and field devices shall be effectively performed
under direct supervision of the lighting control module.
(g) The CLM system shall be capable of interfacing with the Central Control
and Monitoring System (CCMS) via high-level interface such that the
CCMS is allowed under password-authorization to retrieve various lighting
control parameters without direct access to the workstation of the CLM
system.
(h) Where specified, the CLM system shall be capable of interfacing with the
control of air-conditioning units, such as variable air volume box or fan coil
unit, etc. in such a manner that the aforesaid air-conditioning units can be
automatically switched Off/On or reset temperature set-point when “No
occupant” is detected by the occupancy sensor or the local lighting switch
is switched off.
(i)
The CLM system design shall be provided with maintenance by-pass or
other similar feature so that the lighting fittings can be locally isolated for
“ON” switching in case of ad-hoc need, emergency or equipment failure.
(j)
The lighting management software shall be resided in the server of the
operator workstation so that the building management can centrally gain
control of the lighting management, including viewing of operation status
of the connected lighting. The software shall also include simple to use
diagnostics for checking the correct operation of the system, enabling the
user, through multi-level password protection, to access Graphical User
Interfaces (GUI‟s) for the following settings:
-
to program “Time Events” of individual or group of lighting fittings;
to program “Holiday Events” of individual or group of lighting fittings;
(k) Graphic display of geographical locations of lighting fittings and field
devices.
(l)
Where specified for situation requiring high flexibility of grouping/zoning
of lighting control, the lighting control system shall be of digital
addressable type. This lighting control system interface shall employ
digital communication protocol for interchange of data information
amongst its connected field devices and electronic ballast. Full system
compatibility with electronic ballast in conformance with IEC 60929 shall
be designed. The digital addressable lighting control system shall have 64
individual addresses, 16 group addresses and 16 scene light value settings.
For large scale of lighting control installation where the number of address
point exceeds 64 nos., the digital addressable lighting control system shall
work in conjunction with the CLM system platform specified in this section.
Section C14
Page 2 of 3
EE_GS
2012 Edition
C14.3
COMMUNICATION BUS
(a) The communication bus shall be of Cat 5 unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
cable or similar to be approved by the Architect. The communication bus
shall be of low smoke zero halogen type. Where the CLM system of digital
addressable type is specified, the communication bus shall be of the type as
recommended by the system manufacturer.
(b) The communication bus shall be „free topology‟ structure, allowing
connections looping from one field device to another or branching at any
point over the communication bus. New field devices shall be allowable to
be added freely over the communication bus without the need of system reconfiguration.
C14.4
LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES
(a) Lighting control module shall be microprocessor based having intelligence
and be able to continue to operate all local control functions in the event of
failure of any higher hierarchy control systems.
(b) Lighting control module shall be equipped with input/output relays,
overcurrent protective devices, channels/modules for receiving wiring
connections of field devices and lighting fittings. Each channel shall be
individually addressed and programmable to control lighting circuit over the
communication bus. Number of input/output channels required to be
provided in lighting control module shall depend on the design requirement.
Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, number of lighting fittings
connected to each of the controllable channels should not be more than two
(2) in order to allow a high flexibility of configuration of lighting
zone/group.
(c) Appropriate software shall be resided in the lighting control module for
performing direct digital control of connected field devices and lighting
without the support from the operator workstation.
Section C14
Page 3 of 3
EE_GS
2012 Edition
PART D - INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING DURING
CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
SECTION D1
GENERAL REQUIREMENT
D1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENT
The inspection, testing and commissioning shall be carried out in accordance
with the requirements specified in this Part, IEC 60364:2005, Code of Practice
for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations (COP) and Testing and Commissioning
Procedure for Electrical Installation in Government Buildings which shall be
referred to and adopted where appropriate.
The Contractor shall follow the administrative requirements, including but not
limited to submitting the standard test forms of the testing and commissioning
and giving advanced notices before carrying out any inspections or tests, as
agreed between the Architect or his representative and the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary provision of labour, specialists,
materials and other consumables. The Contractor shall also supply all necessary
calibrated instruments for carrying out the testing and commissioning work. The
instruments shall not be limited to the typical instruments as detailed in Table
D1.1. The instrument shall be calibrated by laboratories accredited by the Hong
Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) or other recognized
accredited laboratories. The calibration shall be made against certified
equipment having a known valid relationship to internationally or nationally
recognized standards. Where no such standards exist, the basis used for
calibration shall be documented. In such cases, the laboratories shall provide
satisfactory evidence of correlation of results, for example by participation in a
suitable programme of inter – laboratory comparisons or proficiency testing.
Upon completion of the installation but prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall
submit to the Architect or his representative in good time the supplementary
inspection, testing and commissioning proposals and their schedules to be
carried out. The proposals and schedules shall be agreed by the Architect or his
representative before any inspection and testing and commissioning work are
carried out.
Section D1
Page 1 of 2
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Table D1.1 - Testing Instrument Required for Acceptance Tests
Tests for which
Instrument Instrument can
Perform
Multi-tester 1. Continuity of
comprising
protective
low voltage
conductor
ohmmeter, 2. Continuity of
ammeter
ring conductor
and voltage 3. Polarity
tester, DC & 4. Current
AC
measurement
5. Voltage
measurement
Earth loop
tester
Test
Current
Test
Voltage
0.01ohm
(on low
scale)
1. Earth fault loop
test
2. Continuity of
protective
conductor
3. Earth electrode
resistance
Insulation
resistance test
Low
resistance
ohmmeter
Ductor Test
+2% to 2%
+5% to 5%
RCD tester RCD test
Insulation
resistance
tester
Resolution Accuracy
Test
current:
10%
Time
duration:
5%
250V for
ELV
circuits,
500V for
circuits up
to 500V,
1,000V for
circuits
between
500V to
1,000V
Up to 10A
D.C.
Section D1
Page 2 of 2
+3% to 3%
+5% to 5%
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION D2
ROUTINE INSPECTION
D2.1
OFF-SITE ROUTINE INSPECTION AND FUNCTIONAL TEST
Before carrying out any off-site inspection and functional test, the Contractor
shall give due advanced notice and provide details of date, time and list of
inspections and tests to the Architect or his representative for approval.
D2.2
INSPECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT DELIVERED TO
SITE
Before any materials and equipment delivered to site, the Contractor shall give
due advanced notice of not less than 3 days and provide details of date, time and
list of items to be inspected to the Architect or his representative for approval.
D2.3
VISUAL INSPECTION OF INSTALLATION
A visual inspection shall be carried out in accordance with Code 21A and Code
21C of the COP before testing of the installation in order to verify the following:
D2.4
(a)
The installation has been carried out in compliance with regulations
and/or COP;
(b)
The correctness of the designation of the installation; and
(c)
There is no visual damage to the installation.
INSPECTION AND FUNCTIONAL TEST OF INSTALLED WORKS
Where tests are required to be witnessed by the Architect or his representative
and site supervisory staff, the Contractor shall give due advanced notice of not
less than 3 days and provide details of date, time and lists of works to be
inspected and tested.
The Contractor shall carry out the tests and inspections as shown in the
following sections and record the test results and as agreed between the
Architect or his representative and the Contractor.
Registered or suitably qualified electrical workers shall be employed to conduct
such tests.
Section D2
Page 1 of 1
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION D3
HANDOVER INSPECTION
Before handover of any materials and equipment to the Architect or his representative, the
Contractor shall give due advanced notice of not less than 3 days and provide details of
date, time and list of items to be tested and commissioned to the Architect or his
representative for approval. The Contractor shall follow the details of the testing and
commissioning procedures as shown in Section D4.
Section D3
Page 1 of 1
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION D4
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
D4.1
GENERAL
Upon completion of the installed works, the Contractor shall give due advanced
notice and provide details of date, time and list of testing and commissioning
works to the Architect or his representative for approval.
The Contractor shall submit the appropriate schedule and phasing of the testing
and commissioning works as agreed by the Architect or his representative.
Where testing and commissioning works are required to be witnessed by the
Architect or his representative and site supervisory staff, the Contractor shall
carry out the proper testing and commissioning works before inviting them to
witness the works.
D4.2
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES
The Contractor shall carry out the testing and commissioning works in
accordance with the Testing and Commissioning Procedure for Electrical
Installation in Government Building.
D4.3
TESTING OF EMERGENCY LIGHTING, EXIT SIGN AND
EMERGENCY GENERATOR INSTALLATIONS
Where there are emergency lighting, exit sign and emergency generator
installations included in the Contract under the Electrical Installation, the
Contractor shall be responsible for the following duties:
(a)
Confirmation to the Fire services Contractor on the completion and
readiness of these installations for fire service inspection by FSD;
(b)
Provision of drawings and necessary information to the Fire Service
Contractor for inclusion in the submission to FSD for comments and
inspection;
(c)
Co-ordination with the Fire Service Contractor to inspect and witness the
final tests of these installations and rectification of any works found not
complying with the fire service requirements of FSD; and
(d)
Co-ordination with the Fire Services Contractor to carry out the final
functional test and performance test.
Section D4
Page 1 of 1
EE_GS
2012 Edition
PART E - TRAINING, INSPECTION, ATTENDANCE AND
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DURING
MAINTENANCE PERIOD
SECTION E1
TRAINING TO USERS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE AGENTS
E1.1
PARTICULARS OF TRAINING COURSE AND TRAINING SCHEDULE
Whenever possible, the training courses shall be held before or during the
commissioning period and shall be in Hong Kong. To reach the required depth
of appreciation, the principles, theory and practical “hand-on” demonstration
shall be included.
Training for the operation and maintenance of sophisticated equipment shall be
provided and arranged by the Contractor. The training shall include all training
facilities, material and handouts etc. The Contractor shall submit a “Training
Schedule” at least 2 months prior to completion of installation for the
Architect’s approval. The schedule shall consist of but not limited to the
following requirements:
(i)
Facilities and training program to ensure that the Employer’s operation
and maintenance staff acquire full knowledge and appreciation of all
aspects of the design, day-to-day operation, breakdown and routine
maintenance, diagnosis and hence capable to effectively and efficiently
operate and maintain the system/equipment. The training proposal shall
be submitted at least 3 months prior to completion of the Contract and
shall include all aspects of operation and maintenance of the plant
including the use of special tools;
(ii)
Details and duration of the training course(s), qualifications of the
instructor and the qualification requirements for the trainee(s); and
(iii)
Full details of the training syllabus.
Section E1
Page 1 of 1
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION E2
EMERGENCY SERVICES AND ATTENDANCE TO FAULT CALLS
E2.1
REQUIREMENTS ON RESPONSE TIME
The Contractor shall maintain efficient and prompt response to breakdown;
emergency call-out or complaint for the timely attendance of faults on
installation/equipment and/or unsatisfactory services. The works shall be in
accordance with the following categories:
(a)
VERY URGENT
This refers to installation breakdown i.e. interruption more than one final
sub-circuit, system or equipment failure bearing safety implication or
seriously affecting the operation of the whole system. Emergency fault
includes failure of switchboard, pipe burst or water dripping which may
jeopardize the electrical installation, fire alarm and all types of electricity
supply system failure or other situation the Architect or his representative
shall determine. For Very Urgent situation, the Contractor shall attend to
the call immediately.
(b)
URGENT
This refers to unsatisfactory services including individual lamp or socket
outlet failure not involving more than one final sub-circuit and
abnormality of equipment operation. Under this circumstance, the
Contractor shall attend the Urgent calls within one hour from the receipt
of the calls and provide temporary/permanent repair within 1 day after
the receipt of the calls.
(c)
NON URGENT
This refers to any incident for anything that is not as serious as being
included in (a) or (b) above. The Contractor shall attend the Non Urgent
calls within 4 hours from receipt of the calls.
The Contractor shall promptly complete any repair necessary for
resuming the breakdown installation. In case immediate permanent
repair is not possible due to safety related reason, the following "time for
repair" targets counted from the receipt of breakdown or fault call shall
be complied with:
(a) Complete temporary repair for resumption of the suspended or
breakdown services to a safe operating condition within 24 hours;
and
(b) Complete permanent rectification works within 3 and 7 working
days unless long component and parts delivery time is required.
Section E2
Page 1 of 2
EE_GS
2012 Edition
If the Contractor fails to respond promptly within the specified period, the
Contractor shall immediately contact the Architect or his representative and
provide sufficient justification for his incapability to comply with the
requirement of response.
E2.2
MONITORING MECHANISM ON CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining a log book with each switch
room or other specific area requested by Architect or his representative. Every
attendance and details of work done for the installation shall be entered into the
log book by the Contractor so as to form a comprehensive repair record and
evidence to certify that the Contractor has accomplished the Works.
E2.3
FOLLOW UP ACTION AFTER EMERGENCY AND FAULT CASES
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect or his representative the following
documentation and reports at the specified intervals of time:
(a)
Fault/Complaint Call Report
Immediately after each attendance of fault/complaint, a report shall be
submitted to the Architect or his representative as soon as practicable but
in any case not exceeding 72 hours after the receipt of fault
call/complaint.
(b)
Equipment Breakdown Report
The equipment breakdown report shall have full details of findings
during investigation/examination on cause of breakdown, account of
repair/replacement work done, suggested precaution and/or action
required to prevent the recurrence of similar incident. Interim report with
proposal for repair/replacement work shall be submitted to the Architect
or his representative within 48 hours after the receipt of breakdown call.
A full report shall be available immediately after the rectification of
breakdown for submission to the Architect and his representative.
Sample format of log and system performance sheet and breakdown report shall
be submitted to the Architect or his representative for approval 2 months before
completion of the installation. If sample format is approved, the Contractor shall
provide at his own expenses all copies of log and system performance sheets and
breakdown reports to be used within the Maintenance Period.
Section E2
Page 2 of 2
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION E3
INSPECTION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
During the Maintenance Period, the Contractor shall supply and install, without additional
cost to the Employer, replacements for all and any equipment or parts thereof, which may,
in the opinion of the Architect, become unserviceable, especially where the causes are
attributable to faulty materials, workmanship, or inadequate performance.
The Contractor shall also replace all burnt out or defective lamps or luminaires for failure
or deficiency in performance at no cost to the Employer if the failure of the lamps and
luminaires is still within the manufacturer’s guaranteed life period. The Contractor will be
permitted to charge for the cost of lamps only if they fail beyond the guaranteed life period.
In the execution of servicing and maintenance, repair and operation work on site, apart
from transportation, necessary labour, tools, equipment and testing instruments, the
Contractor shall also be responsible for keeping adequate stocks of spare parts/equipment
and other items necessary to maintain all emergency repair in an efficient, satisfactory and
safe operation condition at all time.
The interruption of electricity supply to the existing installations during execution of works
shall be kept to the minimum and shall only be allowed with the prior approval of the
Architect or his representative.
E3.1
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Contractor shall prepare and submit the maintenance program before the
commencement of the Maintenance Period for the approval of the Architect or
his representative.
Upon the approval of the above maintenance program, the Contractor shall
prepare a comprehensive maintenance schedule for all installations and indicate
dates for routine maintenance of the installations before the commencement of
the Maintenance Period. The schedule shall include but not limited to the
following:
-
E3.2
Infra-red scan of bus duct at 3 months interval;
servicing of switchgear at L.V. switchboard at 6 months interval; and
calibration of the instruments of L.V. switchboard at 6 months interval.
MONITORING MECHANISM ON CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE
Every attendance and details of work done on each installation should be
entered into the log book as required in Clause E2.2 by the Contractor to form a
works record, and/or to certify his attendance visits as required by the Contract.
In addition to this log book record, the Contractor shall also keep maintenance
record in his own office. On the request of the Architect or his representative,
the Contractor shall be required to forward his own maintenance record for
checking.
Section E3
Page 1 of 2
EE_GS
2012 Edition
E3.3
FINAL INSPECTION BEFORE THE END OF MAINTENANCE PERIOD
The Contractor shall, in addition to the routine maintenance, make further visit
to the site one month before the end of the maintenance period to check and, if
necessary, re-adjust the systems to meet the actual operation conditions.
The Contractor shall attend inspection to the installation at the end of the
Maintenance Period in order to facilitate the acceptance and handing over of the
installation to the Employer’s representatives.
E3.4
FINAL INSPECTION BEFORE THE END OF MAINTENANCE PERIOD
FOR LOW VOLTAGE CUBICLE SWITCHBOARD
The following tests shall be carried out before the end of the Maintenance
Period or at a timing specified by the Architect if he considers that the electrical
loads supplied by the Switchboard at such time period is more representative of
the full load condition, and defects so identified shall be rectified by the
Contractor:
(i) Insulation
Test
This shall be carried out by means of a 1000V "Megger"
tester or similar instrument.
(ii) Contact
Resistance
Test
This shall be required as determined by the Architect if
the thermographic scanning (item (iv) below) detects
abnormal hot spots and the Switchboard needs to be
overhauled, and be carried out after the overhaul by
means of "Ductor" tester or similar instrument to ensure
that contacts and joints for switchgears, cables, busbars
as well as the contacts and joints for outgoing cables and
busbars are maintained in good condition.
(iii) Functional
Test
This shall be carried out to ensure that all devices
operate properly as intended.
(iv) Thermographic This shall be carried out to ascertain whether abnormal
Scanning
hot spots exist at the switchgears, cables, busbars, joints
and other components of the Switchboard.
An Inspection and Test Report shall be submitted to the Architect within two
weeks before the completion of the Maintenance Period. Such Inspection and
Test Report shall incorporate records of the tests and state clearly also the
following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
The “Switchboard” is operated in good condition;
The work carried out and any adjustments made during Maintenance
Period; and
Any recommendation on the necessary improvement or rectification on
the “Switchboard”.
The test and inspection shall be carried out with the prior approval of the
Architect if such would require shut-down of the “Switchboard” and the work
may be carried out at any time outside normal hours as required by the Architect.
Section E3
Page 2 of 2
EE_GS
2012 Edition
SECTION E4
COMPLETION OF OUTSTANDING AND DEFECTIVE WORKS
After receiving the Architect’s completion certificate, the Contractor shall complete all
outstanding works listed thereon and rectify any defects that have occurred up to that time.
The defect completion schedule shall be approved by Architect.
Section E4
Page 1 of 1
EE_GS
2012 Edition
ANNEX I
LIST OF TECHNICAL STANDARDS QUOTED IN
THIS GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 60364-7-704
Ed. 2.0:2005
Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 7-704:
Requirements for special installations or locations –
Construction and demolition site installations
A2.1.3 (g)
IEC 60364-1:2009
Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 1:
Fundamental principles, assessment of general
characteristics, definitions
A2.2 (f), B1.4,
B2.2.4, B2.3.9,
B2.4.5 (m), B3.7.11
(b), B7.1, B7.7.4,
B7.10.2
ISO 5457:1999
Technical Product Documentation - Sizes and
Layout of Drawing Sheets
A4.2.2, A4.3.2
BS 1710:1984
Identification of Pipelines and Services
B1.4
BS 4800:1989
Paint Colours for Building Purposes
B1.4
IEC 61238-1:2003
Compression and mechanical connectors for power
cables for rated voltages up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
Part 1: Test methods and requirements
B2.7.1, C13.2.9 (b)
IEC 60228:2004
Conductors of Insulated Cables
B3.8.5, C2.1.5
IEC 60702-2:2002
Mineral Insulated Cables and Their Terminations
with a Rated Voltage Not Exceeding 750 V Part 2:
Terminations
B3.8.5, C3.2 (d),
C3.2 (e)
BS 1494-1:1964
Fixing Accessories for Building Purposes Part 1:
Fixings for Sheet, Roof and Wall Coverings
B3.9.1
IEC 60079-0:2007
Electrical
Apparatus
for
Explosive
Atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements
Gas
B4.4.3
IEC 61558-2-5:1997
Safety of Power Transformers, Power Supply Units
and Similar - Part 2-5: Particular Requirements for
Shaver Transformers and Shaver Supply Units
B4.4.6
IEC 60127-1:2006
Miniature Fuses - Part 1: Definitions for Miniature
Fuses and General Requirements for Miniature
Fuse-Links
B5.1.1
IEC 60189-1:2007
Low-Frequency Cables and Wires with PVC
Insulation and PVC Sheath Part 1: General Test and
Measuring Methods
B5.1.1
IEC 60245-1:2008
Rubber Insulated Cables - Rated Voltages up to and
Including 450/750 V - Part 1: General
Requirements
B5.1.1
IEC 61140
Protection Against Electric Shock - Common
Aspects for Installation and Equipment
B5.1.1, B5.1.4
Annex I
Page 1 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 60227-1:2007
Polyvinyl Chloride Insulated Cables of Rated
Voltages up to and Including 450/750 V Part 1:
General Requirements
B5.1.1, B7.10.1
IEC 60670-1:2003
Boxes and enclosures for electrical accessories for
household and similar fixed electrical installations
Part 1: General requirements
B5.2.1, B5.2.3,
B5.6.1, B5.8, B7.6.4,
B8.1.3, B8.1.4,
B8.1.5, B8.2.7,
B8.2.9, C2.2.3,
C2.2.4, C2.2.5,
C2.3.3, C4.1
IEC 60439-2:2005
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
- Part 2: Particular requirements for busbar trunking
systems (busways)
B6.10, C5.9.1,
C5.9.4, C6.1, C6.2,
C6.3, C6.4, C6.10.6,
C6.11.5
IEC 60189-1:2007
Low-Frequency Cables and Wires with PVC
Insulation and PVC Sheath Part 1: General Test and
Measuring Methods
B7.10.1
BS 6004:2000
Electric cables PVC insulated, non-armoured cables
for voltages up to and including 450/750 V, for
electric power, lighting and internal wiring
B7.10.1, C2.1.3 (f),
C2.1.3 (g), C2.1.3
(h), C2.1.4 (d),
C2.1.4 (e)
IEC 60755:2008
General Requirements for
Operated Protective Devices
B7.12.1
IEC 61008-1:2006
Residual current operated circuit-breakers without
integral overcurrent protection for household and
similar uses (RCCBs) – Part 1: General rules
B7.12.1, C5.7.1,
C5.7.2
EN 60742:1995
Isolating Transformers and
Transformers Requirements
B8.2.5
BS EN 50014 to
50039
Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres
B8.3.1 (a), B8.3.1 (c)
IEC 60079-0:2007
Electrical
Apparatus
for
Explosive
Atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements
B8.3.1 (a), B8.3.6,
C7.4.4 (a), C12.7.5
(a)(i), C12.7.5 (b)(i)
Residual
Safety
Current
Isolating
Gas
IEC 60079-20-1:2010 Explosive atmospheres - Part 20-1: Material
characteristics for gas and vapour classification Test methods and data
B8.3.2 (c), B8.3.4,
B8.3.6, C7.4.4 (a)
BS 2470:1973
Hexagon Socket Screws and Wrench Keys. Inch
Series
B8.3.5
BS 2558:1954
Tubular Box Spanners
B8.3.5
BS 476-4:1970
Fire tests on building materials and structures Part
4: Non-combustibility test for materials
B8.3.8
BS EN ISO
1461:2009
Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and
steel articles. Specifications and test methods
B8.4.4
Annex I
Page 2 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 60502-1:2009
Power Cables with Extruded Insulation and Their
Accessories for Rated Voltages from 1 kV (Um =
1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) - Part 1: Cables
for Rated Voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) and 3
kV (Um = 3.6kV)
B8.4.8, C2.1.3 (a),
C2.1.3 (b), C2.1.3 (c),
C2.1.3 (d), C2.1.3 (l),
C3.2 (a), C3.2 (b),
C3.2 (f), C13.6.1
IEC 62305-1:2006
Protection against lightning – Part 1: General
principles
B8.5.2, B8.5.10
ISO 8502:2006
Preparation of steel substrates before application of
paints and related products Tests for the assessment
of surface cleanliness
B9.5.1 (d)
IEC 60454-3-1:2002
Pressure-sensitive adhesive tapes for electrical
purposes Part 3 Specifications for individual
materials Sheet 1: PVC film tapes with pressuresensitive adhesive
C1.3
BS 1210:1963
Wood Screws
C1.6
BS EN ISO
4016:2001
Hexagon Head Bolts - Product Grade C
C1.6
BS EN ISO
4018:2001
Hexagon Head Screws - Product Grade C
C1.6
BS EN ISO
4034:2001
Hexagon Nuts - Product Grade C
C1.6
ISO 885:2000
General Purpose Bolts and Screws - Metric Series Radii under the Head
C1.6
ISO 683-13:1986
Heat-Treatable Steels, Alloy Steels and FreeCutting Steels - Part 13: Wrought Stainless Steels
C1.7, C3.12.1
BS 3858:1992
Binding and Identification Sleeves for Use on
Electric Cables and Wires (E)
C1.8.1, C3.7
IEC 60227-3:1997
Polyvinyl Chloride Insulated Cables of Rated
Voltages up to and Including 450/750 V - Part 3:
Non-Sheathed Cables for Fixed Wiring
C2.1.2 (a), C2.1.2 (b)
BS 7211:1998
Electric cables Thermosetting insulated, nonarmoured cables for voltages up to and including
450/750 V, for electric power, lighting and internal
wiring, and having low emission of smoke and
corrosive gases when affected by fire
C2.1.2 (e), C2.1.3 (i),
C2.1.3 (j)
IEC 60245-7:1994
Rubber Insulated Cables - Rated Voltages up to and
Including 450/750 V - Part 7: Heat Resistant
Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate Rubber Insulated Cables
C2.1.2. (c), C2.1.2
(d), C2.1.4 (k),
C2.1.4 (l)
IEC 60227-4:1997
Polyvinyl Chloride Insulated Cables of Rated
Voltages up to and Including 450/750 V - Part 4:
Sheathed Cables for Fixed Wiring
C2.1.3 (e)
BS 7629-1:2008
Specification for 300/500 V fire resistant electric
cables having low emission of smoke and corrosive
gases when affected by fire Part 1: Multicore cables
C2.1.3 (k)
Annex I
Page 3 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 60227-5:2003
Polyvinyl Chloride Insulated Cables of Rated
Voltages up to and Including 450/750 V - Part 5:
Flexible Cables (Cords)
C2.1.4 (a)
IEC 60245-4:2004
Rubber insulated cables Rated voltages up to and
including 450/750 V Part 4: Cords and flexibe
cables
C2.1.4 (b), C2.1.4 (c)
BS 6007:2006
Electric Cables - Single Core Unsheathed Heat
Resisting Cables for Voltages up to and Including
450/750 V, for Internal Wiring
C2.1.4 (f)
BS 6500:2000
Electric cables Flexible cords rated up to 300/500
V, for use with appliances and equipment intended
for domestic, office and similar environments
C2.1.4 (g), C10.1.2
(e), C10.9.3 (d)(ii),
C10.18.3 (l),
C10.19.3 (k),
C10.20.3 (n),
C10.23.3 (f)
BS 7919:2001
Electric cables Flexible cables rated up to 450/750
V, for use with appliances and equipment intended
for industrial and similar environments
C2.1.4 (h), C2.1.4 (i),
C2.1.4 (j)
IEC 60245-3:1994
Rubber Insulated Cables - Rated Voltages up to and
Including 450/750 V - Part 3: Heat Resistant
Silicone Insulated Cables
C2.1.4 (m)
IEC 60332-1-1:2004
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire
conditions Part 1-1: Test for vertical flame
propagation for a single insulated wire or cable
Apparatus
C2.1.6
IEC 61034-2:2006
Measurement of smoke density of cables burning
under defined conditions – Part 2: Test procedure
and requirements
C2.1.6
IEC 60754-1:1994
Test on Gases Evolved During Combustion of
Materials from Cables - Part 1: Determination of
the Amount of Halogen Acid Gas
C2.1.6, C3.8.1
BS 6387:1994
Specification for Performance Requirements for
Cables Required to Maintain Circuit Integrity
Under Fire Conditions
C2.1.6
IEC 61386-21:2002
Conduit Systems for Cable Management - Part 21:
Particular Requirements - Ridgid Conduit Systems
C2.2.1, C2.2.3,
C2.3.1
IEC 61386-23:2002
Conduit Systems for Cable Management - Part 23:
Particular Requirements - Flexible Conduit Systems
C2.2.2
IEC 60670-21:2004
Boxes and enclosures for electrical accessories for
household and similar fixed electrical installations
Part 21: Particular requirements for boxes and
enclosures with provision for suspension means
C2.2.3
BS 4662:2006
Boxes for flush mounting of electrical accessories –
Requirements and test methods and dimensions
C2.2.4, C2.2.5,
C2.3.3
Annex I
Page 4 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 61386-1:2008
Conduit Systems for Electrical Installations - Part
1: General Requirements
C2.2.5, C2.3.1,
C2.3.2, C2.3.4
BS 3382-2:1961
Electroplated Coatings on Threaded Components
Part 1: Cadmium on Steel Components Part 2: Zinc
on Steel Components
C2.2.6, C2.4.7
IEC 60614-2-2:1980
Specification for conduits for electrical installations
- Part 2: Particular specification for rigid plain
conduits of insulating materials
C2.3.1
IEC 61386-22:2002
Conduit Systems for cable management - Part 22:
Particular requirements - Pliable conduit systems
C2.3.2
IEC 61084-2-2:2003
Cable trunking and ducting systems for electrical
installations Part 2-2: Particular requirements Cable
trunking systems and cable ducting systems
intended for underfloor and flushfloor installations
C2.4.1
IEC 61084-1:1993
Cable Trunking and Ducting Systems for Electrical
Installations Part 1: General Requirements
C2.4.1, C2.5
BS 4678-1:1971
Cable Trunking Part 1: Steel Surface Trunking
C2.4.2
BS EN 10143:2006
Continuously Hot-Dip Metal Coated Steel Sheet
and Strip - Tolerances on Dimensions and Shape
C2.4.2
BS 7846:2000,
Category F2
Electric Cables - 600/1 000 V Armoured FireResistant Cables Having Thermosetting Insulation
and Low Emission of Smoke and Corrosive Gases
When Affected by Fire
C3.2 (c)
IEC 60702-1:2002
Mineral Insulated Cables and Their Terminations
with a Rated Voltage Not Exceeding 750 V Part 1:
Cables
C3.2 (d), C3.2 (e)
BS EN 10149-1:1996
Specification for hot-rolled flat products made of
high yield strength steels for cold forming. General
delivery conditions
C3.10.1, C3.12.1
ISO 1460:1992
Metallic Coatings - Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings
on Ferrous Materials - Gravimetric Determination
of the Mass per Unit Area
C3.10.1, C3.12.1
ISO 1461:1999
Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Fabricated Iron
and Steel Articles - Specifications and Test Method
C3.10.1, C3.11.2,
C3.12.1
BS 5733:1995
General Requirements for Electrical Accessories
C4.1
IEC 60669-1:2007
Switches for Household and Similar FixedElectrical Installations - Part 1: General
Requirements
C4.2.1
Annex I
Page 5 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 60529:2009
Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP
Code)
C4.2.1, C4.2.5,
C4.3.1, C4.7.6,
C5.1.5, C5.26.2,
C6.2, C7.3.2, C7.4.2
(a), C7.4.3 (a), C7.4.4
(a), C8.5.1, C9.1.3,
C11.4, C12.1.3 (c),
C12.2.1, C12.7.3
(a)(v), C13.4.7 (b)
BS 1363-2:1995
13 A Plugs, Socket-Outlets, Adaptors and
Connection Units - Part 2: Specification for 13 A
Switched and Unswitched Socket-Outlets
C4.3.1
BS 546:1950
Two-Pole and Earthing-Pin Plugs, Socket-Outlets
and Socket-Outlet Adaptors for AC (50-60 Hz)
Circuits up to 250 V
C4.3.1
IEC 60309-2:2005
Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial
purposes – Part 2: Dimensional interchangeability
requirements for pin and contact-tube accessories
C4.3.1
IEC 61558-1:2005
Safety of power transformers, power supplies,
reactors and similar products - Part 1: General
requirements and tests
C4.3.2
IEC 61558-2-5:1997
Safety of Power Transformers, Power Supply Units
and Similar - Part 2-5: Particular Requirements for
Shaver Transformers and Shaver Supply Units
C4.3.2
IEC 60269-1:2009
Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements
C4.3.3, C4.4.2,
C5.6.3, C5.8.2,
C5.8.5, C5.26.4
(a)(xi), C6.6, C6.10.6,
C6.11.5, C13.3.1 (f)
BS 1363-1:1995
13 A Plugs, Socket-Outlets, Adaptors and
Connection Units - Part 1: Specification for
Rewirable and Non-Rewirable 13 A Fused Plugs
C4.4.2, C10.1.2 (f)
IEC 60570:2003
Electrical supply track systems for luminaires
C4.6.1
BS 667:2005
Illuminance meters Requirements and test methods
C4.6.2
BS 67:1987
Ceiling Roses
C4.6.3
IEC 60061-1:2005
Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the
control of interchangeability and safety Part 1:
Lamp caps
C4.6.4
IEC 60061-2:2005
Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the
control of interchangeability and safety Part 2:
Lampholders
C4.6.4
IEC 60238:2008
Edison Screw Lampholders
C4.6.4
IEC 61184:2009
Bayonet Lampholders
C4.6.4
Annex I
Page 6 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 62053-11:2003
Electricity metering equipment (a.c.) Particular
requirements Part 11: Electromechanical meters for
active energy (classes 0,5, 1 and 2)
C4.7.1
IEC 60051-1:1997 to
IEC 60051-9:1995
Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical
Measuring Instruments and Their Accessories - Part
1: Definitions and General Requirements Common
to All Parts, Part 2: Special Requirements for
Ammeters and Voltmeters, Part 3: Special
Requirements for Wattmeters and Varmeters, Part
4: Special Requirements for Frequency Meters, Part
5: Special Requirements for Phase Meters, Power
Factor Meters and Synchroscopes, Part 6: Special
Requirements for Ohmmeters (Impedance Meters)
and Conductance Meters, Part 7: Special
Requirements for Multi-Function Instruments, Part
8: Special Requirements for Accessories, Part 9:
Recommended Test Methods
C4.7.2
IEC 60044-1:2003
Instrument transformers
transformers
C4.7.3, C5.5.2,
C11.9, C13.3.1 (f),
C13.3.10
IEC 60947-1:2007
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 1:
General rules
C5.1.1
IEC 60439-1:2004
Low-voltage
switchgear
and
controlgear
assemblies – Part 1: Type-tested and partially typetested assemblies
C5.1.1, C5.11.1,
C5.26.2, C11.3,
C11.4, C11.4 (c),
C11.7, C11.16 (a)(i),
C11.16 (a)(viii),
C12.2.6, C12.2.11
IEC 60947-3:2008
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 3:
Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-Disconnectors and
Fuse-Combination Units
C5.1.7, C5.2.2,
C5.2.5
IEC 60947-2:2009
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 2:
Circuit-Breakers
C5.4.1, C5.4.2,
C5.5.1, C5.5.3, C6.6
IEC 60755:2008
General Requirements for
Operated Protective Devices
C5.5.2
IEC 60255-1:2009
Measuring relays and protection equipment - Part 1:
Common requirements
C5.5.2, C11.9,
C13.3.1 (f)
IEC 60898-1:2003
Electrical Accessories - Circuit-Breakers for
Overcurrent Protection for Household and Similar
Installations - Part 1: Circuit-Breakers for A.C.
Operation
C5.6.1, C5.6.2,
C5.6.3
BS 88-1:2007
Low-voltage fuses. General requirements
C5.6.3
IEC 61009-1:2006
Residual current operated circuit-breakers with
integral overcurrent protection for household and
similar uses (RCBO’s) Part 1: General rules
C5.7.4, C5.7.5
-
Annex I
Page 7 of 18
Part
1:
Residual
Current
Current
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 60269-2-1:2006
Low-voltage fuses – Part 2-1: Supplementary
requirements for fuses for use by authorized
persons (fuses mainly for industrial application) –
Sections I to VI: Examples of types of standardized
fuses
C5.8.5
IEC 60364:2005
Low-voltage electrical installations
C5.9.4, D1.1
IEC 60439-3:2001
Low-Voltage
Switchgear
and
Controlgear
Assemblies - Part 3: Particular Requirements for
Low-Voltage
Switchgear
and
Controlgear
Assemblies Intended to Be Installed in Places
Where Unskilled Persons Have Access for Their
Use - Distribution Boards
C5.10.5, C5.10.7,
C5.12.1
IEC 60947-4-1:2009
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Part 4-1:
Contactors and Motor-Starters - Electromechanical
Contactors and Motor-Starters
C5.14.1, C5.14.2,
C5.14.3, C5.15,
C5.26.4 (a)(i),
C5.26.4 (a)(vii),
C5.26.4 (a)(viii),
C5.26.4 (a)(ix)
IEC 61000-4-2:2008
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-2:
Testing and
Measurement
Techniques
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test
C5.16.1 (c), C5.18.1
(b)(iii), C5.19.1 (a),
C5.20.1(d), C5.24.1
(d)
IEC 61000-4-3:2008
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4-3:
Testing and measurement techniques – Radiated,
radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity
test
C5.16.1 (c), C5.18.1
(b)(iv), C5.19.1 (a),
C5.20.1(d),
C5.24.1(d)
IEC 61000-4-4:2007
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4-4:
Testing and measurement techniques – Electrical
fast transient/burst immunity test
C5.16.1 (c), C5.18.1
(b)(v), C5.19.1 (a),
C5.20.1(d), C5.24.1
(d)
IEC 61000-4-5:2009
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4-5:
Testing and measurement techniques – Surge
immunity test
C5.16.1 (c), C5.18.1
(b)(vi), C5.19.1 (a),
C5.20.1(d), C5.24.1
(d)
ISO 9001:2008
Quality Management Systems - Requirements
C5.16.1 (c), C5.19.1
(a), C14.1
IEC 61537:2006
Cable management - Cable tray systems and cable
ladder systems
C3.11.1
IEC 61643-1:2005
Low-voltage surge protective devices – Part 1:
Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage
power distribution systems – Requirements and
tests
C5.17.1 (d)
IEC 60364-4-44:2006 Electrical Installations of Buildings - Part 4-44:
Protection for Safety - Protection Against Voltage
Disturbances and Electromagnetic Disturbances
C5.17.2 (c)
Annex I
Page 8 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 60068-2-6:2007
Environmental Testing - Part 2: Tests - Test FC:
Vibration (Sinusoidal)
C5.18.1 (b)(i)
IEC 60068-2-27:2008 Basic Environmental Testing Procedures Part 2:
Tests - Test Ea and Guidance: Shock
C5.18.1 (b), C11.4
BS EN 61800-3:2005 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods
C5.19.1 (a)
BS 7430:1998
Code of Practice for Earthing
C5.21.1 (c)
BS EN 61204:1995
Low-Voltage Power Supply Devices, d.c. Output Performance Characteristics
C5.21.1 (c)
IEC 60950-1:2009
Information technology equipment – Safety – Part
1: General requirements
C5.21.1 (c)
IEC 61204:2001
Low-Voltage Power Supply Devices, D.C. Output Performance Characteristics
C5.21.1 (c)
IEC 61951-2:2003
Secondary Cells and Batteries Containing Alkaline
or Other Non-Acid Electrolytes - Portable Sealed
Rechargeable Single Cells - Part 2 Nickel-Metal
Hydride
C5.21.1 (e)
BS EN 60529:1992
Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP
Code)
C5.21.3 (a)
BS EN 60831-2:1996 Shunt Power Capacitors of the Self-Heating Type
for a.c. Systems Having a Rated Voltage up to and
Including 1 kV Part 2: Ageing Test, Self-Healing
Test and Destruction Test
C5.22.2 (a)
IEC 60931-1:1996
Shunt power capacitors of the non-self-healing type
for a.c. systems having a rated voltage up to and
including 1 000 V Part 1: General Performance,
testing and rating Safety requirements Guide for
installation and operation
C5.22.2 (a)
BS EN 60947-41:2001
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 41:
Contactors
and
Motor-Starters
Electromechanical Contactors and Motor-Starters
C5.22.2 (d)
IEC 60076-6:2007
Power transformers - Part 6: Reactors
C5.22.2 (f)
IEC 60255-26:2004
Electrical relays Part 26: Electromagnetic
compatibility requirements for measuring relays
and protection equipment
C5.23.1 (b)
IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Electrical relays - Part 21: Vibration, shock, bump
and seismic tests on measuring relays and
protection equipment - Section One: Vibration tests
(sinusoidal)
C5.23.1 (f)
Annex I
Page 9 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Part and Clause No.
Description
IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Electrical relays - Part 21: Vibration, shock, bump
and seismic tests on measuring relays and
protection equipment - Section Two: Shock and
bump tests
C5.23.1 (f)
IEC 60255-22-2:2008 Electrical Relays - Part 22: Electrical Disturbance
Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment - Section 2: Electrostatic Discharge
Tests
C5.23.1 (f)
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 Electrical Relays - Part 22-3: Electrical Disturbance
Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment - Radiated Electromagnetic Field
Disturbance Tests
C5.23.1 (f)
IEC 60255-22-4:2008 Electrical Relays Part 22-4: Electrical Disturbance
Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment - Electrical Fast Transient/Burst
Immunity Test
C5.23.1 (f)
IEC 60255-22-5:2008 Electrical Relays - Part 22-5: Electrical Disturbance
Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment - Surge Immunity Test
C5.23.1 (f)
IEC 60255-25:2000
Electrial Relays - Part 25:Electromagnetic Emission
Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment
C5.23.1 (f)
IEC 61000-3-2:2009
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . Part 3-2:
Limits . Limits for harmonic current emissions
(equipment input current .16 A per phase)
C5.20.1(d), C5.24.1
(d), C7.8.1 (c),
C9.2.1,
C10.33.4(e)(iv)
IEC 60034-2-1:2007
Rotating electrical machines - Part 2-1:Standard
methods for determining losses and efficiency from
tests (excluding machines for traction vehicles)
C5.25.6
IEC 60034-5:2006
Rotating Electrical Machin–s - Part 5: Degrees of
Protection Provided by the Integral Design of
Rotating Electrical Machines (IP Code)
C5.25.1
IEC 60034-30:2008
Rotating electrical machines - Part 30: Efficiency
classes of single-speed, three-phase, cage-induction
motors (IE-code)
C5.25.6
IEC 60085:2007
Electrical insulation – Thermal classification
C10.8.1 (b), C10.9.3
(a)(ii)
IEC 60034-1:2004
Rotating electrical machines Part 1: Rating and
performance
C5.25.1, C5.25.7,
C10.9.3 (a)(i),
C12.1.5, C13.2.1
(a)(ii), C13.2.1
(a)(iv), C13.2.3,
C13.2.4, C13.2.10
BS 3790:2006
Specification for belt drives – Endless wedge belts,
endless V-belts, banded wedge belts, banded Vbelts and their corresponding pulleys
C5.25.11
Annex I
Page 10 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC TS 6003425:2007
Rotating electrical machines Part 25: Guide for the
design and performance of cage induction motors
specifically designed for converter supply
C5.25.13
IEC 60034-9:2007
Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 9: Noise Limits
C5.25.5
IEC 60034-14:2007
Rotating electrical machines Part 14: Mechanical
vibration of certain machines with shaft heights 56
mm and higher Measurement, evaluation and limits
of vibration severity
C5.25.5, C13.2.1
(a)(vi), C13.2.5
IEC 60470:2000
High-Voltage Alternating Current Contactors and
Contactor-Based Motor-Starters
C5.26.4 (a)(i),
C5.26.4 (a)(vii)
BS EN 13601:2002
Copper and Copper Alloys - Copper Rod, Bar and
Wire for General Electrical Purposes
C6.4, C11.7, C13.3.3
IEC 60667-1:1980
Specification for vulcanized fibre for electrical
purposes. Part 1: Definitions and general
requirements
C6.10.2
IEC 60081:2002
Double-Capped Fluorescent Lamps - Performance
Specifications
C7.1.2
IEC 60155:2006
Glow-Starters for Fluorescent Lamps
C7.1.2
IEC 60400:2008
Lampholders for Tubular Fluorescent Lamps and
Starterholders
C7.1.2
IEC 60901:2007
Single-Capped Fluorescent Lamps - Performance
Specifications
C7.1.2
IEC 60920:1990
Ballasts for Tubular Fluorescent Lamps General
and Safety Requirements
C7.1.2
IEC 60921:2006
Ballasts for tubular fluorescent
Performance requirements
–
C7.1.2
IEC 60927:2007
Auxiliaries for Lamps - Starting Devices (Other
Than Glow Starters) - Performance Requirements
C7.1.2
IEC 61048:2006
Auxiliaries for lamps – Capacitors for use in
tubular fluorescent and other discharge lamp
circuits – General and safety requirements
C7.1.2
IEC 61049:1992
Capacitors for Use in Tubular Fluorescent and
Other Discharge Lamp Circuits Performance
Requirements
C7.1.2
IEC 61111:2009
Live Working - Electrical Insulating Matting
C11.14
IEC 61347-1:2007
Lamp Controlgear - Part 1: General and Safety
Requirements
C7.1.2, C9.2.1,
C10.33.4(e)(i)
IEC 61347-2-1:2006
Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-1: Particular
requirements for starting devices (other than glow
starters)
C7.1.2
Annex I
Page 11 of 18
lamps
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Part and Clause No.
Description
IEC 61347-2-11:2001 Lamp controlgear - Part 2-11: Particular
requirements for miscellaneous electronic circuits
used with luminaries
C7.1.2
IEC 61347-2-13:2006 Lamp controlgear – Part 2-13: Particular
requirements for d.c. or a.c. supplied electronic
controlgear for LED modules
C9.2.1, C10.33.4
(e)(ii)
IEC 60598-2-1:1987
Luminaires Part 2: Particular Requirements Section
One - Fixed General Purpose Luminaires
C7.1.2, C7.1.5,
C9.1.2, C9.1.3
IEC 60598-2-2:1997
Luminaires - Part 2: Particular Requirements Section 2: Recessed Luminaires
C7.1.2, C7.1.5,
C9.1.2, C9.1.3
IEC 60598-1:2008
Luminaires - Part 1: General requirements and tests
C7.1.2, C7.3.2,
C7.4.2 (a), C7.4.3 (a),
C8.5.1, C9.1.2
IEC 61347-2-3:2006
Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-3: Particular
Requirements for A.C. Supplied Electronic Ballasts
for Fluorescent Lamps
C7.1.2, C7.8.1 (a)
IEC 60929:2006
AC-supplied electronic ballasts for tubular
fluorescent lamps – Performance requirements
C7.1.2, C7.8.1 (b),
C14.2(l)
ISO 9000:2008
Quality Management Systems - Fundamentals and
Vocabulary
C7.1.2, , C9.1.2,
C10.33.1(d)
IEC 60079-10-1:2008 Explosive atmospheres - Part 10-1: Classification
of areas - Explosive gas atmospheres
C7.4.3 (a), C7.4.4 (a)
IEC 60079-1:2008
Electrical
Apparatus
for
Explosive
Gas
Atmospheres - Part 1: Flameproof Enclosures "D"
C7.4.4 (a)
BS 1490:1988
Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Ingots and
Castings for General Engineering Purposes
C7.4.4 (b)
ISO 3522:2006
Aluminium and aluminium alloys Castings Chemical composition and mechanical properties
C7.4.4 (b)
IEC 60598-2-22:2008 Luminaires - Part 2-22: Particular Requirements Luminaires for Emergency Lighting
C7.5.2
IEC 61347-2-7:2006
Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-7: Particular
Requirements for D.C. Supplied Electronic Ballasts
for Emergency Lighting
C7.5.2
IEC 61951-2:2003
Secondary Cells and Batteries Containing Alkaline
or Other Non-Acid Electrolytes - Portable Sealed
Rechargeable Single Cells - Part 2 Nickel-Metal
Hydride
C7.5.3 (a)
EN 55015:2009
Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio
Disturbance Characteristics of Electrical Lighting
and Similar Equipment
C7.8.1 (d), C9.2.1,
C10.33.4 (e)(vi)
IEC 61547:2009
Equipment for General Lighting Purposes - EMC
Immunity Requirements
C7.8.1 (e), C9.2.1,
C10.33.4 (e)(v)
Annex I
Page 12 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 60662:2002
High-Pressure Sodium Vapour Lamps
C8.2, C8.4
IEC 60188:2001
High-Pressure Mercury Vapour
Performance Specifications
IEC 61167:1998
Metal Halide Lamps
C8.4
IEC 60598-2-5:2001
Luminaires - Part 2-5: Particular Requirements Floodlights
C8.5.1
IEC 62471:2006
Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems
C9.1.4, C10.33.2(c)
IEC 62384:2009
DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED
modules – Performance requirements
C9.2.1,
C10.33.4(e)(iii)
IEC 62031:2008
LED modules for general lighting – Safety
specifications
C9.3.1, C10.33.4 (f)
IEC 60838-2-2:2006
Miscellaneous lampholders – Part 2-2: Particular
requirements – Connectors for LED modules
C9.3.1
IEC 60335-1:2006
Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety
- Part 1: General requirements
C10.1.1 (b), C10.13.1
(a)
IEC 60879:1992
Performance and construction of electric circulating
fans and regulators
C10.2.1 (b)(i)
Lamps
-
C8.3
IEC 60335-2-80:2008 Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety
- Part 2-80: Particular requirements for fans
C10.2.1 (b)(ii),
C10.3.1 (c)(i),
C10.4.1 (c)(i),
C10.5.1 (c)(i),
C10.6.1 (c)(i),
C10.7.1 (a)
BS EN 10255:2007
Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and
threading — Technical delivery conditions
C10.2.3 (c)(ii)
JIS C 9601:1990
Electric Fans
C10.3.1 (c)(ii),
C10.4.1 (c)(ii),
C10.5.1 (c)(ii),
C10.6.1 (c)(ii)
IEC 60335-2-30:2009 Household and Similar Electrical Appliances Safety - Part 2-30: Particular Requirements for
Room Heaters
C10.10.1 (a),
C10.11.1 (a),
C10.12.1 (a),
C10.13.1 (a)
BS EN ISO
1461:2009
C10.13.3 (m)
Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Fabricated Iron
and Steel Articles - Specifications and Test
Methods
IEC 60335-2-21:2009 Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety
- Part 2-21: Particular requirements for storage
water heaters
Annex I
Page 13 of 18
C10.14.1 (d),
C10.15.1 (f)(i)
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
BS EN 12897:2006
Water supply. Specification for indirectly heated
unvented (closed) storage water heaters
C10.15.1 (f)(i)
BS EN 60730-215:2007
Automatic electrical controls for household and
similar use — Part 2-15: Particular requirements for
automatic electrical water level sensing controls of
the float or electrode-sensor type used in boiler
applications
C10.15.1 (f)(ii),
C10.15.3 (e)
BS 6283-2:1991
Safety and control devices for use in hot water
systems. Specifications for temperature relief
valves for pressures from 1 bar to 10 bar
C10.15.1 (f)(iii),
C10.15.3 (f)(i),
C10.15.3 (f)(ii)
BS 6282-1:1982
Devices with Moving Parts for the Prevention of
Contamination of Water by Backflow Part 1: Check
Valves of Nominal Size up to and Including DN 54
C10.15.4 (b)
IEC 60335-275:1998
Safety of Household and Similar Electrical
Appliances Part 2: Particular Requirements for
Commercial Dispensing Appliances and Vending
Machines
C10.16.1 (b)
IEC 60335-2-15:2008 Household and Similar Electrical Appliances Safety - Part 2-15: Particular Requirements for
Appliances
for
Heating
Liquids
C10.17.1 (a),
C10.22.1 (a)
IEC 60335-2-24:2005 Household and similar electrical appliances –
Safety – Part 2-24: Particular requirements for
refrigerating appliances, ice-cream appliances and
ice-makers
C10.18.1 (c),
C10.32.2 (a)
IEC 60335-2-6:2005
Household and similar electrical appliances –
Safety – Part 2-6: Particular requirements for
stationary cooking ranges, hobs, ovens and similar
appliances
C10.19.1 (c),
C10.20.1, C10.21.1
IEC 60335-2-9:2008
Household and similar electrical appliances –
Safety – Part 2-9: Particular requirements for grills,
toasters and similar portable cooking appliances
C10.23.1
IEC 60335-2-23:2008 Household and Similar Electrical Appliances Safety - Part 2-23: Particular Requirements for
Appliances for Skin or Hair Care
C10.24.1 (a)
IEC 60335-2-3:2008
Household and similar electrical appliances –
Safety – Part 2-3: Particular requirements for
electric irons
C10.27.1 (b)
IEC 60335-2-2:2009
Household and similar electrical appliances –
Safety – Part 2-2: Particular requirements for
vacuum cleaners and water-suction cleaning
appliances
C10.28.1 (a)
Annex I
Page 14 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Part and Clause No.
Description
IEC 60335-2-40:2006 Household and similar electrical appliances –
Safety – Part 2-40: Particular requirements for
electrical heat pumps, air conditioners and
dehumidifiers
C10.29.1 (a),
C10.30.1 (a),
C10.31.2 (a)
ISO 5151:1994
Non-Ducted Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps Testing and Rating for Performance
C10.31.3 (d)
ISO 8187:1991
Household Refrigerating Appliances - RefrigeratorFreezers - Characteristics and Test Methods
C10.32.2 (b),
C10.32.3 (b)(ii)
IEC 60598-2-4: 1997
Part 2 Particular Requirements – Section 4:
Portable General Purpose Luminaires
C10.33.2 (a)
IEC 60068-2-29:1987 Basic Environmental Testing Procedures Part 2:
Tests - Tests Eb and Guidance: Bump
C11.4
IEC 60068-2-64:1993 Environmental Testing Part 2: Test Methods Test
Fh: Vibration, Broad-Band Random (Digital
Control) and Guidance
C11.4
BS 6231:2006
Electrical cables - Single core PVC insulated
flexible cables of rated voltage 600/ 1000 V for
switchgear and controlgear wiring
C11.7, C13.3.1 (f)
IEC 62053:2003
Electricity metering equipment (a.c.) Particular
requirements
C11.9
IEC 60051:1997
Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical
Measuring Instruments and Their Accessories
C11.9, C13.3.1 (f)
BS 921:1976
Rubber mats for electrical purposes
C11.14, C13.3.17,
C12.2.12
ISO 8528:2005
Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven
alternating current generating sets
C12.1.1, C12.1.2 (a),
C12.1.2 (c)
BS EN 590:2004
Automotive fuels Diesel Requirements and test
methods
C12.1.2 (a)
ISO 8528-2:2005
Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven
alternating current generating sets -- Part 2: Engines
C12.1.2 (b)(vii)
ISO 8528-3:2005
Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven
alternating current generating sets -- Part 3:
Alternating current generators for generating sets
C12.1.3 (a)
ISO 8528-5:2005
Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven
alternating current generating sets -- Part 5:
Generating sets
C12.1.3 (b)
BS EN 55014:1997
Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio
Disturbance Characteristics of Electrical MotorOperated and Thermal Appliances for Household
and Similar Purposes, Electric Tools and Similar
Electric Apparatus
C12.1.7
Annex I
Page 15 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Part and Clause No.
Standard
Description
BS 1821:1982
Class I Oxy-Acetylene Welding of
Pipework for Carrying Fluids
Ferritic
C12.1.10
BS 2640:1982
Class II Oxy-Acetylene Welding of Carbon Steel
Pipework for Carrying Fluids
C12.1.10
BS EN 1011-2:2004
Welding - Recommendations for Welding of
Metallic Materials - Part 2: Arc Welding of Ferritic
Steels
C12.1.10
BS 4:2005
Structural Steel Sections
C12.1.11
BS 7668:2004
Weldable structural steels Hot finished structural
hollow sections in weather resistant steels
Specification
C12.1.11
BS 921:1976
Rubber mats for electrical purposes
C12.2.12
BS EN 1057:1996
Copper and Copper Alloys - Seamless, Round
Copper Tubes for Water and Gas in Sanitary and
Heating Applications
C12.6.6
IEC 60189-2:1981
Low-Frequency Cables and Wires with P.V.C
Insulation and P.V.C Sheath Part 2: Cables in Pairs,
Triples, Quads and Quintuples for Inside
Installations
C12.6.8 (a)
BS 2594:1975
Specification for Carbon Steel Welded Horizontal
Cylindrical Storage Tanks
C12.7.1 (a)(i),
C12.7.1 (a)(iii)
BS EN 499:1995
Welding Consumables - Covered Electrodes for
Manual Metal Arc Welding of Non Alloy and Fine
Grain Steels - Classification (F)
C12.7.1 (a)(ii)
EN 1011-1:1998
Welding Recommendations for welding of metallic
materials Part 1: General guidance for arc welding
C12.7.1 (a)(ii)
ISO 12944:1998
Paints and Varnishes - Corrosion Protection of
Steel Structures by Protective Paint Systems
C12.7.1 (b)
BS 1600:1991
Dimensions of Steel Pipe for the Petroleum
Industry
C12.7.4 (a)(ii)
ISO 65:1981
Carbon steel tubes suitable for screwing in
accordance with ISO 7-1
C12.7.4 (a)(ii)
ISO 7005-1:1992
Metallic flanges -- Part 1: Steel flanges
C12.7.4 (a)(iii)
ISO 7-1:1994
Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are made
on the threads -- Part 1: Dimensions, tolerances and
designation
C12.7.4 (a)(iii)
BS 476-7:1997
Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures Part
7: Method of Test to Determine the Classification
of the Surface Spread of Flame of Products
C12.8.3 (d)
Annex I
Page 16 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
ISO 1834:1999
Short link chain for lifting purposes -- General
conditions of acceptance
C12.10.2
ISO 1835:1980
Short link chain for lifting purposes -- Grade M (4),
non-calibrated, for chain slings etc.
C12.10.2
ISO 3075:1980
Short link chain for lifting purposes -- Grade S (6)
non calibrated, for chain slings etc.
C12.10.2
ISO 3076:1984
Short link chain for lifting purposes -- Grade T (8),
non-calibrated, for chain slings etc.
C12.10.2
ISO 3077:2001
Short-link chain for lifting purposes -- Grade T,
(types T, DAT and DT), fine-tolerance hoist chain
C12.10.2
EN 1677-5:2001
Components for Slings - Safety - Part 5: Forged
Steel Lifting Hooks with Latch - Grade 4
C12.10.3
ISO 8528-6:2005
Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven
alternating current generating sets -- Part 6: Test
methods
C12.13.1 (c)
BS 4142:1997
Method for Rating Industrial Noise Affecting
Mixed Residential and Industrial Areas
C12.13.4
IEC 60072-1:1991
Dimensions and Output Series for Rotating
Electrical Machines Part 1: Frame Numbers 56 to
400 and Flange Numbers 55 to 1080
C13.2.2
IEC 60072-2:1990
Dimensions and Output Series for Rotating
Electrical Machines Part 2: Frame Numbers 355 to
1 000 and Flange Numbers 1180 to 2360
C13.2.2
IEC 60034-8:2007
Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 8: Terminal
Markings and Direction of Rotation
C13.2.8 (b)
BS 91:1998
Electric Cable Soldering Sockets - Specification
C13.2.9 (b)
IEC 60751:2008,
Grade 2
Industrial
Sensors
C13.2.11 (a)
IEC 62271-100:2006
High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part
100: High-Voltage Alternating-Current CircuitBreakers
C13.3.1 (a), C13.3.1
(f), C13.3.3, C13.3.4
(a), C13.3.4 (e)
IEC 62271-200:2003
High-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 200:
AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for
rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including
52 kV
C13.3.1 (a), C13.3.1
(f), C13.3.3, C13.3.4
(e)
Platinum
Resistance
Annex I
Page 17 of 18
Thermometer
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 60376:2005
Specification of technical grade sulfur hexafluoride
(SF6) for use in electrical equipment
C13.3.1 (f)
IEC 62271-1:2007
High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 1:
Common specification
C13.3.1 (f)
IEC 60947-5-1:2009
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 5-1:
Control circuit devices and switching elements
Electromechanical control circuit devices
C13.3.1 (f)
IEC 62052-11:2003
Electricity metering equipment (AC) General
requirements, tests and test conditions Part 11:
Metering equipment
C13.3.1 (f)
IEC 60044-2:2003
Instrument Transformers - Part 2: Inductive
Voltage Transformers
C13.3.1 (f), C13.3.11
IEC 60044-5:2004
Instrument transformers . Part 5: Capacitor voltage
transformers
C13.3.1 (f), C13.3.11
IEC 60282-1:2009
High-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: Current-Limiting
Fuses
C13.3.1 (f), C13.5,
C13.5 (g)
ISO 8501-1:1994
Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application
of Paints and Related Products - Visual Assessment
of Surface Cleanliness - Part 1: Rust Grades and
Preparation Grades of Uncoated Steel Substrates
and of Steel Substrates After Overall Removal of
Previous Coatings
C13.3.2
BS 159:2006
High-Voltage Busbars and Busbar Connections
C13.3.3
IEC 60076:2000
Power Transformers
C13.4.1 (b), C13.4.9
(a)
BS EN 10025:2004
Hot Rolled Products of Non-Alloy Structural Steels
- Technical Delivery Conditions
C13.4.7 (c)(i)
BS EN 10029:1991
Tolerances on Dimensions, Shape and Mass for Hot
Rolled Steel Plates 3 mm Thick or Above (Q)
C13.4.7 (c)(i)
BS EN 1011-1:2004
Welding Recommendations for welding of metallic
materials Part 1: General guidance for arc welding
C13.4.7 (c)(i)
IEC 60296:2003
Fluids for electrotechnical applications Unused
mineral insulating oils for transformers and
switchgear
C13.4.7 (c)(v)
ISO 8501:1994
Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application
of Paints and Related Products - Visual Assessment
of Surface Cleanliness
C13.4.8 (a)
Annex I
Page 18 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Standard
Description
Part and Clause No.
IEC 60502-2:2005
Power Cables with Extruded Insulation and Their
Accessories for Rated Voltages from 1 kV (Um =
1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) - Part 2: Cables
for Rated Voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7,2 kV) and
up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
C13.6.1
BS EN 50262:2005
Cable glands for electrical installations
C13.6.4
Annex I
Page 19 of 18
EE_GS
2012 Edition
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement